1996-1998 Polaris Service Manual

LRRIS
InDUSTRIES Inc:.
ATV AND LIGHT UTILITY VEHICLE
SERVICE MANUAL
Foreword
This manual is designed primarily for use by ATV service technicians in a properly equipped shop. Since a
certain knowledge of mechanical theory, tool use, and shop procedures is necessary to perform the service
work safely, all operations should be performed by qualified service personnel only. In order to perform the
work efficiently and prevent costly errors, the technician should read the text and be familiar with procedures
before starting the work. Cleanliness of parts and tools as well as the work area is of primary importance.
All references to left and right side of the vehicle are from the operator's perspective when seated in a normal
riding position.
This manual includes procedures for maintenance operations, component identification and unit repair, along
with service specifications for 1996-1998 model Polaris ATVs and Light Utility Vehicles. The section index
tabs enable the user to quickly locate the section desired. In addition, a table of contents is placed at the
beginning of each section for location of specific page numbers and service information. Keep this manual
available for reference in the shop area.
To keep this manual current it is important that it is updated yearly with new model information and
specifications.
At the time of publication all information contained in this manual was current. However, all materials and
specifications are subject to change without notice.
Comments or suggestions about this manual may be directed to: Polaris Industries Inc., Service Publications
Supervisor, 1225 Highway 169 North, Minneapolis, Minnesota 55441-5078.
1996-1998 Service Manual Volume II Part No. 9913680
1998 Service Manual Update Part No. 9914752
Printed in U.S.A.
UNDERSTANDING SAFETY LABELS AND INSTRUCTIONS
Throughout these instructions, important information is brought to your attention by the following symbols:
.&,.The Safety Alert Symbol means ATIENTIONI BECOME ALERTI YOUR SAFETY IS INVOLVED!
A DANGER
Failure to follow DANGER instructions will result in severe injury or death to the operator, passenger, bystand-
er or person inspecting or servicing the ATV.
A WARNING
Failure to follow WARNING instructions could result in severe injury or death to the operator, passenger, by-
stander or person inspecting or servicing the ATV.
A CAUTION indicates special precautions that must be taken to avoid minor personal injury, or ATV or proper-
ty damage.
NOTE:
A NOTE provides key information to clarify instructions.
Trademarks
Polaris acknowledges the following products mentioned in this manual:
FLEXLOC, Registered Trademark of SPS Technologies
Loctite, Registered Trademark of the Loctite Corporation
STA-BIL, Registered Trademark of Gold Eagle
FOX, Registered Trademark of Fox Shox
Nyogel, Trademark of Wm. F. Nye Co.
Fluke, Registered Trademark of John Fluke Mfg. Co.
Mity Vac, Registered Trademark of Neward Enterprises, Inc.
Ammco, Registered Trademark of Ammco Tools, Inc.
Torx, Registered Trademark of Textron
Hilliard, Trademark of the Hilliard Corporation
Table of Contents
9913680
Chapter 01 .............................. General Information
Chapter 02 ....................................... Maintenance
Chapter 03 ............................................... Engine
Chapter 04 ........................ Fuel System/Carburetion
Chapter 05 ....................... Body/Steering/Suspension
Chapter 06 ........................................ PVT System
Chapter 07 .......................................... Final Drive
Chapter 08 ...................................... Transmission
Chapter 09 .............................................. Brakes
Chapter 10 ............................................ Electrical
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
Model Identification ........................... 1.1 - 1.1 c
Publications Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1.2 - 1.2a
Service Videos ............................... 1.2a
Service/Information Bulletin Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1.3 - 1.3b
Paint Codes ................................. 1.4 - 1.4b
Model Specifications, 1996 1.5 - 1.8
Model Specifications, 1997 .................... 1.8a - 1.8d
Model Specifications, 1998 .................... 1.8e - 1.8h
Standard Torque Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1.9
Decimal Equivalent Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1.10
Conversion Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1.11
Tap Drill Charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1.12
Warranty .................................... 1 .13
Service Tips ................................. 1.14
Glossary of Terms ............................ 1.15 - 1.17
Tool Ordering Information ..................... , 1.18
Routing Diagrams ............................ 1.19 - 1.24
GENERAL INFORMATION
Model Identification
Engine Serial Number Location
Whenever corresponding about an engine, be sure to refer to the engine model number and serial number. This
information can be found on the sticker applied to the manual starter recoil housing. An additional number is
stamped in one of the following locations:
4 stroke models - center top of crankcase beneath the cylinder coolant elbow
2 stroke liquid cooled models - center top of crankcase beneath the carburetor mounting flange
2 stroke air cooled models - top of crankcase near right side of cylinder
Machine Model Number and Serial Number Location
The machine model number and serial number are im-
portant for vehicle identification. The machine model
number is located on the frame on the left side of the
vehicle near the oil tank. Depending on model, the Se-
rial number will be stamped into the frame in one of the
following locations:
On the right side of the vehicle in front
of the shift selector box (A). (1996)
Under the seat on the upper shock
mount cross member (8) (1996)
On the right hand frame rail (C) near
the air box. (1997)
On the left hand lower frame rail (D)
near the rear A-arm mount.
(199B-Current)
Transmission 1.0. Number Location
Transmission model and serial numbers are located
on top of the transmission case below the shifting bell-
cranks.
Carburetor 1.0. Number Location
The carburetor 1.0. number is in one of the following
locations:
4 stroke models - right side center of
the carburetor body
2 stroke models - right side of carbu-
retor body near choke plunger boss
Polaris Industries Inc.
1.1
VIN Location - 1996
VIN Location - 1996/1997
VIN Location - 199B-Current
Example
Mod :ffl 13411571
Ser #t 96-1Q273
Transmission 1.0. Numbers
5/98
GENERAL INFORMATION
1996 Model Identification
The machine model and serial number must be used with any correspondence regarding service or repair.
1996 Machine Model Number Identification
W 96 81
MOD EL ATV or Light Utility vehicle/- T - i ~
N U M B E R S Year Designation Basic Chassis Engine Designation
Designation
1996 Engine Designation Numbers 1996 Chassis Designation Numbers
27 ........... 250 75 .......... Magnum 2x4
30 ........... 300 78 .......... Trail Blazer / Scrambler
40 ........... 400 80 .......... Sportsman 4x4
44 ........... 425 81 .......... Magnum 4x4
50 ........... 500 85 .......... Trail Boss / Sport
87 .......... 400 6x6 / Magnum 6x6
91 .......... Xplorer 300 / Xplorer 400
92 .......... Sportsman 500
95 .......... Xpress 300 / Xpress 400
5/98
1.1 a
GENERAL INFORMATION
Vehicle Identification Number (1997 and Later Model Years)
1997 to Current ATVs and Light Utility Vehicles have a 17 digit Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). The VIN is
organized as follows: Digits 13: World Manufacturer Identifier. For Polaris ATVs, this is 4XA Digits 4-9: Vehicle
Descriptor Section. Digits 10-17: Vehicle Indicator Section. Digits 4-8 of the VIN identify the body style, drive
type, engine type, and emissions equipment. The VIN number and the model number must be used with any
correspondence regarding service or repair.
World Mfg. ID Vehicle Descriptor Vehicle Identifier
1997-Current
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
4 X A B A 3 8 C 0 V 2 0 0 0 0 0 0
VIN Number I
...
T
,;
I Emissions
Body Style
I
~ I I
Engine
MJdel I
Year
Individual Serial No.
Powertrain
Check Digit
Plant No.
Vehicle Identification Number I Model Number Key
Body Style Powertrain Engine Emissions Ogtions
A=Gen II A=2x4 chain 25:::EC25PF(250cc) A=Approved by CARB* A=Std
B=Gen III C=4x4 chain 28=EC28PF(300 cc) C=Non CARB* Approved B=1st
Color Option
C=Gen IV D=4x4 shaft 38=EC38PL(400 cc) D=Norway
E=6x6 chain 42=EH42PL (425 cc) E=Sweden
50=EH50PL (500 cc)
*CARB = California Air Resources Board
Year I Letter Identification
The tenth digit of a 17 digit VIN is the model year of the vehicle. Example: W = 1998; X = 1999 etc. Refer to the
listing below.
V 1997
W 1998
X 1999
Y 2000
1997 to Current Model Numbers
The model year is also listed in the model number. The last 4 digits in the model number correspond to digits
4 through 8 of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Machine Model Number Identification
W;:;;ATV or Light ___ W 9 8 CH50A B Option Indicator
Utility Vehicle --- ~ ' .. .
Year Designation ./ Last 5 M ~ e l # Digits=Digits 4-8 of VIN
5/98
1.1 b
GENERAL INFORMATION
5/98 1.1 c
1996 Publication Numbers
Model Model No.
Trail Blazer W967827
Trail Boss W968527
Xplorer 300 W969130
Xpress 300 W969530
Sport W968540
Scrambler 4x4 W967840
Xpress 400 W969540
Xplorer 400 W969140
Sportsman 4x4 W968040
4006x6 W968740
Magnum 2x4 W967544
Magnum 4x4 W968144
Magnum 6x6 W968744
Sportsman 500 W969244
Model Model No.
Trail Blazer W97BA25C
Trail Boss W97AA25C
Xplorer 300 W97CC28C
Xpress 300 W97CA28C
Sport 400 W97BA38C
Scrambler 4x4 W97BC38C
Xpress 400 W97CA38C
Sportsman 4x4 W97AC38C
4006x6 W97AE38A
Magnum 2x4 W97AA42A
Magnum 4x4 W97AC42A
Magnum 6x6 W97AE42A
Sportsman 500 W97CH50A
Xplorer 500 W97CD50A
Scrambler 500 W97BC50A
Owner's Manual PN
9913584
9913506
9913332
9913327
9913584
9913519
9913327
9913511
9913414
9913516
9913512
9913512
9913522
9913269
Owner's Manual
9914011
9914056
9913980
9913959
9914011
9913988
9913959
9913974
9913966
9913917
9914069
9914069
9914074
9913998
9914134
9913988
1.2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Publications
Parts Manual PN 1996 Parts Micro
Fiche Set PN
9913586 9913433
9913588
9913590
9913592
9913586
9913582
9913592
9913598
9913594
9913596
9913603
9913605
9913607
9913609
Parts Manual , 997Parts Micro
Fiche Set PN
9914012 9914645
9914057
9913981
9913960
9914012
9913989
9913960
9913975
9913967
9914081
9914070
9914083
9914075
9913999
9914135
9914307
5/98
GENERAL INFORMATION
Publications
Model Model No.
Trail Boss W98AA25C
Trail Blazer W98BA25C
Xpress 300 W98CA28C
Sport 400 W98BA38C
Scrambler 400 W98BC38C
Magnum 2x4 W98AA42A
Magnum 4x4 W98AC42A
Scrambler 500 W98BC50A
Sportsman 500 W98CH50A(&AB)
Big Boss 500 6x6 W98AE50A
DESCRIPTION
Owner's
Manual
9914659
9914659
9914659
9914659
9914659
9914659
9914659
9914659
9914659
9914659
9914659
9914720
1995-1996 Magnum and Sportsman 500 Service Manual
1996 ATV Service Manual Volume II
1998 ATV Service Manual Vol. II Update
Owner's Parts Parts
Manual Manual Microfiche
Supplement
9914530 9914531 9914532
9914530 9914546 9914547
9914525 9914536 9914537
9914525 9914526 9914527
9914545 9914723 9914724
9914722 9914725 9914726
9914540 9914541 9914542
9914520 9914552 9914553
9914721 9914521 9914522
9914498 9914499 9914501
9914570 9914571 9914572
N/A 9914639 9914640
PART NUMBER
9913681
9913680
9914752
SERVICE TRAINING VIDEOS
VIDEO TITLE PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
Magnum 4-Stroke Introduction 9912996 Includes 4 Stroke theory of operation, engine removal,
disassembly, and assembly techniques, along with and
general tech-tips.
Ignition System Diagnostics 9913533 Describes all current Polaris ignition systems. Provides
working knowledge of ignition system theory and diagnostics.
Charging System Diagnostics 9913278 Describes all current Polaris charging systems. Provides work-
ing knowledge of charging system theory and diagnostics.
Polaris Variable Transmissions 9913987 Theory, disassembly, assembly and troubleshooting of the
(PVT) Polaris PVT system.
Fuels and Fuel Delivery 9914393 Describes fuel properties including octane and vapor pres-
sure; fuel mixture and burn characteristics; VM and CV car-
buretor theory and adjustments.
5/98
1.2a
GENERAL INFORMATION
Service Bulletin Index
Service/Information Bulletins - By Bulletin Number
ATV-94-0B 1995 Scrambler - Oil line may contact exhaust head pipe
ATV-94-09 1994400 ATVs and 1995 Xplorer, Sportsman, and 400 6X6 - Poor fuel economy and hesitation
ATV-94-10
ATV-95-01
ATV-95-02
ATV-95-03
ATV-95-04
ATV-95-05
ATV-95-06
ATV-95-07
ATV-95-0B
ATV-95-09
ATV-95-10
ATV-95-11
ATV-95-12
ATV-95-13
ATV-95-14
ATV-95-15
ATV-95-16
ATV-95-17
ATV-95-1B
ATV-95-19
ATV-95-20
ATV-95-21
ATV-95-22
ATV-96-01
ATV-96-02
ATV-96-03
ATV-96-04
ATV-96-05
ATV-96-06
ATV-96-07
ATV-96-0B
ATV-96-09
ATV-96-10
ATV-96-11
ATV-96-12
ATV-96-13
ATV-96-14
ATV-96-15
ATV-96-16
ATV-97-01
ATV-97-02
ATV-97-03
1995 Scrambler - Some brake calipers may rub on inside of tire rim
1995 Scrambler - Loose clamp on carburetor boot
1995 Xplorer 4x4, Sportsman - Front hub oil leak
1995 Xplorer 4x4 - Incorrect speedometer angle drive
1995 Scrambler - Headlight wiring reversed
1995 Magnum 2x4, Magnum 4x4 - Engine oil in air box
1995 Scrambler 4x4 - Revised carburetor jetting
1995 Models Equipped with Auxiliary Brake - Brake inspection and adjustment procedure
1995 Scrambler 4x4 - Missing lower front bumper bolts
1995 Scrambler 4x4 - Incorrect sprocket guard spacer
1995 Scrambler 4x4 - Front brake lines may rub against CV joint boot
1995 Magnum 2x4, Magnum 4x4 - Oil tank vent fitting restricted
All 1995 Models - Transmission lubricant expelled through vent line
All 1995 Models (exc. Scrambler, Xplorer, 6x6 - Aux. brake arm may contact right footrest
All 1995 All Wheel Drive Models - Faulty Gear Selector Switches
1995 Scrambler - Headlight Bulb May Fall Out Of Socket
1995 Magnum 2x4 and 4x4 - Rich Condition/Plug Fouling Checklist
AI! 1996 - Synthetic Chaincase Lubricant Recommended for all 1996 Models
1996 Sport - Loose Headlight Mounting Screws
1995 Xplorer, 400 2x4, Sport, Scrambler, 6x6 - Idle Speed Adjustment on 1995400 cc ATVs
1996 Scrambler, Sport 400L - Incorrect Carburetor Jetting Chart in Owner's Manual
1996 Scrambler - Water May Freeze in Oil Pump Housing
1996 Xplorer 400L, Xpress 300, Sportsman 500 - Plow Blade Mounting Kit Applications
1996 Trail Boss; Magnum 4x4 - Water Leaks at Inner PVT Cover
1996 Sportsman 500 - Oil Tank Vent Hose Routing
1996 Sportsman 500 - Loose Rear Drive Shaft Retaining Bolts
1996 Sportsman 500; Magnum 2x4; 4x4; 6x6 - Improved Seat Fit For 1996 ATVs
1996 Gen IV models with rear rack extender kit. Flag mount not functional w/ rack extender.
1996 Sport, Scrambler - Brake Line Retention Strap May Be Missing
1996 Sport, Scrambler - Exhaust Muffler Restricted
1996 All Except Tr. Blazer, Tr. Boss - Cooling Fan Motors May Be Damaged By Water.
1996 Sportsman 500 Hose Clamp On Coolant Line May Contact Fuel Filter
1996 Sportsman 500 - Engine Overheating due to fan placement and debris in the shroud
1995/ 19964 Stroke Models Moisture May Freeze In Oil Tank Vent Line
1996/1997 Xlorer and Xpress 300s - Revised Oil Pump Bleeding Procedure
1996 Sportsman 500; 1997 Sportsman and Xplorer 500 - Rear Brake Noise / Floating Disc Kit
1997 Magnum 6x6 - Fuel Tank Vent Line Routed Incorrectly
1997 Sportsman 500 - Pressure Relief Slit Missing Form Oil Tank Vent Line
1997 Scrambler 400 / 1997 Scrambler 500 - Brake Lines May Contact CV Boot or Clamp
1995 and 19964 Stroke Models - Oil Tank Breather Modification For Cold Temperatures
1997 Sportsman and Xplorer 500 - Rear Brake Disc Hub Bolt Torque Procedure
1997 Sportsman and Xplorer 500 Revised Serial Number Range For ATV-97-02
1.3 5/98
GENERAL INFORMATION
Bulletin Index - 1996 By Model
1996 Model Bulletin #
ALL 1996 MODELS ATV-96-11
1996 Sportsman SOO ATV-96-13
ATV-96-10
ATV-96-09
ATV-96-0B
ATV-96-05
ATV-96-04
ATV-96-03
ATV-96-02
ATV-9S-22
1996 Magnum 6x6 ATV-96-0B
ATV-96-04
ATV-96-04
ATV-96-01
ATV-9S-17
ATV-96-04
19964006x6 ATV-96-0B
ATV-95-17
1996 Sportsman 4x4 ATV-96-0B
ATV-9S-17
1996 Scrambler ATV-96-0B
ATV-96-07
ATV-96-06
ATV-9S-21
ATV-95-20
1996400 Xplorer ATV-96-0B
ATV-9S-22
ATV-95-17
1996 400 Xpress ATV-96-0B
1996 Sport ATV-96-0B
ATV-96-07
ATV-96-06
ATV-9S-20
ATV-9S-1B
1996300 Xplorer ATV-96-12
ATV-96-0B
ATV-9S-17
1996 300 Xpress ATV-96-12
ATV-96-0B
ATV-9S-22
1996 Trail Boss ATV-96-01
1996 Trail Blazer ATV-9S-1B
5/98
Type Notes
Information Moisture May Freeze In Oil Tank Vent Line
Information Rear Brake Noise / Floating Disc Kit
Service Engine Overheating
Information Hose Clamp May Contact Fuel Filter
Service Cooling Fan Motor May Be Damaged By Water
Service Flag Mount Not Functional
Information Poor Seat Fit
Information Loose Rear Drive Shaft Retaining Bolts
Service Oil Tank Vent Hose Routing
Information Plow Blade Mounting Kit Applications
Service Water Leaks at Inner PVT Cover
Information Synthetic Chaincase Lubricant Recommended
Information Exhaust Muffler Restriction
Service Brake Une Retention Strap May Be Missing
Information Water May Freeze In Oil Pump Housing
Information Incorrect Jetting Chart In Owners Manual
Information Exhaust Muffler Restriction
Service Brake Line Retention Strap May Be Missing
Information Incorrect Jetting Chart In Owners Manual
Service Loose Headlight Mounting Screws
Service Revised Oil Pump Adjustment Procedure
Service Water Leaks at Inner PVT Cover
Service Loose Headlight Mounting Screws
1.3a
1997 Model
All 1997 Models
Sportsman 500
Xplorer 500
Scrambler 500
Magnum 6x6
Magnum 4x4
Magnum 2x4
Big Boss 6x6 400L
Sportsman 400L
Xplorer 400L
Xpress 400L
Scrambler 400L
Sport 400L
Xplorer 300
Xpress 300
Trail Blazer ES
Trail Boss 250
1998 Model
All 1998 Models
Big Boss 500 6x6
Sportsman 500
Scrambler 500
Magnum 4x4
Magnum 2x4
Xplorer 400
Scrambler 400
Sport 400
Xplorer 300
Xpress 300
Trail Blazer
Trail Boss
5/98
Bulletin #
ATV-97-03
ATV-97-02
ATV-96-15
ATV-96-13
ATV-97-03
ATV-97-02
ATV-96-13
ATV-96-16
ATV-96-14
ATV-96-16
ATV-96-12
ATV-96-12
Bulletin #
GENERAL INFORMATION
Service Bulletin Index - 1997/1998 By Model
Type Notes
Service Loose Pins And Locking Hub For Rear Disc Brake
Revised Serial Number Range For ATV-97-02
Service Rear Brake Disc Hub Bolt Torque Procedure/Hub Kit
Service Pressure Relief Slit Missing From Oil Tank Vent Line
Service Rear Brake Noise
Service Loose Pins And Locking Hub For Rear Disc Brake
Revised Serial Number Range For ATV-97-02
Service Rear Brake Disc Hub Bolt Torque Procedure/Hub Kit
Service Rear Brake Noise
Service Brake Line May Contact CV Boot Or Clamp
Service Fuel Tank Vent Line Routing
Service Brake Line May Contact CV Boot Or Clamp
Type Notes
No bulletins issued as of 4/24/1998
1.3b
Model Item Color
400L Springs Purple Velvet
Rims Brushed Aluminum
Trail Blazer Springs Fire Red
Rims Bright White
Trail Boss Springs Aqua Marine
Rims Bright White
Rack Aqua Marine
Scrambler Springs Lavender
Rims Bright White
Xpress 300 Springs Bonnie Blue
Xpress 400 Springs Blue Green
Xplorer 300 Springs Eddie B. Green
Xplorer Springs Fire Red
Magnum 2x4 Springs Eddie B. Green
Racks Steel Gray
Magnum 4x4 Springs Bonnie Blue
Racks Bonnie Blue
Sportsman 500 Springs Black
Rims Black
Racks Black
Magnum 6x6 Springs Eddie B. Green
Rack Eddie B. Green
Box Eddie B. Green
4006x6 Springs Eddie B. Green
Rack Eddie B. Green
Box Eddie B. Green
GENERAL INFORMATION
1996 Pai nt Codes
Raw Material No. PPG Ditzler No.
8520160 51467
N/A N/A
8520149 72060
8520153 2185
8520159 46975
8520153 2185
8520159 46975
8520157 N/A
8520153 2185
8520148 12908
N/A N/A
8520202 N/A
N/A N/A
8520150 44931
N/A N/A
8520149 72060
N/A N/A
8520150 44931
N/A N/A
8520151 N/A
8520148 12908
N/A N/A
8520148 12908
8520147 9440
8520147 9440
8520147 9440
8520150 44931
N/A N/A
8520150 44931
8520150 44931
8520150 44931
N/A N/A
8520150 44931
8520150 44931
Order direct from Midwest Industrial Coatings (612-934-8252). Mix as directed.
1.4
10/96
GENERAL INFORMATION
1997 Paint Codes
MODEL PAINTED PART
Trail Blazer Springs
Rims
Trail Boss Springs
Rims
Rack
Sport Springs
Rims
Xpress 300 Springs
Rims
Xpress 400 Springs
Rims
Xplorer 300 Springs
Rims
Xplorer 400 Springs
Rims
Xplorer 500 Springs
Rims
Scrambler 4x4 Springs
Rims
Scrambler 500 Springs
Rims
Sportsman 4x4 Springs
Rims
Rack
Sportsman 500 Springs
Rims
4006x6 Springs
Rims
Rack
Box
Magnum 2x4 Springs
Rims
Rack
Magnum 4x4 Springs
Rims
Rack
Magnum 6x6 Springs
Rims
Rack
Box
Big Boss 6x6 Springs
Rims
Rack
Box
10/96
COLOR
DESCRIPTION
Fire Red
Bright White
Aqua Marine
Bright White
Aqua Marine
Purple Velvet
Brushed Aluminum
Bonnie Blue
Brushed Aluminum
Blue-green
Brushed Aluminum
Eddie Bauer Green
Brushed Aluminum
Eddie Bauer Green
Brushed Aluminum
Screamin' Yellow
Brushed Aluminum
Lavender
Bright White
Screamin' Yellow
Brushed Aluminum
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Eddie Bauer Green
Brushed Aluminum
Eddie Bauer Green
Eddie Bauer Green
Fire Red
Brushed Aluminum
Black
Eddie Bauer Green
Brushed Aluminum
Eddie Bauer Green
Eddie Bauer Green
Brushed Aluminum
Eddie Bauer Green
Eddie Bauer Green
Eddie Bauer Green
Brushed Aluminum
Eddie Bauer Green
Eddie Bauer Green
1.4a
DITZLER POLARIS
NUMBER NUMBER
72060 8520149
2185 8520153
46975 8520159
2185 8520153
46975 8520159
51467 8520160
N/A N/A
12908 8520148
N/A N/A
N/A 8520202
N/A N/A
44931 8520150
N/A N/A
44931 8520150
N/A N/A
N/A 8520241
N/A N/A
N/A 8520157
2185 8520153
N/A 8520241
N/A N/A
9440 8520147
9440 8520147
9440 8520147
9440 8520147
9440 8520147
44931 8520150
N/A N/A
44931 8520150
44931 8520150
72060 8520149
N/A N/A
9440 8520147
44931 8520150
N/A N/A
44931 8520150
44931 8520150
N/A N/A
44931 8520150
44931 8520150
44931 8520150
N/A N/A
44931 8520150
44931 8520150
1998 Pai nt Codes
Model Item Color
Big Boss 500 6X6 Springs Eddie B Green
Rims Aluminum
Sportsman 500 (Opt. 1) Springs Black
Rims Black
Sportsman 500 (Opt. 2) Springs Bonnie Blue
Rims Aluminum
Scrambler 500 Springs Black
Rims Aluminum
Magnum 4X4 Springs Fire Red
Rims Aluminum
Racks Eddie B. Green
Magnum 2X4 Springs Black
Rims Aluminum
Racks Black
Xplorer 400L Springs Burnished Brown
Rims Aluminum
Scrambler 400 Springs Fire Red
Rims Bright White
Sport 400L Springs Purple Velvet
Rims Bright White
Xplorer 300 Springs Fire Red
Rims Aluminum
Rims Aluminum
Rims Bright White
Trail Boss Springs Fire Red
Rims Bright White
Rack(s) Fire Red
GENERAL INFORMATION
1998 Paint Codes
Raw Material No. PPG Ditzler No.
8520150 (P195) 44931
(P117)
8520147 (P067) 9440
8520147 (P067) 9440
8520148 (P157) 12908
(P117)
8520147 (P067) 9440
(P117)
8520149 (P093) 72060
(P117)
8520150 (P195) 44931
8520147 (P067) 9440
(P117)
8520147 (P067) 9440
P218
(P117)
8520149 (P093) 72060
8520153 (P133) 2185
8520160 (P194) 51467
8520153 (P133) 2185
8520149 (P093) 72060
(P117)
8520148 (P157) 12908
(P117)
8520149 72060
8520153 (P133) 2185
8520149 (P093) 72060
8520153 (P133) 2185
8520149 (P093) 72060
Order direct from Midwest Industrial Coatings (612-934-8252). Mix as directed.
Frames (Medium Black) P067 / 8520147 / Ditzler 9440
1.4b
5/98
1997 Model (Gen II, III, or IV) Trail Boss (II) Trail Blazer ES (III)
Model Number W97AA25C W97BA25C
Height
44/1 46/1
Width
44/1 46.5/1
Length 73.2" 74.5"
- . ~ .. , . ~ .- , ' " ~
WheelBase 49.75/1 49.75/1
Seat Height
33/1 34/1
Ground Clearance 5.5/1
6/1
Weight 4251bs. 4201bs.
Turning Radius (Unloaded)
60/1 60/1
Front Suspension Travel 6.25/1 6.25/1
(McPherson Strut)
..... - ~ - - . ~ ~ - ~ - - - - " " . ~ [---.-
Rear Suspension 8.5/1 8.5/1
Front Tires 23x7x10 23x7x10
Rear Tires 22x11x10 22x11x10
Center Tires N/A N/A
FronVRear/Center Tire PSI 4/3 4/3
-_. ~ .. -.
Front Brake
~ ~ ~ Disc
Hydr. Disc
Rear Brake Hydr. Disc Hydr. Disc
Auxiliary Brake Mechanical Mechanical
Fuel Capacity (U.S. Gallons) 4 4
Oil Capacity (U.S. Quarts) 2 2
Gearcase Oil Capacity (oz) 16 16
Main Head Light 12V 60/60W 12V 55W
Grill Mounted Lights N/A N/A
Tail Light 12V/8.26W 12V/8.26W
- n_.__ .
Gear Box F/R/N F/R/N
Gear Reduction Low N/A N/A
Drive Type 520 O-ring 520 a-ring
-" .. ~ .
Final Drive 12/4288P 12/4288P
Center Drive N/A N/A
Front Drive N/A N/A
Axle to Axle N/A N/A
Displacement 244cc 244cc
Engine Model Number EC25PFE08 EC25PFE09
Compression Ratio (Effective) 6.1/1 6.1/1
Bore and Stroke 72x60 72x60
Spark Plug BR8ES (NGK) BR8ES (NGK)
Alternator Output 150W 150W
Timing Degrees 25@3000 25@3000
Carburetion (1) VM30SS (1) VM30SS
Main Jet 145 130
Pilot Jet 40 40
Jet Needle 5DP7-3 5DP7-3
Needle Jet 0-4 (169) 0-4 (169)
r. t::l\AI::I\I
2.0 2.0
-J
Air Screw/Pilot Screw 1 Turn 1 Turn
* See Owner's Manual for rack load recommendations and restrictions.
1.8a
GENERAL INFORMATION
Specifications 1997
Xpress 300 (IV) Xplorer 300 (IV)
W97CA28C W97CC28C
45.5" 45.5/1
46/1 46/1
78.5"
81/1
-----
49.75/1 49.75/1
33"
34/1
6.75/1
6/1
5121bs. 5671bs.
60/1
57"
6.25/1 6.25/1
8.5" 8.5/1
23x7x10 23x7x10
24x11 x1 0 24x11x10
N/A N/A
4/3 4/3
Hydr. Disc Hydr. Disc
Mechanical Mechanical
4 4
2 2
20 20
N/A N/A
2, 12V 30/30W 2, 12V 30/30W
12V/8.26W 12V/8.26W
HI/LO/R/N HI/LO/R/N
6.64/1 6.64/1
520 O-ring 520 a-ring
13/3886P 13/4088P
N/A 11/2270P
N/A 12/2264P
N/A N/A
283cc 283cc
EC28PFE01 EC28PFE01
6.1/1 6.1/1
74.5x65 74.5x65
BR8ES (NGK) BR8ES (NGK)
150W 150W
25@3000 25@3000
- - ~ ~ .-
(1) VM30SS (1) VM30SS
155 155
40 40
..
5DP7-3 5DP7-3
0-4 (169) 0-4 (169)
2.0 2.0
1.5 Turn 1.5 Turn
5/98
GENERAL INFORMATION
Specifications 1997
1997 Model (Gen II, III, or IV)
Model Number
Height
Width
--._-
Length
Wheel Base
Seat Height
Ground Clearance
Weight
Front Suspension Travel
(McPherson Strut)
Rear Suspension
Front Tires
Rear Tires
Center Tires
Front/Rear/Center Tire PSI
Front Brake
Rear Brake
Auxiliary Brake
Fuel Capacity (U.S. Gallons)
Oil Capacity (U.S. Quarts)
Coolant Capacity (Quarts / Liters)
Gearcase Oil Capacity (oz)
Engine Counter Balancer Oil
Capacity (10W/30)
Main Head Light
Grill Mounted Lights
Tail Light
Gear Box
,.
Gear Reduction Low
Drive Type
Final Drive
Center Drive
Front Drive
Axle to Axle
Displacement
Engine Model Number
Compression Ratio (Effective)
Bore and Stroke
Spark Plug
Alternator Output
Timing Degrees
Carburetion
Main Jet
Pilot Jet
Jet Needle
Needle Jet
Cutaway
Air Screw/Pilot Screw
r-'
Xpress 400 (IV)
W97CA38C
47.5/1
46"
78.5"
49.75"
33"
6.75/1
5431bs.
60"
6.25"
8.5"
23x7x10
24x11x10
N/A
4/3
Hydr. Disc
Hydr. Disc
Mechanical
4
2
2.25/2.16
20
100cc
12V 60/55W
Accessory
12V/8.26W
HI/LO/R/N
6.64/1
520 O-ring
13/3484P
N/A
N/A
N/A
378.7cc
EC38PLE06
6.9/1
83x70
BR8ES (NGK)
200W
23.5@3000
(1) VM34SS
200
30
6CEY6-3
0-6 (480)
1.5
1.5 Turn
Xplorer 400 (IV)
W972238C
47.5"
46"
81"
49.75
11
34"
7.375"
5701bs.
65/1
6.25/1
8.5"
25x8x12
25x12x10
N/A
4/3
Hydr. Disc
Hydr. Disc
Mechanical
4
2
2.25/2.16
20
100cc
12V 60W
2, 12V 35W
12V/8.26W
HI/LO/R/N
6.64/1
520 O-ring
13/3484P
11/2270P
13/2264P
N/A
378.7cc
EC38PLE06
6.9/1
83X70
BR8ES (NGK)
200W
23.5@3000
(1) VM34SS
200
30
6CEY6-3
0-6 (480)
1.5
1.5 Turn
5/98
1.8b
Sport 400 (III) Sportsman 4x4 (II)
W97BA38C W97AC38C
47/1 46/1
46.5" 46/1
74.5" 77/1
49.75" 49.75/1
33/1
34"
5.5" 6"
4791bs. 5851bs.
60" 65"
6.25/1 6.25/t
8.5" 8.5"
23x7x10 25x8x12
22x11x10 25x12x10
N/A N/A
4/3 4/3
4 4
2 2
2.25/2.16 2.25/2.16
16 20
100cc 100cc
12V 55W 12V 60W
, , ~
N/A 2, 12V 35W
12V/8.26W 12V/8.26W
F/R/N HI/LO/R/N
N/A 6.64/1
520 O-ring 520 O-ring
13/3484P 13/3484P
N/A 11/2270P
N/A 13/2264P
N/A N/A
378.7cc 378.7cc
EC38PLE07 EC38PLE06
6.9/1 6.9/1
83x70 83x70
BR8ES (NGK) BR8ES (NGK)
150W 200W
23.5@3000 23.5@3000
(1) VM34SS (1) VM34SS
230 200
35 30
6CEY6-3 6CEY6-3
0-6 (480) 0-6 (480)
1.5 1.5
1.5 Turn 1.5 Turn
1997 Model (Gen II, III, or IV) Scrambler 4x4 (III) Magnum 2x4 (II)
Model Number W97BC38C W97AA42A
Height 47"
47/1
Width 45.5" 46.5"
~ n g t l 74.5" 77"
Wheel Base 48.5/1 49.75"
Seat Height 33" 33"
Ground Clearance
6/1
5.5"
Weight 4901bs. 5341bs.
Tuming Radius (Unloaded) 60" 60"
8.5/1 6.25"
(McPherson Strut)
Rear Suspension 8.5" 8.5"
--
Front/Rear/Center Tire PSI 4/3 4/3
Front Brake Hydr. Disc Hydr. Disc
Fuel Capacity (U.S. Gallons) 4 3.5
Oil Capacity (U.S. Quarts) 2 2- OW40 Engine Oil
Coolant Capacity (Quarts / Liters) 2.25/2.16 2.25/2.16
Engine Counter Balancer Oil 100cc N/A
Capacity (10W/30)
Main Head Light 12V 35/35W 12V 60/60W
Grill Mounted Lights N/A Ace.
Tail Light 12V/8.26W 12V/8.26W
Gear Box F/R/N HI/LO/R/N
Gear Reduction Low N/A 6.64/1
,-
Drive Type 520 O-ring 520 ing
Final Drive 13/3884P 12/3886P
Center Drive 11/2270P N/A
Front Drive 12/2264P N/A
Displacement 378.7cc 425cc
Engine Model Number EC38PLE07 EH42PLE01
Bore and Stroke 83x70 87.9x70
Spark Plug BR8ES (NGK) BKR5ES (NGK)
Timing Degrees 23.5@3000 30@3500
.._-".,--
Carburetion (1) VM34SS (1) BST34-CV type
Main Jet 230 140
Pilot Jet 35 40
--
Pilot Air Jet N/A #160
Jet Needle 6CEY6-3 5F81-3
Needle Jet 0-6 (480) P-8
Cutaway 1.5 N/A
Air Screw or Fuel Screw (Tums Out) 1.5 2.5
1.8c
GENERAL INFORMATION
Specifications 1997
Magnum 4x4 (II) Sportsman 500(IV)
W97AC42A W97CH50A
46/1
47"
46/1
46"
77" 7"
49.75" 50.5"
34" 34"
6" 10"
5951bs. 6491bs.
65" 65"
6.25" 6.25"
8.5" 9.5"
25x8x12 25x8x12
25x12x10 25x12x10
4/3 5/5
Mechanical Mech.
3.5 5.25
2- OW40 Engine Oil 3
2.25/2.16 2.25/2.16
20 32
N/A N/A
12V 60W 12V 60W
2,12V 35W 2,12V 35W
12V/8.26W 12V 8.26W
HIILO/R/N HIILO/R/N
6.64/1 6.64/1
520 O-ring Shaft
1213886P 3.16:1
11/2270P N/A
11/2268P 2:1
N/A N/A
425cc 498
EH42PLE01 EH50PLE01
9.211 N/A
87.9x70 92x75
BKR5ES (NGK) BKR5ES (NGK)
200W 200W
30@3500 30@3500
(1) BST34-CV type (1) BST34 Cv.., type
140 142.5
40 42.5
#160 #160
5F81-3 5078-3
P-8 P-1
N/A N/A
2.5 2
-- --
5/98
GENERAL INFORMATION
Specifications 1997
Model Number
Height
Width
Length
Wheel Base
Seat Height
Ground Clearance
Weight
(McPherson Strut)
Rear Suspension
Front Tires
Rear Tires
Center Tires
Front Brake
Rear Brake
Auxiliary Brake
Coolant Capacity (Quarts / Liters)
Counter Balancer Oil Capacity
Main Head Light
Tail Light
Gear Box
Gear Reduction Low
Drive Type
Final Drive
Center Drive
Front Drive
Axle to Axle
Displacement
Engine Model Number
Bore and Stroke
Spark Plug
Alternator Output
Timing Degrees
- - - - ~ ~ , . ,
Carburetion
Main Jet
Pilot Jet
Pilot Air Jet
Jet Needle
Needle Jet
Cutaway
1--------_ .. ...
Air Screw
Scrambler 500 (III)
W97BC50A
47"
45.5"
74.5"
48.5"
33"
6"
5471bs.
60"
8.5"
9.5"
23x7X10
24x11x10
N/A
--_.
4/3
Hydr. Disc
Hydr. Disc
Mech.
3.5
2
2.25/2.16
16
N/A
12V 35/35W
N/A
12V 8.26W
HIIR/N
N/A
520 O-ring
12/38/86P
11/22/70P
11/22/68P
N/A
498
EH50PLE02
N/A
92x75
BKR5ES (NGK)
200W
30@3S00
(1) BST34 CV type
125
42.S
160
SD78-3
P-3
N/A
---.. ~ - - ...~
2.0
Xplorer 500(lV)
W97CD50A
47"
46"
7"
50.5"
34"
10"
6491bs.
65"
6.25"
9.5"
25x8x12
25x12x10
.. ~ ..
N/A
5/5
Hydr. Disc
Hydr. Disc
Mech.
5.25
3
2.25/2.16
32
N/A
N/A
2,12V 35W
12V 8.26W
HI/LO/R/N
6.64/1
Shaft
3.16:1
N/A
2:1
N/A
498
EH50PLE01
N/A
92x75
BKRSES (NGK)
200W
30@3S00
(1) BST34 CV type
142.5
42.S
#160
5078-3
P-1
N/A
2 Turns
.. See Owner's Manual for rack load recommendations and restrictions.
5/98
1.8d
Magnum 6x6 (II) 400 6x6 (II)
W97AE42A W97AE38A
47/1 47/1
46/1 46/1
103/1
103"
75" 75"
34" 34"
5.5" 5.5"
8521bs. 8301bs.
98/1 98/1
6.25" 6.25"
8.5" 8.5"
25x8x12 25x8x12
25x12x10 25x12x10
25x12x10 25x12x10
5/5/5 5/5/5
3.5 4
2- OW40 Engine Oil 2
2.25/2.16 2.25/2.16
20 20
N/A 100cc (1 OW30)
12V 60W 12V 60W
2,12V 35W 2, 12V 35W
12V/8.26W 12V/8.26W
HI/LO/R/N HIILO/R/N
6.64/1 6.64/1
1214288P 13/4288P
11/2472P 11/2270P
11/2268P 1212264P
30/30 116P 30/30 116P
425cc 378.7cc
EH42PLE01 EC38PLE06
9.2/1 6.9/1
87.9x70 83x70
BKRSES (NGK) BR8ES (NGK)
200W 200W
.._-_.-
30@3500 23.5@3000
(1) BST34-CV type (1) VM34SS
140 210
40 30
#160
5F81-3 6DH29-3
P-8 0-6 (480)
N/A 1.5
2.5 Turn 1 Turn
1998 Model (Gen II, III, or IV) Trail Boss (II) Trail Blazer (III)
Model Number W98AA25C W98BA25C
Height, inches (cm)
44/1
(111.8)
46/1
(116.8)
Width, inches (cm) 44/1 (111.8) 46.5/1 (118.1)
Length, inches (cm) 73.2/1 (185.9) 74.5" (189.2)
Wheel Base, inches (cm) 49.75/1 (126.4) 49.75/1 ( 26.4)
Seat Height, inches (cm) 33
'1
(83.8)
34/1
(86.4)
Ground Clearance, inches (cm) 5.5/1 (14.0)
6/1
(15.2)
Weight, Dry - Lbs. (Kg) 425 (203.4) 420 Ibs. (199.8)
Turning Radius-Unloaded, in. (cm) 60
11
(1S2.4) 60
'1
(152.4)
Front Suspension Travel, in. (cm) 6.25/1 (15.9) 6.25
'1
(15.9)
(McPherson Strut)
Rear Suspension, inches (cm) 8.5
'1
(21.6) 8.5" (21.6)
Center Ti res N/A N/A
Fuel Capacity (U.S. Gallons) 4 4
Oil Capacity (U.S. Quarts) 2 2
Cooling System Capacity (Qt'/Liter) N/A N/A
I-----..- ~ - - -
Engine Counter Balancer Oil N/A N/A
Capacity (10W/30)
Main Head Light 12V 60/60W 12V 55W
Grill Mounted Lights N/A N/A
Tail Light 1 Brake Light (Watts) 12V - 8.26/26.9 12V - 8.26/26.9
Gear Box F/R/N F/R/N
Gear Reduction Low N/A N/A
.-
r----'
Drive Type 520 O-ring 520 O-ring
Final Drive 12/4288P 1214288P
Center Drive N/A N/A
Front Drive N/A N/A
Displacement 244cc 244cc
Engine Model Number EC25PFE10 EC25PFE11
Bore and Stroke (mm) 72x60 72x60
Spark Plug 1 Gap, in. BR8ES (NGK) .028 BR8ES (NGK) .028
Timing Degrees 2S@3000 25@3000
Carburetion (1) VM30SS (1) VM30SS
Main Jet 145 130
Pilot Jet 40 40
Jet Needle SDP7-3 SDP7-3
Needle Jet 0-4 (169) 0-4 (169)
Cutaway 2.0 2.0
Air Screw/Pilot Screw 1 Turn 1 Turn
1.8e
GENERAL INFORMATION
Specifications 1998
Xpress 300 (IV) Xplorer 300 (IV)
W98CA28C W98CC28C
45.5/1 (115.6) 45.5/1
(115.6)
46" (116.8) 46/1 (116.8)
79.5/1 (201.9)
81/1
(205.7)
49.75/1 (126.4) 49.75
/1
\126.4)
34
/1
(86.4) 34" (86.4)
6.75/1 (16.5) 6" (15.2)
512 Ibs. (224.7) 567 Ibs. (252.4)
60" (152.4) 57
/1
(144.8)
6.25" (15.9) 6.25" (15.9)
8.S" (21.6) 8.5
'1
(21.6)
23x7x10 23x7x10
--
24x11x10 24x11x10
N/A N/A
4/3 4/3
.----.---
4 4
2 2
N/A 2.25/2.16
20 20
N/A N/A
N/A N/A
2, 12V 30/30W 2, 12V 30/30W
12V - 8.26 1 26.9 12V - 8.261 26.9
_. __ .. _---
HIILO/R/N HIILO/R/N
6.64/1 6.64/1
13/3886P 13/4088P
N/A 11/2270P
N/A 12/2264P
283cc 283cc
EC28PFE02 EC28PFE02
6.1/1 6.1/1
74.5x65 74.5x65
BR8ES (NGK) .028 BR8ES (NGK) .028
150W 150W
25@3000 25@3000
(1) VM30SS (1) VM30SS
155 155
40 40
5DP7-3 5DP7-3
0-4 (169) 0-4 (169)
2.0 2.0
1.5 Turn 1.5 Turn
5/98
GENERAL INFORMATION
Specifications 1998
Model Number
Height, inches (cm)
Width, inches (cm)
Length, inches (cm)
Wheel Base, inches (I 1)
Seat Height, inches (cm)
Ground Clearance, inches (cm)
Weight - Lbs. (Kg)
Turning Radius (Unloaded), in.(crn)
(McPherson Strut)
Rear Suspension
Front Tires
Rear Tires
Front Brake
Rear Brake
Auxiliary Brake
Cooling System Capacity-qt (liter)
Engine Counter Balancer Oil
Capacity (10W/30)
Main Head Light
~ .
Tail Light / Brake Light (Watts)
Gear Box
Gear Reduction Low
Drive Type
Final Drive
Center Drive
Front Drive
Axle to Axle
Displacement
Engine Model Number
Bore and Stroke
Spark Plug
Alternator Output
Timing Degrees
Carburetion
Main Jet
Pilot Jet
Jet Needle
Needle Jet
Cutaway
Air Screw/Pilot Screw
Sport 400 (III)
W98BA38C
47" (119.4)
46.5
11
(118.1)
74.5
11
(189.2)
49.75/1 ( f)
33
11
(83.8)
5.5" (15.2)
4791bs. (215)
60" (152.4)
6.25
11
(15.9)
8.5" (21.6)
23x7x10
22x11x10
4/3
Hydr. Disc
Hydr. Disc
Mechanical
4
2
2.25 (2.13)
16
100cc
12V 55W
N/A
12V - 8.26/26.9
F/R/N
N/A
520 O-ring
13/3484P
N/A
N/A
N/A
378cc
EC38PLE07
6.9/1
-- .
83x70
BR8ES (NGK)
150W
23.5@3000
(1) VM34SS
230
35
6CEY6-3
0-6 (480)
---
1.5
1.5 Turn
Scrambler 400 (III)
W98BC38C
47/1
(119.4)
45.5
11
(115.6)
74.5/1 (189.2)
48.5" (123.2)
33" (83.8)
6.5/1
(15.2)
519 Ibs. (236)
60
11
(152.4)
8.211 (21.6)
8.5" (21.6)
23x7x10
22x11x10
4/3
Hydr. Disc
Hydr. Disc
Mechanical
4
2
2.25 (2.13)
32
100cc
(2) 12V 30/30W
N/A
12V - 8.26/26.9
F/R/N
N/A
520 O-ring
13/3676P
11/2270P
12/2264P
N/A
378cc
EC38PLE09
6.9/1
83x70
BR8ES (NGK)
150W
23.5@3000
(1) VM34SS
~ , "
230
35
6CEY6-3
0-6 (480)
1.5
1.5
5/98
1.8f
Xplorer 400 (IV) Magnum 2x4 (II)
W98CC38C W98AA42A
47.5" (120.7) 47" (119.4)
46
11
(116.8) 46.5
11
(118.1)
81/1
(205.7) 77/1
(195.6)
49.75" (126.4) 49.75
11
(126.4)
34/1
(86.4) 33/1
(83.8)
7.375" (19.0) 5.5/1
(14.0)
570 Ibs. (267) 534 Ibs. (244)
65/1 (165) 60/1 (152.4)
6.25" (15.9) 6.25" (15.9)
8.5" (21.6) 8.5
11
(21.6)
25x8x12 23x7x10
25x11x10 24x11x10
4/3 4/3
-
4 3.5
2 2- OW40 Engine oil
2.25 (2.13) 2.25 (2.13)
20 20
100cc N/A
12V 60W 12V 60/60W
2, 12V 27W Acc.
12V - 8.26 / 26.9 12V - 8.26/26.9
HIILO/R/N HI/LO/R/N
..
---
6.64/1 6.64/1
..
13/3484P 12/3886P
11/2270P N/A
13/2264P N/A
N/A N/A
378cc 425cc
EC38PLE06 EH42PLE02
6.9/1 9.2/1
83X70 87.9x70
.. - ~ ~ . ~ - -
BR8ES (NGK) BKR5ES (NGK)
200W 200W
23.5@3000 30@3500
(1) VM34SS (1) BST34-CV type
200 140
30 40
6CEY6-3 5F14-3
0-6 (480) P-9
1.5 Pilot Air Jet #160
1.5 Turn 2.5
1998 Model (Gen II, III, or IV) Magnum 4x4 (II) Scrambler 500 (III)
Model Number W98AC42A W98BC50A
Height, inches (cm)
46/1
(119.4)
47/1
(119.4)
Width, inches (cm)
46/1
(116.8) 45.5" (115.6)
Length, inches (cm)
77/1
(195.6) 74.5/1 (189.2)
Wheel Base, inches (cm) 49.75/1 (126.4) 48.5" (123.2)
Seat Height, inches (I 1)
34/1
(86.4) 33" (83.8)
Ground Clearance, inches (cm) 6" (15.2)
6.5/1
(15.2)
Weight - Lbs. (Kg) 595 Ibs. (274) 542 Ibs. (246)
Turning Radius (Unloaded), in. (cm) 65" (165) 60" (152.4)
Front Suspension Travel, in. (cm) 6.25/1 (15.9) 8.2" (21.6)
(McPherson Strut)
Rear Suspension, inches (cm) 8.5" (21.6) 8.5/1 (24.1)
Front Tires 25x8x12 23x7X10
Center Tires N/A N/A
Auxiliary Brake Mechanical Mech.
Fuel Capacity (U.S. Gallons) 3.5 3.5
Oil Capacity (U.S. Quarts) (2) OW40 Engine Oil (2) OW40 Engine Oil
Cooling System Capacity (Qt./Liter) 2.25/2.16 2.25 I 2.16
Main Head Light 12V 60W (2) 12V 30/30W
Grill Mounted 2,12V 27W N/A
Tail Light 1 Brake Light (Watts) 12V - 8.26/26.9 12V 8.26 I 26.9
-,
Gear Box HIILO/R/N HI/R/N
Gear Reduction Low 6.64/1 N/A
Drive Type 520

520 a-ring
Final Drive 12/3886P 13/36-76P
,-
Center Drive 11/2270P N/A
Front Drive 11/2268P N/A
Displacement 425cc 499
Engine Model Number EH42PLE02 EH50PLE04
Compression Ratio (Full Stroke) 9.2/1 10.2/1
Bore and Stroke 87.9x70 92x75
Spark Plug BKR5ES (NGK) BKR5E (NGK)
.. -
Timing Degrees 30@3500 30@3500
Carburetion (1) BST34-CV type (1) BST 40 CV type
Main Jet 140 155
Pilot Jet 40 40
Pilot Air Jet
Jet Needle 5F14-3 6H25-94-3
Needle Jet P-9 y-O
--
Cutaway N/A N/A
Air Screw or Fuel Screw (Turns Out) 2.5 2.0
1.89
GENERAL INFORMATION
Specifications 1998
Sportsman 500 (IV) Big Boss 500 6x6 (II)
W98CH50A W98AE42A
47/1
(119.4)
47/1
(119.4)
46" (116.8) 46" (116.8)
81" (205.7) 103" (261.6)
50.5/1 (128.3) 75" (190.5)
34" (86.4)
34/1
(91.4)
11 " (27.9) 5.5/1
(14.0)
660 Ibs. (316) 870 Ibs. (395)
65" (165) 98" (249)
6.25" (15.9) 6.25" (15.9)
9.5" (24.1) 7.5" (21.6)
25x8x12 25x8x12
-
25x11x10 25x11x10
N/A 25x11x10
5/5 5/5/5
5.25 3.5
(2) OW40 Engine Oil (2) OW40 Engine Oil
2.25 I 2.16 2.25 I 2.16
32 20
12V 60W 12V 60W
2,12V 27W 2,12V 27W
12V - 8.26 I 26.9 12V 8.26 1 26.9
HI/LO/R/N HIILO/R/N
6.69/1 6.64/1
Shaft 520 a-ring
3.16:1 1214288P
N/A 11/2472P
2:1 11/2268P
N/A 30/30 116P
498 498cc
EH50PLE07 EH50PLE06
10.211 10.2/1
92x75 92x75
BKR5E (NGK) BKR5E (NGK)
250W 250W
30@3500 30@3500
(1) BST34 CV type (1) BST34-CV type
142.5 140
42.5 40
5078-3 5078-3
P-1 Q-6
N/A N/A
2.0 2.0
5/98
--,
-,-
GENERAL INFORMATION
Standard Torque Specifications
The following torque specifications are to be used as a general guideline. Some fasteners require a special torque
procedure during installation. In addition, some fastener torque values may be different than the standard torque
value listed below. Critical fastener torques are listed (where applicable) at the beginning of each section. Always
refer to the appropriate chapter for specific torque specifications and procedures before using standard torque.
o
Bolt Size Threads/In Grade 2 Grade 5
#10 8
#10 -
1/4
1/4
5/16 -
5/16 -
3/8
3/8
Torgue in. Ibs. ( k g ~ m )
24 ............. 27 (.31) ............... 43 (.50) .............. 60 (.69)
32 ............. 31 (.36) ............... 49 (.56) .............. 68 (.78)
Torgue ft. Ibs. ( k g ~ m ) *
20 ............. 5 (.7) ................. 8(1.1) ............... 12{1.6)
28 ............. 6 (.8) ................. 10 {1.4} .............. 14 (1.9)
18 ............. 11 (1.5) ............... 17 (2.3) .............. 25 (3.5)
24 ............. 12 (1.6) .............. 19 (2.6} .............. 29 (4.0)
16 ............. 20 (2.7) ............... 30 (4.0) .............. 45 (6.2)
24 ............. 23 (3.2) ............... 35 (4.8) .............. 50 (6.9)
14 ............. 30 (4.0) ............... 50 (6.9) .............. 70 (9.7)
Grade 8
7/16 -
7/16 -
1/2
20 ............. 35 (4.8) ............... 55 (7.6) .............. 80 (11.0)
1/2
Metric
6 x 1.0
8 x 1.25
10 x 1.25
13 ............. 50(6.9) ............... 75(10.4) ............ 110{15.2)
20 ............. 55 (7.6) ............... 90 (12.4) ............ 120 (16.6)
72
8
78 In. Ibs.
14-18 ft. Ibs.
26-30 ft. Ibs.
*To convert ft. Ibs. to kg-m multiply foot pounds by .1383.
*To convert kg-m to N-m move the decimal to the right one position.
1.9 5/98
GENERAL INFORMATION
Decimal Equivalents
1/64 .......................... 0156
1/32 .................... 0312 ................ 1 mm = .0394//
3/64 .......................... 0469
1/16 ............... 0625
5/64 .......................... 0781 ................ 2 mm = .0787"
3/32 .................... 0938
7/64 .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .1 094 ................ 3 mm = .11 81"
1/8 ......... 1250
9/64 .......................... 1406
5/32 .................... 1563 ................ 4 mm = .1575"
11/64 ......................... 1719
3/16 .............. .1875 ................ 5 mm = .1969"
13/64 ........................ 2031
7/32 .................... 2188
15/64 ....................... .2344 ................ 6 mm = .2362"
1/4 ........... 25
17/64 ....................... .2656 ................ 7 mm = .2756"
9/32 .................... 2813
19/64 ........................ 2969
5/16 ............... 3125 ................ 8 mm = .3150"
21/64 ....................... .3281
11/32 .................. .3438 ................ 9 mm = .3543"
23/64 ........................ 3594
3/8 ........... 375
25/64 ....................... .3906 ................ 10 mm = .3937"
13/32 .................. .4063
27/64 ........................ 4219 ................ 11 mm = .4331"
7/16 .............. .4375
29/64 ....................... .4531
15/32 .................. .4688 ................ 12 mm = .472411
31/64 ........................ 4844
1/2 . . . . . . . . .. .5.................... 13 mm = .5118
33/64 ........................ 5156
17/32 ................... 5313
35/64 ....................... .5469 ................ 14 mm = .551211
9/16 ............... 5625
37/64 ....................... .5781 ................ 15 mm = .5906//
19/32 ................... 5938
39/64 ........................ 6094
5/8 ........... 625 ................. 16 mm = .6299"
41/64 ........................ 6406
21/32 ................... 6563 ................ 17 mm = .6693"
43/64 ........................ 6719
11/16 .............. 6875
45/64 ....................... .7031 ................ 1 8 mm = .7087"
23/32 ................... 7188
47/64 ........................ 7344 ................ 19 mm = .7480"
3/4 ........... 75
49/64 ........................ 7656
25/32 ................... 7813 ................ 20 mm = .7874"
51/64 ........................ 7969
13/16 .............. 8125 ................ 21 mm = .8268"
53/64 ........................ 8281
27/32 ................... 8438
55/64 ........................ 8594 ................ 22 mm = .8661"
7/8 ........... 875
57/64 ........................ 8906 ................ 23 mm = .9055"
29/32 ................... 9063
59/64 ........................ 9219
15/16 . . . . . . . . . . . .. .9375 ................ 24 mm = .9449/1
61/64 ........................ 9531
31/32 .................. .9688 ................ 25 mm = .9843
63/64 ........................ 9844
1 ........... 1.0
7/96
1.10
Unit of Measure
ft. Ibs.
in.lbs.
ft. Ibs.
in.lbs.
kg-m
kg-m
kg-m
in.
mm
in.
mile (mi.)
km
Ounces (oz)
Grams (g)
lb.
kg
Cubic inches (cu in)
Cubic centimeters (cc)
Fluid Ounces (fl.oz.)
Imperial pints (Imp pt)
Liters (I)
Imperial quarts (Imp qt)
Liters (I)
Imperial quarts (Imp qt)
US quarts (US qt)
US quarts (US qt)
Liters (I)
US gallons (US gal)
Liters (I)
Pounds - force per square inch (psi)
Kilopascals (kPa)
Kilopascals (kPa)
Kilograms - force per square cm
C to OF: 9 (OC + 40) 5 - 40 :::: OF
OF to C: 5 (OF + 40) + 9 - 40 = C
Multiplied by
x12
x.0833
x.1383
x.0115
x 7.233
x 86.796
x10
x 25.4
x.03937
x 2.54
x 1.6
x.6214
x 28.35
x 0.035
x.454
x 2.2046
x 16.387
x 0.061
x.03381
x 29.57
x 0.568
x 1.76
x 1.137
x 0.88
x 1.201
x 0.833
x 0.946
x 1.057
x 3.785
x 0.264
x 6.895
x 0.145
x 0.01
x 98.1
1.11
GENERAL INFORMATION
Conversion Table .
Converts to
:::: in. Ibs.
= ft. Ibs.
:::: kg-m
kg-m
= ft. Ibs.
:::; in.lbs.
;;:Nm
::::mm
:;:: in.
::::cm
;;:km
mile (mi.)
Grams (g)
= Ounces (oz)
;;: kg
:::: lb.
:::: Cubic inches (cu in)
:::: Fluid Ounces (fl.oz.)
:::: Cubic centimeters (cc)
:::: Liters (I)
:::: Imperial pints (Imp pt)
== Liters (1)
== Imperial quarts (Imp qt)
US quarts (US qt)
== Imperial quarts (Imp qt)
== Liters (I)
== US quarts (US qt)
=Liters (I)
:::: US gallons (US gal)
== Kilopascals (kPa)
= Pounds - force per square inch (psi)
== Kilograms - force per square cm
== Kilopascals (kPa)
5/98
GENERAL INFORMATION
Tap Drill Charts
SAE Tap Drill Sizes
Thread Size Drill Size
#0-80 3/64
#1-64 53
#1-72 53
#2-56 51
#2-64 50
#3-48 5/64
#3-56 45
#4-40 43
#4-48 42
#5-40 38
#5-44 37
#6-32 36
#6-40 33
#8-32 29
#8-36 29
#10-24 24
#10-32 21
#12-24 17
#12-28 4.6mm
1/4-20 7
1/4-28 3
5/16-18 F
5/16-24 I
3/8-16 0
3/8-24 Q
7/16-14 U
7/16-20 25/64
Metric Tap Drill Sizes
Tap Size
3 x .50 #39
3 x .60 3/32
4 x .70 #30
4 x .75 1/8
5 x .80 #19
5 x .90 #20
6 x 1.00 #9
7 x 1.00 16/64
8 x 1.00 J
8 x 1.25 17/64
9 x 1.00 5/16
9 x 1.25 5/16
10 x 1.25 11/32
10 x 1.50 R
11 x 1.50 3/8
12 x 1.50 13/32
12 x 1.75 13/32
5/98
Thread Size Drill Size
1/2-13 27/64
1/2-20 29/64
9/16-12 31/64
9/16-18 33/64
5/8-11 17/32
5/8-18 37/64
3/4-10 21/32
3/4-16 11/16
7/8-9 49/64
7/8-14 13/16
1-8 7/8
1-12 59/64
1 1/8-7 63/64
1 1/8-12 1 3/64
1 1/4-7 1 7/64
1 1/4-12 1 11/64
1 1/2-6 1 11/32
1 1/2-12 1 27/64
1 3/4-5 1 9/16
1 3/4-12 1 43/64
2-4 1/2 1 25/32
2-12 1 59/64
2 1/4-4 1/2 2 1/32
2 1/2-4 2 1/4
2 3/4-4 2 1/2
3-4 2 3/4
Drill Size Decimal Equivalent Nearest Fraction
0.0995 3/32
0.0937 3/32
0.1285 1/8
0.125 1/8
0.166 11/64
0.161 5/32
0.196 13/64
0.234 15/64
0.277 9/32
0.265 17/64
0.3125 5/16
0.3125 5/16
0.3437 11/32
0.339 11/32
0.375 3/8
0.406 13/32
0.406 13/32
1.12
LIMITED WARRANTY
GENERAL INFORMATION
Warranty
Polaris Industries Inc., 1225 Highway 169 North, Minneapolis, Minnesota 55441-5078, gives a SIX MONTH LIM-
ITED WARRANTY on all components of the Polaris All Terrain Vehicle (ATV) against defects in material or work-
manship. This warranty covers the parts and labor charges for repair or replacement of defective parts which are
covered by this warranty. This warranty begins on the date of purchase. This warranty is transferrable to another
consumer during the warranty period through a Polaris dealer. There is a charge of $35.00 payable to Polaris
Industries Inc.
REGISTRATION
At the time of sale, the Warranty Registration Form must be completed by your dealer and submitted to Polaris
within ten days. Upon receipt of this registration, Polaris will record the registration for warranty. THE PURCHAS-
ER MUST COMPLETE AN ATV SAFETY TRAINING COURSE PROVIDED BY THE DEALER IN ORDER TO
HAVE VALID WARRANTY ON THE ATV. No verification of registration will be sent to the purchaser as the copy of
the Warranty Registration Form will be the warranty entitlement. If you have not signed the original registration
and received the "customer copy", please contact your dealer immediately. NO WARRANTY COVERAGE WILL
BE ALLOWED UNLESS YOUR ATV IS REGISTERED WITH POLARIS.
Initial dealer preparation and set-up of your ATV is very important in ensuring trouble-free operation. Purchasing a
machine in the crate or without proper dealer set-up will void your warranty coverage.
WARRANTY COVERAGE AND EXCLUSIONS:
LIMITATIONS OF WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES
The Polaris limited warranty excludes any failures that are not caused by a defect in material or workmanship.
This warranty does not cover accidental damage, normal wear and tear, abuse or improper handling. This warran-
ty also does not cover any ATV that has been altered structurally, modified, neglected, improperly maintained,
used for racing, or used for purposes other than for which it was manufactured, or for any damages which occur
during trailer transit or as a result of unauthorized service or the use of unauthorized parts. In addition, this warran-
ty does not cover physical damage to paint or finish, stress cracks, tearing or puncturing of upholstery material,
corrosion, or defects in parts, components or the ATV due to fire, explosions or any other cause beyond Polaris'
control.
This warranty does not cover the use of unauthorized lubricants, chemicals, or fuels that are not compatible with
the ATV. The exclusive remedy for breach of this warranty shall be, at Polaris' exclusive option, repair or replace-
ment of any defective materials, or components or products. THE REMEDIES SET FORTH IN THIS WARRAN-
TY ARE THE ONLY REMEDIES AVAILABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY. PO-
LARIS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY TO ANY PERSON FOR INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL
DAMAGES OF ANY DESCRIPTION, WHETHER ARISING OUT OF EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTY OR ANY OTHER CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, OR OTHER TORT OR OTHERWISE. Some states
do not permit the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages or implied warranties, so the
above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you if inconsistent with controlling state law.
ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER-
CHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE) ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE
ABOVE SIX MONTH WARRANTY PERIOD. POLARIS FURTHER DISCLAIMS ALL EXPRESS WARRANTIES
NOT STATED IN THIS WARRANTY. Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts,
so the above limitation may not apply to you if inconsistent with controlling state law.
HOW TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE
If your ATV requires warranty service, you must take it to a Polaris Servicing Dealer. When requesting warranty
service you must present your copy of the Warranty Registration form to the dealer. (THE COST OF TRANS-
PORTATION TO AND FROM THE DEALER IS YOUR RESPONSIBILITY). Polaris suggests that you use your
original selling dealer; however, you may use any Polaris Servicing Dealer to perform warranty service.
Please work with your dealer to resolve any warranty issues. Should your dealer require any additional assistance
they will contact the appropriate person at Polaris.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state.
If any of the above terms are void because of state or federal law, all other warranty terms will remain in effect.
Engine Oil
1. Always use Polaris engine oil.
2. Never substitute or mix oil brands as serious engine damage and voiding of warranty can result.
1.13 5/98
GENERAL INFORMATION
Service Tips
In order to perform service work efficiently and to prevent costly errors, the technician should read the text in this
manual, thoroughly familiarizing him/herself with procedures before beginning. Pictures and illustrations have
been included with the text as an aid. Notes, cautions and warnings have also been included for clarification of text
and safety concerns. However, a knowledge of mechanical theory, tool use and shop procedures is necessary to
perform the service work safely and satisfactorily. Use only genuine Polaris service parts.
&. Cleanliness of parts and tools as well as the work area is of primary importance. Dirt and foreign matter will act
as an abrasive and cause damage to precision parts. Clean the vehicle before beginning service. Clean new parts
before installing.
&. Watch for sharp edges which can cause personal injury. Protect hands with gloves when working with sharp
components.
&. If difficulty is encountered in removing or installing a component, look to see if a cause for the difficulty can be
found. If it is necessary to tap the part into place, use a soft face hammer and tap lightly.
&. Some of the fasteners were installed with locking agents. Use of impact drivers or wrenches will help avoid
damage to fasteners.
A Always follow torque specifications as outlined throughout this manual. Incorrect torquing may lead to serious
machine damage or, as in the case of steering components, can result in injury or death for the rider(s).
A If a torquing sequence is indicated for nuts, bolts or screws, start all fasteners in their holes and hand tighten.
Then, following the method and sequence indicated in this manual, tighten evenly to the specified torque value.
When removing nuts, bolts or screws from a part with several fasteners, loosen them all about 1/4 turn before
removing them.
A If the condition of any gasket or O-Ring is in question, replace it with a new one. Be sure the mating surfaces
around the gasket are clean and smooth in order to avoid leaks.
A Some procedures will require removal of retaining rings or clips. Because removal weakens and deforms
these parts, they should always be replaced with new parts. When installing new retaining rings and clips use care
not to expand or compress them beyond what is required for installation.
A Because removal damages seals, replace any oil or grease seals removed with new parts.
A Polaris recommends the use of Polaris lubricants and greases, which have been specially formulated for the
top performance and best protection of our machines. In some applications, such as the engine, warranty
coverage may become void if other brands are substituted.
A Grease should be cleaned from parts and fresh grease applied before reassembly of components.
Deteriorating grease loses lubricity and may contain abrasive foreign matter.
A Whenever removing or reinstalling batteries, care should be taken to avoid the possibility of explosion
resulting in serious burns. Always disconnect the negative (black) cable first and reconnect it last. Battery
electrolyte contains sulfuric acid and is poisonous! Serious burns can result from contact with the skin, eyes or
clothing. ANTIDOTE: External - Flush with water. Internal - Drink large quantities or water or milk. Follow with
milk of magnesia, beaten egg, or vegetable oil. Call physician immediately. Eyes Flush with water for 15 minutes
and get prompt medical attention.
5/98
1.14
GENERAL INFORMATION
Glossary Of Terms
ABDC: After bottom dead center.
ACV: Alternating current voltage.
Alternator: Electrical generator producing voltage alternating current.
AlDC: After top dead center.
BBDC: Before bottom dead center.
BDC: Bottom dead center.
BlOC: Before top dead center.
CC: Cubic centimeters.
COl: Capacitor discharge ignition. Ignition system which stores voltage generated by the stator plate exciter coil in a
capacitor or condenser (in COl box). At the proper moment a voltage generated by the stator plate pulser coil closes an
electronic switch (thyristor) in the COl box and allows the voltage in the capacitor to discharge into the primary windings
of the ignition coil.
Center Distance: Distance between center of crankshaft and center of driven clutch shaft.
Chain Pitch: Distance between chain link pins (520 = 5/8" or 1.6 cm). Chain length is measured in number of pitches
(pins). A 520 x 86 has 86 total pins, including the master link pins.
CI: Cubic inches.
Clutch Buttons: Plastic bushings which transmit rotation of the clutch to the movable sheave in the drive and driven
clutch.
Clutch Offset: Drive and driven clutches are offset so that drive belt will stay nearly straight as it moves along the clutch
face.
Clutch Weights: Three levers in the drive clutch which relative to their weight, profile and engine RPM cause the drive
clutch to close.
Condenser/Capacitor: A storage reservoir for electricity, used in both E.T. and COl systems.
Crankshaft Run-Out: Run-out or "bend" of crankshaft measured with a dial indicator while crankshaft is supported
between centers on V blocks or resting in lower half of crankcase. Measure at various points especially at PTO.
Maximum allowable run-out is .006" (.02 cm).
DCV: Direct current voltage.
Detonation: The spontaneous ignition of the unburned fuellair mixture after normal spark ignition. Piston looks
"hammered" through, rough appearance around hole. Possible causes: 1) too high a compression ratio for the fuel
octane; 2) low octane fuel; 3) over-advanced ignition timing.
Dial Bore Gauge: A cylinder measuring instrument which uses a dial indicator. Good for showing taper and
out-of-round in the cylinder bore.
Driven Clutch: (Also-Secondary Clutch). The torque sensitive clutch in a CVT system which is located on the
transmission input shaft.
Electrical Open: Open circuit. An electrical circuit which isn't complete. (i.e. poor connections or broken wire at hi-Io
beam switch resulting in loss of headlights.
Electrical Short: Short circuit. An electrical circuit which is completed before the current reaches the intended
component. (i.e. a bare wire touching the grounded chassis).
End Seals: Rubber seals at each end of the crankshaft.
Engagement RPM: Engine RPM at which the drive clutch engages to make contact with the drive belt.
EBS: Engine Braking System
ft.: Foot/feet.
Foot Pound: Ft. lb. A force of one pound at the end of a lever one foot in length, applied in a rotational direction.
g: Gram. Unit of weight in the metric system.
gal.: Gallon.
Head Volume: Cylinder head capacity in cc, head removed from engine with spark plug installed.
High Tension Lead: The heavy insulated wire which carries the high secondary voltage from the coil to the spark plug.
Holed Piston: Piston in which a hole has formed on the dome. Possible causes: 1) detonation; 2) pre-ignition.
HP: Horsepower.
10: Inside diameter.
Ignition Coil: A type of transformer which increases voltage in the primary windings (approx. 200V) to a higher voltage
in the secondary windings (approx. 14KV - 32KV) through induction. Secondary voltage is high enough to ionize (jump)
the air gap at the spark plug.
Ignition Generating Coil: Exciter coil, primary charge coil. Stator plate coil which generates primary ignition voltage.
1.15 5/98
GENERAL INFORMATION
Glossary Of Terms
in.: Inch/inches.
Inch Pound: In. lb. 12 in. Ibs. 1 ft. lb.
2
kg/cm : Kilograms per square centimeter.
k g ~ m : Kilogram meters.
Kilogram/meter: A force of one kilogram at the end of a lever one meter in length, applied in a rotational direction.
I or Itr: Liter.
2
Ibs/in : Pounds per square inch.
Left Side: Always referred to based on normal operating position of the driver.
m: Meter/meters.
Mag: Magneto.
Magnetic Induction: As a conductor (coil) is moved through a magnetic field, a voltage will be generated in the
windings. The common method used to convert mechanical enery to electrical energy in the lighting coil, ignition
generating coils and trigger coil.
mi.: Mile/miles.
mm: Millimeter. Unit of length in the metric system. 1 mm = .040".
N ~ m : Newton meters.
00: Outside diameter.
Ohm: The unit of electrical resistance opposing current flow.
oz.: Ounce/ounces.
Piston Clearance: Total difference between piston outside diameter and cylinder inside diameter.
Piston Erosion: Piston dome melts. Usually occurs at the exhaust port area. Possible causes: 1) Detonation due to
lean fuel/air mixture, improper spark plug heat range, excess heat buildup, poor fuel quality / octane rating.
Pre-Ignition: A problem in combustion where the fuel/air mixture is ignited before normal spark ignition. Piston looks
melted at area of damage. Possible causes: 1) too hot a spark plug; 2) spark plug not properly torqued; 3) "glowing"
piece of head gasket, metal burr or carbon in the combustion chamber; 4) lean fuel/air mixture.
Primary Circuit: This circuit is responsible for the voltage build up in the COl capacitor. In the COl system the parts
include the exciter coil, the trigger coil, the wires from stator plate to COl box and to the low resistance primary windings
in the ignition coil.
Primary Clutch: Drive clutch on engine. Mainly RPM sensitive.
psi.: Pounds per square inch.
PTO: Power take off.
PVT: Polaris Variable Transmission (Drive Clutch System)
qt.: Quart/quarts.
RPM: Revolutions per minute.
Resistance: In the mechanical sense, friction or load. In the electrical sense, ohms. Both result in energy conversion to
heat.
Right Side: Always referred to based on normal operating position of the driver.
Running Time: Ignition timing when fully advanced or at specified RPM.
Secondary Circuit: This circuit consists of the large secondary coil windings, high tension wire and ground through the
spark plug air gap.
Secondary Clutch: {Also-Driven Clutch} The torque sensitive clutch in a CVT system which is located on the
Seized Piston: Galling of the sides of a piston. Usually there is a transfer of aluminum from the piston onto the cylinder
wall. Possible causes: 1) improper lubrication; 2) excessive temperatures; 3) insufficient piston clearance; 4) stuck
piston rings.
Spark Plug Reach: Length of threaded portion of spark plug. Polaris uses 3/4" (2 cm) reach plugs.
Static Timing: Ignition timing when engine is at zero RPM.
Stator Plate: The plate mounted under the flywheel supporting the primary ignition components and lighting coil.
5/98
1.16
TOC: Top dead center. Piston's most outward travel from crankshaft.
GENERAL INFORMATION
Glossary Of Terms
Trigger Coil: Pulser coil. Generates the voltage for triggering (closing) the thyristor and timing the spark in COl
systems. Small coil mounted at the top of the stator plate next to the ignition generating coil.
Voltage Regulator: Maintains Prevents over-charging of battery or damage to electrical components as engine RPM
increases.
Venturi: An area of air constriction. A venturi is used in carburetors to speed up air flow which lowers pressure in venturi
to below atmospheric pressure, causing fuel to be pushed through jets, etc., and into the venturi to be mixed with air and
form a combustible air/fuel mixture.
Volt: The unit of measure for electrical pressure of electromotive force. Measured by a voltmeter in parallel with the
circuit.
Watt: Unit of electrical power. Watts = amperes x volts.
WaT: Wide open throttle.
1.17 5/98
GENERAL INFORMATION
Special Tools
Special tool part numbers and usage are listed in each section of this manual as required for a specific service
procedure. For complete tool information refer to the Service Tool Catalog (PN 9914681). U.S. dealers can obtain
a current price list or get tool information by contacting Victor Specialty Tool Company at the address, phone or
FAX number listed below. Canadian dealers can obtain this information by contacting the Winnipeg parts depart-
ment at (204)-925-7125. Dealers serviced by a distributor should follow tool ordering procedures established by
their respective distributor parts department.
5/98
POLARIS
SPECIAL TOOLS
VICTOR SPECIALTY TOOL CO.
66 School Street
Victor, New York 14564
TO PLACE AN ORDER
Toll Free Tool Order FAX Numbers
(U.S.)1-800-716-3938
(Canadian Dealers) 1-800-413-4441
Phone Orders or Information
(U.S.) 1-716-742-1790
(Canadian Dealers) 1-204-925-7125
1.18
Magnum
Cable ties secure
wire harness and
fuel line to frame
1.19
GENERAL INFORMATION
Routing Diagram
Fuel pump
impulse line
(from pump)
~
Cable tie secures
coolant hose to
frame
5/98
GENERAL INFORMATION
Magnum Routing Diagram
5/98
Cable tie secures:
-Engine wiring
-Main wire harness
-Fuel line
-Brake line
-Choke Cable
Inlet
Duct
Engine wiring
routed around
and under inlet
duct
Clip secures
brake line to
frame
Circuit Breaker
Cable tie securing
wiring from solenoid
to starter
1.20
Shifter
~ Cable tie
securing
fuel line
When mounting fuel
tank, carburetor vent
lines should be in
this approximate
location
Edge Trim
To carburetor
(top RH side)
Cable tie through
bulkhead secures
three hoses
Cable tie oil tank vent
line and fuel pump im-
pulse hose
To carburetor
(lower LH side)
Fuel line from
fuel valve
1.21
GENERAL INFORMATION
Fuel Pump
5/98
GENERAL INFORMATION
Hoses
5/98
Loosely
cable tie
wire
Coolant bottle
400s
/
Front
~
Coolant hose
~
Convoluted tubing
1.22
Loosely cable tie
Brake line
Oil line
Coolant line
~
Front
Raised side of
reinforcement
ribs face engine
Front ~
GENERAL INFORMATION
300 Fan Motor Wiring
Orient fan motor so
wiring and vent line
are on bottom.
Fan motor vent line should come straight up from motor between the two large
coolant lines, through cab assembly and back down into frame as shown.
oil tank
\ , ~ ~
-- J ( ( ~ 3\--
\ C ~ ~ /
I
~
~
1.23
o
5/98
GENERAL INFORMATION
Wire Harness
Engine wiring should
be routed behind fuel
tank cover mount
~ ~
Front
ALL MODELS
Fuel tank
Engine wiring
must not hang be-
low side panel
All wiring to be on this side of carburetor
for proper air box installation
All loosely ________
cable tied
--.... Front
-----7--.1'-/ , ...-
Z under carburetor
5/98
1.24
GENERAL INFORMATION
Service Tools
CHASSIS/SUSPENSION
TRANSMISSION
Transmission Tool Kit - Shaft Drive
Used to disassembly and assembly transmission
and front gearcase on 500 models.
PN 2871702
Yoke Gauge Tool .. Shaft Drive
Used to check yoke alignment
PN 2871813 - Large Yoke
PN 2871814 - Small Yoke
1.25 10/96
GENERAL
Mity Vac Pump Kit
This tool is used for many service functions on Polaris
ATVs including testing of cooling systems, carburetor
needle and seat, oil system check valves, etc.
PN 2870975
Small Battery Hydrometer
Measures the strength of battery electrolyte in terms
of specific gravity. Specially designed for small
batteries.
PN 2870836
Transmission Seal/Bearing Driver - 50mm
For installing bearings and case seals during
transmission gearcase overhaul.
PN 2871282
CV Boot Clamp Pliers
The ear and earless driveshaft CV boots require a
special pliers to secure the clamps properly without
distortion.
PN 8700225 For Earless (Flush) Style Clamps
PN 8700226 For Ear Style Clamps
10/96
1.26
GENERAL INFORMATION
Service Tools
LIMITED WARRANTY
GENERAL INFORMATION
Warranty
Polaris Industries Inc., 1225 Highway 169 North, Minneapolis, Minnesota 55441-5078, gives a SIX MONTH LIM-
ITED WARRANTY on all components of the Polaris All Terrain Vehicle (ATV) against defects in material or work-
manship. This warranty covers the parts and labor charges for repair or replacement of defective parts which are
covered by this warranty. This warranty begins on the date of purchase. This warranty is transferrable to another
consumer during the warranty period through a Polaris dealer. There is a charge of $25.00 payable to Polaris
Industries Inc.
REGISTRATION
At the time of sale, the Warranty Registration Form must be completed by your dealer and submitted to Polaris
within ten days. Upon receipt of this registration, Polaris will record the registration for warranty. THE PURCHAS-
ER MUST COMPLETE AN ATV SAFETY TRAINING COURSE PROVIDED BY THE DEALER IN ORDER TO
HAVE VALID WARRANTY ON THE ATV. No verification of registration will be sent to the purchaser as the copy of
the Warranty Registration Form will be the warranty entitlement. If you have not signed the original registration
and received the "customer copy", please contact your dealer immediately. NO WARRANTY COVERAGE WILL
BE ALLOWED UNLESS YOUR ATV IS REGISTERED WITH POLARIS.
Initial dealer preparation and set-up of your ATV is very important in ensuring trouble-free operation. Purchasing a
machine in the crate or without proper dealer set-up will void your warranty coverage.
WARRANTY COVERAGE AND EXCLUSIONS:
LIMITATIONS OF WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES
The Polaris limited warranty excludes any failures that are not caused by a defect in material or workmanship.
This warranty does not cover accidental damage, normal wear and tear, abuse or improper handling. This warran-
ty also does not cover any ATV that has been altered structurally, modified, neglected, improperly maintained,
used for racing, or used for purposes other than for which it was manufactured, or for any damages which occur
during trailer transit or as a result of unauthorized service orthe use of unauthorized parts. In addition, this warran-
ty does not cover physical damage to paint or finish, stress cracks, tearing or puncturing of upholstery material,
corrosion, or defects in parts, components or the ATV due to fire, explosions or any other cause beyond Polaris'
control.
This warranty does not cover the use of unauthorized lubricants, chemicals, or fuels that are not compatible with
the ATV. The exclusive remedy for breach of this warranty shall be, at Polaris' exclusive option, repair or replace-
ment of any defective materials, or components or products. THE REMEDIES SET FORTH IN THIS WARRAN-
TY ARE THE ONLY REMEDIES AVAILABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY. PO-
LARIS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY TO ANY PERSON FOR INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL
DAMAGES OF ANY DESCRIPTION, WHETHER ARISING OUT OF EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTY OR ANY OTHER CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, OR OTHER TORT OR OTHERWISE. Some states
do not permit the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages or implied warranties, so the
above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you if inconsistent with controlling state law.
ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER-
CHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE) ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE
ABOVE SIX MONTH WARRANTY PERIOD. POLARIS FURTHER DISCLAIMS ALL EXPRESS WARRANTIES
NOT STATED IN THIS WARRANTY. Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts,
so the above limitation may not apply to you if inconsistent with controlling state law.
HOW TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE
If your ATV requires warranty service, you must take it to a Polaris Servicing Dealer. When requesting warranty
service you must present your copy of the Warranty Registration form to the dealer. (THE COST OF TRANS-
PORTATION TO AND FROM THE DEALER IS YOUR RESPONSIBILITY). Polaris suggests that you use your
original selling dealer; however, you may use any Polaris Servicing Dealer to perform warranty service.
Please work with your dealer to resolve any warranty issues. Should your dealer require any additional assistance
they will contact the appropriate person at Polaris.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state.
If any of the above terms are void because of state or federal law, all other warranty terms will remain in effect.
Engine Oil
1. Always use Polaris engine oil.
2. Never substitute or mix oil brands as serious engine damage and voiding of warranty can result.
1.27 7/96
GENERAL INFORMATION
Glossary Of Terms
ABOC: After bottom dead center.
ACV: Alternating current voltage.
Alternator: Electrical generator producing voltage alternating current.
ATDC: After top dead center.
BBDC: Before bottom dead center.
BDC: Bottom dead center.
BTOC: Before top dead center.
CC: Cubic centimeters.
COl: Capacitor discharge ignition. Ignition system which stores voltage generated by the stator plate exciter coil in a
capacitor or condenser (in COl box). At the proper moment a voltage generated by the stator plate pulser coil closes an
electronic switch (thyristor) in the COl box and allows the voltage in the capacitor to discharge into the primary windings
of the ignition coil.
Center Distance: Distance between center of crankshaft and center of driven clutch shaft.
Chain Pitch: Distance between chain link pins (No. 35 = 3/8" or 1 cm). Polaris measures chain length in number of
pitches.
CI: Cubic inches.
Clutch Buttons: Plastic bushings which transmit rotation of the clutch to the movable sheave in the drive and driven
clutch.
Clutch Offset: Drive and driven clutches are offset so that drive belt will stay nearly straight as it moves along the clutch
face.
Clutch Weights: Three levers in the drive clutch which relative to their weight, profile and engine RPM cause the drive
clutch to close.
Condenser/Capacitor: A storage reservoir for electricity, used in both E.T. and COl systems.
Crankshaft Run-Out: Run-out or "bend" at crankshaft measured with a dial indicator while crankshaft is supported
between centers on V blocks or resting in lower half of crankcase. Measure at various pOints especially at PTO.
Maximum allowable run-out is .006" (.02 cm).
Dev: Direct current voltage.
Detonation: The spontaneous ignition of the unburned fuel/air mixture after normal spark ignition. Piston looks
"hammered" through, rough appearance around hole. Possible causes: 1) too high a compression ratio for the fuel
octane; 2) low octane fuel; 3) over-advanced ignition timing.
Dial Bore Gauge: A cylinder measuring instrument which uses a dial indicator. Good for showing taper and
out-at-round in the cylinder bore.
Electrical Open: Open circuit. An electrical circuit which isn't complete. (i.e. poor connections or broken wire at hi-Io
beam switch resulting in loss of headlights.
Electrical Short: Short circuit. An electrical circuit which is completed before the current reaches the intended
component. (i.e. a bare wire touching the snowmobile chassis under the seat resulting in loss of taillights and brake
lights).
End Seals: Rubber seals at each end of the crankshaft.
Engagement RPM: Engine RPM at which the drive clutch engages to make contact with the drive belt.
ft.: Foot/feet.
Foot Pound: Ft. lb. A force of one pound at the end of a lever one foot in length, applied in a rotational direction.
g: Gram. Unit of weight in the metric system.
gal.: Gallon.
Head Volume: Cylinder head capacity in cc, head removed from engine with spark plug installed.
High Tension Lead: The heavy insulated wire which carries the high secondary voltage from the coil to the spark plug.
Holed Piston: Piston in which a hole has formed on the dome. Possible causes: 1) detonation; 2) pre-ignition.
HP: Horsepower.
10: Inside diameter.
Ignition Coil: A type of transformer which increases voltage in the primary windings (approx. 200V) to a higher voltage
in the secondary windings (approx. 14KV - 32KV) through inductions. Secondary voltage is high enough to arc the air
gap at the spark plug.
Ignition Generating Coil: Exciter coil, primary charge coil. Stator plate coil which generates primary ignition voltage.
in.: Inch/inches.
Inch Pound: In. lb. 12 in. Ibs. = 1 ft. lb.
7/96
1.28
kg/cm 2 : Kilograms per square centimeter.
kg-m: Kilogram meters.
GENERAL INFORMATION
Glossary Of Terms
Kilogram/meter: A force of one kilogram at the end of a lever one meter in length, applied in a rotational direction.
I or Itr: Liter.
2
Ibs/in : Pounds per square inch.
Left Side: Always referred to based on normal operating position of the driver.
m: Meter/meters.
Mag: Magneto.
Magnetic Induction: As a conductor (coil) is moved through a magnetic field, a voltage will be generated in the
windings. This is how mechanical energy in our engines is converted to electrical energy in the lighting coil, ignition
generating coils and trigger coil.
mi.: Mile/miles.
mm: Millimeter. Unit of length in the metric system. 1 mm = .040".
N-m: Newton meters.
00: Outside diameter.
Ohm: The unit of electrical resistance opposing current flow.
oz.: Ounce/ounces.
Piston Clearance: Total distance between piston and cylinder wall.
Piston Erosion: Piston dome melts. Usually occurs at the exhaust port area. Possible causes: 1) lean fuel/air mixture;
2) improper spark plug heat range.
Pre-Ignition: A problem in combustion where the fuel/air mixture is ignited before normal spark ignition. Piston looks
melted at area of damage. Possible causes: 1) too hot a spark plug; 2) spark plug not properly torqued; 3) "glowing"
piece of head gasket, metal burr or carbon in the combustion chamber; 4) lean fuel/air mixture.
Primary Circuit: This circuit is responsible for the voltage build up in the COl capacitor. In the COl system the parts
include the exciter coil, the trigger coil, the wires from stator plate to COl box and to the low resistance primary windings
in the ignition coil.
Primary Clutch: Drive clutch on engine.
psi.: Pounds per square inch.
PTO: Power take off.
PVT: Polaris Variable Transmission (Drive Clutch System)
qt.: Quart/quarts.
Resistance: In the mechanical sense, friction or load. In the electrical sense, ohms. Both result in energy conversion to
heat.
Right Side: Always referred to based on normal operating position of the driver.
Running Time: Ignition timing when fully advanced or at specified RPM.
Secondary Circuit: This circuit consists ofthe large secondary coil windings, high tension wire and ground through the
spark plug air gap.
Secondary Clutch: Driven clutch on chaincase or jackshaft.
Seized Piston: Galling of the sides of a piston. Usually there is a transfer of aluminum from the piston onto the cylinder
wall. Possible causes: 1) improper lubrication; 2) excessive temperatures; 3) insufficient piston clearance; 4) stuck
piston rings.
Select Monitor: Diagnostic tool which provides static and dynamic displays of the function of critical components in an
EFI system. It also has the capability to display the contents of the ECU memory.
Spark Plug Reach: Length of threaded portion of spark plug. Polaris uses 3/4/1 (2 cm) reach plugs.
Static Timing: Ignition timing when engine is at zero RPM.
Stator Fiate: The plate mounted under the flywheel supporting the primary ignition components and lighting coil.
Surge Tank: The fill tank in the liquid cooling system.
1.29 7/96
GENERAL INFORMATION
Glossary Of Terms
TOC: Top dead center. Piston's most outward travel from crankshaft.
Trigger Coil: Pulser coil. Generates the voltage for triggering (closing) the thyristor and timing the spark in COl
systems. Small coil mounted at the top of the stator plate next to the ignition generating coil.
V Regulator: Voltage regulator. Maintains maximum lighting coil output at approx. 14.5 ACV as engine RPM
increases.
Venturi: An area of air constriction. A venturi is used in carburetors to speed up air flow which lowers pressure in venturi
to below atmospheric pressure, causing fuel to be pushed through jets, etc., and into the venturi to be mixed with air and
form a combustible air/fuel mixture.
Volt: The unit of measure for electrical pressure of electromotive force. Measured by a voltmeter in parallel with the
circuit.
Watt: Unit of electrical power. Watts = amperes x volts.
waT: Wide open throttle.
7/96 1.30
Cable tie secures:
-Engine wiring
-Main wire harness
-Fuel line
-Brake line
-Choke Cable
Inlet
Duct
Engine wiring
routed around
and under inlet
duct
Clip secures
brake line to
frame
Solenoid
Choke Cable
Fuel Impulse
Line
~ Cable tie securing
wiring from solenoid
to starter
1.31
GENERAL INFORMATION
Shifter
~ Cable tie
securing
fuel line
When mounting fuel
tank, carburetor vent
lines should be in
this approximate
location
7/96
GENERAL INFORMATION
7/96
Cable ties secure
wire harness and
fuel line to frame
Fuel pump
impulse line
(from pump)
~
Gear Selector
1.32
Cable tie secures
coolant hose to
frame
To carburetor
(top RH side)
Cable tie through
bulkhead secures
three hoses
Cable tie oil tank vent
line and fuel pump im-
pulse hose
To carburetor
(lower LH side)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Routed over fuel shut-off
Fuel line from
fuel valve
1.33 7/96
GENERAL INFORMATION
Hoses
7/96
Loosely
cable tie
Coolant bottle
4008
Inlet Duct \
/
Front
~
Coolant hose
~ Convoluted tubing
Loosely cable tie
Brake line
Oil line
Coolant line
'"
Front
Brake line ~ ""-
y ~ '
/ ) ~ ~
~ ~
1.34
Raised side of
rei nforcem ent
ribs face engine
F r o n t ~
GENERAL INFORMATION
300 Fan Motor Wiring
Orient fan motor so
wiring and vent line
are on bottom.
Fan motor vent line should come straight up from motor between the two large
coolant lines, through cab assembly and back down into frame as shown.
1.35 7/96
GENERAL INFORMATION
Wire Harness
Engine wiring should
be routed behind fuel
tank cover mou nt

Front
ALL MODELS
-- "'",
.'
".

Fuel tank \< .
. \.,.,\,
. :.
\ . '.

,'Y
Engine wiring
must not hang be-
low side panel
All wiring to be on this side of carburetor
for proper air box installation
Ailioosely ________
cable tied
--....... Front
7/96
/

Z under carburetor
1.36
Oil Tank Vent Line Routing (1996 Sportsman 500)
Be sure to route line through top half of hold-
er (remove loop from line)
Forward
Forward
Carburetor vent line
II
Route over top of carb
GENERAL INFORMATION
Oil Tank Vent Line Routing
"
Route smoothly
downward to oil
tank vent fitting
To front fitting on
oil tank
Be sure hose is routed smooth-
ly with no kinks, sharp bends or
low areas (under carburetor vent line "T")
1.37 10/96
CHAPTER 2
MAINTENANCE
Periodic Maintenance Chart .................... 2.1-2.2
Pre-Ride Inspection ........................... 2.2
Recommended Lubricants and Capacities ....... 2.3
Lubricant and Maintenance Product Numbers .... 2.4
Lubrication Chart ............................. 2.5-2.9
Front Gearcase Lubrication .................... 2.10
Carburetor Adjustments ....................... 2.11-2.12b
Carburetor Draining ........................... 2.13-2.14
Breather System Maintenance ................. 2.14a-2.14b
Compression Test ............................ 2.15
Battery Maintenance .......................... 2.16
General Maintenance ......................... 2.17
Coolant System Maintenance .................. 2.18
2 Stroke Engine Maintenance .................. 2.19-2.22d
4 Stroke Engine Maintenance .................. 2.22e-2.29
Toe Alignment Inspection ...................... 2.30
Chassis Maintenance ......................... 2.31-2.45
Drive Chain Inspection/Adjustment .............. 2.36-2.39
Drive Chain Adjustment, Concentric SWingarm ... 2.37a
MAINTENANCE
Periodic Maintenance Chart
Inspection, adjustment and lubrication intervals of important components is listed in the following chart.
Maintenance intervals are based upon average riding conditions and a vehicle speed of approximately 10 miles
per hour.
Inspect, clean, lubricate, adjust or replace parts as necessary. NOTE: Inspection may reveal the need for re-
placement parts. Always use genuine Polaris parts.
-CAUTION: Due to the nature of these adjustments, it is recommended that service be periormed by an
authorized Polaris dealer. For engine oil, short trip cold weather riding also constitutes severe use. Pay special
attention to oil level. A rise in oil level in cold weather can indicate moisture collecting in the oil tank .
.... Vehicles subjected to severe use, such as operation in wet or dusty areas, should be inspected and serviced
more frequently.
E Emission Control System Service (California). For 4-cycle models built after January 1, 1997.
ENGINE
Item Hours Frequency See Page Remarks
E ....
Engine Oil - Level/Change 100 hrs 6 months 2.23 Check Level Daily; Break In service at 1 month
E
Oil Filter (4-strokes) 100 hrs 6 months 2.23 Replace with oil change
Oil Filter (2-strokes) 100 hrs 12 months 2.22 Replace
Oil Pump Cable (2-strokes) 50 hrs 6 months 2.19 Inspect, Adjust, Lubricate, Replace if Required
E ....
Air Filter - Foam Pre-Cleaner Daily Daily 2.22/2.25 Inspect Clean & oil more often in dirty condo
E ....
Air Filter - Main Element Weekly Weekly 2.22/2.25 Inspect - Replace if necessary
.... Air Box Sediment Tube Daily 2.26 Drain deposits whenever visible
.... Engine Breather Filter 20 hrs Monthly Inspect and replace if necessary
.... Oil Tank Vent Hose 100 hrs 12 months Inspect hose routing /hose condition
E.
Valve Clearance (4-strokes) 100 hrs 12 months 2.27 Inspect/Adjust
.... Counter Balancer Fluid (400s) 100 hrs 12 months 2.21 Check Monthly / Change Annually
E
Idle Speed As required As required 2.11 Adjust

Throttle Cable / ETC Switch 50 hrs 6 months 2.11 Inspect -Adjust, Lubricate, Replace if necessary
Choke (Enricher) Cable 50 hrs 6 months 2.12 Inspect -Adjust, Lubricate, Replace if necessary
Carburetor Float Bowl 50 hrs 6 months 2.13 Drain bowl periodically and prior to storage
Carburetor Air Intake Ducts/Flange 50 hrs 6 months - Inspect all ducts for proper sealing/air leaks
E. Fuel System 100 hrs 12 months 2.13 Check for leaks at tank cap, lines, fuel valve, filter,
pump & carburetor. Replace lines every 2 years.
E-
Fuel Filter 100 hrs 12 months 2.13 Replace filter annually
Coolant/Level Inspection Daily Daily 2.18 Replace engine coolant every 2 years
Coolant Strength / Pressure Test 100 hrs 6 months 2.18 Inspect strength seasonally: Pressure test sys-
System tem annually
Radiator 100 hrs 12 months 2.18 Inspect / Clean external surface
Cooling System Hoses 100 hrs 12 months 2.18 Inspect
Engine Mounts 100 hrs 12 months 2.17 Inspect
Drain Recoil Housing Weekly Weekly 2.21 More often if operating in wet environment
Exhaust Muffler I Pipe 100 hrs 12 months
ELECTRICAL
E
Spark Plug 100 hrs 12 months 2.17 Inspect - Replace if necessary
Ignition Timing 100 hrs 12 months 10.10 Inspect
Battery 20 hrs Monthly 2.16 Check terminals; Clean; Check fluid level
Headlight Aim As required As required 10.4 Adjust if Necessary
Headlamp Inspection Daily Daily 10.4 Check operation daily; Apply Polaris Dielectric
Grease to connector when lamp is replaced
Tail Lamp Inspection Daily Daily 10.9 Check Operation Daily; Apply Polaris Dielectric
Grease to socket when lamp is replaced
5/98 2.1
MAINTENANCE
Periodic Maintenance Chart, Cont.
CHASSIS

Item Hours or Frequency See Page Remarks
.....
Odometer
.....
General Lubrication 50 hrs 3 months 2.5 - 2.9 Lubricate All Fittings, Pivots, Cables, Etc.
.....
Front Hubs/Fluid Check 50 hrs 6 months 2.32 Check monthly
..... Front Hubs/Fluid Change 100 hrs 12 months 2,32 Check monthly

Front Wheel Bearings (2x4) Annually Annually 7.21 Inspect and replace if necessary

Front Hub Spindle Nut Torque Annually Annually 7.21 Inspect Torque and Locking Fastenerand re-
(AWD Models) place if necessary
Drive Belt 50 hrs 6 months 6.12 Inspect - Adjust, Replace if Necessary
Clutches (Drive And Driven) 100 hrs 12 months 6.7 Inspect, Clean
.....
Transmission Oil Level 25 hrs Monthly 2.41 Inspect Monthly; Change Annually
Shift Linkage 50 hrs 6 months 2.41 Inspect, Lubricate, Adjust
Shift Selector Box 200 hrs 24 months 8.9 Change Lubricant Every Two Years

Steering 50 hrs 6 months 2.31 Inspect Daily, Lubricate

Toe Adjustment As required As required 2.31 Periodic Inspection, Adjust When Parts are Re-
placed
..... Rear Axle 50 hrs 6 months 7.24 Inspect Bearings, Grease Fitting
.....
Front Suspension 50 hrs 6 months 2.40 Inspect - Lubricate
.....
Rear Suspension 50 hrs 6 months 2.40 Inspect - Lubricate
Drive Chain 50 hrs 6 months 2.37 Inspect Daily, Adjust and Lubricate if Needed
Tires Pre-ride Pre-ride 2.43 Inspect Daily, Pre-Ride Inspection Item

Brake Fluid 200 hrs 24 months 2.34 Change Every Two Years
.....
Brake Fluid Level Pre-ride Pre-ride 2.34 Inspect Daily, Pre-Ride Inspection Item
..... Brake Lever Travel Pre-ride Pre-ride 2.34 Inspect Daily, Pre-Ride Inspection Item

Brake Pad Wear 10 hrs/100 Monthly 2.34 Inspect Periodically
miles
Auxiliary Brake Adjustment As required As required 2.35 Inspect Deflection Daily; Adjust
Output Shaft Bearing Monthly Monthly 2.7 Grease Monthly
Brake System Pre-ride Pre-ride 2.34 Pre-Ride Inspection Item
Wheels Pre-ride Pre-ride 2.42 Pre-Ride Inspection Item
Frame Nuts, Bolts, Fasteners Pre-ride Pre-ride 2.43 Pre-Ride Inspection Item
Pre-Ride I Daily Inspection
Perform the following pre-ride inspection daily, and when servicing the vehicle at each scheduled maintenance.
Tires - check condition and pressures
Fuel and oil tanks - fill both tanks to their proper level; Do not overfill 4-stroke oil tank
All brakes - check operation and adjustment (includes auxiliary brake)
Throttle - check for free operation and closing
HeadlightfTaillightiBrakelight - check operation of all indicator lights and switches
Engine stop switch - check for proper function
Wheels - check for tightness of wheel nuts and axle nuts; check to be sure axle nuts are secured by
cotter pins
Drive chain - condition and slack; refer to drive chain adjustment
Air cleaner element - check for dirt; clean or replace
Steering check for free operation noting any unusual looseness in any area
Loose parts - visually inspect vehicle for any damaged or loose nuts, bolts or fasteners
Engine coolant - check for proper level at the recovery bottle
5/98
2.2
Recommended Lubricants - Quick Reference
MAINTENANCE
Recommended Lubricants and Capacities
Lubricants and maintenance product part numbers are listed on page 2.4.
Item Type Capacity Notes See
Page
Engine Oil Polaris Premium 4 2 Quarts Add to proper level on dipstick. See oil 2.23
4-Strokes Synthetic,OW/40 change.
Engine Injector Polaris Premium 2 Quarts Add to top of oil reservoir as required. 2.22
Oil (2-Strokes) TC-W3 2-Stroke oil
Counter Balancer SAE 10W30 Motor Oil 3.2 oz. Add to proper level on dipstick. 2.21
Oil (400L Engines) (SG/SH Rated)
Transmission Polaris Synthetic Gear Add to proper level on dipstick. See trans- 2.41
(Gearcase) Case Oil mission oil change.
Type III HLR 20 oz.
Type III HR 16 oz.
Type IV 32 oz. Capacity after draining is approx. 20 ounces
Front Gear Case Premium Front Gear- 3.2S oz. Add to bottom of fill plug threads. 2.10
(Shaft Drive) case Fluid or GLS (100 cc)
80-90 Gear Lube
Shift Selector Box Polaris OW /40 Syn- 1 oz. Oil in selector box should be at the center 8.9
thetic Engine Lubri- 30cc line of the shift selector plungers. Do not
cant or 10W Motor Oil overfill or the selector may hydro-lock.
Coolant Level Polaris Premium Approx. Fill reservoir tank to full line. Check after 2.18
60/40 pre-mixed Anti- 2 Quarts short period of operation when system is
freeze/Coolant or cold. Add if necessary. Refer to 2.18 for
SO/SO mixture more information.
antifreeze/coolant and
distilled water
Front Hubs Premium Demand 2.S oz. Fill hub at 4:00 or 8:00 position until fluid 2.32
(AWD Models) Drive Hub Fluid (7Scc) trickles out. Do not force fluid into hub.
Brake Fluid Polaris DOT 3 Brake - -Fill reservoir to 1/4" (6.4 mm) below cover 2.34
Fluid gasket surface for aluminum reservoir.
-Fill between "Min" & "Max" indicators on
plastic reservoir.
5/98 2.3
MAINTENANCE
Recommended Lubricants
Polaris Premium Lubricant and Maintenance Product Part Numbers
Part No. Description
2871281 Premium 4 Synthetic 0-W40 (4-Cycle) Engine Oil (Quart)
-
2871567 Premium 4 Synthetic 0-W40 (4-Cycle) Engine Oil (16 Gallon)
2871098 Premium 2 Cycle Engine Oil (Quart)
2871097 Premium 2 Cycl Ellgi
1-------
Oil (I I)
2871240 Premium 2 Cycle Engine Oil (2.5 Gallon)
2871566 Premium 2 Cycle Engine Oil (16 Gallon)
2871721 Premium Gold 2 Cycle Synthetic Lubricant
2871477 Premium Synthetic Gearcase Lubricant (1 Gal.)
2871478 Premium Synthetic Gearcase Lubricant (12 oz. bottle)
2870465 Oil Pump for Gearcase Oil
2871654 Premium Demand Drive Hub Fluid (12 oz.)
2871653 Premium Front Gearcase Fluid ( 2 . )
2870510 Cable Lube
.... " .. ..... .. ...-,. - ..
2870584 Loctite RC 680-1 Occ Retaining Compound
2870587 518 Gasket Eliminator
.,
- - ..---.-
2870601 Loctite Chisel Gasket Remover
2870661 RTV Silicone Sealer
8560054 Marine Grade Silicone Sealer ( 4 oz.
2870791 Fogging Oil
.... .. -..... ....... ..
2870990 DOT3 Brake Fluid
2871027 Anti-Corrosive Dielectric Grease
-- --------_._ ..
2871322 Premium All Season Grease (3 oz. cartridge)
2871423 Premium All Season Grease (14 oz. cartridge)
2871460 Starter Drive Grease
2871515 Premium U-Joint Lube (3 oz.)
2871551 Premium U-Joint Lube (14 oz.)
2871323 60/40 Coolant Gallon
2871534 60/40 Coolant Quart
2871312 Grease Gun Kit
2871326 Premium Carbon Clean 12 oz.
2870652 Fuel Stabilizer 16 oz.
5/98
2.4

.. _--_._-
III. Item Lube Rec.
#
1 Engine Oil Polaris OW/40
(4 Strokes) Synthetic
2 Transmission Polaris Synthet-
ic Gear Case
Lubricant
3 Brake Fluid Polaris DOT 3
Brake Fluid
4 Throttle Cable Polaris Cable
Lube
5 Speedometer Polaris Cable
Cable Lube
6 Drive Chain Polaris Chain
Lube or O-Ring
chain lube
Filter
1. Engine Oil and Filter (4 Cycle)
Maximum
Method
Add oil to proper level. See page
2.23.
Add lube to FULL level on dip-
stick. See pages 2.41 .
Fill master cylinder reservoir to
MAINTENANCE
Lubrication Chart
Frequency*
Change after 1 st month, 6 months or 100
hours thereafter; Change more often (25-50
hours) in extremely dirty conditions, or short
trip cold weather operation.
Change annually [2J
As required. Change fluid every 2 years.
1/4" (6.4mm) from top, or between
indicated lines. See page 2.34.
See page 2.11. Semi-annually
OJ
Disconnect cable on back of Semi-annually OJ
speedometer and lubricate inner
cable.
Apply to chain link plates and As required*
rollers.
Transmission Dipstick
Master Cylinder
Reservoir
} ~ {
Operating Range
2. Transmission Dipstick
Full
Parking Brake Lock
3. Brake Fluid (Left hand Master Cylinder)
4. Throttle Cable 5. Speedometer Cable 6. Drive Chain(s)
5/98 2.5
Operating
Range'
MAINTENANCE
Lubrication Chart
12. Tie Rod
End
/
8. Front
Wheel
Bearings
(2x4 Models)
10. Ball Joint
9. Front Drive Axle

J ..
13. Counter-
balance dipstick
III. Item
#
7 Demand 4 Hubs -
All Wheel Drive
ATVs
8 Front Wheel Bear-
ings - Non - driving
front wheels
9 Front Drive Axle "U"
Joints
10 Ball Joint
11 Front A-Arm Pivot
Shaft
12 Tie Rod Ends
13 Counter Balance
Housing (400L)
14 Steering Post Bush-
ings
5/98
Lube Rec.
Polaris Demand
Drive Hub Fluid or
ATFType F
Sealed; Replace
Polaris U-Joint
Grease**
Polaris All Season
Grease**
Polaris All Season
Grease**
Polaris All Season
Grease
u
10W30 Motor Oil
All Season
Grease**
12. Tie Rod End
(4x4 Models)
7. Demand 4 Hubs
4 or 8 O'clock position-
(end view)
/
11. Front A-Arm
Pivot Shaft
10. Ball Joint
Method
Remove filler hole screw in hubs. Rotate wheels to
4 or 8 O'clock position. If lubricant is not visible add
until it flows from filler hole screw. Reinstall screw.
Inspect and replace bearings if necessary
Locate grease fitting and grease with grease gun.
Locate grease fitting on back side of struts and
grease with grease gun.
Locate grease fitting on pivot shaft and grease with
grease gun.
Locate grease fitting and grease with grease gun
(where applicable. On others: Lift boot. Clean
away dirt and grease. Apply fresh grease by hand
and reassemble.
Check level on dipstick and add oil as necessary.
Change annually. To change oil see page 2.21.
Locate fittings on upper and lower steering post and
grease with grease gun.
Frequency*
Semi-annually
ITJ
Annually [l]
Semi-annually
ITJ
Semi-annually
ITJ
Semi-annually
ITJ
Semi-annually
ITJ
Change
Annually [l]
Semi-annually
ITJ
2.6
MAINTENANCE
Lubrication Chart
15. Output shaft support \ '-"'" . ~ C)
III.
#
15
15
a
16
17
18
19
16. Middle Axle Bearings (6x6)
16. Rear Axle
Bearing
Item Lube Rec.
Transmission Polaris All Season
Output Shaft Grease**
Rear Strut Assy Polaris All Season
Grease**
Rear and Middle Polaris All Season
Axle Bearings Grease**
(6xB)
Swing Arm Polaris All Season
Bushings and Grease**
Center Swing Arm
Housing (6x6)
Chain Adjusters Polaris All Season
(Center and Front Grease**
Eccentrics)
Rear Strut (6x6) Polaris All Season
Grease**
Forward
18. Center and Front Eccentrics
17. Center Swing
Arm Housing (6x6)
19. Rear
Stabilizer
Method
Locate grease fitting on transmission output shaft
and grease with grease gun.
Locate grease fitting on eccentric and grease with
grease gun.
Locate grease fitting on swing arm and grease with
grease gun.
Locate grease fitting on center eccentric and
grease. Locate grease fitting on front eccentric (side
opposite chain) and grease.
Locate fitting on rear strut and grease with grease
gun.
* More often under severe use, such as wet or dusty conditions
Frequency*
Semi-annually
[]J
Semi-annually
[j]
Semi-annually
[]J
Semi-annually
[]J
Semi-annually
[j]
**Grease conforming to NLGI No.2, such as Polaris Premium All Season Grease, Conoco Superlube M or
Mobilegrease Special
[j] Semi-annually or 50 hours of operation
[2J Annually or 100 hours of operation
NOTE: Hours are based on 10 mph average.
5/98 2.7
MAINTENANCE
Lubrication Chart - Type IV Transmission (Shaft Drive)
4. Axle Cardan
(U Joint)
I"
'3,0.'
4. Front Prop Shaft
Axle Cardan
3. Rear Halfshaft
2. Slip Yoke
5. Props haft Yoke
/(3 pumps max.)
6.Transmission
} Operating
Range
"'"
Magnet
(Pre-1998)
NOTE: On Shaft Drive models, lubricate these areas in addition to applicable general lubrication items.
III. Item Lube Ree. Method
#
1 Front Gearcase Oil GL5 80-90 Weight Add to bottom of fill plug
Gear Lube threads. See page 2.10
_ ~ ' . ' A
2 Slip Yoke (No grease fitting on Premium U-Joint Locate fittings and grease - 3
late models) Grease pumps maximum
3 Rear Halfshafts Premium U-Joint Locate Fittings and Grease
Grease
4 Axle Cardan (U-Joint) Front Drive Premium U-Joint Locate Fittings and Grease
Shaft / Prop Shaft Grease
5 Propshaft Yoke Premium U-Joint Locate fittings and grease - 3
Grease pumps maximum
6 Transmission Synthetic Add to proper level on dipstick.
Transmission Approx. 20 oz. at change;
Lubricant Approx 32 oz. initial fill after
disassembly .
..
* More often under severe use, such as wet or dusty conditions
[j] Semi-annually or 50 hours of operation
[1J Annually or 100 hours of operation
5/98
2.8
Frequency*
Change annually[1J
Semi-annually[j]
Semi-annually[j]
Semi-annually[j]
Annually[1J
Inspect Monthly;
Change annually I2J
MAINTENANCE
Lubrication Chart - Type IV Transmission (Shaft Drive)
III.
#
7
8
9
10
7. Upper Control
Arm
8. Lower Control
Arm
10. Rear Anti-
9. Rear Wheel Hub Bearing
i / Carrier
fff\
RoliSar . ~
( ~ < ~
~
Item
Upper Control Arms
Lower Control Arms
Rear Wheel Hub Bearing Carrier
Rear Anti-Roll Bar
Lube Rec.
Grease**
Grease**
Grease**
Grease**
~
I / I
Method
Locate fittings and grease
More often under severe use, such as wet or dusty conditions
Frequency
Semi-annually rn
Semi-annually rn
Semi-annually rn
Semi-annually rn
**Grease conforming to NLGI No.2, such as Polaris Premium All Season Grease, Conoco Superlube M or
Mobilegrease Special
OJ Semi-annually or 50 hours of operation
~ Annually or 100 hours of operation
5/98 2.9
MAINTENANCE
Front Gearcase Lubrication .. Type IV Transmission (Shaft Drive)
Front Gearcase Lubrication
The front gearcase fill plug is located on the right side
of the machine.
The gearcase lubricant level should be checked every
six months or 1000 miles (1600 km), whichever comes
first. Change front gearcase lubricant annually or at
100 hour intervals, whichever comes first. With the
ATV on a level surface, remove fill plug and check the
lubricant level. Lubricant should be kept at the bottom
of the fill hole threads. The correct gearcase lubricant
to use is GLS 80-90 Gear Lube.
Front Gearcase Lubricant
PN2871653
Gearcase Lubricant Change
1. Remove fill plug.
2. Remove gearcase drain plug located on the bottom
right hand side and drain the oil. Catch and discard
used oil properly.
3. Clean and reinstall the drain plug using a new seal-
ing washer.
4. Add GLS 80-90W Gear Lube to bottom of fill hole
threads.
5. Install fill plug.
6. Check for leaks.
7. Make sure vent hose is clear and free of kinks.
5/98
2.10
Make sure vent is unobstructed
Carburetor Adjustments
Idle Speed Adjustment
1. Start engine and warm it up thoroughly.
2. Adjust idle speed by turning the idle adjustment
screw. See illustrations at right.
NOTE: Adjusting the idle speed affects throttle cable
freeplay and electronic throttle control (ETC) adjustment.
Always check throttle cable freeplay after adjusting idle
speed and adjust if necessary.
. ,., .. , .," ,
.. 100FlPM)

Throttle Cable I Electronic Throttle
Control (ETC Switch) Adjustment
1. Slide boot off throttle cable adjuster and jam nut at
throttle block.
2. Place shift selector in neutral and set parking brake.
3. Start engine and set idle to.
NOTE: Be sure the engine is at operating temperature.
See Idle Speed Adjustment.
4. Loosen lock nut.
5. Turn cable adjuster out until engine RPM starts to
increase.
6. Turn cable adjuster back in until throttle lever has
1/16" (.16 cm) of travel before engine RPM
increases. Be sure ETC switch plunger is held
inward by throttle cable tension.
7. Tighten lock nut securely and slide boot completely in
place to ensure a water-tight seal.
NOTE: On 2 stroke models, whenever throttle cable ad-
justments are made, always check oil pump adjustment.
Refer to pages 2.19 2.20 for adjustment procedure.
8. Turn handlebars from left to right through the entire
turning range. If idle speed increases, the throttle
cable freeplay must be increased, or check for proper
cable routing.
Throttle Operation
Check for smooth throttle opening and closing in all han-
dlebar positions. Throttle lever operation should be
smooth and lever must return freely without binding. Re-
place the throttle cable if worn, kinked, or damaged.
5/98 2.11
MAINTENANCE
425/500 Engines
Idle Screw ---IrnrJ
250/300/400
Engines
1/16" Th rottle
Lever Freeplay
Switch Plunger Must
Be Held In By Cable
Tension
MAINTENANCE
Throttle Cable Adjustment
NOTE: If the proper freeplay cannot be obtained with the
throttle block adjuster, adjust the cable at the carburetor
using the following procedure. See III. 1 and 3.
1. Remove fuel tank.
2. Slide boot off throttle cable adjuster and jam nut.
3. Loosen lock nut and turn adjuster until proper throttle
lever freeplay is obtained.
4. Tighten locknut and slide boot back over adjuster.
5. Reinstall fuel tank.
6. Check for proper throttle operation and correct
freeplay in all handlebar positions.
Choke Adjustments
With the choke control toggle flipped to the full off position,
the choke plunger must be seated on the fuel passage way
in the carburetor. If the plunger is not seated on the pas-
sage way, the engine will flood or run too rich, causing plug
fouling and very poor engine performance.
If cable slack is too great there will be excessive toggle free
play resulting in hard cold starting. Also, the half on position
used for intermittent applications will not function.
1. Flip choke toggle to full off position.
2. Loosen adjustment locknut (A) on carburetor.
3. Turn cable sleeve adjusting nut (8) clockwise on
carburetor until 1/4" (6 mm) or more choke toggle free
play is evident.
4. Turn cable sleeve adjusting nut counterclockwise on
carburetor until toggle has zero free play, then rotate it
clockwise until 1/8"-1/4" (3-6 mm) toggle free play is
evident.
5. Tighten adjustment locknut (A).
Throttle Control Lever Stop Adjustment
The throttle control lever incorporates an adjustable stop.
This can be adjusted to limit the amount of throttle opening
by loosening the screw (A) and sliding the stop to a desired
setting. Then tighten screw. See III. 4.
5/98
2.12
III. 1
1/8-1/4" (.3-.6 cm)
Freeplay
III. 2
Throttle Cable
Adjuster
Throttle Cable
Adjuster
Lock Nut
4-Stroke CV Carburetor
Choke Toggle Position
~
Half On
~ I l F
Full On
A
III. 3
1-----,
2-Stroke VM Carburetor
Air Screw Adjustment
2-Stroke Models
1. Turn carburetor air screw in until lightly seated. Back
screw out the specified number of turns.
2. Warm up the engine to operating temperature.
3. Set idle speed to 600-800 RPM.
NOTE: Adjusting the air screw may affect idle speed.
Always check throttle cable freeplay after adjusting idle
speed and adjust if necessary.
4. Turn the screw in (to richen) or out (to lean) the
mixture. Adjust air screw for best throttle response
and smooth idle.
5. Re-adjust idle if necessary.
Pilot Screw (Idle Mixture) Adjustment
4-Stroke Models
NOTE: The pilot screw is pre-set at the factory. The fol-
lowing adjustment procedure should be used after disas-
sembly and cleaning or if the pilot screw is replaced. Be
sure all engine maintenance items have been performed
and are within specifications before adjusting pilot screw.
1. Turn pilot screw in (clockwise) until lightly seated.
Turn screw out the specified number of turns.
2. Start engine and warm it up to operating temperature
(about 10 minutes).
3, Connect an accurate tachometer that will read in
increments of + or - 50 RPM.
4. Set idle speed to 1200 RPM. Always check throttle
cable freeplay after adjusting idle speed and adjust if
necessary.
5. Slowly turn mixture screw clockwise until RPM begins
to decrease by 50 RPM or greater.
5/98 2.12a
MAINTENANCE
250/300/400cc Engines
Air Screw
425/500 Engines
FRONT
(Enginy
Pilot Screw
MAINTENANCE
Pilot Screw (Idle Mixture) Adjustment, Cont.
4-Stroke Models
NOTE: If tamper proof plug is installed refer to removal
procedure below.
6. Slowly turn mixture screw counterclockwise until idle
speed increases to maximum RPM. Continue turning
counterclockwise until idle RPM begins to drop.
7. Center the pilot screw between the points in step 5
and 6.
8. Re adjust idle speed if not within specification.
5/98
2.12b
425/500 Engines
FRONT
(Enginy
Pilot Screw
Fuel Lines
1. Check fuel lines for signs of wear, deterioration,
damage or leakage. Replace if necessary.
2. Be sure fuel lines are routed properly and secured with
cable ties. CAUTION: Make sure lines are not kinked
or pinched.
3. Replace all fuel lines every two years.
Vent Lines
1. Check fuel tank, oil tank, carburetor, battery and
transmission vent lines for signs of wear, deterioration,
damage or leakage. Replace every two years.
2. Be sure vent lines are routed properly and secured
with cable ties. CAUTION: Make sure lines are not
kinked or pinched.
Fuel Filter
The fuel filter should be replaced periodically or whenever
sediment is visible in the filter.
1. Shut off fuel supply at fuel valve.
2. Remove line clamps at both ends of the filter.
3. Remove fuel lines from filter.
4. Install new filter and clamps onto fuel lines with arrow
pointed in direction of fuel flow.
5. Install clamps on fuel line.
6. Start engine and inspect for leaks.
7. Reinstall fuel tank.
Carburetor Float Bowl Draining
A WARNING
Gasoline is extremely flammable and explosive under certain conditions.
Always stop the engine and refuel outdoors or in a well ventilated area.
MAINTENANCE
Fuel LinesNent Lines
A
A
Do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks in or near the area where refueling is performed or where
gasoline is stored.
A
A
A
A
A
5/98
Do not overfill the tank. Do not fill the tank neck.
If you get gasoline in your eyes or if you swallow gasoline, see your doctor immediately.
If you spill gasoline on your skin or clothing, immediately wash it off with soap and water and change clothing.
Never start the engine or let it run in an enclosed area. Gasoline powered engine exhaust fumes are poison-
ous and can cause loss of consciousness and death in a short time.
Never drain the float bowl when the engine is hot. Severe burns may result.
2.13
MAINTENANCE
Carburetor Draining
Carburetor Draining
The carburetor float bowl should be drained periodically to
remove moisture or sediment from the bowl, or before ex-
tended periods of storage.
NOTE: The bowl drain screw is located on the bottom left
side of the float bowl on 4-stroke models. A drain plug
(which also acts as a water/sediment trap) is located on the
bottom of the float bowl on 400cc 2-stroke models.
1. Turn fuel valve to the off position.
2. Remove left side body panel. See Body Panel
Removal, Chapter 5.
3. Place a clean container beneath the bowl drain spigot
or bowl drain hose.
4. Turn drain screw out two turns (remove drain plug for
2-Strokes) and allow fuel in the float bowl and fuel line
to drain completely.
5. Inspect the drained fuel for water or sediment.
6. Tighten drain screw.
7. Turn fuel valve to "on".
8. Start machine and check for leaks.
5/98
2.14

Drain tube
attached
here
Drain Screw
400cc 2-Strokes
OFF
RES
ON
Fuel Valve
Breather Filter Inspection
1. Inspect the breather filter(s) for obstruction.
Replace if necessary. Breather filter service life is
extended when the air box pre-filter is in place and
maintained properly. Never operate the engine without
the pre-filter.
Breather Hose
1. Be sure breather line is routed properly and secured in
place. CAUTION: Make sure lines are not kinked or
pinched.
2.14a
MAINTENANCE
Breather System (4 Strokes)
Breather Filter (In-Line)
Scrambler 500
Breather Filter (In-Line)
Breather
5/98
MAINTENANCE
5/98
2.14b
Compression Test - 2 Stroke
1 . Remove spark plug and install compression tester.
2. Connect high tension lead to a good ground on engine.
3. Open throttle and crank engine until maximum reading
is obtained (approximately 3-5 revolutions).

115<fl$1
Compression Test - 4 Stroke
NOTE: 4-Stroke engines are equipped with an automatic
decompressor. Compression readings will vary in propor-
tion to cranking speed during the test. Average compres-
sion (measured) is about 50-90 psi during a compression
test.
Smooth idle generally indicates good compression. Low
engine compression is rarely a factor in running condition
problems above idle speed. Abnormally high compres-
sion can be caused by a decompressor malfunction, or
worn or damaged exhaust cam lobes. Inspect camshaft
and automatic decompression mechanism if compression
is abnormally high.
A cylinder leakage test is the best indication of engine
condition on models with automatic decompression. Fol-
low manufacturer's instructions to perform a cylinder leak-
age test. (Never use high pressure leakage tester as
crank seals may dislodge and leak).

. >,19 .rc.

2.15
MAINTENANCE
General Maintenance
5/98
MAINTENANCE
General Maintenance
Battery Maintenance
AWARNING
Battery electrolyte is poisonous. It contains sulfuric acid. Serious
burns can result from contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Antidote:
External: Flush with water.
Internal: Drink large quantities of water or milk. Follow with milk
of magnesia, beaten egg, or vegetable oil. Call physician immedi-
ately.
Eyes: Flush with water for 15 minutes and get prompt medical
attention.
Batteries produce explosive gases. Keep sparks, flame, ciga-
rettes, etc. away. Ventilate when charging or using in an enclosed
space. Always shield eyes when working near batteries. KEEP
OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN.
The battery is located under the left rear fender.
Inspect the battery fluid level. When the battery fluid nears
the lower level, the battery should be removed and distilled
water should be added to the upper level line. To remove
the battery:
1. Disconnect holder strap and remove cover.
2. Disconnect battery negative (-) (black) cable first,
followed by the positive (+) (red) cable.
.&. CAUTION
Whenever removing or reinstalling the battery, disconnect
the negative (black) cable first and reinstall the negative
cable last!
3. Disconnect the vent hose.
4. Remove the battery.
Maintain
between upper
and lower level
marks
-- ~ ~ ~
5. Remove the filler caps and add distjlfed water only as needed to bring each cell to the proper level. Do not
overfill the battery .
.&. To refill use only distilled water. Tap water contains minerals which are harmful to a battery .
.&. Do not allow cleaning solution or tap water to enter the battery. It will shorten the life of the battery.
6. Reinstall the battery caps.
7. Clean battery cables and terminals with a stiff wire brush. Corrosion can be removed using a solution of one
cup water and one tablespoon baking soda. Rinse will with clean water and dry thoroughly.
8. Reinstall battery, attaching positive (+) (red) cable first and then the negative (-) (black) cable.
9. Reattach vent hose making sure it is not kinked or pinched.
10. Coat terminals and bolt threads with Polaris dielectric grease PN 2871027.
11. Reinstall battery cover and holder strap .
.&. Do not start the engine with the battery disconnected. Vehicle lamps will burn out if battery is disconnected
or has a specific gravity lower than 1.14 during vehicle operation. Also, the reverse speed limiter can be damaged.
5/98
2.16
Spark Plug
1. Remove right body panel. See Body Panel Removal,
Chapter 2 (4 strokes). On two stroke models, access
spark plug through the right front footwell.
2. Remove spark plug high tension lead. Clean plug area
so no dirt and debris can fall into engine when plug is
removed.
3. Insert spark plug wrench provided in tool kit. Remove
spark plug.
4. Inspect electrodes for wear and carbon buildup. Look
for a sharp outer edge with no rounding or erosion of
the electrodes.
5. Clean with electrical contact cleaner or a glass bead
spark plug cleaner only. CAUTION: A wire brush or
coated abrasive should not be used.
6. Measure gap with a wire gauge. Recommended spark
plug gap is shown in chart at right. Adjust if necessary
by bending the side electrode carefully.
7. If necessary, replace spark plug with proper type.
CAUTION: Severe engine damage may occur if the
incorrect spark plug is used.
8. Coat spark plug threads with a small amount of
anti-seize compound.
9. Install spark plug and torque to 14 ft. Ibs.
Ignition Timing
Refer to the electrical section for ignition timing procedure.
Engine Mounts
Inspect rubber engine mounts for cracks or damage.
Check fasteners and ensure they are tight.
2.17
MAINTENANCE
General Maintenance
Spark Plug Gap
.024 - .028" (.6 - .7 mm)
5/98
MAINTENANCE
General Maintenance
Coolant Level Inspection
With the engine at operating temperature, the coolant level
should be between the upper and lower marks on the re-
covery bottle. If not:
1. Remove recovery bottle cap. Inner splash cap vent
hole must be clear and open.
2. Fill recovery bottle to upper mark with Polaris
Premium 60/40 Anti Freeze / Coolant or 50/50 or
60/40 mixture of antifreeze and distilled water.
3. Reinstall cap.
NOTE: If coolant is excessively low in the radiator, coolant
will not circulate or be drawn in from the recovery bottle.
Coolant Strength
Test the strength of the coolant using an antifreeze
hydrometer. A 50/50 or 60/40 mixture of antifreeze and
distilled water will provide the optimum cooling, corrosion
protection, and antifreeze protection. Do not use tap wa-
ter, straight antifreeze, or straight water in the system. Tap
water contains minerals and impurities which build up in
the system. Straight water or antifreeze will cause the sys-
tem to freeze.
Cooling System Hoses
1. Inspect all hoses for cracks, deterioration, abrasion or
leaks. Replace if necessary.
2. Check tightness of all hose clamps.
Radiator
1. Check radiator air passages for restrictions or
damage.
2. Carefully straighten any bent radiator fins.
3. Remove any obstructions with compressed air or low
pressure water.
Cooling System Pressure Test
Refer to page 3.6 for pressure test procedure.
5/98
2.18
Antifreeze Hydrometer
Oil Pump Adjustment Procedure
(1996 250cc Engines)
1. Before adjusting the oil pump, check engine idle
RPM. Recommended RPM is 700. Adjust if
necessary. Check and adjust throttle lever free
play (ETC switch). See page 2.12.
2. Start the engine and let it idle. Place very slight
pressure on the throttle lever until all freeplay is
removed from throttle cable to carburetor.
3. Loosen locknut (D) and align marks (A) and (C) by
turning adjuster (E) up or down as needed.
4. When the marks are aligned, tighten locknut (D).
5. Check throttle lever freeplay/ETC switch
adjustment and readjust at throttle block if
necessary.
(300cc Engines and 1997 to current 250 cc Engines)
1. Adjust engine idle speed to 600-800
RPM.
2. Remove seat, air box cover, and air filter
to gain access to carburetor slide.
3. Pull boot back from throttle cable adjuster
located on throttle housing. Loosen lock
nut. See. III. 1.
4. Turn adjuster into throttle housing until the
oil pump lever arm rests firmly against its
stop on the oil pump body. Verify this by
pushing downward on lever arm and
checking for movement. See III. 2.
NOTE: If lever arm cannot rest against stop
even with throttle cable adjuster screwed all
the way in, loosen oil pump cable adjuster nuts
and adjust cable down until lever arm is firmly
against stop.
2.19
MAINTENANCE
2 Stroke Engine Maintenance
250cc Engine
D
A
A. Idle Index
B. Oil Pump Lever
C. Static Line
D. Locknut
B
E. Cable Adjuster
F. Bleed Screw
Throttle Housing
III. 1
Cable Adjuster -
Turn in until oil pump
lever arm rests against
stop (Step 4)
Lock N
Step 4 -
Verify lever is against
stop by pushing down
on lever
Oil Pump ----'<-...-
Lever Stop
III. 2
Measure
Distance
_I
5/98
MAINTENANCE
(300cc Engines and 1997 to current 250 cc Engines), cont.
5. Using machinist's dividers or a drafting compass,
gauge the distance from the bottom of the cable
bracket to the bottom of the lever arm tip as
shown in III. 3. Note the exact position of the
divider on the bracket and lever arm. The divider
must be in the same position on these parts when
you perform the oil pump cable measurements in
Step 8. It may be helpful to scribe or mark a line
on the end of the lever arm to use as a reference.
See III. 2 and 3.
6. Measure the width of the divider on a metric ruler
to the nearest 1/2 millimeter. Record this
measurement.
Note: The carburetor slide must be resting against the
idle stop screw and the throttle lever must have free
play before proceeding with Step 7. If you cannot ob-
tain free play at the carburetor even with the throttle
housing adjuster screwed completely into the throttle
housing, loosen the lock nut on top of carburetor, turn
the throttle cable adjuster in until free play is obtained,
tighten the lock nut, and then proceed with Step 7.
7. Place gear selector in neutral and set parking
brake.
8. Start engine.
9. Turn the adjuster on the throttle lever housing
out until the engine RPM just begins to rise.
Repeat this step to make sure you have the
throttle cable set to the exact point where the
slide (engine RPM) just begins to rise.
10. Stop engine.
2.19a
Forward
Step 5 - ..
111.3
-fA
1/ \\
/1 \
(I ~
Adjuster
III. 4
Cable Adjuster -
Turn adjuster in
if lever free play can-
not be obtained with
adjuster on throttle
lever housing
Throttle Housing
Turn out until engine
RPM just begins to in-
crease (Step 9)
III. 5
5/98
11. Adjust the dividers to a distance 3mm less than
the measurement recorded in Step 6. Set the
distance from the bracket to the lever arm tip (or
mark made in Step 5) by placing the divider points
in exactly the same location as in step 5. Loosen
lock nuts and adjust oil pump cable to new divider
dimension. Tighten lock nuts. Note: Adjustment
may change when oil pump cable adjuster lock
nuts are tightened. Verify the distance is 3mm
less than the recorded measurement.
12. Reinstall air filter, air box cover, and seat.
13. Turn throttle cable adjuster in (at throttle
housing) approximately 1 turn. Place
transmission in neutral, set parking brake, start
engine and let it idle.
14. Turn throttle cable adjuster out until engine RPM
starts to increase.
15. Turn adjuster in until there is 1/16" of throttle lever
movement before engine RPM begins to
increase. Tighten lock nut and slide boot over
adjuster.
16. Turn handlebars from left to right through the
entire turning range. If engine RPM increases,
readjust throttle cable free play and check for
proper cable routing.
5/98
2.19b
III. 7
MAINTENANCE
Lock N
Distance must
be 3mm less
than recorded
measurement
Throttle Housing
1/16" Throttle JL
Lever Free Play
MAINTENANCE
(400L Engines)
1. Before adjusting the oil pump, check engine idle
RPM. Recommended RPM is 700. Adjust if
necessary. Check and adjust throttle lever free
play (ETC switch). See page 2.11.
2. Adjust oil pump cable until marks (F) align when
throttle slide just begins to raise and engine speed
just begins to increase.
3. Tighten jam nuts.
4. Reinstall the ETC cover removed in step 1. ,
making sure cover gasket is properly seated. If not,
moisture can enter the ETC and damage the
switch.
Oil Pump Bleeding Procedure
1. Fill the oil reservoir with Polaris injector oil.
2. Loosen the pump bleed screw one full turn. Allow
oil to flow from the bleed screw for five to ten
seconds. Tighten bleed screw. CAUTION: Never
run the engine with the bleed screw loose. Loss of
oil will cause serious engine damage.
3. Start the engine and lift the oil pump lever or reel to
its full up (open) position. Allow engine to idle with
the lever or wheel in this position for ten to twenty
seconds to make sure all air is out of the system.
If oil starvation is suspected, proceed as follows:
1. Premix fuel in tank at a 40:1 fuel/oil ratio.
2. With the oil reservoir full and the pump bled, remove
the oil delivery line from the intake manifold.
3. Test the oil delivery check valve with a low pressure
pump and gauge. (See Page 3.21).
4. Start engine and lift oil pump lever to full open position.
5. Oil should pulse from the delivery line every few second
If it does not, suspect one of the following:
A. Oil line or filter plugged/Oil tank vent line restricte
B. Oil lines leaking or blocked
C. Faulty oil pump or drive mechanism
5/98
2.20
Type 2
(1/4 reel)
Oil Outlet Oil Inlet
\ r__--fhi'"
400 Oil Pump Bleeding
r Lift Lever
250/300 Oil Pump Bleeding
Recoil Housing
Drain the housing periodically to remove moisture.
Counter Balancer Lubrication (400)
The counter balance oil should be checked semi-annually, espe-
cially before off season storage. If the machine is used in wet
conditions the oil should be checked more frequently. If the oil has
a milky white or gray appearance it should be changed as soon
as possible. Failure to properly maintain this important area can
result in premature wear or possible failure of the counter balanc-
er components. Always use SAE 10W30 oil.
Procedure for Adding Oil (400)
1. Remove seat and locate dipstick. Remove by loosening with
a long handled screwdriver.
2. Remove dipstick. Oil level is shown on dipstick.
3. Add SAE 10W30 oil with a transmission fluid funnel. The
recommended oil level is indicated by the knurled area on the
dipstick.
NOTE: Screw dipstick in fully and remove to check. Check with
engine at room temperature. Do not overfill. If overfilled, excess
oil will be expelled through the vent hose.
4. Reinstall dipstick. Do not over tighten.
5. Inspect vent line for kinks or obstructions.
Counter Balance Oil Changing Procedure
1. Remove seat. Locate and remove dipstick.
2. Remove drain plug and drain oil. Catch and discard used oil
properly.
3. Clean and reinstall drain plug.
4. Add SAE 10W30 oil using a transmission fluid funnel. The
recommended oil level is indicated by the knurled area on the
dipstick. The dipstick should be screwed in fully to check. Do
not overfill. If overfilled, excess oil will be expelled through the
vent hose.
5. Reinstall dipstick.
6. Check for leaks.
2.21
MAINTENANCE
Counter Balance Drain
~
Recoil Drain
Starter
Recommended
Oil Level
5/98
MAINTENANCE
Air Cleaner
Trail Boss, Xpress 300,
Xplorer 300, Xplorer 400
Dual Stage Air Cleaner
The Polaris ATV is equipped with a dual stage engine
air filtration system. The primary pre-cleaner foam boot
is designed to remove the majority of dust particles be-
fore they reach the secondary dry filter element.
Primary Pre-cleaner Foam Boot
Inspect the primary air cleaner boot daily or on a regular
basis depending on running conditions and dust.
1. Remove the ATV seat.
2. Remove the primary air filter box.
3. Remove the yellow pre-cleaner foam boot, held in
place by a gray collar, from the air box. Do not re-
move the collar.
4. Carefully wash the yellow foam boot in soapy water
and dry it.
5. Oil the foam boot with engine injection oil (1 to 2 tea-
spoons). Squeeze out the excess into an absorbant
cloth.
6. Reinstall the yellow foam boot onto the air filter box.
7. Reinstall the primary air filter box removed in step 2.
NOTE: There will be some resistance. Be sure the
black rubber sealing ring is securely positioned over
the main filter neck.
CAUTION: When installing the primary air filter box be
sure the gray foam collar (B) is below the intake opening
of the air box intake (A). Improper installation will re-
strict airflow to the engine possibly resulting in engine
damage.
5/98
2.22
Primary Air Filter Box
Pre-cleaner Boot
Air Cleaner
Trail Blazer, Trail Boss, Xpress 300,
Xplorer 300, Xplorer 400
Secondary (Main) Filter
Inspect the secondary filter weekly or after every 50
hours of operation.
CAUTION: Never operate the ATV with the filter ele-
ment removed. Dirt will enter the engine causing seri-
ous rapid wear and damage to the engine.
Secondary filter removal and installation pro-
cedure:
1. Remove ATV seat.
2. Remove primary air filter box.
3. Remove four wing nuts holding cover assembly to
secondary air filter housing.
4. Remove filter element.
5. Inspect gaskets on both sides of filter. Replace if
required.
6. Coat top and bottom gaskets of filter with a gener-
ous amount of grease.
7. Check condition of air box and replace if necessary.
Install filter into airbox. Be sure filter element seats
securely.
8. Check cover gasket and replace if required. Be
sure cover is seated properly and wing nuts are fin-
ger tightened securely.
9. Reinstall primary air filter box as per instructions
found on page 2.22.
10. Reinstall ATV seat.
Cleaning the Main Filter
Important:
It is advisable to replace the filter when it is dirty. How-
ever, in an emergency it is permissible to clean the
main filter if you observe the following practices.
1. Never immerse the filter in water since dirt can be
transferred to the clean air side of the filter.
2. If compressed air is used never exceed a pressure
of 40 PSI. Always use a dispersion type nozzle to
prevent filter damage and clean from the outside to
the inside.
NOTE: Replace the air filter every 50 hours, and poss-
ibly more often in very dirty conditions.
2.22a
MAINTENANCE
5/98
MAINTENANCE
Air Filter Service
Sport, Scrambler 400
1. Release seat latch and lift up on the rear of the seat.
2. Pull the seat back and free the tab from front cab.
3. Remove the two wing nuts and washers securing
the air filter access cover.
4. Remove the cover. Inspect the gasket. It should
adhere tightly to the cover and seal all the way
around.
5. Remove the wing nut and washer securing the se-
cond cover. The cover should be straight and not
distorted.
6. Remove pre filter from main filter and discard the
main air filter.
7. Carefully wash the pre-filter in soapy water and dry
it.
8. Install dry pre-filter over new main filter and install.
NOTE: Apply a small amount of general purpose
grease to the sealing edges of the filter before
installing.
5/98
2.22b
Access
Cover
i I
Air Filter Service
Trail Blazer
1. Release seat latch and lift up on the rear of the
seat.
2. Pull the seat back and free of the tabs.
3. Remove the primary air filter box.
4. Remove the yellow pre-cleaner foam boot, held in
place by a gray collar, from the air box. Do not re-
move the collar.
5. Carefully wash the yellow foam boot in soapy wa-
ter and dry it.
6. Oil the foam boot with engine injection oil (1 to 2
teaspoons). Squeeze out the excess into an ab-
sorbant cloth.
7. Reinstall the yellow foam boot onto the air filter
box.
8. Reinstall the primary air filter box removed in step
2. NOTE: There will be some resistance. Be sure
the black rubber sealing ring is securely positioned
over the main filter neck.
CAUTION: When installing the primary air filter box
be sure the gray foam collar (B) is below the intake
opening of the air box intake (A). Improper installation
will restrict airflow to the engine possibly resulting in
engine damage.
2.22c
MAINTENANCE
Intake
Airbox Retainer '-i

Air Filter
Airbox _____ __j_:
5/98
MAINTENANCE
Oil Filter (2 Strokes)
The oil filter is located in-line between the oil tank and
the oil pump on all 2-stroke models. The in-line oil filter
is a special type and must not be substituted. Replace
the oil filter annually or whenever water or debris has
entered the oil tank. Do not attempt to clean this filter.
1. Remove clamps, securing lines to filter.
2. Remove lines and replace filter with arrow pointing
in direction of oil flow (towards pump).
3. Reinstall clamps on each line and check for leaks.
Oil Filter Change (2 .. Strokes)
Replace oil filter every 100 hours of operation.
5/98
2.22d
MAINTENANCE
2.22e 5/98
MAINTENANCE
NOTES
5/98
2.22f
Air Filter - 4 Stroke Engines
It is recommended the air filter be replaced yearly. When
riding in extremely dusty conditions replacement will be re-
quired more often.
The pre filter should be cleaned before each ride, using the
following procedure.
Pre-Filter Service
1 . Lift up on the rear of the seat.
2. Pull the seat back and free of the tabs. NOTE: When
reinstalling seat, make sure the slots in the seat engage
the tabs in the fuel tank.
Magnum
3. Remove splash guard foam securing pre-filter.
Remove pre-filter element. Note position of duct
support wire. It must be properly positioned before
reinstalling pre-filter.
Gen IV 50 Os
Remove wing nuts (6) from air box cover and remove
cover. Slip the pre-filter element off of main element.
Cleaning
4. Clean the element with high flash pOint solvent,
followed by hot soapy water.
5. Rinse and dry thoroughly.
6. Inspect element for tears or damage.
7. Apply a 1-2 oz of 2-stroke oil (or foam filter oil) to the
pre-filter. Thoroughly work oil completely into foam.
Squeeze out excess oil.
Installation
Magnum
8. Reinstall pre-filter element making sure duct support
wire is in proper position. Secure splash guard foam
removed in step 3. Do not allow splash guard foam to
restrict air intake. Do not tuck the element under the
noise baffle foam.
Gen IV 500s
Reinstall element over main filter. Be sure the element
covers entire surface of main filter without folds or
creases.
Air Filter Main Element
1. Remove the two wing nuts and washers securing the
air filter access cover (6 on Gen IV 500s).
2. Remove the cover. Inspect the gasket. It should
adhere tightly to the cover and seal all the way around.
2.229
MAINTENANCE
Element
6
CD
\-
/ Duct Support Wire
CD Must Be Positioned
Properly on Magnum
Magnum Pre-filter

,

Pre-filter
Gen IV 500s Pre-filter
5/98
MAINTENANCE
Air Filter Main Element, Cont.
3. Remove the wing nut and washer securing the filter
cover. The cover should be straight and not distorted
(Loosen clamp on Gen IV 500s).
4. Remove the air filter. Inspect and replace if necessary.
If the filter has been soaked with water, fuel or oil it must
be replaced.
NOTE: Apply a small amount of general purpose grease
to the sealing edges of the filter before reinstalling.
Air Box Sediment Tube
Periodically check the air box drain tube located toward the
rear of the machine. Drain whenever deposits are visible
in the clear tube.
NOTE: The sediment tube will require more frequent ser-
vice if the vehicle is operated in wet conditions or at high
throttle openings for extended periods.
1. Remove drain plug from end of sediment tube.
2. Drain tube.
3. Reinstall drain plug.
Sportsman Style
5/98
2.22h
Cove r
Cover ........... ",,"'.
Magnum Style
Air Filter Service
Scrambler 500
1. Remove seat.
2. Release clips and remove cover.
3. Loosen clamp and remove filter
4. Remove fabric type pre-filter from main filter. Wash
pre-filter in soapy water and dry it.
5. Reinstall pre-filter in main filter. Replace main filter
as required.
Air Filter Service
Sportsman 500, Xplorer 500
1. Remove seat.
2. Remove wingnuts securing the airbox lid and re-
move lid.
3. Pull foam breather filter out.
4. Loosen clamp and remove filter.
5. Remove foam pre-cleaner from main filter.
6. Wash the pre-filter in soapy water and dry it.
7. Install dry pre-filter over new main filter and reinstall.
8. Push foam breather filter straight down into airbox
until flush with upper edge of box. Make certain
foam is flush with front edge of airbox so air cannot
enter engine breather fitting hole without first pass-
ing through the foam.
2.22i
MAINTENANCE
Foam
Pre-cleaner
c< Breather Filter
" ' ~ Q ~
Main Filte lEU
5/98
MAINTENANCE
NOTES
5/98
2.22j
Check Engine Oil (4 Stroke)
The oil tank is located on the left side of the vehicle. To
check the oil:
1. Set machine on a level surface.
2. Start and run engine for seconds. This will return
oil to its true level in the oil tank. About a cup of oil will
remain in the crankcase.
3. Stop engine, remove dipstick and wipe dry with a clean
cloth.
4. Reinstall dipstick, screwing into place.
NOTE: The dipstick must be screwed completely in to
keep the angle and depth of stick consistent.
5. Remove dipstick and check to see that the oil level is
between the safe and add marks. Add oil as indicated
by the level on the dipstick. Do not overfill.
NOTE: Rising oil level between checks in cold weather
driving, can indicate moisture collecting in the oil reservoir.
Oil and Filter Change (4 Stroke)
The recommended oil change interval is 100 hours, 1000
miles, or every six months, whichever comes first. Sug-
gested break in oil change is at 20 hours, 500 miles, or one
month, whichever comes first. Severe use, such as
uous duty in dirt, dust, water, short trip winter driving, or any
driving below -10 F. (-23C) requires more frequent ser-
vice. Be sure to change the oil filter whenever changing oil.
1. Place vehicle on a level surface.
2. Run engine for two to three minutes until warm. Shut
engine off.
3. Clean area around drain plug at the bottom of the oil
tank.
4. Place a drain pan beneath the oil tank and remove the
drain plug. CAUTION: Oil may be hot. Do not allow hot
oil to come into contact with skin as serious burns may
result.
5. Allow oil to drain completely.
6. Replace sealing washer on oil drain plug. NOTE: The
sealing surfaces on the drain plug and the oil tank
should be clean and free of burrs, nicks or scratches.
7. Reinstall drain plug and torque to 14 ft. Ibs. (1.9 kgm).
2.23
MAINTENANCE
Maintain Oil Level In Normal Range
Screw in completely to check

P(.llaris

':'409 Fto120
9
F
5/98
MAINTENANCE
Oil and Filter Change, Cont. (4 Stroke)
8. Place shop towels beneath oil filter. Using an oil
filter wrench, turn filter counterclockwise to remove.
9. Using a clean dry cloth, clean filter sealing surface
on crankcase.
10. Lubricate O-ring on new filter with a film of engine
oil. Check to make sure the O-ring is in good
condition.
11. Install new filter and turn by hand until filter gasket
contacts the sealing surface, then turn and
additional 112 turn.
12. Approximately 1 cup of engine oil will remain in the
crankcase. To drain, remove drain plug found on
lower right side of crankcase.
NOTE: The sealing surfaces on the drain plug and
crankcase should be clean and free of burrs, nicks or
scratches.
13. Reinstall drain plug.
14. Remove dipstick and fill tank with 2 quarts (1.9 I) of
Polaris Premium 4 synthetic oil.
15. Place gear selector in neutral and set parking brake.
16. Start the engine and let it idle for one to two minutes.
Stop the engine and inspect for leaks.
17. Re-check the oil level on the dipstick and add oil as
necessary to bring the level to the upper mark on the
dipstick.
18. Dispose of used filter and oil properly.
... ":,,,,: .. ,',,:,,:,,:,',',',,:',:,',",,,,,,,,',',,

1 .. k9.n)
:"'.' .. ':.,.,,' """:'''"':'/:'",.":,,,",,,
..
.. .
..... ..... . .......i...(i: ............... i\":'
. . :.; .. ... .... .... . :......: . :.
. ' ..
.
turn.anadditionaI1/2turn

., .
0'
5/98
2.24
Engine Sump Drain Plug
NOTES
2.25
MAINTENANCE
5/98
MAINTENANCE
NOTES
5/98
2.26
Valve Clearance
Inspect and adjust valve clearance while the engine is cold
and the piston positioned at Top Dead Center (TOC) on
compression stroke.
1 . Lift up on the rear of the seat.
2. Pull the seat back and free of the tabs. NOTE: When
reinstalling seat, make sure the slots in the seat
engage the tabs in the fuel tank.
3. Remove the left and right side body panels and fuel
tank cover. See Body Panel Removal, Chapter 2.
4. Remove the fuel tank.
5. Remove the spark plug high tension lead and remove
the spark plug. CAUTION: Place a clean shop towel
into the spark plug cavity to prevent dirt from entering.
6. Remove the eight 6 x 20 mm bolts securing the rocker
cover. Remove the cover and gasket. NOTE: It may
be necessary to tap the cover lightly with a plastic
hammer to loosen it from the cylinder head.
7. Remove the timing inspection plug from the recoil
housing.
CAUTION: Failure to position the crankshaft exactly as
shown (TOC on compression stroke) will result in improper
valve adjustment.
8. Rotate the engine slowly with the recoil rope, watching
the intake valves open and close.
NOTE: At this point watch the camshaft sprocket marks
and slowly rotate engine until marks are parallel to rocker
cover gasket surface. The cam sprocket locating pin will
be facing upward directly in line with the crankshaft to cam-
shaft center line as shown. See photo at right.
9. Verify accurate TOC positioning by observing the mark
aligned with the line in the timing inspection hole. In
this position there should be clearance on all valves.
2.27
MAINTENANCE
10/96
MAINTENANCE
Intake Valve Clearance Adjustment
1. Insert a .006/1 (.15 mm) feeler gauge between the end
of the intake valve stem and the clearance adjuster
screw as shown.
2. Using a 10 mm wrench and a screwdriver, loosen the
adjuster lock nut and turn the adjusting screw until
there is a slight drag on the feeler gauge.
3. Hold the adjuster screw and tighten the adjuster lock
nut to a torque of 5.8 to 7.2 ft. Ibs., using the 10mm
flank drive torque adapter at a 90angle to the torque
wrench as shown. NOTE: The flank drive must be
positioned at a 90 angle to the torque wrench to
prevent over torquing.
4. Re-check the valve clearance.
5. Repeat adjustment procedure if necessary until
clearance is correct.
6. Repeat this step for the other intake valve.
Exhaust Valve Clearance Adjustment
NOTE: The exhaust valves share a common rocker arm,
and must be adjusted using two feeler gauges.
1. Insert a .006" (.15 mm) feeler gauge between each of
the exhaust valves and adjuster screws.
2. If adjustment is needed, loosen the locknuts and turn
the adjuster screws until there is a slight drag on both
feeler gauges. NOTE: Both feeler gauges should
remain inserted during adjustment.
3. When the clearance is correct, hold the adjuster screw
and tighten the locknut to 5.8 to 7.2 ft. Ibs., using the
1 Omm flank drive torque adapter at a 90angle fa the
torque wrench as shown. NOTE: The flank drive must
be positioned at a 90 angle to the torque wrench to
prevent over torquing.
4. Re-check the valve clearance.
5. Repeat adjustment procedure if necessary until
clearance is correct.
6. Scrape gasket surfaces to remove all traces of the old
gasket. CAUTION: Use care not to damage the
sealing surface of the cover or cylinder head.
10/96
2.28
Use torque adaptor for all valve adjuster
locknuts.
Exhaust Valve Clearance Adjustment Cont.
7. Reinstall the cover using a new gasket.
8. Torque cover bolts to 72 in. Ibs.
9. Remove the shop towel from the spark plug cavity.
10. Reinstall the spark plug. Torque to 11 ft. Ibs. (new), 18
ft. Ibs. (used).
11. Reinstall the spark plug high tension lead.
12. Reinstall the fuel tank.
13. Reinstall the fuel tank shroud.
14. Reinstall the left and right body panels.
Throttle Cable Lubrication
Lubricate throttle cable from the throttle block end.
1. Turn engine off.
2. Remove three throttle block cover screws.
3. Slide boot off throttle cable adjuster and jam nut.
4. Loosen cable adjuster jam nut.
5. Turn adjuster in to obtain maximum cable freeplay.
6. Open throttle and hold cable.
MAINTENANCE
7. Carefully disconnect throttle cable from throttle lever. Do not kink or bend throttle cable.
8. Unscrew adjuster and remove cable.
9. Hold throttle cable up and lubricate with Polaris Cable Lube.
10. Turn adjuster in to obtain maximum cable freeplay.
11. Reinstall cable onto throttle lever.
12. Perform throttle cable adjustment.
2.29 10/96
MAINTENANCE
Toe Alignment Inspection
CAUTION: Due to the critical nature of the procedures outlined in this chapter, Polaris recommends steering
component repair and adjustment be performed by an authorized Polaris Dealer. One of two methods can be
used to measure toe alignment. The string method is shown below and the chalk method on page 2.31. If adjust-
ment is required, refer to page 2.31 for procedure.
Method 1
Be sure to keep handlebars centered. See note below.
NOTE: String
should just touch
side surface of rear
tire on each side of .......
machine.
Measure from string
to rim at front and
rear of rim along the
horizontal centerline .......
of the hub.
Rear rim measure-
ment should be
1/16" to 1/8" (.2 to
.3 cm) more than ........
front rim measure-
ment.

I
@J

I I
II
. I ~
@
NOTE: The steering post arm can be used as an indicator of whether the handlebars
are straight. The arm should always point straight back from the steering post.
5/98
2.30
Steering
MAINTENANCE
Chassis Maintenance
The steering components should be checked periodically for loose fasteners, worn tie rod ends, and damage.
Also check to make sure all cotter pins are in place. If cotter pins are removed, they must not be re-used. Always
use new cotter pins.
Replace any worn or damaged steering components. Steering should move freely through entire range of travel
without binding. Check routing of all cables, hoses, and wiring to be sure the steering mechanism is not restricted
or limited. NOTE: Whenever steering components are replaced, check front end alignment. See page 5.9 for
an optional alignment procedure. Polaris recommends steering component repair and adjustment be performed
by an authorized Polaris dealer.
Camber and Caster
The camber and caster are non-adjustable.
Toe Alignment Inspection
1. Place machine on a smooth level surface.
2. Set handlebars in a straight ahead position and
secure handlebars in this position. NOTE: The
steering frog can be used as an indicator of whether
the handlebars are straight. The frog should always
point straight back from the steering post.
3. Place a chalk mark on the face of the front tires
approximately 10" (25.4 cm) from the floor as close to
the horizontal center line of the hub as possible.
NOTE: It is important that both marks be equally
positioned from the ground in order to get an accurate
measurement.
4. Measure the distance between the marks and
record. Call this measurement "A".
Chalk Line
Measurement
"A"
Measurement "B"
5. Rotate the tires 180
0
by moving vehicle forward or backward. Position chalk marks approximately 10" (25.4
cm) from the floor. Measure the distance between the marks and record. Call this measurement "B".
6. Subtract measurement "B" from measurement "A". The difference between measurements "A" and "B" is called
vehicle toe alignment. The recommended vehicle toe tolerance is 1/8" to 1/4" (.3 to .6 cm) total toe out. This means
the measurement at the front of the tire (A) is 1/8" to 1/4" (.3 to .6 cm) wider than the measurement at the rear (B).
7. If this measurement needs to be adjusted, measure the distance between vehicle center and each wheel.
This will tell you which tie rod needs adjusting. NOTE: Be sure handlebars are straight ahead before
determining which tie rod(s) need adjustment.The steering post arm can be used as an indicator of whether
the handlebars are straight.
CAUTION: During tie rod adjustment it is very important that the following precautions be taken when tightening
tie rod end jam nuts. If the rod end is positioned incorrectly it will not pivot, and may break.
To adjust toe alignment, the jam nuts must be loos-
ened and the tie rod either shortened or lengthened
for proper toe setting.
When the tie rod end jam nuts are tightened, be
sure to hold tie rod ends so they are parallel with
the steering arm or the steering frog, respectively.
8. After alignment is complete, torque jam nuts to 12-14 ft.
Ibs. (1.66-1.93 kg-m).
2.31
I :
Correctly
Tightened
Jam Nut
: I
Incorrectly
Tightened
Jam Nut
5/98
MAINTENANCE
Chassis Maintenance
Tie Rod End Inspection
A WARNING
Only a qualified technician should replace worn or damaged steering parts.
To check for play in the tie rod end, grasp the steering tie
rod, pull in all directions feeling for movement. Replace
any worn steering components. Steering should move
freely through entire range of travel without binding.
Front Hubs (4x4 AWD Model)
To check front hub fluid:
1. Place vehicle on a level surface.
2. Turn wheel until front hub fill/check plug is in either the
4:00 or 8:00 position.
3. Remove fill/check plug.
4. Add Polaris Premium Demand Drive Hub Fluid or Type
F Automatic Transmission Fluid if necessary until fluid
trickles out. NOTE: Do not force the fluid into the hub
under pressure or seal damage may occur.
5. Reinstall plug.
6. Repeat procedure for other hub.
Changing Front Hub Fluid
1. Place a drain pan beneath the hub.
2. Remove the hub cap by carefully prying with a
screwdriver in the notches provided. Pry equally until
cap is removed. NOTE: Mid 1996 to current AWD
model ATVs are equipped with three TorxTM head
screws to secure the hub cap.
3. Allow fluid to drain completely.
4. Inspect hub cap O-rings for nicks, cuts or abrasions.
Replace if necessary.
5. Remove check/fill plug.
6. Reinstall the hub cap. NOTE: The check/fill plug
must be removed before reinstalling the hub cap.
7. Turn wheel until front hub fill/check plug is in either the
8. Add fluid until it trickles out. NOTE: Do not force the
fluid into the hub under pressure or seal damage may
occur.
Poliids Demand Drive Hub Fluid
..... PN2si1654i ... ... 12 oz.
5/98
2.32
Exhaust Pipe
The exhaust pipe must be periodically purged of accumu-
lated carbon as follows:
1. Remove the clean out plugs located on the bottom of the
muffler as shown above.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Place the transmission in neutral and start the engine.
Purge accumulated carbon from the system by momen-
tarily revving the engine several times.
If some carbon is expelled, cover the exhaust outlet and
rap on the pipe around the clean out plugs while revving
the engine several more times.
If particles are still suspected to be in the muffler, back
the machine onto an incline so the rear of the machine
is one foot higher than the front. Set the parking brake
and block the wheels. Make sure the machine is in neu-
tral and repeat steps 2 and 3. WARNING: SEE
BELOW.
If particles are still suspected to be in the muffler, drive
the machine onto the incline so the front of the machine
is one foot higher than the rear. Set the parking brake
and block the wheels. Make sure the machine is in neu-
tral and repeat steps 2 and 3. WARNING: SEE
BELOW.
Repeat steps 2 through 5 until no more particles are e x ~
pelled when the engine is revved.
Stop the engine and allow the arrestor to cool.
Reinstall the clean out plugs.
A WARNING
Do not perform this operation immediately after the engine has
been run because the exhaust system becomes very hot.
Because of the increased fire hazard, make sure that there are
no combustible materials in the area when purging the spark
arrestor.
Wear eye protection.
Do not stand behind or in front of the vehicle while purging the
carbon from the spark arrestor.
Never run the engine in an enclosed area. The exhaust con-
tains poisonous carbon monoxide gas.
Do not go under the machine while it is inclined.
Failure to heed these warnings could result in serious personal injury
or death.
2.33
MAINTENANCE
Chassis Maintenance
Clean Out Plugs
Clean Out Plugs
Clean Out Plug
;
g
~
"'" Clean Out Plug
Clean Out Plugs
5/98
MAINTENANCE
Chassis Maintenance
Brake System Inspection
The following checks are recommended to keep the brake system in good operating condition. How often they
need checking depends upon the type of driving that has been done.
Keep fluid level in the master cylinder reservoir 1/4/1 (6.4 mm) from the top (between "Min" & "Max" lines on
plastic reservoirs) at all times. Normal functioning of the diaphragm is to extend into the reservoir as fluid
level drops. If the fluid level is low and the diaphragm is not extended, a leak is indicated and the dia-
phragm should be replaced. Always fill the reservoir to within 1/4" (6.4 mm) of the top (between "Min" &
"Max" lines on plastic reservoirs) whenever the cover is loosened or removed to insure proper diaphragm
operation. Use Polaris DOT 3 brake fluid (PN 2870990).
Check brake system for fluid leaks.
Check brake for excessive travel or spongy feel.
Check friction pads for wear, damage and looseness.
Check surface condition of the disc.
Pads should be changed when worn to 3/64" (.1 cm),
or about the thickness of a dime.
Brake Fluid Level Inspection
The master cylinder is located on the left handlebar. Re-
move the cover and check the brake fluid level often. The
correct fluid level is 1/4" (6.4 mm) from the top "A" (be-
tween "Min" & "Max" lines on plastic reservoirs). If the fluid
level is low add DOT 3 brake fluid PN 2870990 only. Fill
to 1/4" (6.4 mm) from the top (between "Min" & "Max" lines
on plastic reservoirs).
When reservoir cover is removed do not squeeze brake le-
ver. Fluid may squirt out the compensating port if lever is
pulled.
Wear Line
5/98
Pads should be changed when worn to the
indicator lines (A), as shown. See page 9.1 for
pad wear specifications.
Inspect the brake disc spline and pad wear
surface for excessive wear.
2.34
~ -
3/64,JL
(.1 cm) ..
@ Minimum
Thickness
1/4"
(6.4 mm)
A
~ -
JL
Brake Pad Wear
Auxiliary Mechanical Brake System
The auxiliary brake system is intended to be used as a
backup for the hydraulic system. Should the hydraulic
system fail, the rear brake can be activated by depressing
the foot pedal on the inside of the right floorboard.
NOTE: Since this is a rear brake only, it will not be as ef-
fective as the all wheel system.
Auxiliary Brake Testing
The auxiliary brake should be checked for proper adjust-
MAINTENANCE
Chassis Maintenance
ment. ~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ~
1. Support the rear wheels off the ground.
2. While turning the rear wheels by hand, apply the auxil-
iary foot brake. This brake should not stop the wheels
from turning until the lever is half way between its rest
pOSition and bottoming on the footrest.
Auxiliary Brake Adjustment
The auxiliary brake should be adjusted if the brake pedal
deflection is under 1/2" (1.3 cm) or exceeds 3/4" (1.9 cm)
prior to brake activation.
1. Put the machine in neutral. Stop engine.
2. Type I: If adjustment is necessary turn adjuster bolt
(A) clockwise until disc rotation becomes difficult.
Turn adjuster bolt counterclockwise until brake en-
gagement starts at approximately 1/2 of the total pedal
travel (See Illustration 1).
Type 1I:lf adjustment is necessary, loosen jam nut (A)
and turn adjuster bolt (B) clockwise until disc rotation
becomes difficult. Turn adjuster bolt counterclockwise
until brake engagement starts at approximately 1/2 of
the total pedal travel (See Illustration). Tighten the lock
nut securely. (See Illustration 2).
3. Check brakes to be sure they are not dragging. Read-
just pedal deflection if necessary.
4. Type III (Hydraulic): Refer to Inspection Procedurel
Linkake adjustment on page 9.30b.
Hose/Fitting Inspection
Check brake system hoses and fittings for cracks, deterio-
ration, abrasion, and leaks. Tighten any loose fittings and
replace any worn or damaged parts.
2.35
Auxiliary Foot Brake Pedal
Full Height Engagement Full
1 / (Flush)
j
(1/2 Height) Engagement
F t ~ ; 1 7
Board Surface
A
Side View
Auxiliary Brake Adjustment - Type 1
III. 1
A
Side View
Auxiliary Brake Adjustment - Type II
III. 2
5/98
MAINTENANCE
Drive Chain
Drive Chain and Sprocket Inspection
Inspect the drive chain for missing or damaged O-Rings, link plates, or rollers. Do not wash the chain with a high
pressure washer, gasoline or solvents; do not use a wire brush to clean the chain as damage to the O-Rings may
occur. Clean chain with hot soapy water and a soft bristled nylon brush.
Never allow battery acid to contact the drive chain. Periodically lubricate the chain with Polaris a-Ring Chain
Lubricant (PN 2871079).

PN,2871079
Drive Chain Inspection
The chain must be replaced when it reaches 3% elonga-
tion.
1. Stretch the chain tightly in a straight line.
2. Measure a length of twenty pitches (pins) from pin
center to pin center, and compare to the specification.
Replace the chain if the length exceeds the wear limit.
3. When replacing or reinstalling drive chain, install the
closed end of the splice link clip as shown, with the
closed end leading in forward operation.
Pitch
L"l1g
th
:
Std: "12.5"(3201'0),
WearLimit:
Proper
Splicelink Clip
Opening
Position
Rear Drive Chain Note (All Except Models With Concentric Swingarm):
Rear Chain
Shown
The rear chain will change tension as the swingarm moves through the range of travel. Adjusting the chain at
the tightest point (swingarm pivot, output shaft sprocket, and rear axle are aligned in a straight line) will ensure
proper adjustment and prevent damage to the chain, sprockets, axle bearings and transmission bearings.
Drive Chain Inspection
Polaris ATV drive chains are equipped with a-ring sealed permanently greased pins and rollers. The sprockets
and outer rollers require periodic lubrication.
Always inspect the drive chain prior to operating the vehicle, checking for damaged or missing a-rings, rollers
and correct slack adjustment. Maintain the stone guard to rear sprocket clearance at 1/8" (.3 cm).
Regularly lubricate the drive chain with Polaris a-Ring Chain Lube or an approved O-ring chain spray lube.
5/98
2.36
Rear Drive Chain Tension Adjustment
MAINTENANCE
Drive Chain
NOTE: On models with concentric swingarm (such as 1998 Scramblers), chain tension can be measured
at any point in the swingarm arc. It is not necessary to compress the suspension on concentric models
(as shown below). Refer to page 2.37a for drive chain adjustment procedure on concentric swingarm
models.
Never adjust or operate the vehicle
with the rear drive chain too loose or
too tight as severe damage to the
transmission and drive components
can result.
Check the amount of chain slack by
moving the vehicle slightly forward
to gain slack at the top side of the
rear chain. Collapse the suspension
by using an adjustable (buckle type)
trailer tie down. Fasten the strap
around the axle and rear bumper
tube. Tighten until a straight line (A)
can be drawn from the axle to the
transmission output shaft intersect-
ing the swing arm pivot. If the chain
needs adjustment, use the following
procedure.
IMPORTANT: Suspension must be compressed as shown to
check drive chain tension (except concentric swingarm models).
1. Loosen chain guard.
2. Loosen two eccentric locking bolts.
3. Insert a pin punch through the sprocket hub and into
the eccentric axle housing.
4. Roll the vehicle ahead or back to adjust chain slack
to 1/4 inch (6mm) in the center of the chain as shown
above.
5. Tighten the eccentric locking bolts to 60 ft. Ibs. (8.3
kg-m). chain deflection measurement.
6. Reinstall chain guard.
7. Adjust stone guard to allow 1/8/1 clearance between
sprocket and guide.
2.37
L
Step3
I
Step 2
Rear Drive Chain Adjustment
5/98
MAINTENANCE
Drive Chain
Drive Chain Adjustment, Concentric Swingarm
.& CAUTION: Never adjust or operate the vehicle with the rear drive chain too loose or too tight as severe
damage to the transmission and drive components can result.
Check the amount of chain slack by moving the vehicle slightly forward to gain slack at the top side of the rear
chain. At this point the chain should have 3/16/1-3/8/1 (.48 cm - .95 cm) deflection. If the chain needs adjustment,
use the following procedure.
3/16"-3/8" (.48 cm - .95 cm) Deflection
Adjustment Procedure
3. Loosen caliper mount bolts.
4. Using a 2 1/2/1 wrench, rotate the housing to adjust
chain slack to the proper dimension, and then pro-
ceed to Step 7;
or ... follow Steps 5 and 6.
5. Insert a pin punch through the sprocket hub and into
the eccentric axle housing.
6. Roll the vehicle ahead or back to adjust chain slack
to the proper dimension.
7. Tighten caliper mount bolts 10-12 ft. Ibs. (1.4 - 1.7
kg/m)
8. Tighten the eccentric locking bolts to 60 ft. Ibs. (8.3
kg/m).
NOTE: Reposition chain guide to allow 1/8/1 (.3 cm)
clearance between sprocket and guide.
Loosen caliper mounting
bracket bolts (Step 3) '-.....
Punch
Alternate Adjustment Method - Pin Punch
(Step 5)
~ ~ L I
Proper
link Clip
ing Position
2.37a 5/98
MAINTENANCE
Drive Chain
5/98
NOTES
2.37b
MAINTENANCE
Drive Chain
Center/Front Drive Chain Slack Adjustment
Periodically remove the chain guards to check chain quality and adjustment.
The center chain should be adjusted before the front chain. This adjustment affects the front chain slack.
After the recommended center chain adjustment is made, proceed to the front chain. NOTE: This procedure
should be performed while the vehicle is empty (Le. no one sitting on the machine).
Center/Front Drive Chain In-
spection/ Adj ustment
1. Remove cotter pin and washer
connecting brake pedal linkage
to caliper actuating arm. Re-
move linkage from arm.
2. Remove right front fender mud
flap foot rest attaching hardware.
3. Remove center chain guard at-
taching hardware. Press brake
pedal downward and remove
guard.
4. Remove forward chain guard at-
taching bolts and guard.
5. Loosen center chain eccentric
clamp bolts (A).
/
Pin punCh--/
\'.--__ -A
~ B
\
Front
\
\
'\ '" Q 50 ft. Ibs.
\ () .. \ 6.9 kg-m)
\ \ /
\ ~ 50 ft. Ibs. \
6.9 kg-m)
6. Rotate vehicle forward or rearward until one of sprocket holes aligns with hole provided in eccentric.
7. Insert a large punch or screwdriver through sprocket and into eccentric hole. Rotate vehicle rearward to tight-
en chain. Chain deflection should be 1/4-1/2" (.6 -1.2 cm) with 18 Ibs. (8.18 kg) of force at center of chain.
8. Tighten eccentric clamp bolts to 45 ft. Ibs. (6.21 kg-m). NOTE: This does not include nut rolling torque. Check
chain tension.
9. Loosen forward chain eccentric clamp bolt (8). Install punch as was done previously and adjust chain to
1/4-1/2" (.6 -1.2 cm) with 18 Ibs. (8.18 kg) force at center of chain.
1 O.Tighten forward eccentric clamp bolt to 45 ft. Ibs. (6.21 kg-m). NOTE: This does not include nut rolling torque.
When this bolt is tightened the chain deflection may change. Check deflection and adjust again if needed.
Sprocket Inspection
Inspect the sprocket for worn, broken or bent teeth.
To check for wear, pull outward on the chain as shown. Re-
place sprocket if chain movement exceeds 1/4" (.6 cm).
5/98
2.38
Drive Chain Inspection/Adjustment
MAINTENANCE
Drive Chain
Never adjust or operate the vehicle with the rear drive chain slack out of the 1 1/4" to 1 1/2" (3 to 3.8 cm) specifica-
tion as severe damage to the transmission and drive components can result.
Check the amount of chain slack by moving the vehicle slightly for-
ward to gain slack at the top side of the rear chain. Then pull up and
down on the chain. Total slack should be 1 1/4" to 1 1/2" (3 to 3.8
cm). If slack is not within specification, it must be adjusted.
Rear Axle (6x6 Middle Axle) Adjustment Procedure
3. Insert a pin punch through the sprocket hub and into the eccen-
tric axle housing.
4. Roll the vehicle ahead or back to adjust chain slack to the proper
dimension. Correct chain slack adjustment is 1 1/4" to 1 1/2" (3
to 3.8 cm) total at the midpoint.
5. Tighten the eccentric locking bolts to 60 ft. Ibs.
NOTE: Reposition chain guide to allow 1/8/1 (.3 cm) clearance be-
tween sprocket and guide.
Final Drive Chain
Proper
Splicelink Clip
Opening
Position
--
Rear Drive Chain Adjustment
2
CAUTION: Never adjust or operate the vehicle with the drive chain slack out of the 1 1/4/1 to 1 1/2" (3 to 3.8 cm)
specification. Severe damage to the transmission and drive components can result.
6x6 Rear Axle Drive Chain Adjustment
To adjust the rear axle drive chain on 6x6 models, loosen the rear most eccentric and rotate using the same meth-
od as outlined for the middle axle chain. Total slack, however, should be adjusted to 1/4"-1/2" (.6-1.3 cm). Check
to be sure all cotter pins, cable ties, hose clamps, etc., are in place and in good condition.
2.39
1 1/4" to 1 1/2"
(3 to 3.8 cm)
1/4"-1/2" (.6-1.3 cm)
5/98
MAINTENANCE
Chassis Maintenance
Front Suspension
Compress and release front suspension. Damping should
be smooth throughout the range of travel.
Check all front suspension components for wear or dam-
age.
Inspect front strut cartridges for leakage.
Rear Suspension
Compress and release rear suspension. Damping should
be smooth throughout the range of travel.
Check all rear suspension components for wear or dam-
age.
Inspect shock for leakage.
Shock spring preload can be adjusted using the shock
spanner wrench.
Operator weight and loading affect spring preload require-
ments. Adjust as necessary.
Controls
Check controls for proper operation, positioning and ad-
justment. Brake lever and switches must be positioned to
allow adequate clearance for the movement of the lever.
The brake control and switch must be positioned to allow
the brake lever to travel throughout the entire range without
contacting the switch body.
5/98
2.40
Rear Spring
Adjustment Cam
Position Master Cylinder
and Switch to Provide Clearance
Transmission Lubrication
MAINTENANCE
Chassis Maintenance
The transmission dipstick is located on the right side of the machine.
The transmission lubricant level should be checked monthly or 1000 miles (1600 km), whichever comes first.
Transmission oil should be changed annually. With the ATV on a level surface, remove fill plug dipstick and check
the lubricant level. Lubricant should be kept at the full mark on the dipstick. The correct transmission lubricant
to use is Polaris Premium Synthetic Gearcase Lubricant (PN 2871478).
Transmission Oil Changing Procedure
1. Remove skid plate.
2. Remove fill plug/dipstick.
3. Remove transmission drain plug located on the bot-
tom right hand side and drain the oil. Catch and dis-
card used oil properly.
4. Clean and reinstall the drain plug.
5. Add Polaris Premium Synthetic Gearcase Lubricant
(PN 2871478 12 oz. bottle) to full mark on the fill
plug/dipstick.
6. Check for leaks.
7. Reinstall skid plate removed in step 1.
Transmission Oil Change - Dipstick Models
1. Place a drain pan beneath the transmission oil drain
plug area.
2. Remove the drain plug and wipe the magnetic end
clean to remove accumulated metallic filings.
3. After the oil has drained completely, install a new
sealing washer and install the drain plug. Torque to
14 ft. Ibs. (1.93 kg-m).
4. Remove dipstick and clean accumulated metallic
filings from the magnetic end.
NOTE: On some models the magnet is located on the
drain plug.
2.41
Transmission Dipstick
Full - - - - - " " ' i ~ Operating
Range
} Operating
Range
5/98
MAINTENANCE
Chassis Maintenance
5. Add Polaris Chaincase Oil through the dipstick hole.
Insert the dipstick all the way, remove, and check the
level on the stick. Add oil if necessary until the oil
level is between the upper and lower limits of the
knurled portion. Do not overfill.
: ',"'.

1 < :.,. ," . , .: ..
,', .'
.. .. ,
.. .
.
. , ...
32
Transmission Lubrication - Type V Shaft/Chain
The transmission fill plug is located on the right side of the
machine behind the propshaft shield.
The transmission lubricant level should be checked every
six months or 1000 miles (1600 km), whichever comes
first. Transmission oil should be changed annually. With
the ATV on a level surface, remove fill plug and check the
lubricant level. Lubricant level is correct when it reaches
the bottom'thread of filler hole. Use Polaris Premium Syn-
thetic Gearcase Lubricant (PN 2871478).
Transmission Oil Change Procedure
1. Remove propshaft shield from the right side of the
vehicle.
2. Remove fill plug.
3. Remove transmission drain plug located on the bot-
tom left hand side and drain the oil. Catch and discard
used oil properly.
4. Clean and reinstall the drain plug.
5. Add Polaris Premium Synthetic Gearcase Lubricant
(PN 2871478 12 oz. bottle) until oil reaches the bot-
tom thread of the filler hole.
6. Check for leaks.
7. Reinstall propshaft shield removed in step 1.
5/98
2.42
Full-__
Operating
Range
Transmission Fill
} Operating
Range
Transmission Vent Line Routing
1. Check the transmission vent line for proper routing,
cracks or damage. Be sure the vent line is not
kinked or pinched.
NOTE: Vent line location varies by model.
Transmission Linkage Adjustment
The transmission shift linkage should be periodically in-
spected for wear and proper adjustment. Refer to Trans-
mission, Chapter 8 for more information.
2.43
MAINTENANCE
Chassis Maintenance
Sportsman 500
5/98
MAINTENANCE
Chassis Maintenance
Wheels
Inspect all wheels for runout or damage. Check wheel nuts
and ensure they are tight. Do not over tighten the wheel
nuts.
Wheel, Hub, and Spindle Torque Table
Model Item
Front Wheel Nuts
2x4
Rear Wheel Nuts
Front Spindle Nut
Rear Hub Retaining Nut
Front Wheel Nuts
4x4
Rear Wheel Nuts
Chain Drive
Front Spindle Nut
and
Chain/Shaft Models
Front Wheel Nuts
4x4
Rear Wheel Nuts
Shaft Drive Front Spindle Nut
Wheel Removal Front or Rear
1. Stop the engine, place the transmission in gear
and lock the parking brake.
2. Loosen the wheel nuts slightly.
3. Elevate the side of the vehicle by placing a
suitable stand under the footrest frame.
4. Remove the wheel nuts and remove the wheel.
Wheel Installation
1. With the transmission in gear and the parking brake
locked, place the wheel in the correct position on the
wheel hub. Be sure the valve stem is toward the
outside and rotation arrows on the tire point toward
forward rotation.
2. Attach the wheel nuts and finger tighten them.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground.
4. Securely tighten the wheel nuts to the proper torque
listed in the table above.
If wheels are improperly installed it could affect vehicle
handling and tire wear. On vehicles with tapered rear
wheel nuts, make sure the tapered end of the nut goes into
the taper on the wheel.
5/98
2.44
Specification
15 Ft. Lbs.
50 Ft. Lbs.
40 Ft. Lbs.
80 Ft. Lbs.
15 Ft. Lbs.
50 Ft. Lbs.
Refer to procedures listed on following pages
80 Ft. Lbs.
15 Ft. Lbs.
15 Ft. Lbs.
Refer to procedures listed on following pages
100 Ft. Lbs.
Tapered side
of nut goes in
Tire Pressure
Tire Pressure Inspection (PSI Cold)
Model Front
(1996-Current) 4
All Except Models Listed Below
(1996-Current) 5
6x6
Sportsman/Xplorer 500 5
(1996-Current)
Tire Inspection
Maintain proper tire pressure. Improper tire inflation may
affect ATV maneuverability. When replacing a tire always
use original equipment size and type.
The use of non-standard size or type tires may affect ATV
handling.
Tire Tread Depth
Always replace tires when tread depth is worn to 1/8" (.3
cm) or less.
AWARNING
Operating an ATV with worn tires will increase the possibility of
the vehicle skidding easily with possible loss of control.
Worn tires can cause an accident.
Always replace tires when the tread depth measures 1/8/1 (.3 cm)
or less.
Frame, Nuts, Bolts, Fasteners
Periodically inspect the tightness of all fasteners in accor-
dance with the maintenance schedule. Check that all cot-
ter pins are in place. Refer to specific fastener torques
listed in each chapter.
2.45
Center
5
-
MAINTENANCE
Chassis Maintenance
Rear
3
5
5
Tread
Depth 1/8/1
(.3 em)
5/98
CHAPTER 3
ENGINE
Torque Specifications ............................ 3.1
Torque Patterns ................................. 3.2
Specifications, 1996 to Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.3
Piston Identification / Installation .................. 3.3
EH42PL-01 / EH50PL-01 Service Data ............. 3.4-3.5
Cooling System Pressure Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.6
Cooling System Specifications .................... 3.7
Engine Removal/Installation ..................... 3.8-3.11
EC25PF / EC28PF Engine Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.12
EC25PF / EC28PF Crankshaft Alignment . . . . . . . . . .. 3.13
EC25PF / EC28PF Engine Assembly / Installation ... 3.14-3.19
EC25PF / EC28PF Oil Pump End Play Adjustment. .. 3.20
EC25PF / EC28PF Oil Check Valve Testing ......... 3.21
EC25PF Recoil Disassembly / Assembly . . . . . . . . . .. 3.22-3.24
EC38PL Engine Disassembly ..................... 3.25-3.32
Cylinder Honing ................................. 3.33-3.34
Polaris Engine Disassembly/Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.34a-3.34b
EH42PL / EH50PL Engine Exploded View .......... 3.35
EH42PL / EH50PL Engine Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.36
EH42PL / EH50PL Oil Flow Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.37
EH42PL / EH50PL Engine Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.38-3.42
EH42PL / EH50PL Engine Installation .............. 3.43
EH42PL / EH50PL Engine Disassembly / Inspection . 3.43-3.73
EH42PL / EH50PL Engine Assembly ............... 3.74-3.89
Water Pump Mech. Seal Removal (Engine Installed) .... 3.77a-3.77b
Sealed Recoil Disassembly/Inspection ............. 3.90-3.91
Sealed Recoil Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.91-3.92
Spark Plug Fouling Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.93
2 Stroke Troubleshooting 3.94
4 Stroke Troubleshooting ......................... 3.95-3.97
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
ENGINE
Torque Specifications
2 Stroke Engine Torque Specifications
Fastener Size 250 300 400
EC25PFE EC28PFE EC38PLE
Ft. Lbs. Ft. Ft. Lbs. (kg-m)
Cylinder Head Bolts 8mm 17 -19(2.3-2.6) 17-19(2.3-2.6) 17-19(2.3-2.6)
Cylinder Base Bolts 10mm 24-28 (3.3-3.9) 24-28 (3.3-3.9) 24-28 (3.3-3.9)
Crankcase 8mm 17-18 (2.3-2.4) 17-18 (2.3-2.4) 17-18 (2.3-2.4)
Crankcase 6mm 6-8 (.8-1.1) 6-8 (.8-1 .1 ) 6-8 (.8-1.1)
Crankshaft Slotted Nut 16mm - - 36-44(5.0-6.0)
Drive Clutch Bolt 7/16 - 20 40 (5.5) 40 (5.5) 40 (5.5)
Flywheel 16mm 44-54(6.0-7.5) 44-54 (6.0-7.5) 36-44 (5.0-6.0)
Recoil Housing 6mm 5-6.5 (.69-.90) 5-6.5 (.69-.90) 5-6.5 (.69-.90)
Spark Plug 14mm 14 (1.94) 14 (1.94) 14 (1.94)
Starter Motor 6mm 5-6.5 (.69-.90) 5-6.5 (.69-.90) 5-6.5 (.69-.90)
Stator Plate 6mm 5-6.5 (.69-.90) 5-6.5 (.69-.90) 5-6.5 (.69-.90)
Water Pump Impeller Nut 6mm - - 6-7 (.8-1.0)
4 Stroke Engine Torque Specifications
Cylinder Head Bolts ......... 11 mm . . . . .. See Engine Assembly for torque procedure, page 3.82.
6mm . . . . . .. See Engine Assembly for torque procedure, page 3.82.
Cylinder Base Bolts .......... 10mm ...... 45-49 ft. Ibs ....... 6.21-6.76 kg-m ........ 62.1-67.6 N-m
6mm ....... 5-6 ft. Ibs ........... 69-.828 kg-m ......... 6.9-8.28 N-m
Crankcase ................. 8mm ....... 14-15 ft. Ibs ....... 1.93-2.07 kg-m ........ 19.3-20.7 N-m
Cam Chain Drive Sprocket '" 28mm ...... 35-51 ft. Ibs. . ..... 4.83-7.04 kg-m ........ 48.3-70.4 N-m
Cam Chain Driven Sprocket .. 6mm ....... 5-6 ft. Ibs ........... 69-.828 kg-m ......... 6.9-8.28 N-m
Cam Chain Tensioner ........ 6mm ....... 5-6 ft. Ibs ........... 69-.828 kg-m ......... 6.9-8.28 N-m
Cam Chain Tensioner Plug '" 11 mm ...... 14-19 ft. Ibs. . ..... 1.93-2.62 kg-m ........ 19.3-26.2 N-m
Rocker Arm Shaft Support .... 8mm ....... 8-9 ft. Ibs .......... 1.10-1.24 kg-m ........ 11.0-12.4 N-m
Rocker Arm Adjuster Nut . . . .. 6mm .. . . . .. 6-7 ft. Ibs. . . . . . . . .. .828-.966 kg-m ........ 8.28-9.66 N-m
Water Pump Impeller Nut ..... 6mm ....... 5-6.5 ft. Ibs ......... 69-.897 kg-m ......... 6.9-8.97 N-m
Water Pump Cover .......... 6mm ....... 5-6.5 ft. Ibs ......... 69-.897 kg-m ......... 6.9-8.97 N-m
Carburetor Flange ........... 8mm ....... 12-14 ft. Ibs. . ..... 1.66-1.93 kg-m ........ 16.6-19.3 N-m
Oil Pump Mount Bolts ........ 6mm ....... 5-6.5 ft. Ibs ......... 69-.897 kg-m ......... 6.9-8.97 N-m
Oil Pump Case Screws ...... 5mm ....... 2 ft. Ibs. . .......... 276 kg-m ............. 27.6 N-m
Union (Breather) ............ 1/8 PT ..... 6.5-11 ft. Ibs ........ 897-1.52 kg-m ........ 8.97-15.2 N-m
Union (Oil Hose) ............ 1/8 PT ..... 6.5-11 ft. Ibs ........ 897-1.52 kg-m ........ 8.97-15.2 N-m
Union (Oil Filter) ............ 20mm ...... 36-43 ft. Ibs ....... 4.97-5.93 kg-m ........ 49.7-59.3 N-m
Oil Pressure Blind Plug ,..... 1/8 PT ..... 6.5-11 ft. Ibs ........ 897-1.52 kg-m , ....... 8.97-15.2 N-m
Oil Delivery Pipe ............ 12mm...... 18-25 ft. Ibs. . .... , 2.48-3.45 kg-m , ....... 24.8-34.5 N-m
Oil Drain Bolt (Crankcase) .. '. 14mm ...... 14-17 ft. Ibs. . ..... 1.93-2.35 kg-m ........ 19.3-23.5 N-m
Plug (One Way Valve) ....... 11 mm .. . ... 14-19 ft. Ibs. .. .... 1.93-2.62 kg-m ........ 19.3-26.2 N-m
Stator Plate ................. 6mm ....... 5-6.5 ft. Ibs ......... 69-.897 kg-m ......... 6.9-8.97 N-m
Flywheel ................ '" 16mm, ..... 58-72 ft. Ibs ....... 8.00-9.94 kg-m ........ 80.0-99.4 N-m
Starter Motor ............... 6mm . . . . . .. 5-6.5 ft. Ibs. ....... .69-.897 kg-m ......... 6.9-8.97 N-m
Recoil Housing. . . . . . . . . . . . .. 6mm . . . . . .. 5-6.5 ft. Ibs. ....... .69-.897 kg-m ........ 6,9-8.97 N-m
Spark Plug ......................... ,.... 14 ft. Ibs. ......... 1.94 kg-m .. , .......... 19.4 N-m
3.1 5/98
ENGINE
Engine Fastener Torque Patterns
When torquing nuts, bolts and screws, a specific pattern should be followed to ensure that all parts are tightened
evenly. The correct amount of turning force or tightness is determined by a torque wrench which is broken down
into either inch or foot pounds.
@

G) @
0)
CD
0) @
00
G)
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head
250/300
400
6mm
;/\5w
@ G)
CV
0) @
0)
G) @
@
10/96
Cylinder Base
425/500

@
Refer to page 3.82
for torque procedure.
Cylinder Head
425/500
@
G)
Crankcase
400L
3.2
0) @
G) @
Cylinder Base
250 I 300 I 400
@ G)
@
0)
G)
Crankcase
250/300
1996 to Current Engine Specifications
Machine Model Engine Cyl.Disp. Bore Stroke mml
Model cc's mm/in. in.
Trail Blazer EC25PFE-09/11 244 72/2.8346 60/2.362
Trail Boss EC25PFE-08/10
Xpress 300 EC28PFE-01, 283 74.5/2.935 65/2.561
Xplorer 300 02
300
Xpress 400 EC38PLE- 379 83/3.270 70/2.758
Xplorer 4x4 04, 06
Sportsman 400
4006x6
Sport EC38PLE- 379 83/3.270 70/2.758
Scrambler 400 05,07,09
Magnum 2x4 EH42PLE- 425 87.9/3.461 70/2.758
Magnum 4x4 01,02
Magnum 6x6
Sportsman 500 EH50PLE- 498 92/3.622 75/2.953
Xplorer 500 01,05,06,07
Big Boss 500
6x6
Scrambler 500 EH50PLE-02, 498 92/3.622 75/2.953
04
Piston Identification
Ring End
Gap
in. (mm)
.009-.018
(.23-.46)
.012-.022
(.31-.56)
.007-.015
(.18-.38)
.007-.015
(.18-.38)
.008-.015
(.20-.38)
.008-.015
(.20-.38)
.008-.015
(.20-.38)
ENGINE
Engine Specifications
Piston Clearance Engine Op-
Clearance Svc. Limit erating
in. (mm) in. (mm) RPM
.0011-.0021 .006 5800
(.03-.05) (.15) 6000
.0012-.0026 .006 5600
(.03-.07) (.15)
.0023-.0037 .006 5700
(.06-.09) (.15)
.0023-.0037 .006 5700
(.06-.09) (.15) 6000
.0006-.0018 .0024 6000
(.015-.046) (.061)
.0006-.0018 .0024 6000
(.015-.046) (.061)
.0006-.0018 .0024 6000
(.015-.046) (.061)
Note the directional and identification marks when viewing the pistons from the top. The letter "F", "-+", "...-" or:
must always be toward the flywheel side of the engine. The other numbers are used for identification as to
diameter, length and design. Two stroke rings are keystone design. Four stroke engine rings are rectangular
profile. The numbers or letters on all rings (except 4-stroke oil control rings) must be positioned upward. See text
for 4 stroke oil control ring upper rail installation. Use the information below to identify pistons and rings.
Engine Model No. Oversize Available*
(mm)
EC25PFE-08, 09,10, 11 .25
.50
1.00
EC28PFE-01, 02 .25
.50
EC38PLE-04, 05 .25
.50
EC38PLE-06, 07 .25
.50
EH42PL-01 .25
.50
EH50PL-01, 02, 03 .25
.50
*
Pistons and rings marked 25 equal .25mm (.010") oversized
Pistons and rings marked 50 equal .50mm (.020") oversized
Piston Length
68mm
70mm
78mm
78mm
66mm
72mm
Pistons and rings marked 10 equal 1.0mm (.040") oversized (250 engines only)
3.3
Standard Piston
Identification
3W, 4W
28
38A
38B
B
C
5/98
EC38PL Engines
Jetting Guidelines For Round-Port Pistons
ENGINE
Pistons for EC38PL engines shipped as service parts have round ports on the intake skirt. If you are replac-
ing an oblong port piston with the new round port style, follow the instructions included with the piston or refer
to this chart for quick reference. Without the jetting change the machine will run slightly rich on the main jet.
l Piston Ports
J Use on
l Piston Ports
J Use on
This piston was shipped with:
0 0
1994,
0 0
1995, &
Late 1996
200 Main Jet
Early 1996
to current
230 Main Jet
) Intake side (
400's
) Intake side ( 6CEY6-3 Jet Needle.
A #35 Pilot Jet is not supplied with this piston kit, although a #35 is required if you install a round port piston in a 1995
Scrambler (EC38PLE-03 engine).
A round port piston along with the jetting changes shown effectively changes earlier model EC38PL engines to 1997 spec-
ifications for carburetion and engine operating characteristics. Jetting compensation for altitude and temperature will be
the same as 1997 EC38PLE-06 engines or EC38PLE-07 (Sport, Scrambler) engines.
**In all cases the 6CEY63 Jet Needle (included with piston) should be installed if you replace an "oblong port"
style piston with a "round port" style piston. Standard "E" clip position is #3.
Need to
Year Engine Type Model Original Original Need to Change Change
Main Main Jet? Pilot
Piston Type Jet Jet?
1994" ..... E938PL
7
01 ALL (E938s) I. "'''Oblong Pqrts 200 NO-Use Original NO
1995 EC38PLEQ1
.
4QO 2x4, 4x4, "'Oblongports 200 NO-Use Original NO
.'
Sportsman, AOO 6x6
, .. '
I 1995 .' EC38P\.;E02 .... 'Sport
.
*"Obiong Ports . 200 NO-Use Original NO
..... ' .
1995 EC38PLE-03
.'
Scrambler
/'
. ... Ports 240 YES-Use 230 Main .Jet .. ' YES-Use
. '
..
. Pilot ....
.'
,,',
Jet
I. . . ' .....
.. i
...
. '
.'
.
.
.' .. ,
.
1"Early
. '
EC38PLE-04 Xpress 400,
. ...... **OblongPort!)
210
.
I . ". YESi-Use20llMain Jet NO
1996 Sportsman 4x4, 4006x6
. " .. ' ........ ...
.'
. .'
Late EC38PLE-04 Xpress 400, Xplorer 400, Round Ports 200 NO-Use Original NO
1996 Sportsman 4x4, 400 6x6
Early .EC38PLE-.05 Sport 4x4,$crambler .. ' **Oblong .ports 250
.....
YES-Use 230 Main Jet
.'
NO
.. 1996
".
"1' .... I' .... .
,.
.' .'
.
..
Late EC38PLE-05 Sport 4x4, Scrambler Round Ports 230 NO-Use Original NO
1996
1997 EC38PLE-06 Xpress 400, Xplorer 400, Round Ports 200 NO-Use Original NO
Sportsman 4x4, 400 6x6
1997 EC38PLE-07 Sport 400, Scrambler 4x4 Round Ports 230 NO-Use Original NO
3.3a
5/98
NOTES
5/98
3.3b
ENGINE
ENGINE
Service Data
EH42PL I EH50PL Engine Service Data
Cylinder Head I Valve
Rocker Arm Rocker arm 10
Rocker shaft 00
Rocker shaft Oil Clearance Std
Limit
Camshaft Cam lobe height In Std
Limit
Ex Std
Limit
Camshaft journal 00 Mag
PTO
Camshaft journal bore 10 Mag
PTO
Camshaft Oil clearance Std
Limit
Cylinder Head Surface warpage limit
Standard height
Valve Seat Contacting width In Std
Limit
Ex Std
Limit
Valve Guide Inner diameter
ProtrUSion above head
Valve Margin thickness In Std
Limit
Ex Std
Limit
Valve Stem diameter In
Ex
Stem oil clearance Std In
Ex
Limit
Overall length In
Ex
Valve Spring Free length
Squareness
7/96
EH42PL EH50PL
.8669-.8678" (22.020-22.041 mm) .8669-.8678" (22.020-22.041 mm)
.8656-.8661" (21.987-22.0 mm) .8656-.8661" (21.987-22.0 mm)
.0008-.0021" (.020-.054 mm) .0008-.0021" (.020-.054 mm)
.0039" (.10 mm) .0039" (.10 mm)
1.2884-1.2924/1 (32.726-32.826 mm) 1.2884-1.2924" (32.726-32.826 mm)
1.2766/1 (32.426 mm) 1.2766/1 (32.426 mm)
1.2884-1.2924" (32.726-32.826 mm) 1.2884-1.2924/1 (32.726-32.826 mm)
1.2766" (32.426 mm) 1.2766" (32.426 mm)
1.4935-1.4941" (37.935-37.950 mm) 1.4935-1.4941" (37.935-37.950 mm)
1.4935-1.4941" (37.935-37.950 mm) 1.4935-1.4941" (37.935-37.950 mm)
1.4963-1.4970" (38.005-38.025 mm) 1.4963-1.4970" (38.005-38.025 mm)
1.4963-1.4970" (38.005-38.025 mm) 1.4963-1.4970" (38.005-38.025 mm)
.0022-.0035" (.055-.090 mm) .0022-.0035" (.055-.090 mm)
.0039" (.10 mm) .0039" (.10 mm)
.0020" (.05 mm) .0020" (.05 mm)
3.870" (98.3 mm) 3.870/1 (98.3 mm)
.028" (.7 mm) .028" (.7 mm)
.055" (1.4 mm) .055" (1.4 mm)
.039" (1.0 mm) .039" (1.0 mm)
.071" (1.8 mm) .071" (1.8 mm)
.2362-.2367" (6.0-6.012 mm) .2362-.2367" (6.0-6.012 mm)
.689-.709/1 (17.5-18.0 mm) .689-.709/1 (17.5-18.0 mm)
.039/1 (1.0 mm) .039" (1.0 mm)
.031" (.8 mm) .031" (.8 mm)
.047" (1.2 mm) .047/1 (1.2 mm)
.031/1 (.8 mm) .031" (.8 mm)
.2343-.2348" (5.950-5.965 mm) .2343-.2348" (5.950-5.965 mm)
.2341-.2346" (5.945-5.960 mm) .2341-.2346" (5.945-5.960 mm)
.0014-.0024/1 (.035-.062 mm) .0014-.0024/1 (.035-.062 mm)
.0016-.0026/1 (.040-.067 mm) .0016-.0026" (.040-.067 mm)
.0059" (.15 mm) .0059" (.15 mm)
3.976" (101.0 mm) 3.976" (101.0 mm)
3.984" (101.2 mm) 3.984" (101.2 mm)
Orange Std 1.7342" (44.05 mm)
Paint
Limit 1.656" (42.05 mm)
Yellow Std 1.654" (42.0 mm)
Paint
Limit 1.575/1 (40.0 mm)
.075" (1.9 mm) 2.5
0
3.4
EH42PL I EH50PL Engine Service Data
Cylinder I Piston I Connecting Rod
Cylinder Surface warpage limit (mating with cylinder head)
Cylinder bore Std
Taper limit
Out of round limit
Piston clearance Std
Limit
Boring limit
Piston Outer diameter Std
.0098" (.25 mm) as
.0197" (.50 mm) as
Standard inner diameter of piston pin bore
Piston Pin Outer diameter
Standard clearance-piston pin to pin bore
Degree of fit
Piston Ring Piston ring installed gap Top ring Std
Limit
Second Std
ring
Limit
Oil ring Std
Limit
Piston Ring Standard clearance - Top ring Std
piston ring toring groove
Limit
Second Std
ring
Limit
Connecting Connecting rod small end I D
Rod
Connecting rod small end radial clear- Std
ance
Limit
Connecting rod big end side clearance Std
Limit
Connecting rod big end radial clear- Std
ance
Limit
Crankshaft Crankshaft runout limit
EH42PL
.0020" (.05 mm)
3.4606-3.4614" (87.900-87.920 mm)
.0020" (.050 mm)
.0020" (.050 mm)
.0006-.0018" (.015-.045 mm)
.0024" (.060 mm)
.020" (.5 mm)
3.4596-3.4600" (87.875-87.885 mm)
3.4695-3.4699" (88.125-88.135 mm)
3.4793-3.4797" (88.375-88.385 mm)
.9055-.9057" (23.0-23.006 mm)
.9053-.9055" (22.994-23.0 mm)
.0002-.0003" (.004-.008 mm)
ENGINE
Service Data
EH50PL
.0020" (.05 mm)
3.6216-3.6224" (91.99-92.01 mm)
.0020" (.050 mm)
.0020" (.050 mm)
.0006-.0018" (.015-.045 mm)
.0024" (.060 mm)
.020" (.5 mm)
3.6206-3.6210" (91.96-91.97 mm)
3.6304-3.6310 (92.21-92.23 mm)
3.6403-3.6407 (92.46-92.47 mm)
.9055-.9057" (23.0-23.006 mm)
.9053-.9055" (22.994-23.0 mm)
.0002-.0003" (.004-.008 mm)
Piston pin must be a push (by hand) fit at 68 F (20
0
C)
.0079-.0138" (.20-.36 mm) .0079-.0138" (.20-.36 mm)
.039" (1.0 mm) .039" (1.0 mm)
.0079-.0138" (.20-.36 mm) .0079-.0138" (.20-.36 mm)
.039" (1.0 mm) .039" (1.0 mm)
.0079-.0276" (.20-.70 mm) .0079-.0276" (.20-.70 mm)
.059" (1.5 mm) .059" (1.5 mm)
.0016-.0031" (.040-.080 mm) .0016-.0031" (.040-.080 mm)
.0059" (.15 mm) .0059" (.15 mm)
.0012-.0028" (.030-.070 mm) .0012-.0028" (.030-.070 mm)
.0059" (.15 mm) .0059" (.15 mm)
.9058-.9063" (23.007-23.020 mm) .9058-.9063" (23.007-23.020 mm)
.0003-.0010" (.007-.026 mm) .0003-.0010" (.007-.026 mm)
.0020" (.05 mm) .0020" (.05 mm)
.0039-.0256" (.1-.65 mm) .0039-.0256" (.1-.65 mm)
.0315" (.80 mm) .0315" (.80 mm)
.0004-.0015" (.011-.038 mm) .0004-.0015" (.011-.038 mm)
.0020" (.05 mm) .0020" (.05 mm)
.0024" (.06 mm) .0024" (.06 mm)
KEY - Std: Standard; OS: Oversize; 10: Inner Diameter; 00: Outer Diameter; Mag: Magneto Side; PTO: Power
Take Off Side
3.5 5/98
ENGINE
Cooling System
Radiator
Thermostat
(EH42/50PL)
t tJ:JJ \
L:: (
5/98
Cylinder
Head
Pressure Test
Here
3.6
Water
Pump
Cylinder
Locate hole on inside of
radiator below filler neck.
Hole must be clear or
bleeding will be difficult
Fan Switch
Forward
WARNING: Never remove radiator cap when en-
gine is warm or hot. The cooling system is under
pressure and serious burns may result. Allow the
engine and cooling system to cool before servicing.
System Pressure Test
1. Remove radiator cap access panel from front
of headlamp housing.
2. Remove recovery bottle hose from radiator.
3. Connect aMity Vac (PN 2870975) to radiator
and pressurize system to 10 PSI. The system
must retain 10 Ibs of pressure for five minutes or
longer. If pressure loss is evident within five
minutes, check radiator, all cooling system
hoses and clamps, or water pump seal.
Radiator Cap Pressure Test
1. Remove radiator cap and test using a cap
tester (commercially available).
2. The radiator cap relief pressure is 13 Ibs. for all
models.
ENGINE
Cooling System
5 Blade Fan - Air Cooled Models
6 Blade Fan - Liquid Cooled Models
Fan assembly shown is
for air cooled models
Raised side of reinforcement
rib faces engine on air
cooled and liquid cooled
-1 Red dot faces engine
Washer used here on metal fan blades
Recommended Coolant
Use only high quality antifreeze/coolant mixed with dis-
tilled water in a 50/50 or 60/40 ratio, depending on
freeze protection required in your area. CAUTION:
Using tap water in the cooling system will lead to a
buildup of deposits which may restrict coolant flow and
reduce heat dissipation, resulting in possible engine
damage. Polaris Premium 60/40 Antifreeze/Coolant is
recommended for use in all cooling systems, and
comes pre-mixed and ready to use.
Cooling System Specifications
250/300
Fan Switch (Off) 210
0
F (99
0
C) 10
0
Fan Switch (On) 235F(113C)
Hot Light On - 4 Strokes -
Hot Light On - 2 Strokes -
System Capacity -
Radiator Cap Relief -
Pressure
3.7
Sportsman 500
Style
Fan motor
bracket
Forward
..---
Some models, add spacer (PN
5211809) between fan motor
bracket and frame
Liquid Cooled
Scrambler and Sport
Except
Scrambler and Sport
154
0
F (68
0
C) 50 175F (79C) 5
174
0
F (79C) 190
0
F (88
0
C)
- 221
0
F (105C)
205
0
F (96
0
C) 205
0
F (96
0
C)
2.25 Quarts 2.25 Quarts
13 PSI 13 PSI
5/98
ENGINE
2 Stroke Engine Removal
The following components can be serviced or removed with the engine installed in the frame:
Flywheel
Alternator/Stator
Starter Motor/Starter Drive
Cylinder Head
Cylinder
Piston/Rings
Oil pump (250/400L)
Counterbalancer Assembly (400L engines)
Water pump
The following components require engine removal for service:
Connecting Rod
Crankshaft
Crankshaft Main Bearings
Crankcase
Oil pump (300)
Engine Removal Preparation, Typical (2 Stroke)
1 . Clean work area.
2. Thoroughly clean the ATV engine and chassis.
3. Disconnect battery negative (-) cable.
4. Remove the following parts. Refer to the Body Chapter for removal procedures.
Seat
Left and Right Side Covers
Fuel Tank Cover
Fuel Tank (see Fuel System Chapter)
5. Disconnect oil pump cable (2-Strokes).
6. Disconnect spark plug high tension lead.
7. Remove springs from exhaust pipe and remove pipe.
8. Remove air pre-cleaner and duct.
9. Remove airbox.
10. Remove carburetor.
11. I nsert a shop towel into the carburetor flange to prevent
dirt from entering the intake port.
12. Loosen auxiliary brake adjuster locknut, remove
adjusting bolt and brake actuator arm.
13. Remove center chain guard bolt, two screws, and
chain guard on AWD models.
14. Remove center drive and driven sprocket bolts and
remove chain and sprockets as an assembly.
15. Refer to PVT section page 6.9 for procedure to remove
inner PVT cover.
10/96
3.8
Engine Removal Preparation, Cont.
16. Starter motor. Note ground cable location. Mark
positive (+) cable mounting angle and remove cable.
17. Remove transmission linkage rods from shift selector
and secure out of the way.
18. Disconnect coolant temp sender wire (where
applicable) .
19. Remove nut, ground cable and washer from the upper
right engine mount.
20. Remove the two upper engine mount plate bolts and
remove the plate and ground cable (where applicable).
21. Remove nut and washer from lower front engine
mount.
22. Loosen nut on slotted rear engine mount plate and
back it out to the end of the stud.
3.9
ENGINE
Engine Removal
7/96
ENGINE
Engine Removal
Engine Removal Preparation, Cont.
23. Move top of engine to left until coolant supply hose
clamp clears frame at water pump fitting.
24. Lift and twist engine clockwise until lower left engine
mount stud is clear of frame mount and the lower right
coolant hose clamp clears frame tube.
25. Support engine in this position with a suitable support,
sucH as a board or a 2x4.
26. Place a drain pan beneath area to catch coolant.
27. Clamp coolant inlet hose leading from radiator to pump
to reduce coolant spillage.
28. Remove hose from water pump inlet and place in
container. Release clamp from hose and allow hose to
drain completely.
29. Lift back of engine while rotating front of engine
clockwise and remove engine from left side of frame.
7/96
3.10
Engine Installation Notes (2 Stroke)
Bleed Cooling System
1. Fill coolant reservoir tank to full mark.
ENGINE
Engine Installation
2. Loosen bleed screw at top of cylinder head until all air is purged from coolant system. Tighten bleed screw.
3. Install radiator cap and squeeze coolant lines to force air out of system.
NOTE:Radiator must be full or coolant will not circulate, and reservoir will not refill radiator.
4. Remove cap and add coolant if necessary.
5. After reassembly is complete, start engine and observe coolant level in the radiator. Allow air to purge and top
off as necessary. Reinstall radiator cap and bring engine to operating temp. Check level in reservoir tank after
engine is cool and add coolant if necessary.
Transmission
1. Readjust transmission shift linkage as outlined in Transmission Chapter page 8.3.
Exhaust
1. Replace exhaust gaskets. Seal connections with high temp silicone sealant.
2. Check to be sure all springs are in good condition.
Engine Break In Period (2 Strokes)
1. Pre-mix first tank of fuel at a 40:1 ratio with Polaris Premium Synthetic 2 Cycle Lubricant. Verify proper oil
usage from oil tank during the first tank of fuel.
2. Avoid prolonged idle or periods of sustained full throttle. Vary throttle settings.
3.11 10/96
ENGINE
EC25PF/EC28PF Engines
Disassembly
1. Remove the flywheel nut and flywheel with Flywheel
Puller (PN 2871043). Remove stator assembly.
2. Remove cylinder head and cylinder. Remove piston pin
clips. Use Piston Pin Puller (PN 2870386) to remove
piston pin from piston.
3. Inspect connecting rod small end and bearing; piston,
piston pin, cylinder bore as shown on page 3.33 - 3.34b.
4. Remove the crankcase half attaching bolts. Heat
crankcase in the bearing support areas. After applying
heat, tap on PTa end and magneto end to separate
case half from crankshaft.
5. After removing the crankshaft, thoroughly clean the
bearings and lubricate. Check bearing condition by
pressing on and rotating the outer race (A). If the
bearing(s) feel rough they must be replaced. Check the
crankshaft runout by sliding a bearing onto the PTa end
(8) and clamping the shaft into the special holding
fixture (PN 2870710). The shaft should be straightened
to .002/1 (.05 mm) or less.
10/96
3.12
o
o u
Crankshaft Alignment
ENGINE
When the crankshaft runout exceeds .005" (.15 mm) it must be straightened or replaced. To straighten a crank-
shaft the crank wheel(s) must be relocated on the lower rod pin. The four basic movements which may be required
to realign the crankshaft are listed below.
1. If the dial indicators are moving in the same
direction and approximately the same amount
while the shaft is rotated, the crankshaft has
twisted on the lower rod pin. To correct this,
remove the shaft from the fixture and strike the
crank wheel on the high spot (A). This will rotate
the wheel on the lower rod pin.
2. If the right side indicator is moving more than the
left indicator while turning the shaft, and the high
spot is found with the rod in this position (see photo
at right), the crankshaft wheels will have to be
squeezed together. Remove the shaft from the
fixture. Locate the high spot and squeeze directly
opposite from it using a large channel lock pliers or
a vise. Arrows show direction of force to be
applied.
3. If the right side indicator is moving more than the
left indicator while turning the shaft, and the high
spot is found with the rod in this position (see photo
at right), the crankshaft wheels will have to be
spread apart. Place a large chisel between the
wheels and force the chisel downward. This will
open the wheels and bring the end of the shaft
down (8). Arrows show the direction of force to be
applied.
4. If the indicators are moving in opposite directions while turning the shaft, the shaft is twisted. To correct this,
remove the shaft from the fixture and strike the high spot found on the left side indicator.
NOTE: Squeezing the crank wheels is always done opposite the high spot. Spreading the crank wheels is always
done at the high spot. Twisting the crank wheel by striking it is always done at a right angle to the lower rod pin,
and at the high spot.
3.13 7/96
ENGINE
Assembly
Before reassembling the crankcase, the following steps should be performed to determine the amount of crank-
shaft end play. Excessive end play will cause the engine to be noisy at idle and slow speeds. Too little end play
will side load the main bearings, which may cause premature bearing failure.
Measure Crankshaft Width - Bearings Installed
1. Measure distance from outer edge of PTO end
bearing race to outer edge of mag side bearing race.
Record measurement.
If bearings and spacers are already installed, measure
distance as shown in photo at right, then proceed to
Step 5.
or ...
If PTO end bearings have not yet been installed, mea
w
sure distance as shown in photo at right, then pro-
ceed to Step 2.
2. Measure distance from crank wheel to bearing
seating surface (A). Record measurement.
5/98
3.14
Assembly, Cont.
ENGINE
Correct crankshaft end play is .008" - .016" (.2 - .4 mm). End play is adjusted by adding or subtracting spacer
washers from between the inner PTO end bearing and the crank wheel. Two different thickness spacers are avail-
able for EC 25 and EC28 engines:
For all EC25PF (except late 1998) - PN 3083629 - .008" (.2 mm); and PN 3083630 - .004" (.1 mm).
For late 1998 EC25PF and All EC28PF - PN 3084778 ~ .008" (.2 mm); and PN 3084779 - .012" (.3 mm).
3. Measure width of main bearing outer races with
bearings positioned as shown. Add the thickness of
the spacer between the bearings (if applicable).
Record measurement.
4. Add all recorded measurements from Steps 1, 2,
and 3 and record the total on line A below. If PTO
bearings were assembled on crankshaft, record
the measurement from Step 1.
5. Measure PTO crankcase half as shown to
determine depth of case. Place a piece of flat
stock on the case mating surface and measure
from this surface to the bearing seating surface.
Subtract thickness of flat stock and record the
measurement on line B below.
6. Measure magneto side case half using the same
procedure. Record measurement on line C below.
(Remember to subtract thickness of flat stock.)
7. Add the readings from steps 5 and 6 and record on
line D. Subtract line A from line D. The result is the
amount of crankshaft end play.
8. If adjustment is required, determine the amount of
spacers needed to achieve proper end play.
Install spacers on crankshaft followed by PTO
bearings.
Connecting Rod Side Clearance Total from Step 1,2, and 3.
(or from Step 1 only if PTO
1. Measure clearance between lower rod and
counterweight with a feeler gauge (connecting rod big
end side clearance). New measurement should be
between .016"-.020" (.4-.5 mm). Clearance should
not exceed .036/1 (.9mm).
bearings were installed). (A) ______ _
Step 5 Result {B) ___ _
Step 6 Result {C) ___ _
Line B and Line C :::: (0)
Line 0 Line A = End Play
3.15 5/98
ENGINE
Assembly, Cont.
10. Remove crankcase end seals and thoroughly clean
the case half mating surfaces.
11. Heat PTa side case half until it is hot to the touch.
12. Reinstall crankshaft into heated case.
13. Heat mag side case half until it is hot to the touch.
14. Place Loctite 518 gasket eliminator on one of the
case halves.
15. Reinstall the mag side half.
16. Torque case half attaching bolts in three steps to 17
ft. Ibs. (2.3 kg-m) following pattern shown on page
3.2.
NOTE: Before proceeding, check piston to cylinder
clearance and ring end gap (page 3.34) and cylinder
honing procedures (page 3.33).
17. Install piston rings, beveled side up, onto piston.
Keystone rings are beveled to the inside. This bevel
must be toward the top of the piston (letter and/or
number marks near end gap of ring face upward.
7/96
3.16
Straight Edge 1
Piston Ring Cutaway
Keystone Ring
Assembly, Cent.
18. Position C clip onto driver (PN 2870773) with
open end down as shown, Slide barrel over driver.
Toward Flywheel
C clip retainers
open end should be
straight up or

/
Forward
19. Install guide pin at the driver into the piston pin and
position the barrel up against the piston. While
holding the barrel against the piston, push the
driver in until you hear the clip engage into the
piston groove. Visually inspect the C-clip to be
sure it is fully seated.
20. Rotate driver to complete engagement of clip.
21. Reinstall piston onto rod with "F" mark or -..?toward
the magneto side of the engine. Support with
support block.
22. Lubricate piston pin and pin bearing.
23. Reinstall piston pin.
3.17
ENGINE
7/96
ENGINE
Assembly, Cont.
2. Apply Loctite No. 518 Gasket Eliminator to both
sides of the cylinder base gasket. Install the
base gasket and cylinder. Torque the cylinder
base nuts in 3 steps to 28 ft. Ibs. (3.9 kg-m).
Install the head gasket and head. Torque nuts to
20 ft. Ibs. (2.8 kg-m) following pattern on page
3.2.
When installing base gasket
use gasket eliminator no.
518 on both sides of the
base gasket.
Oil check valve
should release as
specified below.
1. Reinstall stator plate and align timing marks.
Stator Plate Timing
2. Reinstall flywheel.
3. Reinstall magneto housing.
4. Torque flywheel bolt to 44-62 ft. Ibs. (6.08-8.57
kg-m).
5. Reinstall recoil starter assembly.
6. Seal wire harness grommet to crankcase using
RTV silicone sealant.
7. Refer to electrical section of this manual for
starter motor inspection. Reinstall starter motor.
5/98
3.18
Center the mark
with stator plate
attaching screw hole.
Advance Retard
Installation
1. The engine can be reinstalled into the frame and
secured. The oil pump and carburetor can also be
assembled onto the engine. Bleed the oil pump of
trapped air by loosening the bleed screw (A) for a
few seconds, then tighten. Install the air box and
filter element. NOTE: If the crankcase or oil pump
have been replaced, check the oil pump end play
as outlined on page 3.20.
2. Make sure the vent line from the carburetor is
routed to the upper part of the frame (B). Check
the vent line and be sure it is not pinched or kinked.
3. Install PVT system as outlined in PVT section. Be
sure to inspect clutch offset, alignment, and belt
deflection and adjust if necessary.
4. Torque drive clutch retaining bolt to 40 ft. Ibs. (5.5
kg-m). Torque driven clutch retaining bolt to 17 ft.
Ibs. (2.35 k g ~ m ) .
3.19
ENGINE
7/96
ENGINE
EC25PF/EC28PF Engine
Assembly
Oil Pump End Play Adjustment
The oil pump is a positive displacement type pump. Whenever the oil pump, oil pump bushing, or crankcase are
replaced, the end play clearance must be checked. Target clearance is .008-.024" (.2-.6mm) between the oil
pump boss and the bushing in the crankcase. Symptoms of excessive gear end play include: noticeable engine
noise at idle; pump lever arm binds in the 1/2 open position (will release when engine is rotated).
NOTE:Some 250/300 cc ATV engine oil pumps were produced with a plastic oil pump drive gear (PN 3084825). The
plastic drive gear is no longer available and subs to a metal drive gear (PN 3083429). If you are replacing a plastic drive
gear with a metal one, you must also order and install thrust washer (PN 3083428). If you install the metal drive gear
without the thrust washer you will not be able to achieve the proper drive gear end playas outlined below. Refer to the
Illustration on page 3.21
250/300 Models
Refer to Illustration on following page.
1. Measure distance from pump shoulder to pump
mounting flange. Record this measurement.
Example: 3.9mm
2. Lubricate and install pump drive gear thrust
washer, pump drive gear, and bushing into
crankcase. Make sure parts are completely
seated.
3. Measure the distance from the pump bushing to
the crankcase pump seating surface. Record this
measurement. Example: 4.8mm
4. Subtract the measurement recorded in step 1
from the measurement recorded in step 3. See
example below right. The difference between
these two measurements is the end play the
pump bushings will have without shims. Add
shims to adjust end play to .008" - .024/1 (.2 .6
mm).
Spacer shim part numbers:
PN 3083671 .15 mm/.006/1
PN 3083672 .3 mm/.012"
PN 3083673 .6 mm/.024/1
5/98
3.20
EXAMPLE: 4.8
- 3.9
.9
- .2-.6 mm Target clearance
.3-.7mm Total thickness of
shims required
Assembly
Oil Check Valve Testing (250/400)
The oil pump check valve on the EC25PF engine must be
tested by applying 2
M
7 PSI of pressure to the line spigot of
the check valve. Use aMity Vac (PN2870975) or similar
tester. The valve should release between 2 and 7 PSI. The
check valve is located on the cylinder.
Oil Check Valve Testing (300)
The oil pump check valve on the EC28PF engine must be
tested by applying 3-7 inches of mercury VACUUM to the
line spigot of the check valve. The valve should release be-
tween 3 and 7 inches of mercury. Use aMity Vac
(PN2870975) or similar vacuum tester. The check valve is
located on the oil pump.
Thrust Washer (3083428)
(not used with plastiC drive gear)
ENGINE
EC25PF/EC28PF Engine
EC25PF M Apply 2
M
7 PSI pres
M
.... -r,TO engine
250/400 Check Valve
EC28PF - Apply 2-7 inches
of mercury VACUUM to the line
@
300 Check Valve
1 check valve should release at 2 to 7 PSI
U Pump Bleed Screw
/
Drive Gear
lJ
Plastic (3084825)
subs to
Metal (3083429)
Bushing /
Bushing end play
adjustment
shims
\
3.21 5/98
ENGINE
EC25PF Engine
Recoil Disassembly
1. Remove four 6mm bolts securing reel housing to flywheel housing. NOTE: When the last bolt is removed, the
reel housing will rotate, unwinding the recoil spring.
2. Remove reel housing. NOTE: If rope replacement is the only service necessary, it may be replaced without
any further disassembly.
3. Remove pawl return spring.
4. Clamp sides of ratchet pawl bracket in the corner
of the jaws of a vise.
5. Using a cloth belt type strap wrench wrapped
around the outside edge of the reel, unscrew the
reel counterclockwise to remove it from the ratchet
pawl bracket shaft.
6. Remove the ratchet pawl bracket, spring hook,
ratchet friction ring and friction spring. NOTE: It is
not necessary to remove the spring retainer plate
and spring unless it is damaged.
7. Clean and inspect all parts. Repair or replace as
required.
1. Flywheel Housing
2. Reel
3. Recoil Spring
4. Spring Retaining Plate
5. Seal
6. Spring Hook
7. Ratchet Pawl
8. Pawl Pin
9. Ratchet Friction Ring
and Pawl Guide
10. Friction Spring
11. Ratchet Pawl Bracket
12. Reel Housing
13. Pawl Return Spring
14. Recoil Rope
15. Rope Handle
16. Recoil Cup
17. Timing Plug
18. Bushing
7/96
3.22
Clamp in
vise
here.
Use vise
corner.
Recoil Assembly
ENGINE
EC25PF Engine
1. If the recoil spring was removed, reinstall it in its recess in the flywheel housing. The spring should spiral
counterclockwise toward the center.
2. Grease spring with Polaris low temperature grease.
3. Install recoil spring retaining plate.
4. Grease and install spring hook, making sure it properly engages the spring end.
5. Install ratchet friction ring and friction spring
assembly. The friction spring should engage the
bent tab on the recoil spring retaining plate. The ilL"
on the friction ring should be positioned as shown in
the photo at right.
6. Grease the center hole and seal in the flywheel
housing.
7. Install ratchet pawl bracket. The alignment pin and
the square drive on the bracket shaft should
properly align in the spring hook.
8. While holding the bracket tight against the spring
hook, flip the flywheel housing over and thread the
reel onto the pawl bracket shaft.
9. Clamp the ratchet pawl bracket in the corner of the jaws of a vise. Firmly hand tighten the reel.
Pin must engage
hole during
reassembly
10. If the rope was removed, or if a new rope is being installed, attach one end of the rope to the reel, pass the
other end of the rope through the guide in the reel housing and attach it to the rope handle.
11. Install the rope housing over the reel.
12. Holding the flywheel housing with one hand, rotate the rope housing clockwise until the rope is completely
re-wound.
13. Rotate the housing three more turns and reinstall bolts.
14. Reinstall pawl return spring.
15. Check recoil and ratchet operation.
16. When reinstalling assembly onto engine, use
Loctite 515 Gasket Eliminator between the flywheel
housing and crankcase.
3.23 7/96
ENGINE
EC25PF Engine
Recoil Assembly
The recoil cup is incorporated onto the flywheel.
1. If the recoil rope was removed or if a new rope is
being installed, attach one end of the rope to the
reel, pass the other end of the rope through the
guide in the reel housing and attach it to the rope
handle.
2. Install the rope housing over the reel.
3. Holding the flywheel housing with one hand, rotate
the rope housing clockwise until the rope is
completely re-wound.
4. Rotate the housing three more turns and install the
pawl return spring with the large end of the spring
going into rope housing; reinstall retainer plate,
lock washer and bolt.
5. Check recoil and ratchet operation.
6. When reinstalling assembly onto engine, use
Loctite 515 Gasket Eliminator between the
flywheel housing and crankcase.
10/96
3.24
Disassembly
NOTE: To reassemble engine, reverse the following
procedure, paying attention to reassembly notes as in-
dicated.
1. Refer to page 3.8 and follow engine removal
instructions. This engine will also require removal
of coolant lines and the sending unit wire mounted
at the rear of the cylinder head.
2. Remove the six bolts retaining the starter
assembly and flywheel cover.
Reassembly Note: During reassembly apply Loctite
518 to mating surfaces of starter cover assembly and
crankcase assembly.
3. Remove starter pulley and flywheel nut.
4. For starter removal, remove bolts retaining starter
bracket on PTa side and two bolts (A) on mag side.
NOTE: If starter inspection is necessary, make sure
during reassembly that the gear shaft washer (8) is in
place between the gear shaft assembly and starter mo-
tor for reassembly. Starter damage will occur if this
washer is not correctly positioned. For detailed service
and repair of electric starters and starter drives, refer
to Chapter 8 of this Service Manual.
3.25
ENGINE
EC38PL Engine
7/96
ENGINE
EC38PL Engine
Disassembly, Cont.
7. Remove flywheel using Polaris flywheel puller.
8. Remove stator assembly.
Reassembly Note: During reassembly be sure to
seal rubber grommet (A) completely with silicone
sealer to avoid water or dirt ingestion into stator as-
sembly.
150 Watt alternator shown at right (photo 2).
200 Watt alternator shown at right (photo 3).
9. Remove six cylinder head bolts using a 12 mm
socket. Note the position of the bleeder plug for
the coolant system.
10/96
3.26
Disassembly, Cont.
400L Head Gasket pictured at right.
Reassembly Note: The 400L head gasket should
have the word UP (8) toward the cylinder head and the
tab (C) toward the exhaust, matching the tab area on
the cylinder.
NOTE: Small hole in cylinder above exhaust port is a
decompression aid for starting.
10. Loosen clamps retaining coolant transfer hose
and remove the four cylinder nuts. NOTE: Use a
14 mm socket on the exhaust side. A 14 mm
wrench will be necessary on the intake side.
Reassembly Note: Due to limited space you will need
to use a crows foot adaptor for final torquing during
reassembly.
11. Install piston support block and remove C clips.
Reassembly Note: When reinstalling C clips, make
sure that the open end of the retainer clip points either
up or down, not to the side.
3.27
ENGINE
EC38PL Engine
10/96
ENGINE
EC38PL Engine
Disassembly, Cont.
12. Remove piston pin using Polaris piston pin puller
(PN 2870386).
Use on
1994,
1995, &
Early 1996
400's
Piston Ports
o 0
Intake sid!?
Use same style pis-
ton as was removed
Use on
Late 1996
to current
13. Remove slotted left hand thread crankshaft nut
using Polaris tool (PN 2870967).
Reassembly Note: Reinstallation of this crankshaft
nut will also require use of tool PN 2870967.
14. Remove five crankcase bolts (A) with a 12 mm
socket.
15. Remove four nuts and two bolts (8) indicated in
the photo at right with a 10 mm socket.
16. Remove cover, tapping lightly with a soft face
hammer if necessary.
17. Using a 10 mm socket, remove the impeller nut
(C).
18. Slide water pump assembly from counterbalance
assembly.
Reassembly Note: Watch for adjuster shims which
may be between the impeller and pump housing.
Make sure to reinstall any shims removed. Apply Loc-
tite 242TM to impeller nut.
10/96
3.28
Disassembly, Cant.
17. Remove collar, O-ring, guide washer and
crankshaft gear (A). NOTE: A large screwdriver
may be used to aid removal.
18. Remove two bolts retaining the counter balance
bracket (8) using a 10 mm socket. CAUTION:
Make no attempt to remove the counterbalance
until steps 17 and 18 are complete, or damage
may result to the counterbalance assembly.
Reassembly Note: Punch marks (C) on both gears
must be across from each other during reassembly.
See photo three at right.
19. Remove oil pump assembly (0).
20. Attach counterbalance puller onto counter
balance and position as shown in the picture at
right.
Reassembly Note: The retainer bracket must be in
position on the counterbalance assembly before the
assembly is installed in the crankcase.
3.29
Crankshaft Gear
ENGINE
EC38PL Engine
7/96
ENGINE
EC38PL Engine
Disassembly, Cont.
21. Heat areas (A) and (8) with a small propane torch
for approximately one to two minutes, no closer
than 1/1 (2.5 cm) from case areas.
WARNING: Oil and gasoline are highly flammable
and explosive under certain conditions. Use extreme
caution when using a propane torch in this environ-
ment.
22. Once these areas are thoroughly heated, add
tension to the puller by turning the large nut.
Continue tensioning the puller until the
counterbalance assembly is completely removed.
Reassembly Note: For reassembly of counterba-
lancer, heat areas (A) and (8) and press the balancer
and bracket back into place.
23. With counterbalance assembly removed, follow
instructions for crankshaft service on pages 3.13-
3.15.
24. The injection oil check valve is tested using the
Mity Vac (PN 2870975). With the Mity Vac in
the pressure mode the check valve should
release between 2 and 5 PSI.
25. Remove the six bolts retaining the carb adapter
and reed valve assembly using an 8 mm socket.
NOTE: The reed stutter is standard on the 400L
models.
7/96
3.30
Ree
~
Reed Stuffer
Disassembly, Cont.
Reed Valve Assembly
26. Measure reed stop height in the area (A)
indicated. Recommended stop height is .350" (9
mm).
27. Measure the air gap of each reed valve petal as
shown in the photo at right. The air gap should
not exceed .015" (.4 mm). NOTE: An early sign
of reed valve failure may be hard starting.
28. Check each reed valve petal for white stress
marks or missing material. Replace if necessary.
Water Pump Impeller Clearance
Whenever the counterbalance assembly is removed
it will be necessary to verify impeller clearance. Fol-
lowing is a recommended procedure for measuring
water pump impeller clearance.
29. Apply a small amount of putty or clay to the top of
one impeller blade (B).
30. Reinstall case gasket and bolt case together at
areas (C) and (0) as indicated on the photo at
right.
31. Carefully remove case cover.
3.31
ENGINE
EC38PL Engine
7/96
ENGINE
EC38PL Engine
Disassembly, Cont.
5. Remove water pump impeller and check
clearance measurement. Acceptable
clearance measured with a dial caliper is
between .020" - .040" (.05 -.1 cm). CAUTION:
If the clearance is less than .020" (.05 cm) the
impeller may grind against the case. If the
clearance is more than .040" (.1 cm) the water
pump may cavitate.
6. The photo at right illustrates checking
clearance measurement with a feeler gauge.
This method may also be used to check
thickness by removing half of the putty from the
impeller blade.
Spacer shim part numbers:
PN 3084188 0.1 mm!.004"
PN 3084189 0.2 mm/.008"
The illustration depicts correct
positioning of the seals. The water
seal is identified by counting the
number of sealing "lips". It is a triple
lip seal and has a protruding edge
that faces away from the spring.
The oil seal is a double lip variety.
The lip (on the spring end) angles
back toward the spring. The spring
end of the seals (open side) must
face the oil or coolant as shown in
the illustration.
To assemble the pump casing,
press the bearing into the casing
until flush with the casting. Note:
Do not press the bearing in until it
seats against the shoulder, or the
oil hole will be covered by the bear-
ing outer race. Next, press the oil
seal into the seal bore until the
weep hole is visible. Now press the
water seal in until flush with the out-
er edge of the seal bore.
5/98
3.32
Bearing
Counterbalancer
Lip/Spring
Lip/Spring Toward Toward Impeller
Counterbalancer
~
Oil Seal Water Seal
3084184 3084185
Press Oil Seal
Past Weep Hole
ENGINE
Cylinder Hone Selection/Honing Procedure
Selecting a hone which will straighten as well as remove material from the cylinder is very important. Using a
common spring loaded finger type glaze breaker for honing is never advised. Polaris recommends using a rigid
type hone which also has the capability of oversizing. Two manufacturers of this type of hone are Sunnen Prod-
ucts Company of St. Louis, Missouri and Ammco Tools, Inc., of North Chicago, Illinois.
The photo at right shows the Ammco No. 3950 hone.
Cylinders may be wet or dry honed depending upon the
hone manufacturer's recommendations. Wet honing re-
moves more material faster and leaves a more distinct pat-
tern in the bore.
It is important that the cylinder be thoroughly cleaned after
honing to remove all grindings which could cause piston or
cylinder damage. Wash the cylinder in a solvent; then in hot
soapy water; rinse; blow dry; and oil lightly.
NOTE:Honing material may become trapped in rough cast-
ing areas such as the area between the cylinder sleeve and
port openings. Use electrical contact cleaner to ensure
these areas are clean.
A finished cylinder should have a cross-hatch pattern to aid
in the retention of the fuel/oil mixture in the initial break in.
1. Wash cylinder with solvent.
2. Using a vise, clamp cylinder around the exhaust port
studs. NOTE: Protect from vise jaw serrations with
brass stock, wood or cardboard.
3. Place hone in cylinder. Tighten stone adjusting knob
until the stone contacts the cylinder walls. CAUTION:
Do not overtighten. Cylinder damage may result.
4. With a 1/2" drill motor at a speed of 300-500 RPM, run
the hone in and out of the cylinder rapidly until cutting
tension decreases. Remember to keep the hone drive
shaft centered and to bring the stone approximately
1 /2" (1.3 cm) beyond the bore at the end of each stroke.
5. Release the hone at regular intervals and inspect the
bore to determine if it has been cleared, and to check
piston fit. NOTE: Don't allow cylinder to heat up during
honing. The thinner areas of the liner around the ports
will expand causing uneven bore.
6. After honing has been completed inspect all port
opening areas for rough or sharp edges. Apply a slight
chamfer to all ports to remove sharp edges or burrs,
paying particular attention to the corners of the intake
and exhaust ports.
3.33 10/96
ENGINE
Piston/Cylinder Clearance (2 Strokes)
Follow new engine break-in procedures after replac-
ing piston/rings. Pre-mix the first tank of fuel. Bleed
oil pump and warm engine thoroughly. Avoid sus-
tained full throttle for the first two tanks of fuel. Confirm
oil system is working properly. Oil level in reservoir
should drop after first tank of fuel.
Cylinder Inspection/Measurement
I nspect cylinder for wear, scratches, or damage. If no
damage is evident, measure cylinder for taper and out
of round with a telescoping gauge and micrometer or
a dial bore gauge. Measure bore 1/2" down from top
of cylinder in two directions - in line with piston pin and
90to the pin to determine if bore is out of round. Re-
peat measurements at bottom of cylinderto determine
taper or out of round at the bottom. Record all mea-
surements.
Piston Inspection/Measurement (Generic)
1 . Check piston for scoring or cracks in piston crown or
pin area. Excessive carbon buildup below the ring
lands is an indication of piston, ring or cylinder wear.
2. Measure piston outside diameter at a point 10 mm
(3/8") up from bottom of skirt at a 90angle to the
direction of the piston pin. Record the
measurement.
NOTE:The piston must be measured atthis pointto pro-
vide accurate piston-to-cylinder clearance measure-
ment.
3. Subtract this measurement from the maximum
cylinder measurement recorded previously. If
clearance exceeds the service limit, determine if
piston or cylinder is worn and recondition or replace
as necessary. Refer to page 3.3 for piston to
cylinder clearance specifications.
10196
3.34
Piston Ring Installed Gap
1. Position each piston ring 1/2/1 (1.3 cm) from the top
of the cylinder using the piston to push it squarely
into place. Measure installed gap with a feeler
gauge at both the top and bottom of the cylinder.
NOTE: A difference in end gap between the bottom and
top of the cylinder indicates cylinder taper. The cylinder
should be measured for excessive taper and out of
round. Replace rings if the installed end gap exceeds
the service limit. Refer to page 3.3 for specifications.
NOTE:Always check piston ring installed gap after re-
boring a cylinder or when installing new rings.
Piston Pin I Needle Bearing Inspection
1. Clean needle bearing in solvent and dry with
compressed air.
2. Inspect needle cage carefully for cracks or shiny
spots which indicate wear. Replace needle bearing if
worn or cracked, and always replace if piston
damage has occurred.
3. Visually inspect piston pin for damage, discoloration,
or wear. Run your fingernail along the length of the
pin and replace it if any rough spots, galling or wear is
detected. Measure piston pin.
3.34a
ENGINE
Disassembly/Inspection - Polaris
10/96
ENGINE
Disassembly/Inspection - Polaris
Connecting Rod Small End Inspection
1. Clean small end of connecting rod and inspect inner
bore with a magnifying glass. Look for any surface
irregularities including pitting, wear, or dents.
2. Run your fingernail around the inside of the rod and
check for rough spots, galling, or wear.
3. Oil and install needle bearing and pin in connecting
rod. Rotate pin slowly and check for rough spots or
any resistance to movement. Slide pin back and
forth through bearing while rotating and check for
rough spots.
4. With pin and bearing centered in rod, twist ends back
and forth in all directions to check for excessive axial
play. Pull up and down evenly on both ends of pin to
check for radial play. Replace pin and bearing if there
is any resistance to rotation or excessive axial or
radial movement. If play or roughness is evident with
a new pin and bearing, replace the connecting rod.
10/96
3.34b
Crankcase
Crankshaft @
and Piston
3.35
ENGINE
EH42PL/EH50PL Engine Exploded View
Cylinderl
Cylinder
Head
Valve Train
7/96
ENGINE
EH42PL/EH50PL Lubrication/Oil Flow
Engine Lubrication
Oil Type .................... Polaris Premium 4 Synthetic (PN 2871281); or API certified "SH" 5W30 oil
Capacity ................... 2 U.S. Quarts (1.9 I)
Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. PN 3084963
Filter Wrench ............... Snap On PN YA997 or equivalent
Drain Plug Torques .......... 14 ft. Ibs. (1.9 kg-m) tank and sump
Oil Pressure Specification 20 PSI @ 5500 RPM, Polaris OW/40 Synthetic (Engine Hot)
Oil Flow
The chart on page 3.37 describes the flow of oil through the engine. Beginning at the oil tank, the oil flows through
a screen fitting in the bottom of the tank and into the oil supply hose. The feed side of the oil pump draws oil through
the hose and into the crankcase oil gallery, and then pumps the oil through another passage to the one way valve.
(When the engine is off, the one way valve closes to prevent oil in the tank from draining into the crankcase.)
The oil is pumped through a delivery pipe to the oil filter. If the oil filter is obstructed, a bypass valve contained
in the filter allows oil to bypass the filter element.
At this point, the oil is diverted in two directions. Oil is supplied to the camshaft through the left front cylinder stud,
and an oil passage in tl1e head. Oil enters the camshaft through the PTa (L) journal. The camshaft journals, cam
lobes, and rocker arms are lubricated through holes in the camshaft. The oil lubricates the cam chain and sprocket
and drains to the sump.
The other oil path from the filter leads through a delivery pipe to the crankcase main oil gallery, which leads to
the stator plate oil passage. Here it passes through the slotted friction bearing into the crankshaft. An oil seal
on the stator plate prevents oil from entering the stator/flywheel area. Oil travels through the crankshaft to the
crank pin, lubricating the connecting rod large end bearing directly. Oil also passes through an oil jet (drilled ori-
fice) in the end of the crank pin to the PTa end main bearings and counterbalancer gears.
Residual oil from the lubrication of the crankshaft and connecting rod indirectly lubricates the cylinder wall, piston,
rings, connecting rod small end bearing, piston pin, oil/water pump drive gears, cam chain and drive sprocket,
and Magneto end crankshaft main bearing.
The one-way valve is located on the front left (PTa) side of the crankcase. The valve prevents oil in the tank from
draining into the engine sump when the engine is off. The valve mechanism consists of a plunger, return spring,
guide plug, and sealing washer. When the engine is running, oil pressure lifts the plunger off the seat, allowing
oil flow. When the engine is off, spring pressure forces the plunger against the oil passage seat, preventing oil
flow from the tank to the sump. The one-way valve requires very little maintenance. If engine oil drains into the
sump when the engine is off, inspect the valve sealing surface for debris or damage. Inspect the return spring
for distortion or damage.
Oil Pressure Test
1. Remove blind plug on front left cylinder head.
2. Insert a 1/8 NPT oil pressure gauge adaptor into the cylinder head and attach the gauge.
3. Start engine and allow it to reach operating temperature, monitoring gauge indicator.
7/96
3.36
PolariS Industries Inc.
Union Fitting
(Upper)
Prevents oil
from draining
into crankcase
with engine off
I nternal passage to
camshaft (front left
head bolt)
Bottom fitting is oil
exhaust or return
to tank
ENGINE
EH42PL/EH50PL Engine
Oil filter
Oil feed to
filter
From filter
to crankshaft
One way valve
Top fitting is oil
feed or intake
from bottom of
tank
Top of Oil Tank
EH42PL/EH50PL Oil Flow Chart
Union Fitting (Lower)
Oil Tank
Bypass I
,
1:.--------
Oil Hose Crankcase
Oil Gallery
Chain Room 1-----"'"
Oil Pump
(Scavenging)
Sprocket
Chain
Indirect
Lubrcation I
Main Bearing
(PTO)
' ,
Cam Shaft
Journal
\ I , ,
Through Cylinder
Stud Front Left
1-----1Iot Delivery Pipe
Delivery Pipe t---ti14
Crankcase
Oil Gallery
\ I ,
\' '
Large End
Bearing
Crank Pin
Crankshaft
3.37 10/96
ENGINE
Removal
The following components can be serviced or removed with the engine installed in the frame:
PVT System
Flywheel
Alternator/Stator
Starter Motor/Starter Drive
Camshaft
Rocker Arms
Cam Chain and Sprockets
Cam Chain Tensioner and Guides
Cylinder Head
Cylinder
Piston/Rings
The following components require engine removal for service:
Oil Pump
Water Pump*
Water Pump Mechanical Seal
Counterbalancer Assembly
Connecting Rod
Crankshaft
Crankshaft Main Bearings
Crankcase
* Complete engine removal is not necessary to inspect or replace the water pump impeller.
Engine Removal Preparation
1 . Clean work area.
2. Thoroughly clean the ATV engine and chassis.
3. Disconnect battery negative (-) cable.
4. Drain oil tank and engine sump.
5. Remove the following parts. Refer to the Body Chapter for removal procedures.
Seat
Left and Right Side Covers
Fuel Tank Cover
Fuel Tank (see Fuel System Chapter)
Rear Rack
Rear Cab
6. Disconnect spark plug high tension lead.
7. Remove air pre-cleaner and duct.
8. Disconnect engine breather line from engine.
9. Hold plastic fitting on airbox LH side with a wrench,
remove oil tank breather line clamp and remove line.
10. Loosen carburetor boot clamp and two bolts securing
airbox. Remove airbox.
7/96
3.38
Removal, Cant.
11. Remove carburetor,
12. Insert a shoptowel into the carburetor flange to prevent
dirt from entering the intake port.
13. Remove springs from exhaust pipe and remove pipe.
AWD Models:
14. Loosen auxiliary brake adjuster locknut, remove
adjusting bolt and brake actuator arm.
15. Remove center chain guard bolt, two screws, and
chain guard.
16. Remove center drive and driven sprocket bolts and
remove chain and sprockets as an assembly.
PVT Disassembly, All Models:
1 . Remove the screws and retainer clips from PVT outer
cover and remove cover.
2. Mark the drive belt direction of rotation and remove
drive belt. The belt is normally installed so the
numbers can be easily read.
3. Remove drive clutch retaining bolt and remove drive
clutch using puller PN 2870506.
4. Remove driven clutch retaining bolt and driven clutch
using puller PN 2870913.
5. Remove driven clutch offset spacers from the
6. Remove cable tie from PVT air outlet duct.
7. Bend back retainer tabs on three screws at the front of
the inner cover and remove screws and retainer plate.
8. Loosen three inner cover retaining bolts at the rear of
the cover only enough to allow cover removal.
9. Remove cover. NOTE: Do not lose spacers or spacer
retaining O-rings located on the inside of the inner
cover.
3.39
ENGINE
7/96
ENGINE
Removal, Cont.
Recoil/Stator Removal
NOTE: Removal ofthe recoil flywheel and stator assembly
will allow additional clearance for engine removal.
Remove:
Recoil housing bolts and housing.
Starter drive assembly. Note the thrust washer
located at the rear of the drive mechanism.
Flywheel nut and washer.
1. Install flywheel puller and remove flywheel.
CAUTION: Do not thread the puller bolts into the
flywheel more than 1/4" (.63 cm) or stator coils may be
damaged.
2. Mark or note position of stator plate on crankcase.
3. Remove bolts and carefully remove stator assembly,
being careful not to damage the crankshaft bushing or
oil seal on the stator plate.
4. Wrap stator in a shop towel and secure stator out of the
way on top of frame.
6. Remove oil passage O-Ring.
6. Place a shop towel in the cam chain area and over
crankshaft oil passage.
7. Remove transmission linkage rods from shift selector
8. Remove PVT air intake duct.
9. Disconnect coolant temp sender wire.
7/96
3.40
Removal, Cont.
5. Remove the following.
Starter motor. Note ground cable location. Mark
positive (+) cable mounting angle and remove
cable.
Oil tank bolts and oil tank, securing it out of the
way.
Oil filter. Cover oil filter area with a shop towel.
6. Loosen oil line hose clamps and remove oil lines.
NOTE: The uppermost line is the oil feed from the
bottom of the tank. Cover both oil lines to prevent dirt
from entering the line.
7. Remove coolant tank TorxTM screws and remove tank.
Secure out of the way.
8. Loosen clamp and remove coolant line from
thermostat housing. Drain the line into a suitable
container. Plug end of thermostat housing to minimize
spillage.
NOTE: Mark the center of the engine mount studs in the
frame for reference upon installation.
9. Remove nut, ground cable and washer from the upper
right engine mount and mark the location of the center
of the mount stud.
10. Remove the two upper engine mount plate bolts and
remove the plate and ground cable.
11. Remove nut and washer from lower left engine mount
and mark location of stud. Some engines have the
front motor mount located in front of the engine.
3.41
ENGINE
10/96
ENGINE
Removal, Cont.
17. Loosen nut on slotted rear engine mount plate and
back it out to the end of the stud.
Final Coolant Draining/Engine Removal
1 . Move top of engine to left until the coolant supply hose
clamp clears the frame at the water pump fitting.
2. Lift and twist engine clockwise until the lower left
engine mount stud is clear of the frame mount and the
lower right coolant hose clamp clears the frame tube.
3. Support engine in this position with a suitable support,
such as a board or a 2x4.
4. Place a drain pan beneath area to catch coolant.
5. Clamp coolant inlet hose leading from radiator to pump
to reduce coolant spillage.
6. Loosen hose clamp on upper water pump outlet
coolant hose and remove hose, draining engine
coolant into container. NOTE: Remove plug in
thermostat housing to increase flow.
7. Reinstall hose and clamp.
8. Remove hose from water pump inlet and place in
container. Release clamp from hose and allow hose to
drain completely.
9. Lift back of engine while rotating front of engine
clockwise and remove engine from left side of frame.
7/96
3.42
Engine Installation
ENGINE
1. Install engine from left side of frame, placing slotted rear engine plate in position with washer and nut on top of
plate.
2. Attach water pump inlet hose and tighten clamp.
3. With engine in place on rear mount and inlet hose connected, tip top of engine to the left and rotate
counterclockwise to engage lower left engine mount in frame.
4. Continue rotating engine making sure the hose clamp for the water pump inlet hose clears the frame at lower
right side of engine near water pump.
5. Install upper engine mount bracket to engine and line up all reference marks.
6. Align engine by temporarily installing clutches and following alignment/offset procedure outlined in the PVT
Chapter.
7. When engine is aligned properly, tighten all engine mounts and install all parts, reversing the order of
disassembly. See engine installation notes.
Oil Supply
1. Before installing oil supply line, add Polaris Premium 4
OW/40 oil to the oil tank until oil flows from feed line.
2. Connect the lines to the pump inlet and outlet fitting and
tighten securely. Be sure oil feed line is properly
connected to the uppermost oil line fitting on the
crankcase. Add oil until it is at the upper mark on
dipstick.
Bleed Cooling System
1. Fill coolant reservoir tank to full mark.
2. With hose removed from thermostat housing, add coolant to radiator slowly until coolant begins to flow from
thermostat housing.
3. Install hose on thermostat housing and tighten clamp. Continue to add coolant slowly until radiator is full.
4. Install radiator cap and squeeze coolant lines to force air out of system.
5. Remove cap and add coolant if necessary.
6. After reassembly is complete, start engine and observe coolant level in the radiator. Allow air to purge and top
off as necessary. Reinstall radiator cap and bring engine to operating temp. Check level in reservoir tank after
engine is cool and add coolant if necessary.
Transmission
1. Readjust transmission shift linkage as outlined in Transmission Chapter.
Exhaust
1. Seal all connections with high temp silicone seal.
2. Check to be sure all springs are in good condition.
Engine Disassembly
Cam Chain Tensioner/Rocker ArmlCamshaft Removal
1. Remove fuel tank and spark plug high tension lead. If camshaft is to be removed, drain engine coolant. See
cooling system draining/refilling.
2. Remove bolt securing rocker cover and remove cover and gasket.
3. Remove ignition timing inspection plug from recoil housing.
3.43 7/96
ENGINE
Engine Disassembly, Cont.
To position crankshaft at Top Dead Center
(TOe) on compression stroke:
12. Rotate engine slowly in the direction of rotation
watching intake valves open and start to close.
13. Continue to rotate engine slowly, watching
camshaft sprocket marks and the mark in the timing
inspection hole.
14. Align single (TOG) mark on flywheel with projection
in inspection hole, and the cam sprocket pin (facing
upward) aligned with the camshaft to crankshaft
center line. NOTE: The cam lobes should be
pointing down and all valves should have clearance
at this point.
15. Remove cam chain tensioner plug, sealing washer,
and spring. CAUTION: The plug is under spring
tension. Maintain inward pressure while removing.
16. Remove the two 6x25 mm cam chain tensioner
flange bolts.
17. Tap lightly on tensioner body with a soft face
hammer and remove tensioner.
Cam Chain Tensioner Inspection
1. Pull cam chain tensioner plunger outward to the end
of its travel. Inspect teeth on ratchet pawl and
plunger for wear or damage.
2. Push ratchet pawl and hold it. The plunger should
move smoothly in and out of the tensioner body.
10/96
3.44
TDC Mark
, I'
/
Rotation
...
Advance Marks
;, ,r'"
3. Release ratchet pawl and push inward on plunger. It
should remain locked in position and not move
inward.
4. Measure free length of tensioner spring. Replace
spring if excessively worn.
5. Replace entire tensioner assembly if any part is
worn or damaged.
Rocker Arm/Shaft Removal
1 . Loosen rocker shaft retaining bolt.
2. Remove the four bolts securing rocker shaft
supports, and remove the supports, rocker shaft
and rocker arms as an assembly, being careful not
to drop the dowel pins into the engine.
Rocker Arm/Shaft Inspection
1. Remove retaining bolt from the PTa (left) end rocker
shaft support.
2. Mark or tag intake rocker arms so they can be
installed in the same position.
3. Inspect each rocker arm cam follower surface. If
there is any damage or uneven wear, replace the
rocker arm. NOTE: Always inspect camshaft lobe if
rocker arms are worn or damaged.
3.45
ENGINE
Rocker Shaft Retaining Bolt
7/96
ENGINE
4. Measure 0.0. of rocker shaft. Inspect it for wear or
damage.
5. Measure 1.0. of each rocker arm.
6. Measure 1.0. of both rocker arm shaft supports and
visually inspect surface.
7. Inspect rocker adjuster screws for wear, pitting, or
damage to threads of the adjuster or locknut.
Replace all worn or damaged parts. NOTE: The
end of the adjuster screw is hardened and cannot be
ground or re-faced.
7/96
3.46
Camshaft Removal
1 . Remove camshaft sprocket inspection cover.
2. Loosen three camshaft sprocket bolts.
3. Remove thermostat housing and thermostat. Note
the location of the air bleed holes in the thermostat.
Upon reassembly, the thermostat bleed holes
should be positioned next to the holes for the
thermostat cover bolts.
4. Remove camshaft end cap and a-Ring.
5. Place a clean shop towel in the area below cam
chain sprocket and remove sprocket retaining bolts.
6. Slide camshaft inward to allow removal of cam
sprocket and remove sprocket from camshaft and
chain.
7. Secure cam chain with a wire to prevent it from
falling into the crankcase.
8. Inspect cam sprocket teeth for wear or damage.
Replace if necessary.
9. Slide camshaft out the PTa side of the cylinder
head.
3.47
ENGINE
7/96
ENGINE
Automatic Compression Release Removal/Inspection
NOTE: The automatic compression release mecha-
nism can be inspected and serviced without removing
the camshaft from the cylinder head. The actuator ball
in the camshaft is not replaceable. Replace the cam-
shaft as an assembly if the actuator ball is worn or dam-
aged.
1 . Check release lever shaft for smooth operation
throughout the entire range of rotation. The spring
should hold the shaft weight against the stop pin.
In this position, the actuator ball will be held
outward in the compression release mode.
2. Remove release lever shaft and return spring.
3. Inspect shaft for wear or galling.
4. Inspect lobe on end of release lever shaft and
actuator ball for wear and replace if necessary.
Automatic Compression Release Installation
1. Slide spring onto shaft.
2. Apply engine oil to release lever shaft.
The actuator ball must be held outward to allow instal-
lation of the release lever shaft.
If Camshaft Is Removed From Engine:
3. Turn the camshaft until the actuator ball is in the
lowest position and install the release lever shaft,
pre-winding the spring approximately 1/4/1
(6.5mm).
If Camshaft Is Installed In The Engine:
4. Use a small magnet to draw the actuator ball
outward, or rotate the engine until the cam lobes
face upward and install release lever shaft.
5. Position camshaft as shown at bottom of
illustration at right.
6. Place arm of spring under stop pin as shown and
push release lever inward until fully seated. Do not
pre-wind the spring one full turn or the
compression release will not disengage when the
engine starts. Check operation of mechanism as
outlined in step 1 of Removal (above).
NOTE: When shaft is properly installed, actuator
ball will be held in the "out" position. It is important
to note that spring pressure is very light.
7/96
3.48
Spring in relaxed position
Stop pin
.I
Preload approx. 1/4"
(6.5mm)
PolariS Industries Inc.
Engine Disassembly, Cant.
Camshaft Inspection
1. Visually inspect each cam lobe for wear, chafing or
damage.
2. Thoroughly clean the cam shaft, making sure the oil
feed holes are not obstructed.
3. Measure height of each cam lobe using a micrometer.
4. Measure camshaft journal 00.
5. Measure 10 of camshaft journal bore.
6. Calculate oil clearance by subtracting journal 00 from
journal bore 10.
3.49
ENGINE
10/96
ENGINE
Replace camshaft if damaged or if any part is worn past the
service limit.
Replace cylinder head if camshaft journal bore is damaged
or worn excessively.
7. Inspect camshaft end cap (thrust face) for wear.
Replace if worn or damaged.
Cylinder Head Removal
See appropriate chap-
ter to remove the follow-
ing: fuel tank, spark
plug high tension lead,
exhaust pipe, carbure-
tor, and top engine
mount plate. Drain
coolant. Remove cam
chain tensioner, cam-
shaft, and rocker as-
sembly.
7/96
3.50
Engine Disassembly, C ~ n t .
1 . Remove the two 6x28 mm flange bolts from
cylinder head.
2. Loosen each of the four 11 x191 mm cylinder
head bolts evenly 1/8 turn each time in a
criss-cross pattern until loose.
3. Remove bolts and tap cylinder head lightly with
a plastic hammer until loose. CAUTION: Tap
only in reinforced areas or on thick parts of
cylinder head casting to avoid damaging
casting.
4. Remove cylinder head and head gasket. Note
the O-Ring in the corner of the gasket which
seals the front left cylinder stud. The O-Ring is
part of the fiber type gasket.
NOTE:This gasket has been superceded by an all
metal gasket which does not require an O-ring.
Cylinder Head Disassemblyllnspection
1. Thoroughly clean cylinder head surface to remove
all traces of gasket material and carbon. CAUTION:
Use care not to damage sealing surface.
3.51
ENGINE
EH42PUEH50PL Engine
5/98
ENGINE
Cylinder Head Warpage
1. Lay a straight edge across the surface of the cylinder
head at several different points and measure
warpage by inserting a feeler gauge between the
straight edge and the cylinder head surface. If
warpage exceeds the service limit, replace the
cylinder head.
Cylinder Head Disassembly
WARNING: Wear eye protection or a face shield during
cylinder head disassembly and reassembly.
NOTE: Keep all parts in order with respect to their location
in the cylinder head.
1" Using a valve spring compressor, compress the valve
spring and remove the split keeper. NOTE: To
prevent loss of tension, do not compress the valve
spring more than necessary.
2. Remove spring retainer and spring. NOTE: The valve
springs should be positioned with the tightly wound
coils against the cylinder head.
3. Push valve out, keeping it in order for reassembly in
the same guide.
7/96
3.52
4. Measure free length of spring with a Vernier caliper.
Check spring for squareness. Replace spring if either
measurement is out of specification.
5. Remove valve seals. CAUTION: Replace seals
whenever the cylinder head is disassembled.
Hardened, cracked or worn valve seals will cause
excessive oil consumption and carbon buildup.
3.53
ENGINE
Coil Fatiguel
Squareness
7196
ENGINE
Valve Inspection
1 . Remove all carbon from valve with a soft wire wheel.
2. Check valve face for runout, pitting, and burnt spots.
To check for bent valve stems, mount valve in a drill or
use "V" blocks and a dial indicator.
3. Check end of valve stem for flaring, pitting, wear or
damage.
4. Inspect split keeper groove for wear or flaring of the
keeper seat area. NOTE: The Stellite valves
cannot be re-faced or end ground. They must be
replaced if worn, bent, or damaged.
5. Measure diameter of valve stem with a micrometer in
three places and in two different directions (six
measurements total).
7/96
3.54
6. Measure valve guide inside diameter at the top middle
and end of the guide using a small hole gauge and a
micrometer. Measure in two directions, front to back
and side to side.
7. Subtract valve stem measurement to obtain stem to
guide clearance. NOTE: Be sure to measure each
guide and valve combination individually.
8. Replace valve and/or guide if clearance is excessive.
NOTE: If valve guides are replaced, valve seats must be
reconditioned.
Combustion Chamber
Clean all accumulated carbon deposits from combustion
chamber and valve seat area with a soft wire brush.
Valve Seat Inspection
ENGINE
Inspect valve seat in cylinder head for pitting, burnt spots, roughness, and uneven surface. If any of the above
conditions exist, the valve seat must be reconditioned. See Valve Seat Reconditioning, page 3.56. If the valve
seat is cracked the cylinder head must be replaced.
Cylinder Head Reconditioning
NOTE: Servicing the valve guides and valve seats requires special tools and a thorough knowledge of recondi-
tioning techniques. Follow the instructions provided in the cylinder head service tool kit.
CAUTION: Wear eye protection when performing cylinder head service. Valve guide replacement will require
heating of the cylinder head. Wear gloves to prevent burns.
Valve Guide Removal/Installation
1 . Remove all carbon deposits from the combustion chamber, valve seat and valve guide area before attempting
to remove valve guides. CAUTION: Carbon deposits are extremely abrasive and may damage the valve
guide bore when guides are removed.
2. Place new valve guides in a freezer for at least 15 minutes while heating cylinder head.
3. Heat cylinder head in an oven or use a hot plate to bring cylinder head temperature to 212
0
F (100
0
C).
CAUTION: Do not use a torch to heat cylinder head or warpage may result from uneven heating. Head
temperature can be checked with a pyrometer or a welding temperature stick.
4. When thoroughly heated, place cylinder head on blocks of wood which will allow the old guides to be removed.
5. Using valve guide driver, drive guides out of the cylinder head from the combustion chamber side. Be careful
not to damage guide bore or valve seat when removing guides.
3.55 7/96
ENGINE
6. Place cylinder head on cylinder head table.
NOTE: Be sure cylinder head is still at 212
0
F
(100C) before installing new guides.
7. Place a new guide in the valve guide installation
tool and press guide in to proper depth. Check
height of each guide above the cylinder head.
NOTE: The guide can be driven in to the proper
depth. Inspect the guide closely for cracks or
damage if a driver is used.
8. Allow cylinder head to cool to room temperature.
Apply cutting oil to the reamer supplied with the
cylinder head service kit. Guides should be
reamed from the valve spring side of the cylinder
head. Ream each guide to size by turning the
reamer clockwise continually. Continue to rotate
reamer clockwise during removal of the tool.
9. Clean guides thoroughly with hot soapy water and
a nylon brush. Rinse and dry with compressed air.
Apply clean engine oil to guides.
Valve Seat Reconditioning
Follow the manufacturers instructions provided with
the valve seat cutters in the Cylinder Head Recondi-
tioning Kit (PN 2200634). Abrasive stone seat re-
conditioning equipment can also be used. Keep all
valves in order with their respective seat.
NOTE: Valve seat width and point of contact on the
valve face is very important for proper sealing. The
valve must contact the valve seat over the entire cir-
cumference of the seat, and the seat must be the prop-
er width all the way around. If the seat is uneven, com-
pression leakage will result. If the seat is too wide, seat
pressure is reduced, causing carbon accumulation
and possible compression loss. If the seat is too nar-
row, heat transfer from valve to seat is reduced and the
valve may overheat and warp, resulting in burnt
valves.
7/96
3.56
0000
Too
Wide
Uneven Good
Too
Narrow
Valve Seat Reconditioning
1. Install pilot into valve guide.
2. Apply cutting oil to valve seat and cutter.
3. Place 46cutter on the pilot and make a light cut.
4. Inspect the cut area of the seat.
If the contact area is less than 75% of the cir-
cumference of the seat, rotate the pilot 180
0
and make another light cut.
If the cutter now contacts the uncut portion of
the seat, check the pilot. Look for burrs,
nicks, or runout. If the pilot is bent it must be
replaced.
If the contact area of the cutter is in the same
place, the valve guide is distorted from im-
proper installation and must be replaced. Be
sure the cylinder head is at the proper temper-
ature and replace the guide.
If the contact area of the initial cut is greater
than 75%, continue to cut the seat until all pits
are removed and a new seat surface is evi-
dent. NOTE: Remove only the amount of
material necessary to repair the seat surface.
5. To check the contact area of the seat on the valve
face, apply a thin coating of Prussian Blue paste to
the valve seat.
6. Insert valve into guide and tap valve lightly into place
a few times.
3.57
ENGINE
7/96
ENGINE
7. Remove valve and check where the Prussian Blue
indicates seat contact on the valve face. The valve
seat should contact the middle of the valve face and
must be the proper width.
If the indicated seat contact is too high on the
valve face, use the 30or 31
0
cutter to lower
the valve seat.
If too low use the 60or 75cutter to raise the
seat. When contact area is centered on the
valve face, measure seat width.
If the seat is too wide or uneven, use both top
and bottom cutters to narrow the seat.
If the seat is too narrow, widen using the 46
cutter and re-check contact pOint on the valve
face and seat width after each cut.
8. Clean aI/ filings from the area with hot soapy water,
rinse, and dry with compressed air.
9. Lubricate the valve guides with clean engine oil, and
apply oil or water based lapping compound to the face
of the valve.
10. Insert the valve into its respective guide and lap using
a lapping tool or a section of fuel line connected to the
valve stem.
11. Rotate the valve rapidly back and forth until the cut
sounds smooth. Lift the valve slightly off of the seat,
rotate 114 turn, and repeat the lapping process. Do
this four to five times until the valve is fully seated, and
repeat process for the other three valves.
12. Remove oil passage blind plug and thoroughly clean
cylinder head and valves.
7/96
3.58
Seating
Surface
13. After cylinder head and oil passage are clean, apply 3
Bond 1215 or equivalent sealer to the threads of the
blind plug and install, torquing to 8 ft. Ibs. (1.1 kg-m).
CAUTION: Do not allow sealer to enter oil passage.
14. Spray electrical contact cleaner into oil passage and
dry using compressed air.
Cylinder Head Assembly
CAUTION: Wear eye protection during assembly.
NOTE: Assemble the valves one at a time to maintain
proper order.
1. Install new valve seals on valve guides. NOTE: The
intake and exhaust valve seals are different, and must
be installed on the proper guide.
2. Apply engine oil to valve guides and seats.
3. Coat valve stem with molybdenum disulfide grease.
4. Install valve carefully with a rotating motion to avoid
damaging valve seal.
5. Dip valve spring and retainer in clean engine oil and
install spring with closely spaced coils toward the
cylinder head.
6. Place retainer on spring and install valve spring
compressor. Compress spring only enough to allow
split keeper installation to prevent loss of spring
tension. Install split keepers with the gap even on both
sides.
7. Repeat procedure for remaining valves.
8. When all valves are installed, tap lightly with soft faced
hammer on the end of the valves to seat the split
keepers.
3.59
ENGINE
Closely spaced
coils toward
cylinder head
7/96
ENGINE
Valve Seali ng Test
1. Clean and dry the combustion chamber area.
2. Pour a small amount of clean, high flash point solvent
into the intake port and check for leakage around each
intake valve. The valve seats should hold fluid with no
seepage.
3. Repeat for exhaust valves by pouring fluid into exhaust
port.
Cylinder/Piston Removal and Inspection
Follow engine disassembly procedures to remove valve
cover, camshaft and rocker arms, and cylinder head.
1. Remove cam chain guide at front of cylinder.
2. Loosen all four oil pipe banjo bolts and then remove the
bolts and eight sealing washers. Remove the pipes.
3. Loosen hose clamps on coolant inlet hose and remove
hose.
7/96
3.60
4. Remove the two 6 mm cylinder base bolts.
5. Loosen each of the four cylinder base bolts inside the
water jacket 1/4 turn at a time in a criss-cross pattern
until loose.
6. Remove the bolts.
7. Tap cylinder lightly with a plastic hammer in the
reinforced areas only until loose.
8. Rock cylinder forward and backward and lift it from the
crankcase, supporting piston and connecting rod.
Support piston with piston support block PN 2870390.
9. Remove dowel pins from crankcase.
Piston Removal
1. Note piston directional arrow pointing toward the
Magneto (right) side of the engine.
2. Remove piston circlip and push piston pin out of piston.
If necessary, heat the crown of the piston s/ightlywith a
propane torch. CAUTION: Do not apply heat to the
piston rings. The ring may lose radial tension.
3. Remove top compression ring.
3.61
ENGINE
7/96
ENGINE
*Using a piston ring pliers: Carefully expand ring and lift
it off the piston. CAUTION: Do not expand the ring more
than the amount necessary to remove it from the piston, or
the ring may break.
*By hand: Placing both thumbs as shown, spread the ring
open and push up on the opposite side. Do not scratch the
ring lands.
4. Repeat procedure for second ring.
The oil control ring is a three piece design consisting of a
top and bottom steel rail and a center expander section.
The top rail has a locating tab on the end which fits into a
notch in the upper oil ring land of the piston.
5. Remove the top rail first followed by the bottom rail.
6. Remove the expander.
Cylinder Inspection
1. Remove all gasket material from the cylinder sealing
surfaces.
2. Inspect the top of the cylinder for warpage using a
straight edge and feeler gauge.
3. Inspect cylinder for wear, scratches, or damage.
4. Inspect cylinder for taper and out of round with a
telescoping gauge or a dial bore gauge. Measure in
two different directions, front to back and side to side,
on three different levels (1/2/1 down from top, in the
middle, and 112/1 up from bottom).
7/96
3.62
2. Record measurements. If cylinder is tapered or out of
round beyond .002, the cylinder must be re-bored
oversize, or replaced .
......
iEH42PL

i;1-I5Q,P;L,<r.. ... .. .... .....;
nlln)
Piston to Cylinder Clearance
1. Measure piston outside diameter at a point 5 mm up
from the bottom of the piston at a right angle to the
direction of the piston pin.
2. Subtract this measurement from the maximum
cylinder measurement obtained in step 5 above.
EloringLhriit:.020 (.5m.l1l)
3.63
ENGINE
EH42PLJEH50PL Engine
5/98
ENGINE
3. Measure piston pin bore.
4. Measure piston pin 0.0. Replace piston and/or
piston pin if out of tolerance.
5. Measure connecting rod small end 10.
6. Measure piston ring to groove clearance by
placing the ring in the ring land and measuring with
a thickness gauge. Replace piston and rings if
ring-to-groove clearance exceeds service limits.
7/96
3.64
Piston Ring Installed Gap
1. Place each piston ring inside cylinder using piston
to push ring squarely into place.
2. Measure installed gap with a feeler gauge at both
the top and bottom of the cylinder. NOTE: A
difference in end gap indicates cylindertaper. The
cylinder should be measured for excessive taper
and out of round.
3. If the bottom installed gap measurement exceeds
the service limit, replace the rings.
NOTE: Always check piston ring installed gap after re-
boring a cylinder or when installing new rings. A re-
bored cylinder should always be scrubbed thoroughly
with hot soapy water, rinsed, and dried completely.
Wipe cylinder bore with an oil rag immediately to re-
move residue and prevent rust.
Crankcase Disassembly
NOTE: Engine must be removed from frame to disas-
semble crankcase. Refer to engine removal, pages
3.38 - 3.42. Remove the following components: cylin-
der head, cylinder, water pump impeller.
NOTE: The recoil starter, starter motor, starter drive,
flywheel, stator, cam chain and sprockets can be serv-
iced with the engine in the frame.
3.65
ENGINE
7/96
ENGINE
Starter Drive Removal/Inspection
1. Remove recoil housing bolts and remove housing.
2. Remove starter drive assembly. Note the thrust
washer located at the rear of the drive mechanism.
3. Inspect the thrust washer for wear or damage and
replace if necessary.
4. Measure the OD of the starter drive shaft on both ends
and record.
5. Measure the 10 of the bushing in the recoil housing
and in the crankcase and record. Measure in two
directions 90 apart to determine if bushing is out of
round. Calculate bushing clearance. Replace
bushing if clearance exceeds the service limit.
6. Inspect gear teeth on starter drive. Replace
starter drive if gear teeth are cracked, worn, or
broken.
7/96
3.66
o
Flywheel/Stator Removal/I nspection
1 . Remove flywheel nut and washer.
2. Install flywheel puller (PN 2870159) and remove
flywheel. CAUTION: Do not thread the puller bolts
into the flywheel more than 1/4" or stator coils may
be damaged.
3. Mark or note position of stator plate on crankcase.
4. Remove bolts and carefully remove stator
assembly, being careful not to damage crankshaft
bushing or oil seal on stator plate.
5. Remove oil passage O-Ring.
6. Remove large sealing O-Ring from outer edge of
stator plate.
Cam Chain/Tensioner Blade
1 . Remove bolt securing tensioner blade to crankcase.
2. Remove blade and inspect for cracks, wear, or
damage.
3. Remove cam chain. Inspect chain for worn or missing
rollers or damage. Stretch chain tight on a flat surface
and apply a 10 lb. (4.53 kg) load. Measure length of a
20 pitch section of chain. Replace if worn past service
limit.
3.67
ENGINE
7/96
ENGINE
4. Using the special socket, remove the crankshaft
slotted nut. NOTE: The slotted nut is a left hand
thread.
5. Remove cam chain drive sprocket and Woodruff key
from crankshaft.
6. Inspect sprocket teeth for wear or damage.
7. Inspect Woodruff key for wear.
8. Replace any worn or damaged parts.
One Way Valve
The one way valve prevents oil from draining out of the oil
tank and into the crankcase when the engine is off. It must
be clean and have adequate spring pressure in order to
seal properly.
1. Remove cap bolt, sealing washer, spring, and one
way valve from PTO side crankcase.
2. Inspect free length of spring and check coils for
distortion.
3. Inspect valve for wear.
4. Check seat area for nicks or foreign material that may
prevent proper sealing of valve.
Cran kcase Separation
1. Remove flange bolts (10) from magneto side
crankcase evenly in a criss-cross pattern.
2. Install crankcase puller tool on magneto side
crankcase with hole positioned over balancer gear.
NOTE: The flywheel key must be removed before
puller is installed.
3. Separate crankcase by tightening puller bolt in small
steps and tapping on the pump shaft lightly with a
plastic hammer.
4. Tap lightly on balancer gear with a brass drift through
the hole in the puller if necessary to ensure the
balancer shaft stays in the PTO side crankcase.
5. Continue to tighten puller center bolt while tapping on
pump shaft and balancer shaft until cases are
separated.
7/96
3.68
Inspect for Areas of
Tooth Wear or Damage
Oil Pump Removal/Inspection
1. Remove thrust washer from pump shaft.
2. Remove pump drive gear.
3. Inspect drive gear teeth for cracks, damage or
excessive wear.
4. Remove three oil pump retaining bolts and pump.
5. Inspect mating surface of crankcase and oil pump.
Check for nicks, burrs, or surface irregularities.
6. Remove the three screws and strainer screen from
pump.
7. Clean screen thoroughly.
3.69
ENGINE
7/96
ENGINE
8. Remove pump body screw and feed chamber cover.
9. Measure pump end clearance using a thickness gauge
and straight edge.
10. Measure clearance between outer feed rotor and
pump body with a thickness gauge.
11. Measure rotor tip clearance with a thickness gauge.
12. Remove inner and outer feed rotor and pump chamber
body.
13. Repeat measurements for scavenge rotor.
14. Remove inner and outer scavenge rotor and inspect
pump shaft for wear.
7/96
3.70
Oil Pump Assembly
ENGINE
1. Clean and dry all parts thoroughly. Apply clean engine oil to all parts. Do not use gasket sealer on the pump
body mating surfaces or oil passages will become plugged.
2. Install pump shaft and scavenge rotor drive pin.
3. Install outer scavenge rotor, inner scavenge rotor, and scavenge casing.
4. Install outer feed rotor and inner feed rotor drive pin.
5. Install inner feed rotor and feed chamber cover with screw.
6. Tighten screw securely.
7. Install screen on pump body.
8. Install oil pump on crankcase and torque bolts to 6 ft. Ibs. (.828 kg-m).
Counter Balancer Shaft Removal/Inspection
1. Remove the shim washer from the counter balancer
shaft.
2. Note the alignment dots on the balancer and
crankshaft gears, the marks must be aligned during
reassembly.
3. Remove the balancer shaft from the crankcase.
3.71 7/96
ENGINE
4. Inspect the balancer drive gear and pump shaft drive
gear.
5. Replace the shaft if gear teeth are abnormally worn or
damaged.
6. Inspect the balancer shaft bearings.
NOTE: Due to extremely close tolerances and minimal
wear, the balancer shaft ball bearings must be inspected
visually and by feel. Look for signs of discoloration, scor-
ing or galling. Turn the inner race of each bearing. The
bearings should turn smoothly and quietly. The outer race
of each bearing should fit tightly in the crankcase. The in-
ner race should be firm with minimal side to side move-
ment and no detectable up and down movement.
Crankshaft Removal/Inspection
1. Remove the shim washer from the crankshaft.
2. Support the PTO side crankcase and crankshaft;
press the crankshaft out. Be careful not to damage
the crankcase mating surface or connecting rod.
3. Use a thickness gauge to measure the connecting rod
big end side clearance.
7/96
3.72
ENGINE
4. Place the crankshaft in a truing stand or V-blocks and measure the runout on both ends with a dial indicator.
5. Measure the connecting rod big end radial clearance.
6. Inspect the crankshaft main bearing journals for scoring and abnormal wear.
Crankcase Bearing Inspection
1 . Remove the seal from the PTO side crankcase.
2. Inspect the crankshaft main bearings, balancer
shaft bearings, and pump shaft bearing.
NOTE: Due to extremely close tolerances and minimal
wear, the bearings must be inspected visually, and by
feel. Look for signs of discoloration, scoring or galling.
Turn the inner race of each bearing. The bearings
should turn smoothly and quietly. The outer race of
each bearing should fit tightly in the crankcase. The in-
ner race should be firm with minimal side to side move-
ment and no detectable up and down movement.
3. Support the crankcase and drive or press the main
bearings out of each crankcase.
4. To remove balancer shaft bearings and pump shaft
bearing use a blind hole bearing puller.
NOTE: Bearings are stressed during the removal process and should not be re-used!
Pump Shaft Oil Seall Water Pump Mechani-
cal Seal Removal
Replace the pump shaft seal and water pump mechani-
cal seal whenever the crankcase is disassembled.
1 . Remove the pump shaft bearing from the Magneto
(right hand) side crankcase.
2. Pry out the oil seal, noting the direction of
installation. See page 3.76 for seal installation.
3. Drive the water pump mechanical seal out of the
crankcase from inside to outside. Note: The new
mechanical seal must be installed .af.te.r the
crankcases are assembled. See Mechanical Seal
Installation, page 3.77.
3.73 7/96
ENGINE
Assembly
Crankcase Assembly
1 . Remove all traces of gasket sealer from the
crankcase mating surfaces. Inspect the surfaces
closely for nicks, burrs or damage.
2. Check the oil pump and oil gallery mating surfaces
to be sure they are clean and not damaged.
Bearing Installation
NOTE: To ease bearing installation, warm the crank-
case until hot to the touch. Place the bearings in a freez-
er.
1 , Install the bearings so the numbers are visible.
2. Drive or press new bearings into the crankcases,
using the proper driver. CAUTION: Press only on
outer race of bearing to prevent bearing damage.
70mm (2.755") driver- For crankshaft
main bearings.
46mm (1.810") For counter balancer
bearings.
28mm (1.1 00f!) For pump shaft bearing.
End Play Inspectionl Adjustment
Before reassembling the crankcase,the following
steps should be performed to determine the amount
of crankshaft, counter balancer shaft, and pump shaft
end play. Excessive end play may cause engine noise
at idle and slow speeds. Too little play will side load the
bearings which may lead to premature bearing failure.
Crankshaft
1 . Make sure all bearings are firmly seated in the
crankcase.
2. Measure the width of the crankshaft at the bearing
seats with a dial caliper or micrometer, and record
reading.
7/96
3.74
Assembly, Cont.
3. Measure the distance from the PTO crankcase
mating surface to the main bearing using a dial
caliper and a straight edge. Subtract the
thickness of the straightedge and record.
4. Measure the distance from the magneto
crankcase mating surface to the main bearing
using the same method. Remember to subtract
the straightedge from the measurement, and
record.
5. Add the readings obtained in step 3 and 4.
6. Subtract the crankshaft width measured in step 2
from the figure obtained in step 5.
7. Subtract the thickness of the existing shim from
the result of step 6 to determine if a different shim
is needed.
3.75
ENGINE
7/96
ENGINE
Assembly, Cont.
Counter Balancer
1. Make sure all bearings are firmly seated in the
crankcase.
2. Measure the width of the counter balancer shaft at
the bearing seats with a dial caliper or micrometer,
and record reading.
3. Measure the distance from the PTa crankcase
mating surface to the bearing using a dial caliper
and a straight edge. Subtract the thickness of the
straightedge and record.
4. Measure the distance from the magneto
crankcase mating surface to the bearing using the
same method.
5. Add the readings obtained in step 3 and 4.
6. Subtract the counter balancer shaft width
measured in step 2 from the figure obtained in step
5.
7. Subtract the thickness of the existing shim from
the result of step 6 to determine if a different shim
is needed.
Pump Shaft
1. Make sure the pump shaft bearing is firmly seated in the Magneto side crankcase.
2. Measure the distance from the magneto crankcase mating surface to the bearing using a dial caliper and a
straight edge. Subtract the thickness of the straightedge and record.
3. Install the gear on the oil pump and measure the width of the pump and gear. Subtract this measurement from
the measurement recorded in step 2.
4. Subtract the thickness of the existing shim from the result of step 3 to determine if a different shim is needed.
Pump Shaft Oil Seal Installation
1. Install the seal from the outside of the crankcase (water pump side) with the spring facing inward, toward the
pump shaft bearing.
2. Drive or press the seal into place using the 25mm (.985") seal driver, until flush with the bottom of the
mechanical seal bore.
3. Lubricate the seal lip with grease.
7/96
3.76
Assembly, Cont.
Crankshaft, Counter Balancer, and Oil Pump Installation
ENGINE
EH42PLJEHSOPL Engine
Lubricate all bearings with clean engine oil before assembly. See engine disassembly photos (page 3.43-3.73)
for reference.
Use the crankshaft installation tool kit PN 2871283 to prevent damage to the crankshaft and main bearings during
installation.
1. Install the crankshaft into the PTa side crankcase. Screw the threaded rod into the crankshaft until the
threads are engaged a minimum of one inch (25.4mm).
2. Install the collar, washer, and nut onto the threaded rod. Hold the crankshaft and tighten the nut to draw the
crankshaft into the main bearings until fully seated. Loosen the nut and remove the threaded rod from the
crankshaft. If removal is difficult, install two nuts on the end of the threaded rod and tighten against each other.
'I;
3. Install the proper shim on the magneto end of the crankshaft.
4. Place the balancer shaft in the PTa crankcase aligning the timing marks on the crankshaft and balancer
gears. Install the proper shim washer on the shaft.
5. Inspect the oil pump sealing surface on the crankcase. Apply a light film of engine oil to the surface and install
the oil pump.
NOTE: Do not use gasket sealer on the pump mating surfaces.
6. Align the drive gear with the drive pin on the pump shaft and install the gear. Be sure the gear is fully seated
and properly engaged.
7. Install the proper shim washer on the pump shaft.
Crankcase Assembly
1. Apply 3 Bond 1215 (PIN 2871557) to the crankcase mating surfaces. Be sure the alignment pins are in place.
2. Set the crankcase in position carefully to avoid damaging the pump shaft seal, and install the magneto end
crankshaft installation tool (follow instructions provided with tool kit PN 2871283). Draw the crankcase halves
together by tightening the nut on the tool and tapping lightly in the pump shaft area with a soft faced hammer to
maintain alignment. Continually check alignment of the cases during installation, closing the gap equally until
the surfaces are tightly seated.
3. Remove the tool.
4. Install the crankcase flange bolts and tighten in 3 steps in a criss-cross pattern to specified torque.
3.77 5/98
ENGINE
EH42PLJEH50PL Engine
Water Pump Mechanical Seal Installation
1 . Clean the seal cavity to remove all traces of old sealer.
2. Place a new mechanical seal in the seal drive collar, and install on the pump shaft.
3. Screw the guide onto the end of the pump shaft.
4. Install the washer and nut and tighten to draw seal into place until fully seated.
S. Remove the guide adaptor using the additional nut as a jam nut if necessary.
Water Pump Mechanical Seal Removal - Engine Installed
Water pump mechanical seal removal tool:
Replacement T-handle for 28721 OS:
287210S
2872106
This tool allows a technician to replace the mechanical water pump seal on EH42PL & EHSOPL engines without
removing the engine and splitting the cases.
Improper or careless use of this tool or procedure can result in a bent water pump shaft. Pump
shaft replacement requires engine removal and crankcase separation. Use caution while performing this proce-
dure. Make sure that the puller is parallel to the shaft at all times. Do not place side loads on the water pump
shaft or strike the puller or shaft in any way.
1. After the coolant has been drained, remove the water
pump cover, impeller and the sealing washer. (III. 1)
2. Slide the main puller body over the outer portion of the
mechanical seal as shown in III. 2 and turn T-Handle
clockwise until it contacts water pump shaft. Continue
rotating until outer portion of mechanical seal is sepa-
rated from the metal seal body.
3.77a
S I
, W h Sealing Washer
ea Ing as er l
(Copper or AIUminUm)\ 'L

Impeller
\
Oil
Seal
III. 1
Mechanical Seal
T-Handle
III. 2
5/98
Water Pump Mechanical Seal Removal M Engine Installed, Cont.
3. Insert the puller legs between the water pump drive
shaft and the remaining portion of the mechanical seal.
Attach the puller legs to the main puller body_ III. 3
4. Ensure that the split between the puller legs is fully sup-
ported by the main body of the tool (III 4).
5. Tighten the hex socket screws on the puller legs suffi-
ciently so the lip of the puller legs will grasp the me-
chanical seal. III. 5
6. Turn the puller T-Handle clockwise until it contacts the
water pump shaft. Continue rotating until the remaining
portion of mechanical seal has been removed from the
cases. III. 6 Pump shaft oil seal can also be replaced
at this time if necessary.
7. Special tool (PN 5131135) is required to install the new
mechanical seal. This tool is available separately and
it is also included in the CrankshaftlWater Pump Seal
Installation Kit (PN 2871283).
5/98
3.77b
III. 3
III. 4
III. 5
III. 6
ENGINE
EH42PUEH50PL Engine
Hex Socket Screws
Main puller
body
Position the split
90
0
to opening
on main puller
body
Lip must grasp inside
of mechanical seal.
Assembly, Cont.
3. Install the bottom rail with the gap at least 30from
the end of the expander on the side opposite the
top rail gap.(See "I.).
4. Insta" the second ring with the "R" mark facing up.
Position the end gap toward the rear (intake) side
of the piston.
5. Install the top ring (chrome faced) with the "R"
mark facing up and the end gap facing forward
(toward the exhaust). (See 111.).
6. Check to make sure the rings rotate freely in the
groove when compressed.
Piston Installation
1 . Clean the gasket surfaces on the cylinder and
crankcase. Remove a" traces of old gasket material.
2. Make sure the cylinder mounting bolt holes are clean
and free of debris.
3. Install a new circlip on one side of the piston with the
end gap facing up or down, and tang outward.
CAUTION: Circlips become deformed during the removal
process. Do not re-use old circlips. Do not compress the
new clip more than necessary upon installation to prevent
loss of radial tension. Severe engine damage may result
if circlips are re-used or deformed during installation.
4. Apply clean engine oil to the piston rings, ring lands,
piston pin bore, piston pin, and piston skirt. Lubricate
the connecting rod (both ends), balancer drive gear,
and crankshaft main bearing area.
5. Install the piston on the connecting rod with the arrow
facing the magneto (RH) end of the crankshaft. The
piston pin should be a push fit in the piston.
6. Insta" the other circlip with the gap facing up or down
and tang outward. (See Caution with step 3 above).
Push the piston pin in both directions to make sure the
clips are properly seated in the groove.
3.79
~
c;:::]
ENGINE
Ring Profile
Top
Mark up
Mark up
Second
Tang Outward
7/96
ENGINE
Assembly, Cont.
7. Place the dowel pins in the crankcase and install a
new cylinder base gasket.
Cylinder Installation
1 . Position the piston support block PN 2870390
beneath the piston skirt to support the piston during
cylinder installation.
2. Apply clean engine oil to the ring compressor (Snap
On PN RCL30) and install the compressor following
manufacturers instructions. CAUTION: Make sure
the oil control ring upper rail tab is positioned properly
in the notch of the piston. Verify all ring end gaps are
correctly located.
3. Apply clean engine oil liberally to the cylinder bore and
tapered area of the sleeve. Install the cylinder with a
slight rocking motion until the rings are captive in the
sleeve, and remove the ring compressor.
7/96
3.80
Assembly, Cont.
6. Push the cylinder downward until fully seated on the
base gasket.
7. Apply a light film of oil to the threads and flange
suriace of the cylinder mounting bolts.
8. Install all four bolts finger tight. Rotate the engine and
position the piston at BDC.
NOTE: If cam chain is installed, hold it up while rotating
the engine to avoid damage to the chain, drive sprocket
teeth, or tensioner blade.
9. Tighten the cylinder bolts in three steps in a criss cross
pattern and torque to specifications.
10. Install the two 6mm bolts.
Cylinder Head Installation
Clean the gasket suriaces on the cylinder head and cylinder.
Remove all traces of old gasket material.
Refer to disassembly photos.
1. Install the cam chain tensioner guide. Be sure bottom
end of guide is located properly in crankcase.
2. Install the two dowel pins and a new cylinder head
gasket.
3. Place the cylinder head on the cylinder. Apply a film of
engine oil to the cylinder head bolt threads and
washers, and hand tighten the bolts.
3.81
ENGINE
EH42PUEH50PL Engine
Guide in
recess
5/98
ENGINE
Assembly, Cont.
The following procedure must be used to torque the
cylinder head properly:
Cam Chain/Camshaft Installation
Install the cam chain over the crankshaft with the
plated links facing outward.
CAUTION: Serious engine damage may re-
sult if the camshaft is not properly timed to
the crankshaft.
IMPORTANT CAMSHAFT TIMING NOTE: In order to
time the camshaft to the crankshaft, the piston must be
precisely located at Top Dead Center (TOC). This can
be accomplished using one of two methods.
When the stator assembly is removed, follow the pro-
cedure outlined in Method 1. This method uses the
cam chain plated links to time the camshaft and the dot
on the cam chain drive sprocket to establish TOC (see
Method 1, page 3.83). It is important to note that this
method can only be used when the stator is removed
and the cam chain drive sprocket is in view. The plated
links are not used to time the camshaft when the fly-
wheel is installed.
When the stator assembly is installed use Method 2.
This method establishes accurate Top Dead Center
(TOC) by aligning the single mark on the flywheel with
the notch in the timing inspection hole (see Method 2,
page 3.85). The camshaft sprocket alignment pin
faces upward and directly in line with the crankshaft to
camshaft centerline.
7/96
3.82
Assembly, Cant.
Camshaft Installation - Timing Method 1. Refer to Illustration, Page 3.84
If the stator assembly is removed: NOTE: Use this
method only when the stator is removed and cam
chain drive sprocket is in view.
1 . Rotate the crankshaft until the dot on the cam
chain drive sprocket is aligned with the crankcase
projection (dot facing downward).
2. Align the single plated link on the cam chain with
the dotted tooth of the cam chain drive sprocket.
Use a wire to pull the chain up through the cylinder
and cylinder head, and secure it to hold the chain
in place.
3. Apply Polaris Low Temp Grease PN 2870577, or
moly grease to the camshaft main journals and
cam lobes. Lubricate automatic compression
release mechanism with clean engine oil. (To
install the compression release mechanism, refer
to page 3.48).
4. Install the camshaft with the lobes facing
downward and the sprocket alignment pin facing
upward.
5. Disconnect the wire from the cam chain and install
the cam sprocket with the two dots facing outward.
6. Loop the cam chain over the cam sprocket,
aligning the two plated links on the chain with the
two dots on the sprocket.
7. I nstall the sprocket on the camshaft. Apply Loctite
242 to the cam sprocket bolts and torque to
specifications.
8. Apply Loctite 515 or 518 Gasket Eliminator to the
camshaft end cap and install using a new O-ring.
9. Check all cam timing marks to verify proper cam
timing, and install the cam chain tensioner. See
Cam Chain Tensioner Installation page 3.87.
NOTE: The plated links will not align after engine
is rotated.
3.83
ENGINE
7/96
ENGINE
EH42PL/EH50PL Engine Assembly
10/96
Method 1 - Camshaft Timing with Stator Removed
Two Plated
Links
Two Dots on
Sprocket
Single Plated
Link and Dot
on Cam
Chain Drive
Sprocket
Crankcase Projection
NOTE: Plated links will not align after engine is rotated.
3.84
Assembly, Cont.
Camshaft Installation - Timing Method 2. Refer to Illustration, Page 3.86
1. Apply Polaris Low Temp Grease PN 2870577, or
molybdenum disulfide grease to the camshaft
main journals and cam lobes. Lubricate automatic
compression release mechanism with clean
engine oil. (To install the compression release
mechanism, refer to page 3.48).
2. Install the camshaft with the lobes facing
downward and the sprocket alignment pin facing
upward.
3. Disconnect the wire from the cam chain and rotate
the engine to align the .slo.Q.l.e (TOC ) timing mark
(Top Dead Center) on the flywheel with the notch
in the timing inspection window. Be sure to use
the single TOC mark when insta:ling the cam. Do
not use the advance marks. See III. on next page.
4. Loop the cam chain on the cam sprocket with the
dots on the sprocket facing outward and the
alignment pin notch facing directly upward.
5. Before positioning the sprocket on the camshaft,
check the position of the cam sprocket alignment
pin. When the cam is positioned properly, the cam
sprocket alignment pin is directly in line with the
crankshaft/camshaft centerline.
6. Install the sprocket on the camshaft. Apply Loctite
242 to the cam sprocket bolts and torque to
specifications.
7. Apply Loctite 515 or 518 Gasket Eliminator, or 3
Bond 1215 to the camshaft end cap and install
using a new O-Ring.
8. Check all cam timing marks to verify proper cam
timing, and install the cam chain tensioner body
with a new gasket.
9. After tensioner installation, rotate engine at least
two revolutions and re-check marks/timing.
3.85
Single (TOC)
Mark Aligned
ENGINE
7/96
ENGINE
EH42PL/EH50PL Engine Assembly
Rotation
..
7/96
Method 2 Camshaft Timing Using Flywheel TOC Mark
1/ Crankshaft to Camshaft Centerline
I
Sprocket Alignment Pin
Ii
Advance Marks
Recoil Housing Timing Inspection Hole
3.86
Assembly, Cant.
Cam Chain Tensioner Installation
1 . Release the ratchet pawl and push the tensioner
plunger all the way into the tensioner body.
2. Install the tensioner body with a new gasket and
tighten the bolts.
3. Install the spring, new sealing washer, and
tensioner plug.
4. Slowly rotate engine two to three revolutions and
re-check cam timing. NOTE: Plated links will not
align after engine is rotated. Check crankshaft
position by aligning dot on sprocket with
crankcase projection (or TDC mark if flywheel is
installed). Use cam sprocket locating pin (see
Timing Method 2) to check camshaft position.
Stator, Flywheel and Starter Drive Installation
NOTE: The stator, flywheel, starter drive, and recoil
can be assembled with the engine in the frame.
Stator
1. Apply a light film of grease to the crankshaft seal.
Apply molybdenum disulfide grease or assembly
lubricant to the crankshaft bushing.
2. Install a new O-Ring in the oil passage recess in
the crankcase.
3. Apply 3 Bond 1215, Loctite 515 or 518, or an
equivalent sealer to the stator plate outer surface
and install a new O-Ring.
4. Install the stator plate being careful notto damage
the seal. Align timing reference marks on the plate
and crankcase. Be sure the plate is fully seated.
3.87
ENGINE
7/96
ENGINE
EH42PLlEH50PL Engine
Assembly, Cont.
4. Torque bolts evenly to specification.
5. Seal stator wire grommet with 3 Bond 1215 or
equivalent sealer.
Flywheel
1. Install flywheel, washer, and nut. Torque flywheel
to specification.
Starter Drive
1. Be sure the washer is positioned on the back of
the d rive gear.
2. Apply grease to the drive bushing in the crankcase
and all moving surfaces of the starter drive
mechanism. Install the starter drive.
3. Install recoil housing gasket and recoil housing.
5/98
3.88
o
ENGINE
Assembly, Cont.
Rocker Shaft/Rocker Arm Assembly Installation
1 . Assemble rocker arms, rocker shaft, and shaft supports.
2. Install and tighten rocker arm shaft locating bolt.
3. Apply molybdenum disulfide grease to the cam lobes and cam follower surfaces.
4. Rotate the engine until the cam lobes are pointing downward.
5. Be sure the dowel pins are in place and install the rocker shaft assembly.
6. Apply a light film of engine oil to the threads of the bolts and tighten evenly.
7. Adjust valves according to the valve adjustment procedure found in Chapter 2, Maintenance.
S. Apply clean engine oil liberally to the valve springs, cam chain, rocker arms, and camshaft.
9. Place a new rocker cover gasket on the cylinder head and install the cover and bolts.
Thermostat Installation
Install the thermostat with one of the air bleed holes
positioned next to the upper thermostat cover bolt hole
as shown.
Oil Pipes
Install the oil pipes with new sealing washers. Tighten
all bolts evenly to specified torque.
3.89 7/96
ENGINE
Sealed Recoil
Recoil Disassemblyllnspection
CAUTION: The recoil is under spring tension. A face
shield and eye protection is required during this proce-
dure.
Replace any parts found to be worn or damaged.
1. Remove bolts and recoil housing.
2. Pull recoil rope so it is fully extended and tie a loose
knot at the rope guide bushing.
3. Check handle for cracks or damage which may allow
water or dirt to enter the recoil housing through the
rope. NOTE: The handle must also seal tightly on the
recoil housing to prevent water from entering.
4. Pull knot out of of recoil reel. Untie knot. remove rope
from reel.
10/96
3.90
Recoil Disassemblyllnspection, Cant.
5. Slowly remove spring tension by rotating reel
clockwise until all tension is removed.
6. Remove 6 mm bolt and spring washer securing
friction plate. Remove friction plate. Inspect plate for
wear or damage. Inspect plate friction spring for
wear, damage, and proper tension. The spring should
fit tightly on friction plate.
7. Remove ratchet pawl with spring and inspect.
Replace spring or ratchet pawl if worn, broken, or
damaged.
8. Slowly and carefully remove reel from recoil housing
making sure the spring remains in the housing.
Inspect the reel hub and bushing for wear.
9. Unwind rope and inspect for cuts or abrasions.
10. Inspect drive tab on hub return spring for damage. To
remove hub return spring, hold outer coils in place
with one hand and slowly remove spring one coil at a
time from the inside out.
Recoil Assembly
CAUTION: Be sure to wear a face shield and eye protec-
tion when performing this procedure.
To install a new spring:
1. Place spring in housing with the end positioned so the
spring spirals inward in a counterclockwise direction.
See photo above.
2. Hold spring in place and cut retaining wire.
To reinstall an old spring:
3. Hook outer tab in place in recoil housing and wind
spring in a counterclockwise direction one coil at a
time while holding the installed coils in place.
4. Lubricate the spring with light lubricant such as
Polaris Cable Lube (PN 287051 0) or low temperature
grease.
3.91
ENGINE
Sealed Recoil
10/96
ENGINE
Sealed Recoil
Recoil Assembly, Cant.
1. Route rope through guide bushing and into reel. Tie a
secure knot in end of the rope.
2. Wind rope counterclockwise onto the reel, as viewed
from ratchet side of reel as shown.
3. Lock rope into notch on outer edge of reel.
4. Apply a small amount of Polaris low temp grease or
equivalent to the center post of the housing and the
bushing.
5. Install reel into housing making sure the spring drive
tab on the reel engages the spring and the reel is fully
seated in the housing.
6. Apply downward pressure on the reel and rotate
counterclockwise approximately 6 turns to pre-wind
the spring. Continue rotating counterclockwise until
rope on outer edge aligns with rope guide bushing.
7. Release rope from notch and allow reel to rewind
completely. If more pre-wind is required, place rope in
notch and add additional turns of pre-wind.
8. Install ratchet pawl and return spring.
9. Reinstall friction plate. NOTE: The friction plate must
be positioned with both end tabs of the friction spring
on the drive side of the ratchet.
10. Torque friction plate retaining bolt to 5-6 ft. Ibs.
(.69-.828 kg-m).
11. Reinstall recoil housing using a new gasket. Seal
stator wire harness grommet with RTV silicone.
10/96
3.92
ENGINE
Spark Plug Fouling Checklist
Spark Plug Fouling - 2 Stroke Engines
Oil pump adjusted incorrectly
Adjustment (pilot screw)
Restricted air filter (main or pre-cleaner)
Improperly assembled air intake system
Oil pump shaft seal leaking (fills crankcase)
Oil pump arm or reel not returning properly (cable, arm or reel sticking)
Spark plug cap loose or faulty
Choke cable adjustment or plunger/cable sticking
Foreign material on choke plunger seat or plunger
Incorrect spark plug heat range or gap
Carburetor inlet needle and seat worn
Jet needle and/or needle jet worn or improperly adjusted
Excessive carburetor vibration (loose or missing needle jet locating pins)
Loose jets in carburetor or calibration incorrect for altitude/temperature
I ncorrect float level setting
PVT system calibrated incorrectly or components worn or mis-adjusted
Fuel quality poor (old) or octane too high
Low compression
Restricted exhaust
Weak ignition (loose coil ground, faulty coil, stator, or ETC switch)
ETC switch mis-adjusted
Oil line check valve leaking
Spark Plug Fouling - 4 Stroke Engines
Spark plug cap loose or faulty
Choke cable adjustment or plunger/cable sticking
Foreign material on choke plunger seat or plunger
Incorrect spark plug heat range or gap
Carburetor inlet needle and seat worn
Jet needle and/or needle jet worn or improperly adjusted
Excessive carburetor vibration (loose or missing needle jet locating pins)
Loose jets in carburetor or calibration incorrect for altitude/temperature
Incorrect float level setting
PVT system calibrated incorrectly or components worn or mis-adjusted
Fuel quality poor (old) or octane too high
Low compression
Restricted exhaust
Weak ignition (loose coil ground, faulty coil, stator, or ETC switch)
ETC switch mis-adjusted
Restricted air filter (main or
Improperly assembled air intake system
Restricted engine breather system
Oil contaminated with fuel
Restricted oil tank vent
3.93 10/96
ENGINE
2 Stroke Engine Troubleshooting
Condition Possible Cause Action/Possible Cause
Engine turns over but -No fuel -Add fuel as required
does not start
-Dirt in fuel line or filter -Clean line, replace filter
-Fuel will not pass through on-off valve -Clean or replace valve as necessary
(petcock)
-Tank vent plugged -Repair vent system
-Carb starter circuit -Clean or replace as needed
-Engine flooded -Turn off fuel and drain crankcase
a. Inspect carb venting system for obstructions
b. Inspect carb needle and seat
-Low compression (below 100 PSI at a. I nspect head gasket
sea level) b. Inspect piston and cylinder (repair as required)
-No spark
-Repair ignition system (refer to ignition trouble-
shooting
Engine does not turn -Dead battery -Charge or replace battery (refer to battery testing)
over
-Starter motor does not turn -Repair starter (refer to starter testing)
-Engine stuck -Repair engine as required
Engine runs but will not -Plugged carb pilot system -Clean or replace pilot jet
idle
-Carb misadjusted -Adjust as per specification
-Choke not adjusted properly -Adjust choke as per specification
-Low compression -Repair engine as required
-Crankcase leak -Repair crankcase as required
Engine idles but will not -Broken throttle cable -Replace cable
rev up
-Obstruction in air intake -Clean or repair air intake
-I ncorrect carb jetting -Jet as per jetting chart
-ETC limiting speed (1989 and newer) -Repair ETC (refer to ETC troubleshooting)
-Reverse speed limiter limiting speed -Repair reverse speed limiter (refer to reverse speed
limiter troubleshooting chart)
-Incorrect ignition timing -Check and adjust ignition timing
-Restricted exhaust system -Repair or replace exhaust system
Engine has low power -Cylinder, piston and ring wear or
damage (check compression)
-Repair cylinder and piston as needed
-PVT not operating properly -Clean, repair or replace as required
-Plugged exhaust -Repair or replace exhaust system
Piston failure -Lack of lubrication -Fill oil tank and bleed pump
Scoring
-Check pump for proper operation, pinched vent line
-Restricted oil delivery (lines, filter, check valve)
-Oil pump drive gear failure
Melted piston top
-Engine overheating -Install fan or check fan operation, test cooling sys
-Lean air fuel ratio
tem, loose or broken impeller
-Air leak in crankcase
-Clean carb and jet as per chart
-Low octane fuel
-Repair as needed
-Incorrect ignition timing
-Use 87 octane minimum
-Incorrect spark plug
-Adjust timing as per specifications
Skirt breakage
-Piston fatigue from scoring
-Install recommended spark plug
-Excessive piston-to-cylinder clear-
Excessive smoke and ance -Repair cylinder (Check air filter and air box)
carbon buildup
-Oil pump misadjusted
-Synchronize pump to carb (refer to oil pump bleed-
-Oil pump cable not allowing pump to
ing and adjustment)
return to idle position -Lubricate or replace cable
Engine coolant found in -Water pump gasket -I nspectlreplace gasket
counter balance assem-
-Water pump seal -Replace
bly (Liquid cooled mod-
els)
7/96
3.94
Engine Turns Over But Fails to Start
No fuel
Dirt in fuel line or filter
Fuel will not pass through fuel valve
Fuel pump inoperative/restricted
Tank vent plugged
Carb starter circuit
Engine flooded
Low compression (high cylinder leakage)
No spark (Spark plug fouled)
Engine Does Not Turn Over
Dead battery
Starter motor does not turn
Engine seized, rusted, or mechanical failure
Engine Runs But Will Not Idle
Restricted carburetor pilot system
Carburetor misadjusted
Choke not adjusted properly
Low compression
Crankcase breather restricted
Engine Idles But Will Not Rev Up
Spark plug fouled/weak spark
Broken throttle cable
Obstruction in air intake
Air box removed (reinstall all intake components)
Incorrect or restricted carburetor jetting
ETC switch limiting speed
Reverse speed limiter limiting speed
Carburetor vacuum slide sticking/diaphragm damaged
Incorrect ignition timing
Restricted exhaust system
Engine Has Low Power
Spark plug fouled
Cylinder, piston, ring, or valve wear or damage (check compression)
PVT not operating properly
Restricted exhaust muffler
Carburetor vacuum slide sticking/diaphragm damaged
Dirty carburetor
Piston Failure Scoring
Lack of lubrication
Dirt entering engine through cracks in air filter or ducts
Engine oil dirty or contaminated
3.95
ENGINE
4 Stroke Troubleshooting
7/96
ENGINE
Excessive Smoke and Carbon Buildup
Excessive piston-to-cylinder clearance
Wet sumping
Worn rings, piston, or cylinder
Worn valve guides or seals
Restricted breather
Air filter dirty or contaminated
Low Compression
Decompressor stuck
Cylinder head gasket leak
No valve clearance or incorrectly adjusted
Cylinder or piston worn
Piston rings worn, leaking, broken, or sticking
Bent valve or stuck valve
Valve spring broken or weak
Valve not seating properly (bent or carbon accumulated on sealing surface)
Rocker arm sticking
Overheating
Low coolant level - air in system
Faulty pressure cap or system leaks
Lean mixture (restricted jets, vents, fuel pump or fuel valve)
Fuel pump output weak
Restricted radiator (internally or cooling fins)
Water pump failure
Cooling system restriction
Cooling fan inoperative
Ignition timing misadjusted
Low oil level
Spark plug incorrect heat range
Faulty hot light circuit
Thermostat stuck closed
Backfiring
ETC or speed limiter system malfunction
Fouled spark plug or incorrect plug or plug gap
Carburetion faulty - lean condition
Exhaust system air leaks
Ignition system faulty:
Spark plug cap cracked/broken
Ignition coil faulty
Ignition or kill switch circuit faulty
Ignition timing incorrect
Sheared flywheel key
Poor connections in ignition system
System wiring wet
Valve sticking
Air leaks in intake
Lean condition
7/96
3.96
EH42PL/EH50PL Cooling System Troubleshooting
Overheating
Insufficient/wrong type coolant
Air in system
Thermostat stuck closed or not opening completely
Radiator cap faulty (fails to pressurize)
ENGINE
Restricted system (mud or debris in radiator fins or restriction to air flow, passages blocked in
radiator, lines, pump, or water jacket)
Water pump inoperative
Fan motor inoperative
Temperature Too Low
Thermostat stuck open
Leak at Water Pump Weep Hole
Faulty water pump mechanical seal (coolant leak)
Faulty pump shaft oil seal (oil leak)
3.97 7/96
ENGINE
Piston Damage Checkl ist
Piston Damage Checklist - 2 Stroke Engines
(Some items may not apply to all engines)
Oil tank empty; oil wrong type or contaminated
Oil filter restricted
Oil pump inoperative (drive gear, cable, pump); oil check valve restricted or faulty
Lean carburetion or oil delivery due to: Vent lines pinched, kinked, or restricted (carburetor, oil tank,
fuel tank etc.); Restricted oil or fuel passages, incorrect jetting for altitude/temperature
Inoperative fan or low fan RPM (check fan motor amp draw-should be less than 6.5 amps; low bat-
tery, fan switch or connections, wiring)
Cooling system, cooling fins, radiator fins restricted, air flow obstructed
Incorrect piston to cylinder clearance
Air leaks in intake tract / air intake ducts / mounting flange (damaged or loose)
Foreign material ingestion
Air in oil pump / lines
Air in cooling system / low coolant level
Poor fuel quality
Restricted exhaust
Incorrect ignition timing
Spark plug heat range incorrect
Fan blade incorrectly installed or damaged
Air box, carburetor, or exhaust modified
5/98
3.98
CHAPTER 4
FUEL SYSTEM/CARBURETION
Jetting Guidelines ............................ 4.1
Jetting Compensation Charts ................... 4.1-4.40
Jet Part Numbers ............................. 4.4p
Oil and Fuel Tank Asm. Exploded View, Gen II ... 4.5
Fuel Tank Asm. Exploded View, Magnum ........ 4.6
Oil and Fuel Tank Asm. Exploded View, Gen III ... 4.7
Fuel Tank Asm. Exploded View, Gen IV .......... 4.8
Fuel Tank Asm. Exploded View, Sportsman 500 .. 4.9
Fuel Flow Diagrams ........................... 4.10
Mikuni VM Carburetor, Exploded View ........... 4.11
Carburetor Function ........................... 4.12
Carburetor Component Functions ............... 4.13-4.15
Starter System Operation ...................... 4.16
Pilot System Operation ........................ 4.17
Slide Cutaway Operation ...................... 4.18
Jet Needle/Needle Jet Operation ............... 4.19
Main System Operation ....................... 4.20
Component Effect vs. Throttle Opening .......... 4.21
Mikuni VM Carburetor System Components ...... 4.22
Mikuni BST 34 Carburetor, Exploded View ....... 4.23
Mikuni CV Carburetor System Components ...... 4.24
Mikuni CV Carburetor Operation ................ 4.25-4.27
Magnum Fuel Tank Removal ................... 4.28
Magnum Carburetor Removal .................. 4.29
Mikuni CV Carburetor Disassembly ............. 4.30-4.32
Mikuni CV Carburetor Cleaning ................. 4.33-4.35
Mikuni CV Carburetor Assembly/Inspection ...... 4.36-4.38
Mikuni CV Carburetor Installation ............... 4.39
Mikuni CV Needle and Seat Pressure Test ....... 4.40
Mikuni CV Float Bowl Draining ................. 4.41
Fuel Pump Exploded View ..................... 4.43
Fuel Pump Disassembly/Inspection/Assembly .... 4.44
Troubleshooting .............................. 4.45-4.46
1996 Specifications
Jetting Guidelines
Changes in altitude and temperature affect air density, which is essentially the amount of oxygen available for
combustion. In low elevations and cold temperatures, the air has more oxygen. In higher elevations and higher
temperatures, the air is less dense.
Carburetors on Polaris ATVs are calibrated for an altitude of 0-3000 ft. (0-900 meters) and ambient temperatures
between +40 and +80F (+5to +26C). All carburetors must be re-calibrated if operated outside the production
temperature and/or altitude range. The main jet installed in production is not correct for all operating conditions.
A main jet that is too small will cause a lean operating condition and may cause serious engine damage.
Jet the carburetors carefully for elevation and temperature according to the jetting charts in this chapter,
or in the Owner's Safety and Maintenance Manual for each model.
NOTE: Maximum engine efficiency and horsepower are directly related to proper carburetor settings. The follow-
ing charts have been established as a guideline for selecting optimum jetting for varying temperature and altitude
conditions. Air screw or fuel screw adjustment will affect mixture from approximately 0 to 1/4 throttle setting and
should be adjusted as follows:
Air Screw (2 stroke models)
Turn the air screw in (clockwise) 1/4 turn for each 30below 60 F. Turn the air screw out (counterclockwise) 1/4
turn for each 30above 60 F.
Fuel Screw (4 stroke models)
Turn the fuel screw in (clockwise) 1/4 turn for each 30above 60 F. Turn the fuel screw out (counterclockwise)
1/4 turn for each 30below 60 F.
IMPORTANT: The following guidelines must be followed when establishing a main jet setting:
1. Select the lowest anticipated temperature at which the machine will be operated.
2. Determine the lowest approximate altitude at which the machine will be operated.
3. Tracing down and across on the chart, use the intersecting main jet recommendation.
4. Clutching changes may also be required for changes in elevation. Refer to clutching charts in Chapter 6 for
recommendations.
Jetting Compensation for Altitude and Temperature - 1996 Models
Trail Blazer
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
Production Jetting Specifications
Below 0 to +40F +40
0
to +80F +80
0
&
OF -18to +5C +5' to +2SC Above OF
Carburetor Type ........ Mikuni VM30SS
Below 26 &
18C Above C
0-900 150 140 130 120
Main Jet 130
(0-3000) Pilot Jet 40
900-1800 140 130 120 110
Jet Needle 5DP7-3
Altitude (3000-S000) Needle Jet 0-4 (169)
Meters
Cut Away 2.0
(Feet) 1800-2700 125 120 110 100
(SOOO-9000) Air Screw 1 Turn
2700-3700 115 110 100 95
(9000-12000)
4.1 5/98
FUEL SVSTEM/CARBURETION
1996 Specifications
Jetting Compensation for Altitude and Temperature
Trail Boss
0-900
(0-3000)
900-1800
Altitude (3000-6000)
Meters
(Feet) 1800-2700
(6000-9000)
2700-3700
(9000-12000)
Xpress 300
0-900
(0-3000)
900-1800
Meters
(Feet) 1800-2700
(6000-9000)
2700-3700
(9000-12000)
c::J Turn in air screw 1/2 to 3/4 turn.
Below
OF
Below
-18e
170
155
140
130
Below
O'F
Below
-18e
180
165
150
135
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
0' to +40'F +400to +80F
-18to +5e +5 to +26e
155 145
145 135
130 120
120 110
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
O to +40F
-18to +5'C
170
+40'to +80'F
+5 to +26C
155
I?I - Shaded zone should drop Jet Needle one position (raise E-Clip)
Xplorer 300
0-900
(0-3000)
900-18.00
Meters
(Feet) 1800-2700
(6000-9000)
2700-3700
(9000-12000)
c:J Turn in air screw 1/2 to 3/4 turn.
Below
OF
Below
-18'e
180
165
150
135
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
0' to +40'F
-18to +5e
170
+40'to +80F
+5 to +26C
155
II - Shaded zone should drop Jet Needle one position (raise E-Clip)
7/96
4.2
+80' &
Above OF
26 &
Above 'e
135
125
115
100
+80' &
Above OF
26 &
Above e
145
+80' &
Above OF
26' &
Above C
145
Main Jet 145
Pilot Jet 40
Jet Needle 5DP7-3
Needle Jet 0-4 (169)
Cut Away 2.0
Air Screw 1.0 Turns Out
Carburetor Type. . . . . . .. Mikuni VM30SS
Main Jet 155
Pilot Jet 40
Jet Needle 5DP7-3
Cut Away 2.0
Production Jetting SpeCifications
Main Jet 155
Pilot Jet 40
Jet Needle 5DP7-3
Cut Away 2.0
Scrambler
Sport
0-900
(03000)
900-1800
Meters
(Feet) 18002700
(60009000)
2700-3700
(9000-12000 )
(EARLY)
Xpress 400
Sportsman 4 x 4
Xplorer 400
4006)(6
0-900
(03000)
900-1800
Meters
(Feet) 1800-2700
(60009000)
2700-3700
(900012000)
Below
O'F
Below
18'C
290
270
240
220
Below
OF
Below
18'C
240
220
200
185
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
0to +40F +40'to +80'F
18'to +5C +5' to +26C
270 250
250 230
230 210
210 190
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
0' to +40'F
18to +5'C
230
+400to +80'F
+5' to +26'C
210
c::J - Shaded zone should drop Jet Needle one position (raise E-Clip)
c:::J . Turn in air screw 1/2 to 3/4 turn.
(LATE)
Sportsman 4 x 4
Xplorer/Xpress 400
4006x6
0-900
(03000)
9001800
Altitude (30006000)
Meters
(Feet) 1800-2700
(6000-9000)
2700-3700
(9000-12000)
Below
OF
Below
18
c
C
240
220
200
185
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
0' to +40'F
-1810 +5'C
230
+400to +80'F
+5' to +26'C
210
In.!!.;.! Shaded zone should drop Jet Needle one position (raise E-Clip)
c::::J - Turn Air Screw in 1/2 to 3/4 turn
+80 &
Above 'F
26' &
Above 'C
230
210
195
175
+80 &
Above 'F
26' &
Above 'C
195
+80' &
Above 'F
26' &
Above 'C
195
4.3
1996 Specifications
Main Jet 250
Pilot Jet 35
Jet Needle 6F9-3
Cut Away 1.5
Main Jet 210
Pilot Jet 30
Jet Needle 60H29-3
Cut Away 1.5
Main Jet 200
Pilot Jet 30
Jet Needle 6CEY6-3
Cut Away 1.5
5/98
1996 Specifications
Magnum 2 x 4
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
Magnum 4 x 4
Magnum 6 x 6
Below O to +40'F +400to +80F +80 &
OF -1810 +5C +5 10 +26C Above OF
Below 26' &
-18C Above C
0-900 150 145 140 135
(0-3000)
900-1800 145 140 132.5 122.5
Meters
(Feet) 1800-2700 140 135
(6000-9000)
2700-3700 132.5 125
(9000-12000)
1;:;:1 - Shaded zone pilot screw in 1/2 turn
Sportsman 500
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
Below O to +40'F +40to +80'F +80 &
OF -18to +5C +5 to +26C Above OF
Below 26 &
-18'C Above 'C
0-900 152.5 147.5 142.5 137.5
(0-3000)
900-1800 147.5 142.5 135 127.5
Altitude
(3000-6000)
Meters
(Feet)
1800-2700 142.5 137.5
(6000-9000)
2700-3700 135 127.5
(9000-12000)
II - Shaded zone should drip jet needle one position (raise E-Clip)
7/96
4.4
Carburetor Type ........ Mikuni SST 34
Carburetor 1.0. 42PL01 B
Main Jet 140
Pilot Jet 40
Pilot Air Jet 160
Jet Needle 5F81-3
Needle Jet P-8
Throttle Valve #100
Pilot Screw 2.5 Turns Out
Carburetor 1.0. 42PL01 B
Main Jet 142.5
Pilot Jet 42.5
Pilot Air Jet 160
Jet Needle 5078-3
Needle Jet P-1
Throttle Valve #100
Pilot Screw 1 .5 Turns Out
Sportsman 500
Xplorer 500
Below
oaF
Below
-18C
0900 152.5
(0-3000)
Altitude
900-1800 147.5
Meters
(3000-6000)
(Feet)
1800-2700 140
(6000-9000)
2700-3700 135
(9000-12000)
1::;1 Shaded zone pilot screw in 1/2 turn.
Scrambler 500
0-900
(0-3000)
Altitude
900-1800
Meters
(3000-6000)
(Feet)
1800-2700
(6000-9000)
2700-3700
(9000-12000)
Below
OF
Below
-18C
135
130
122.5
117.5
1;;;;;1 - Shaded zone pilot screw in 1/2 turn.
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
0' to +40F +40'to +80F
-18to +5C +5" to
+26C
147.5
142.5
142.5 137.5
135
130
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
0 to .f.40F
-18to +5C
130
125
120
115
.f.400to .f.80F
+5 to
.f.26C
125
120
+80 8<
Above of
26 &
Above
C
137.5
130
.f.80 &
Above OF
26 &
Above
'C
120
115
4.4c
1997 Specifications
Carburetor I.D. 42PL01B
Main Jet 142.5
Pilot Jet 42.5
Pilot Air Jet 160
Jet Needle 5D78-3
Needle Jet P-1
Throttle Valve #100
Pilot Screw 2.0
Carburetor I.D. 42PL01 B
Main Jet 125
Pilot Jet 42.5
Pilot Air Jet 160
Jet Needle 5D78-3
Needle Jet P-3
Throttle Valve #100
Pilot Screw 2.0
10/96
1998 Specifications
1998 TRAIL BOSS
W98AA25C
(Engine - EC-25PFE-10)
SPECIFICATIONS AND CLUTCHING AND JETTING GUIDELINES
FOR ALTITUDE AND TEMPERATURE
Carburetor, Mikuni VM30SS
Main Jet - 145 Pilot Jet - 40 Float Level - Float arm parallel with bowl gasket surtace (Page 4.22)
Jet Needle - 5DP7-3 Needle Jet - 0-4 (169)
Air Screw - 1 Turn Cutaway - 2.0 Needle Seat 2.5
Flywheel Marking: FF45 COl Marking: CU2167 Alternator Output: 150 Watts
Ignition Timing: 25 BTDC @ 3000 RPM ( 3) Spark Plug: BR8ES Gap: .028 (.7mm)
Operating RPM: 6000 ( 200) Idle RPM: 700 ( 100)
Turn out (counterclockwise) one quarter turn for each 30 degrees above 60 degrees F.
Observe the following altitude recommendations and set up the vehicle accordingly.
Altitude AMBIENT Below OF 0to 40F +40to +80F +80F & Above
TEMPERATURE
(Below -18C) (-18C to +5C) (+5C to +26C) (+26C & Above)
Meters 0-900 170 155 145 135
(Feet) (0-3000)
900-1800 155
(3000-6000)
1800-2700 140
(6000-9000)
2700-3700 130
(9000-12000)
r I - Pilot air screw out 1/2- 3/4 turn from lightly seated
Clutching
Altitude Shift Clutch Driven
Weight Spring Helix
Meters 0-900 16 Blue/Green 2-2
(Feet) (0-3000)
900-1800 16 Blue/Green 2-1
(3000-6000)
1800-2700 16 Mod Blue/Green 2-2
(6000-9000)
2700-3700 16 Mod Blue/Green 2-2
(9000-12000)
5/98
4.4d
1998 Specifications
1998 TRAIL BLAZER
W98BA25C
Carburetor VM30SS
Main Jet - 130 Pilot Jet - 40 Float Level - Float arm parallel with bowl gasket surface (Page 4.22)
Cut Away - 2.0 Air Screw - 1 Turn CCW from Seat*
Needle Seat - 2.5
Ignition Timing: 25 BTDC @ 3000 RPM ( 3) Spark Plug: BR8ES Gap: .028 (.7mm)
*Turn in (clockwise) one quarter turn for each 30 degrees below 60 degrees F.
Altitude Below OF 0to 40F +40to +80F +80F & Above
Meters 0-900 150 140 130 120
(Feet) (0-3000)
900-1800 140 130 120 1tO
(3000-6000) ." .
.
1800-2700 125 120
I
.
110 ....
100
. ...
(6000-9000)
.'
. , ......... ...
2700-3700 115
110
.::. . ' ... 100.. ..
95
.. .
(9000-12000)
1
.'.
.......
,..... I -Turn air screw out 1/2 turn (counterciockwise)Shaded Zone should
drop Jet Needle one position to lower jet needle
Clutching
Weight Spring Helix
Meters 0-900 G Blue/Green 2-2
(Feet) (0-3000)
900-1800 G Blue/Green 2-1
(3000-6000)
1800-2700 16 Blue/Green 2-2
(6000-9000)
2700-3700 16 Blue/Green 2-1
(9000-12000)
4.4e 5/98
1998 Specifications
XPRESS 300
W98CA28C
Carburetor VM30SS
Cut Away - 2 Nickel/Aluminum Air Screw - 1.5 Turn CCW from Seat*
Needle Seat - 2.5
Flywheel Marking: FF4574 CDI Marking: CU2513 Alternator Output: 150 Watts
Ignition Timing: 25BTDC @ 3000 RPM ( 2) Spark Plug: BR8ES Gap: .028 (.7mm)
Altitude
Meters
(Feet)
AMBIENT
TEMPERATURE
0-900
(0-3000)
900-1800
(3000-6000)
1800-2700
(6000-9000)
2700-3700
(9000-12000)
Below OaF
(Below -18C)
180
0to 40F
(-18C to +5C)
170
+40to +80F +80F & Above
(+5C to +26C) (+26C & Above)
155 145
I..,.::.':.. .. ... ,.. ... '...'. '1- Shaded Zone should drop Jet Needle one position (raise E-Clip)
.. - Turn Air Screw in 1/2 to 3/4 Turn
Clutching
Weight Spring Helix
Meters 0-900 G Blue/Green 2-2
(Feet) (0-3000) 48GR
900-1800 G Blue/Green 2-2 or
(3000-6000) 48GR 2-1
1800-2700 F Blue/Green 2-2
(6000-9000) 45GR
2700-3700 F Blue/Green 2-1
(9000-12000) 45GR
5/98
4.4f
1998 Specifications
XLPORER 300
W98CC28C
Carburetor VM30SS
Cut Away - 2 Nickel/Aluminum Air Screw - 1.5 Turn CCW from Seat*
Needle Seat - 2.5
Ignition Timing: 25BTDC @ 3000 RPM ( 2) Spark Plug: BR8ES Gap: .028 (.7mm)
Altitude AMBIENT Below OaF 0to 40F +40to +80F +80F & Above
TEMPERATURE
Meters
(Feet)
Meters
(Feet)
0-900 180 155 145
(0-3000)
900-1800 140
(3000-6000)
1800-2700 150
(6000-9000)
2700-3700 135
(9000-12000)
r' . ....... .'1- Shaded Zone should drop Jet Needle one position (raise E-Clip)
Turn Air Screw in 1/2 to 3/4 Turn
Clutching
Weight Spring Helix
0-900 G Blue/Green 2-2
(0-3000) 48GR
900-1800 G Blue/Green 2-2 or
(3000-6000) 48GR 2-1
1800-2700 F Blue/Green 2-2
(6000-9000) 45GR
2700-3700 F Blue/Green 2-1
(9000-12000) 45GR
4.49
5/98
1998 Specifications
1998 XPLORER 400
W98CC38C
(Engine .. EC38PLE .. 06)
Main Jet ~ 200 Pilot Jet - 30 Float Level - Float arm parallel with bowl gasket surface (Page 4.22)
Jet Needle - 6CEY6-3 Needle Jet - 0-6 (480) Air Screw - 1.5 Turns
Needle Seat - 2.5
Ignition Timing: 23.5 BTDC @ 3000 RPM ( 1.5) Spark Plug: BR8ES Gap: .028 (.7mm)
TEMPERATURE
Meters 0-900 230 220 200 185
(Feet) (0-3000)
900-1800 210
(3000-6000)
1800-2700 185
(6000-9000)
2700-3700 165
(9000-12000)
rr=l ... '............ ... -Shaded Zone should drop Jet Needle one position (raise E-Clip)
rr=l -Turn Air Screw in 1/2 to 3/4 Turn From Standard Setting
Clutching
Weight Spring Helix
Meters 0-900 S-55 Blue/Green 2/2
(Feet) (0-3000)
900-1800 S-55 Blue/Green 2/2 or 2/1
(3000-6000)
1800-2700 S Blue/Green 2/1
(6000-9000)
2700-3700 S Blue/Green 2/1
(9000-12000)
5/98
4.4h
1998 Specifications
1998 SPORT 400
W98BA38C
(Engine - EC-38PLE-07)
Main Jet - 230 Pilot Jet - 35 Float Level - Float arm parallel with bowl gasket suriace (Page 4.22)
Jet Needle - 6CEY6-3 Needle Jet - 0-6 (480) Air Screw - 1.5 Turns*
Needle Seat 2.5 (Large Diameter)
Ignition Timing: 23.5 BTDC @ 3000 RPM ( 3) Spark Plug: BR8ES Gap: .028 (.7mm)
TEMPERATURE
(Below -18C) (-18C to +SOC) (+soC to +26C) (+26C & Above)
Meters 0-900 270 250 230 210
(Feet) (0-3000) Air Screw .5 Turn Air Screw 1.0 Turn Air Screw 1.5 Turn Air Screw 1.5 Turn
900-1800 250 230 210 195
(3000-6000 ) Air Screw .5 Turn Air Screw 1.0 Turn Air Screw 1.5 Turn AirScrew 1.75 Turn
1800-2700 220 210 195
.... :.: ..
175
(6000-9000) Air Screw 1.5 Turn Air Screw 1.5 Turn Air Screw 1.75.Turn Air Screw 1. 75 Turn
2700-3700 200 190:.
.....
175 160
(9000-12000) Air Screw 1.5 Turn Air Screw 1;75 Turn .... Screw .1.75 Turn AirScrew 1.75 Turn
"--_ ..... 1 - Turn Air Screw out 1/4 turn
Clutching
Weight Spring Helix
Meters 0-900 S-55 White 2/2
(Feet) (0-3000)
900-1800 8-55 White 2/2 or 2/1
(3000-6000)
1800-2700 8 White 2/1
(6000-9000)
2700-3700 S orC White 2/1
(9000-12000)
4.4i 5/98
..
1998 Specifications
1998 Scrambler 400
W98BC38C
(Engine - EC38PLE-09)
Carburetor VM34SS
Cut Away - 1.5 Nickel/Aluminum Air Screw - 1.5 Turn CCW from Seat*
Jet Needle - 6CEY6-3 Needle Jet - 0-6 (480)
Needle Seat - 2.5 (Large Diameter)
Ignition Timing: 23.5BTDC @ 3000 RPM ( 3) Spark Plug: BR8ES Gap: .028 (.7mm)
*Turn in (clockwise) one quarter turn for each 30below 60 F.
Turn out (counterclockwise) one quarter turn for each 30 above 60 F.
TEMPERATURE
Meters 0-900 270 MJ 250 MJ 230 MJ 210 MJ
(Feet) (0-3000) 0.5 AS 1.0AS 1.5AS 1.5AS
900-1800 250 MJ 230 MJ 210 MJ 195 MJ
(3000-6000) 0.5 AS 1.0AS 1.5 AS 1.75 AS
1800-2700 220 MJ 210 MJ 195 MJ 175 MJ
(6000-9000) 1.5 AS 1.5AS 1.75 1.75 AS
2700-3700 200 MJ 190 MJ 175 MJ 160 MJ
(9000-12000) 1.5AS 1.75 AS 1.75 AS 1.75 AS
MJ - Indicates Main Jet Size
AS - Indicates Air Screw Turns out from Lightly Seated Position
Clutching
Weight Spring Helix
Meters 0-900 8-55 White 2/2
(Feet) (0-3000)
900-1800 S-55 White 2/2 or
(3000-6000) 2/1
1800-2700 8 White 2/1
(6000-9000)
2700-3700 S orC White 2/1
(9000-12000)
5/98
4.4j
1998 Specifications
Magnum 2 x 4
W98AA42A
(Engine - EH-42PLE-02)
Carburetor, Mikuni BST 34 (Marking 42PL01 B)
Main Jet - 140 Pilot Jet - 40 Pilot Screw - 2.S turns out from lightly seated*
Jet Needle - SF14-3 Needle Jet - P-9
Needle Seat - 1.S Pilot Air Jet - 160
Float Level 13.0mm (Page 4.37)
Throttle Valve - #100
Flywheel Marking: FF9S02 COl Marking: CU2S09 Alternator Output: 200 Watts
Ignition Timing: 30BTDC @ 3S00 RPM ( 3) Spark Plug: BKRSES Gap: .028 (.7mm)
*Turn in (clockwise) one quarter turn for each 30 degrees above 60 degrees F.
TEMPERATURE
Meters 0-900 150 145 140 135
(Feet) (0-3000)
900-1800 145 140 135 130
(3000-6000)
1800-2700 137.5 132.5 127.5
i.
122.5
(6000-9000) I ,:
2700-3700 132.5 127.5

1 2 2 ~ 5
: .'.:
, 1 1 7 ~ 5
(9000-12000)
I
.. " .,'
'.'" .. ':.",
, " :
.............................. 1 - Pilot screw in 1/2 turn from standard setting
Clutching
Weight Spring Helix
Meters 0-900 10MH Blue/Green 2-2
(Feet) (0-3000)
900-1800 10WH Blue/Green 2-2 or
(3000-6000) 2-1
1800-2700 10RH Blue/Green 2-1
(6000-9000)
2700-3700 10RH Blue/Green 2-1
(9000-12000)
4.4k 5/98
,
'.
1998 Specifications
Magnum 4 x 4
W98AC42A
SPECIFICATIONS AND CLUTCHING AND JEITING GUIDELINES
Carburetor, Mikuni BST 34 (Marking 42PL01 B)
Main Jet - 140 Pilot Jet - 40 Pilot Screw - 2.S turns out from lightly seated*
Jet Needle - SF14-3 Needle Jet - P-9
Needle Seat - 1.S Pilot Air Jet - 160
Flywheel Marking: FF9S02 COl Marking: CU2S09 Alternator Output: 200 Watts
Ignition Timing: 30
0
BTDC @ 3S00 RPM ( 3) Spark Plug: BKRSES Gap: .028 (.7mm)
*Turn in (clockwise) one quarter turn for each 30 degrees above 60 degrees F.
TEMPERATURE
Meters 0-900 150 145 140 135
(Feet) (0-3000)
900-1800 145 140 135 130
(3000-6000)
1800-2700 137.5 132.5
(6000-9000)
2700-3700 132.5 127.5
(9000-12000)
"'--_....II -Pilot screw in 1/2 turn
Clutching
Weight Spring Helix
(Feet) (0-3000)
900-1800 10WH Blue/Green 2-2 or
(3000-6000) 2-1
1800-2700 10RH Blue/Green 2-1
(6000-9000)
2700-3700 10RH Blue/Green 2-1
(9000-12000)
5/98
4.41
1998 Specifications
1998 Scrambler 500
W98BC50A
(Engine - EH50PLE-04)
Carburetor BST 40
Main Jet - 155 Pilot Jet 40 Pilot Screw Setting* - 2.0 turns out from lightly seated
Jet Needle - 6H25-94-3 Needle Jet - Y-O Float Level 14.7mm (Page 4.37)
Needle Seat - 1 .5 Pilot Air Jet - 1.3 Throttle Valve - #100
Ignition Timing: 30 BTDC @ 3500 RPM ( 1.5) Spark Plug: BKR5ES Gap: .028 (.7mm)
Altitude AMBIENT Below OaF 0to 40F +40 to +80F +80F & Above
TEMPERATURE
(Below -18C) (-18C to +5C)
Meters
(Feet)
Meters
(Feet)
0-900 167.5 160
(0-3000)
900-1800
(3000-6000)
1800-2700 152.5 147.5
(6000-9000)
2700-3700 145 140
(9000-12000)
EJ -Turn Air Screw in 1/2 turn
E=:J -Turn Air Screw out 1/2 turn
Clutching
Altitude Shift
Weight
0-900 10WH
(0-3000)
900-1800 10WH
(3000-6000)
1800-2700 10RH
(6000-9000)
2700-3700 10RH
(9000-12000)
4.4m
(+soC to +26C) (+26C & Above)
155 147.5
147.5 142.5
Clutch Driven
Spring Helix
Blue/Green 1/1
Blue/Green 2/1
Blue/Green 1/1
Blue/Green 2/1
5/98
1998 Specifications
SPORTSMAN 500
W98CH50A (W90CH50AB)
Carburetor BST34 (CV)
Main Jet - 142.5 Pilot Jet - 42.5 Pilot Screw* 2.0 Turns out from lightly seated
Jet Needle - 5D78-3 Needle Jet - P-1 Float Level 13.0mm (Page 4.37)
Needle Seat - 1.5 Pilot Air Jet - 160 Throttle Valve - #100
Ignition Timing: 30BTDC @ 3500 RPM ( 1.5) Spark Plug: BKR5ES Gap: .028 (.7mm)
*Turn out (counterclockwise) one quarter turn for each 30 degrees below 60 degrees F.
Altitude AMBIENT Below OF 0to 40F +40to +80F
TEMPERATURE
(Below -18C) (-18C to +5C) (+5C to +26C)
Meters 0-900 152.5 147.5 142.5
(Feet) (0-3000)
900-1800 147.5 142.5 137.5
(3000-6000)
+80F & Above
(+26C & Above)
137.5
130
1800-2700 140 135 130 .. \ .. 1 ~ 5
...... /
(6000-9000)
..
.. ... . .. ...i. ..... < .
2700-3700 135 130
.......
125 ........
120 ..
(9000-12000)
I:
" .
...

L-....;.._....JI - Pilot screw in 1/2 turn
Clutching
Weight Spring Helix
Meters 0-900 10 MH Blue/Green 2-2
(Feet) (0-3000)
900-1800 10 BH Blue/Green 2-2
(3000-6000 )
1800-2700 10WH Blue/Green 2-1
(6000-9000)
2700-3700 10 RH Blue/Green 2-1
(9000-12000)
Models Equipped With EBS Require No Helix Adjustment
5/98
4.4n
1998 Specifications
1998 BIG BOSS 500 6X6
W98AE50A
(Engine - EH50PLE-06)
Carburetor B8T34 (CV) Mikuni (42PL01 B)
Main Jet - 140 Pilot Jet - 40
Jet Needle - 4033-3 Needle Jet - 0-6
Needle Seat - 1.5 Pilot Air Jet - 160
Pilot Screw* - 2.0 Turns out from lightly seated
Ignition Timing: 30BTDC @ 3500 RPM ( 1.5) Spark Plug: BKR5ES Gap: .028 (.7mm)
*Turn out (counterclockwise) one quarter turn for each 30 degrees below 60 degrees F.
TEMPERATURE
.Meters 0-900 150 145 140 135
(Feet) (0-3000)
,
900-1800 145 140 135 130
(3000-6000)
1800-2700 137.5 135
(6000-9000)
2700-3700 132.5 127.5
(9000-12000)
........ _ ~ I -Pilot screw in 1/2 turn
Clutching
Altitude AMBIENT Shift Clutch Driven
TEMPERATURE
Weight Spring Helix
(Feet) (0-3000)
900-1800 10BH Blue/Green 2-2
(3000-6000)
1800-2700 10WH Blue/Green 2-1
(6000-9000)
2700-3700 10RH Blue/Green 2-1
(9000-12000 )
4.40 5/98
Jet Part Numbers
Pilot Jets Part Numbers - Mikuni VM
Jet No. Part No.
30 3130331
35 3130066
40 3130067
45 3130068
50 3130069
Hex Main Jet Part Numbers - Mikuni VM
Jet No. Part No.
110 3130105
115 3130106
120 3130107
125 3130108
130 3130109
135 3130110
140 3130111
145 3130112
150 3130113
155 3130114
160 3130115
165 3130116
170 3130117
175 3130118
180 3130119
185 3130120
190 3130121
195 3130122
200 3130123
210 3130124
220 3130125
230 3130126
240 3130127
250 3130128
260 3130129
270 3130130
280 3130131
290 3130132
300 3130133
310 3130134
320 3130135
5/98
Main Jet Part Numbers - Mikuni eST Carburetor
112.5
115
117.5
120
122.5
125
127.5
130
132.5
135
137.5
140
142.5
145
147.5
150
152.5
155
157.5
3130554
3130555
3130556
3130557
3130558
3130559
3130560
3130561
3130562
3130563
3130564
3130527
3130566
3130567
3130568
3130569
3130570
3130571
3130572
Pilot Jet Part Number - Mikuni eST Carburetor
40.0 3130624
42.5 3130526
4.4p
Oil Tank and Fuel Tank Assembly Gen II (Except Magnum)
&WARNING
When working with any part of the fuel
system, observe proper safety proce-
dures. Gasoline is extremely flam-
mable and explosive under certain
conditions. Do not smoke or allow
open flames or sparks in or near the
area where the work is being done. If
you get gasoline in your eyes or if you
swallow gasoline, see your doctor im-
mediately. If you should spill gasoline
on your skin or clothing, immediately
wash it off with soap and water and
change clothing. Never start the en-
gine or let it run in an enclosed area.
Gasoline powered engine exhaust
fumes are poisonous and can cause
loss of consciousness and death in a
short time.
Forward
/
Oil Level Sensor
Oil Filter
@ ~ ~
Vent line routed
smoothly into
center of steering
post
NOTE: When servicing the fuel or oil system, use care to prevent kinking or obstructing vent lines.
4.5 7/96
Fuel Tank Assembly (Magnum)
NOTE: When servicing the fuel or oil system,
use care to prevent kinking or obstructing vent lines.
Forward
/
&WARNING
short time.
7/96
4.6
Vent line routed
smoothly into
center of steering
post
'&WARNING
short time.
Oil Level Sensor
Oil Tank and Fuel Tank Assembly (Gen III Typical)
Forward
/
Oil Filter
~ ~ ~
NOTE: When servicing the fuel or oil system, use care to prevent kinking or obstructing vent lines.
4.7 7/96
Fuel Tank Assembly (Gen IV)
7/96
Forward
/
/'
400 ONLY ~ ~
Fitting
---t--To "RES"
on Valve
4.8
Fuel Tank Assembly - 500 Models
1997 Xplorer 500, Sportsman 500
Forward
/
~ n\
Silver Fitting (short stand I \
pipe) to "Res (2)" on Fuel Gold Fitting (tall stand pipe)
Valve to "ON (1)" on Fuel Valve
4.9
Vent line routed
smoothly into
center of steering
post
10/96
Fuel Flow Diagrams
Fuel System Diagram 2 Stroke Models
Fuel Tank vent-j
Fuel Filter
Carburetor Vent
I
II Carburetor
...
Fuel System Diagram 4 Stroke Models
* Fuel Pump
* 425 Under Headlamp Cover
500 Above Oil Tank
7/96
Fuel Tank Vent-
Filter
Carburetor Vent
I
Carburetor
1
4.10
Fuel Tank
~
Fitting Screens
t
Fuel Valve
Engine
Fuel Tank

Fitting Screens

Fuel Valve
Engine
I
Pilot Jets Part Numbers - Mikuni VM
Jet No. Part No.
30 3130331
35 3130066
40 3130067
45 3130068
50 3130069
Hex Main Jet Part Numbers - Mikuni VM
Jet No. Part No.
110 3130105
115 3130106
120 3130107
125 3130108
130 3130109
135 3130110
140 3130111
145 3130112
150 3130113
155 3130114
160 3130115
165 3130116
170 3130117
175 3130118
180 3130119
185 3130120
190 3130121
195 3130122
200 3130123
210 3130124
220 3130125
230 3130126
240 3130127
250 3130128
260 3130129
270 3130130
280 3130131
290 3130132
300 3130133
310 3130134
320 3130135
Mikuni VM Carburetor

Throttle Return
Jet Needle Retainer-----a;'. Starte,r
Plunger

Return
Jet Needle _______ Spring "- -
c1
Seal Washer _------- i Starter lIJ
(Only on some models) I
)

Fuel Inlet and Spring
Body ___ _ Throttle Stop
Screw
and Spring

Arm and Pin .::.
ce' . ,
" ..--> . , ).-- Pilot Jet

Needle, Seat and Gasket
Assembly
Float Bowl---
Main Jet--J
Main Jet Access Cover
and O-Ring
4.11
Bowl Gasket
7/96
Function
The function of a carburetor is to produce a com-
bustible air/fuel mixture by breaking fuel into tiny
particles in the form of vapor, to mix the fuel with
air in a proper ratio, and to deliver the mixture to
the engine. A proper ratio means an ideal air/fuel
mixture which can burn without leaving an excess
of fuel or air. Whether the proper mixture ratio is
maintained or not is the key to efficient engine op-
eration.
The engine of a vehicle is operated under a wide
range of conditions, from idling with the throttle
valve remaining almost closed, to full load or
maximum output with the throttle valve fully
opened. In order to meetthe requirements forthe
proper mixture ratio under these varying condi-
tions, a low speed fuel system, or pilot system,
and a main fuel system are provided in Mikuni VM
type carburetors.
The Mikuni carburetor has varying operations de-
pending upon varying driving conditions. It is
constructed of a float system, pilot system, main
system, and starter system or initial starting de-
vice.
Float System
The float system is designed to maintain a
constant height of gasoline during operation.
When the fuel flowing from the fuel pump into the
float chamber through the needle valve reaches
the constant fuel level, the floats rise. When the
buoyancy of the float and the fuel pressure of the
fuel pump balance, the needle valve seals the ori-
fice in the needle seat, preventing further fuel de-
livery, and the level of fuel in the bowl remains rel-
atively constant.
The fuellevei in the bowl assists in controlling the
amount of fuel in the fuel mixture. Too high a level
allows more fuel than necessary to leave the
nozzle, enriching the mixture. Too Iowa level re-
sults in a leaner mixture, since not enough fuel
leaves the nozzle. Therefore, the predetermined
fuel level should not be changed arbitrarily.
7/96
Float Guide Pin
Float Arm
Float
4.12
Pilot Jet
From idling to low speeds, the fuel supply is metered by the
pilot jet. There are several air bleed openings in the sides
of the pilot jet which reduce the fuel to mist. The number
stamped on the jet is an indication of the amount of fuel in
cc's which passes through the jet during a one minute inter-
val under a given set of conditions.
Pilot Air Screw
The pilot air screw controls the fuel mixture from idle to low
speeds. The tapered tip of the air screw projects into the air
passage leading to the pilot jet air bleeds. By turning the
screw in or out, the cross sectional area of the air passage
is varied, in turn varying the pilot jet air supply and changing
the mixture ratio.
Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio
A carburetor with a piston type throttle valve is also called
a variable venturi type carburetor. In this type of carburetor,
the needle jet and jet needle serve to control a proper air/
fuel mixture ratio at the medium throttle valve opening (be-
tween 1/4 and 3/4 opening). Having the proper needle jet
and jet needle has a major impact on engine performance
at partial load.
The jet needle tapers off at one end and the clearance be-
tween the jet needle and the needle jet increases as the
throttle valve opening gets wider. The air/fuel mixture ratio
is controlled by the height of the "E" ring inserted into one
of the five slots provided in the head of the jet needle. The
chart at right shows the variation of fuel flow based on the
height of the "E" ring.
4.13
Component Functions
...r- 2
-3
~ 4
15
4
2
50
Indicator
Number
Pilot Air Screw
~
/
75 100%
Throttle Valve Opening
7/96
Component Functions
Jet Needle
The jet needle has five adjustment grooves cut into the up-
per portion, and is tapered from approximately the middle
of the needle to the lower end. The top is fixed to the center
of the throttle valve by the needle clip, and the tapered end
extends into the needle jet. Fuel flows through the space
between the needle jet and jet needle. This space does not
vary until the throttle reaches the 114 open point. At that
time the tapered portion of the needle begins to move out
of the jet, affecting fuel flow as the opening enlarges. If the
needle clip is changed from the standard position to a lower
groove, the needle taper starts coming out of the jet sooner,
resulting in a richer mixture. Moving the clip higher pro-
duces a leaner mixture. If the taper is worn due to vibration,
fuel flow may be Significantly affected.
Needle Jet
The needle jet works in conjunction with the jet needle to
regulate fuel flow rate. An air bleed opening in the side of
the needle jet brings in air measured by the air jet. This air
initiates the mixing and atomizing process inside the needle
jet. Mixing is augmented by a projection at the needle jet
outlet, called the primary choke. The letter number code
stamped on the jet indicates jet inside diameter.
Throttle Opening VS. Fuel Flow
In a full throttle condition the cross sectioned area be-
tween the jet needle and the needle jet is larger than
the cross sectioned area of the main jet. The main jet
therefore has greater control over fuel flow.
7/96
4.14
Closed
Throttle
2
4
1
3 Groove
5
One-half
Throttle
I
rz:r:t-=,
I
i)
Leaner
1
Richer
Full
Throttle
Large
Clearance
Throttle Valve
The throttle valve controls the rate of engine air intake
by moving up and down inside the main bore. At small
throttle openings, air flow control is performed chiefly
by the cutaway. By controlling air flow the negative
pressure over the needle valve is regulated, in turn
varying the fuel flow.
The throttle valves are numbered 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, etc.,
according to the size of the cutaway. The higher the
number, the leaner the gasoline/air mixture.
Main Jet
When the throttle opening becomes greater and the
area between the needle jet and jet needle increases,
fuel flow is metered by the main jet. The number on the
jet indicates the amount of fuel CCs which will pass
through it in one minute under controlled conditions.
Larger numbers give a greater flow, resulting in a
richer mixture.
Main jets are screwed directly into the needle jet base.
4.15
Component Functions
Mikuni Hex
Style Main Jet
I
I
~ - - - ' - Cutaway
,
7/96
Starter System - Closed Throttle
Mikuni carburetors use a starter system rather than a choke. In this type of carburetor, fuel and air for starting
the engine are metered with entirely independent jets. The fuel metered in the starter jet is mixed with air and
is broken into tiny particles in the emulsion tube. The mixture then flows into the plunger area, mixes again with
air coming from the air intake port for starting and is delivered to the engine through the fuel discharge nozzle
in the optimum air/fuel ratio. The starter is opened and closed by means of the starter plunger. The starter type
carburetor is constructed to utilize the negative pressure of the inlet pipe, so it is important that the throttle valve
is closed when starting the engine.
,- ;-__ - -_-_ _=_-_- r - -=--=-..:--=--=--=-_____ ,
I I I I
, I
I I Cable Adjuster I I
I I I I
I I I ,
II Cable Adjuster Lock Nut II
I I Plunger Spring I
Plunger Cap
I I
Il
Throttle Valve
I

Inlet Bleed Air
Starter Jet
7/96
4.16
Pilot System (0-3/8 Throttle)
The pilot system's main function is to meter fuel at idle and low speed driving. Though its main function is to supply
fuel at low speed, it does feed fuel continuously throughout the entire operating range.
Fuel for the pilot jet is drawn from the float bowl, mixed with air regulated by the air screw, and delivered to the
engine through the pilot outlet.
The mixture is regulated to some degree by adjusting the air screw. When the air screw is closed, the fuel mixture
is made richer as the amount of air is reduced. When the air screw is opened, the mixture is made more lean
as the amount of air is increased.
4.17
Throttle Valve
Throttle Stop (Idle SPf?ed) Screw
I'
II
I I
7/96
Slide Cutaway (1/8-3/8 Throttle)
Throttle valve cutaway effect is most noticeable at 114 throttle opening. The amount of cutaway is pre-determined
for a given engine to maintain a 14: 1 air/fuel ratio at part throttle. A steep angle would indicate a fairly lean mixture
because there is less resistance to air flow. A flat angle would provide a much richer mixture because there is
more resistance to air flow. The venturi shape can be adjusted for each engine's breathing characteristics by
using a different valve cutaway angle. A number will be stamped into the bottom of the valve (e.g. 2.5) indicating
the size of the cutaway. The higher the number, the steeper the angle.
Cutaway Angle
Throttle Valve
Air Jet
By-pass
Pilot Outlet
Pilot Jet
Needle Jet
Main Jet
3.0
1.5
Leaner Richer
7/96
4.18
Jet Needle/Needle Jet (3/8-3/4 Throttle)
The jet needle and needle jet have the most effect between 3/8 and 3/4 throttle opening. Some mixture adjust-
ment can be accomplished by changing the location of the "E" clip on the needle. Moving the clip down raises
the needle in the jet passage and richens the mixture. Moving the clip up lowers the needle in the jet passage
and leans the mixture. Letter and number codes are stamped into the needle and the jet indicating sizes and
tapers of each.
Clip Position
4.19
Throttle Valve
Jet Needle
By-pass
Pilot Outlet
Pilot Jet
Needle Jet
Main Jet
7/96
Main System (3/4 to Full Throttle)
The main system is designed for delivering fuel between low speed and high speed operation. This system is
made up of the jet needle, needle jet, and main jet. The main system begins to take effect as soon as there is
enough air flow into the carburetor venturi to draw fuel up through the main jet and needle jet assembly. This
system works in conjunction with the needle jet system.
During low speed driving, there is very little clearance between the jet needle and the needle jet; therefore, very
little fuel from the main jet can pass between the jet needle and the needle jet. As the throttle valve opening is
increased, the tapered jet needle is raised farther out of the needle jet, allowing greater fuel flow. Under full throttle
opening, the cross sectioned area of clearance between the jet needle and the needle jet becomes greater than
the cross sectioned area of the main jet. Thus the main jet is now controlling the amount of fuel flow.
Throttle Valve
Jet Needle
Pilot Outlet
Pilot Jet
Needle Jet
Main Jet
7/96
4.20
Component Effect vs. Throttle Opening
The throttle opening chart below demonstrates component relationship to fuel flow versus throttle valve opening.
The pilot system's main function is that of a low speed jet. Its most effective range of fuel delivery is from idle
to approximately 3/8 throttle valve opening.
The throttle valve controls the rate of engine air by its movement up and down in the carburetor venturi. At small
throttle openings the air flow is regulated chiefly by the valve cutaway, with greatest effectiveness at 1/4 throttle
opening. Throttle valves are numbered 1.0, 1.5,2.0, etc., according to the size of the cutaway. Decreasing the
cutaway number will increase the amount of fuel delivered in its effective range.
The jet needle and needle jet have an effective operating range from approximately 1/8 to 7/8 throttle opening.
The amount of fuel delivered during this range relies upon the jet needle clip position, as well as the needle jet
size and other specifications.
The main jet affects fuel delivery at 1/4 throttle and consistently increases to full throttle opening.
Mikuni VM Fuel Delivery
o
z
en

w
a:
(.)
z
EFFECT
o
z
en

w
a:
(.)
w
C
o
J
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4
THROTTLE OPENING
4.21
7/8 FULL
Throttle Valve Cut-Away
Jet Needle/Needle Jet
10/96
Mikuni VM Carburetor System Components
Venting Systems
The fuel tank vent line supplies atmospheric pressure to the fuel in the tank. It must be free of kinks and restric-
tions and be properly routed to allow fuel to flow from the tank and prevent contaminants from entering the tank.
The line should be routed into the center of the steering post.
The carburetor float bowl vent lines supplies atmospheric pressure to the fuel in the float bowl. It must be free
of kinks and restrictions and be properly routed to allow fuel to flow in the proper amount and to prevent contami-
nants from entering the carburetor.
System Main Components Main Function Main Affect
Float System (Fuel Level I nlet Pipe, Needle and Seat, Maintains specified fuel lev- All systems
Control) Floats, Float Pins el in float chamber (carbure- All throttle ranges
tor float bowl)
Venting Vent Passages in Carbure- Supplies atmospheric pres- All systems
tor, Vent line sure to fuel in float chamber All throttle ranges
Starter (Choke/Enrichment) Choke Lever, Cable, Choke Supplies additional fuel air All throttle ranges
Plunger, Return Spring, mixture necessary for cold Greatest effect at low
Carb Passages (Starter Jet, starting throttle settings and idle
passage in float bowl) speeds
Pilot (Idle System) Pilot Jet/Passageways, Pilot Primarily supplies fuel at idle Mainly idle to 114 throttle
Air Screw with Spring, By- and low throttle settings Minimal effect after 1/2
pass Port (Beneath Throttle throttle
Slide), Air Jet, Pilot Outlet,
Throttle Valve Cutaway
Main System Main Jet, Main Air Passage, Supplies fuel at mid-range 114 to full throttle
Needle Jet, Jet Needle, and high throttle settings.
Throttle Valve
7/96
4.22
Main Jet Part Numbers
112.5
115
117.5
120
1225
125
127.5
130
132;5
135
137.5
140
142,5
145
147.5
150
152.5
155
157.5
31$0554
3J30555
3.1.30556
3t30557
3130558
3130559
3130560
3130561
3130562
3130563
3130564
3130527
3130566
3130567
3130568
3130569
3130570
3130571
3130572
Mikuni BST 34 Carburetor
Exploded View
Pilot Jet Part Number
40.0 3130624
42.5 3130526
4.23
1. Carburetor Assembly
2. Screw
3. Throttle Valve
4. Cover Assembly
5. Jet Block Assembly
6. Spring
7. Diaphragm Assembly
8. Ring
9. "E" Ring
1 O. Ring
11 . Needle Jet
12. Cover
13. O-Ring
14. Throttle Shaft Assembly
15. Ring
16. Seal
17. Spring
18. Packing
19. "E" Ring
20. Cap
21. Screw
22. Screw
23. O-Ring
24. Washer
25. Adjuster
26. Spring
27. Pilot Jet
28 Main Jet
29. Washer
30. Jet Needle
31 . Float Assembly
32. Float Body Assembly
33. Float Pin
34. Needle Valve
35. O-Ring
36. O-Ring
37. Filter
38. Screw
39. Screw
40. Screw
41. Guide Holder
42. Spring
43. Plunger Assembly
44. Spring Washer
45. Screw
46. Air Jet
47. Cable Guide
48. Spring
49. Ring
50. Adjust Screw
51. Screw and Washer Assy.
7/96
Mikuni CV Carburetor System Components
Venting Systems
The fuel tank vent line supplies atmospheric pressure to the fuel in the tank. It must be free of kinks and restric-
tions and be properly routed to allow fuel to flow from the tank and prevent contaminants from entering the tank.
The line should be routed into the center of the steering post.
The carburetor float bowl vent lines supplies atmospheric pressure to the fuel in the float bowl. It must be free
of kinks and restrictions and be properly routed to allow fuel to flow in the proper amount and to prevent contami-
nants from entering the carburetor.
System Main Components Main Function Main Affect
Float System (Fuel Level Inlet Pipe, Needle and Seat, Maintains specified fuel lev- All systems
Control) Float, Float Pin el in float chamber (carbure- All throttle ranges
tor float bowl)
Venting Vent Passages in Carbure- Supplies atmospheric pres- All systems
tor, Vent lines (2) into (1) to sure to fuel in float chamber All throttle ranges
frame
Starter (Choke/Enrichment) Choke Lever, Cable, Choke Supplies additional fuel air All throttle ranges
Plunger, Return Spring, mixture necessary for cold Greatest effect at low
Carb Passages (Starter Jet, starting throttle settings and idle
Starter Bleed Pipe)
Pilot (Idle System) Pilot Jet/Passageways, Pi- Primarily supplies fuel at idle Mainly idle to 1/4 throttle
lot-Mixture Screw with and low throttle settings Minimal effect after 1/2
Spring Washer and Sealing throttle
a-Ring, Bypass Ports (Be-
hind Throttle Plate), Pilot Air
Jet, Pilot Outlet, Throttle
Plate
Main System Main Jet, Main Air Jet, Main Supplies fuel at mid-range 1/4 to full throttle
Air Passage, Needle Jet, Jet and high throttle settings.
Needle, Vacuum Slide,
Throttle Plate
7/96
4.24
Mikuni CV Carb Operation
The constant velocity carburetor used on Polaris Magnum and Sportsman 500 model ATVs incorporates a me-
chanically operated throttle plate and a vacuum controlled slide valve (vacuum slide). The venturi cross-sectional
area in the carburetor bore is increased or decreased automatically by the vacuum slide, which moves according
to the amount of negative pressure (less than atmospheric) present in the venturi.
A diaphragm attached to the top of the vacuum slide is sealed to the slide and to the carburetor body forming two
chambers. The chamber above the diaphragm is connected to the venturi area by a drilled orifice in the center
of the vacuum slide. The chamber below the diaphragm is vented to atmospheric pressure by a passage on the
air box side of the carburetor. A spring, installed in the center of the vacuum slide, dampens the slide movement
and assists the return of the slide.
When the throttle plate is opened and engine speed begins to increase, the pressure in the venturi (and therefore
in the chamber above the diaphragm) becomes significantly lower than atmospheric. Atmospheric pressure in
the chamber below the diaphragm forces the diaphragm upward, raising the slide against spring pressure. When
the pressure above and below the diaphragm are nearly equal, the slide moves downward under spring pressure.
Raising or lowering the slide increases or decreases the cross sectional area in the venturi, and therefore the air
velocity in the venturi is kept relatively constant. This provides improved fuel atomization and optimum fuel/air
ratio.
Venturi
Low Pressure
III Air Flow
~ Low Pressure
Air Box
Pressure
From
Venturi
Low Pressure
From
Air Box
~ ~ /
Air Box ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ M
_ Air Flow
~ Low Pressure
Note: Diagrams are for explanation of theory only, and are not true representations of Mikuni BST 34 carburetor.
4.25 7/96
Pilot (Idle and Slow) System
This system supplies fuel during engine
operation with throttle valve closed (1) or
slightly opened. The fuel from float cham-
ber (2) is metered by pilot jet (3) where it
mixes with air coming in through pilot air
jet (4). The mixture then goes up through
pilot passage to pilot screw (5). A part of
the mixture is discharged into the main
bore out of bypass ports (6). The remain-
der is then metered by pilot screw and dis-
charged into the main bore through pilot
outlet (7).
Starter System
(Choke or Enrichment)
When the choke cable (1) is activated, the
starter plunger (5) is lifted off the seat.
Fuel is drawn into the starter circuit from
the float chamber (2) through the starter
jet (3). Starter jet meters this fuel, which
then flows into starter pipe (4) and mixes
with the air (7) coming from the float
chamber. The mixture, rich in fuel con-
tent, reaches starter plunger and mixes
again with the air coming through a pas-
sage (8) extending from underneath the
diaphragm. The rich fuel/air mixture for
starting is discharged through starter out-
let (6) in the the main bore.
7/96
7
4.26
3
--\
\
\
rJ
L-l
I
I
I
.J
Float System
Fuel enters the float chamber (3) by
means of the inlet pipe and passage,
through a screen on the back of the inlet
needle seat (4), and around the inlet
needle (2). As the fuel fills the float cham-
ber, the float (1) rises and forces the inlet
needle against the seat, shutting off the
orifice in the seat. When fuel level is up in
float chamber, floats are up and needle
valve remains pushed up against valve
seat. Under this condition, no fuel enters
the float chamber. As the fuel level falls,
floats go down and needle valve unseats
itself to admit fuel into the chamber. In this
manner, the needle valve admits and
shuts off fuel alternately to maintain a
practically constant fuel level inside the
float chamber.
Main System
As throttle valve (1) is opened, engine
speed rises, and this increases negative
pressure in the venturi. Consequently the
vacuum slide (2) moves upward. The fuel
in float chamber (3) is metered by main jet
(4), and the metered fuel enters needle jet
(5), in which it mixes with the air admitted
through main air jet (6) to form an emul-
sion. The emulsified fuel then passes
through the clearance between needle jet
(5) and jet needle (7), and is discharged
into the venturi (A). Mixture proportioning
is accomplished in needle jet (5); the clear-
ance through which the emulsified fuel
must flow is determined ultimately by
throttle position and vacuum slide height.
A
4.27
~
I
I
,--
~
~
I
3
2
2
4
7/96
Magnum Fuel Tank Removal
Fuel Tank Removal
1. Turn fuel valve to "Off" position.
2. Remove the following items:
Seat
Ignition Key
Side Panels
Fuel Tank Cover
3. Remove cable tie on PVT exhaust duct.
4. Remove the two bolts securing the duct and remove
the duct.
5. Disconnect fuel line from fuel valve and vent line from
top of tank.
6. Remove the two Torx screws at the rear of the
headlight pod until they no longer project into the tank
area.
7. Remove the two bolts and spacers from the rear of the
fuel tank.
8. Shift tank and position throttle cable below the PVT air
inlet duct.
9. Pull and hold fuel valve selector lever out to clear fuel
valve.
10. Lift and pull tank back.
11. Rotate rear of tank to left and remove tank.
Be careful not to damage fuel valve.
7/96
4.28
Carburetor Removal (Mikuni CV)
1. Remove fuel tank on Gen II models. Refer to
procedure on page 4.28.
2. Remove seat and side covers. Loosen clamp at rear of
carburetor.
3. Loosen clamps securing air box intake duct and PVT
intake duct and remove both.
4. Remove air box retaining screws. Pull air box forward
to disengage rear mounting tabs and lift upward.
5. Disconnect vent line from right side of carburetor and
slip oil tank vent hose under vent line. Set airbox aside.
6. Remove two nuts securing rear of carb bracket to
dampers.
7. Remove impulse line clamp and carefully remove line.
8. Loosen carburetor flange clamp at front of carburetor.
9. Remove carburetor. Place a shop towel in carb flange
to prevent dirt from entering.
10. Remove fuel line clamp and fuel line.
11. Remove choke assembly with cable attached.
12. Remove four screws from throttle shaft cover.
13. Hold cable adjuster and loosen lock nut. Turn adjuster
in if necessary to provide enough cable play to prevent
damaging the throttle cable during removal.
14. Lift throttle shaft.
15. Remove throttle cable from throttle shaft.
4.29
Carburetor Removal
5/98
Carburetor Disassembly - Mikuni CV
1 . Remove carburetor diaphragm chamber cover.
2. Remove return spring and vacuum slide.
3. Invert vacuum slide and remove spring seat and jet
needle from slide. Note position of "E" clip and
washer.
4. Remove pilot air jet.
7/96
4.30
5. Remove carburetor float bowl.
6. Remove idle stop screw, washer and spring.
7. Using a small pin punch or a spring loaded automatic
center punch, remove float pin, float, and inlet needle.
8. Remove inlet needle seat retaining screw along with
plate, and carefully remove needle seat. NOTE: Do
not use a pliers to remove the seat or damage may
occur.
4.31
Carburetor Disassembly Mikuni CV
7/96
Carburetor Disassembly - Mikuni CV
9. Remove main jet and washer.
10. Remove needle jet by carefully pushing it out through
the top of the carburetor from the float chamber side.
Do not push on the inside of the needle jet or damage
may occur to the main jet threads.
11. Remove pilot jet.
12. Remove the pilot mixture screw with spring, flat
washer, and O-Ring.
7/96
4.32
NOTE: The starter jet is not removeable.
Carburetor Cleaning - Mikuni CV
1. Thoroughly clean the carburetor body, jets, and all passages with carburetor cleaner or electrical contact
cleaner.
A WARNING
Protect eyes from contact with cleaner. If you get cleaner in your eyes or if you swallow cleaner, see your doctor
immediately. Some carburetor cleaners are extremely caustic and extended periods of soaking can loosen the
adhesive sealer on the passage drill-way plugs. Do not soak rubber or plastic components (such as the vacuum
slide diaphragm, needle seat screen, or O-Rings in caustic cleaning solutions. Irreparable damage may occur.
Do not use agitator type carburetor cleaning equipment. Rubber parts must be cleaned with mild detergent and
hot water only.
2. If the carburetor is extremely dirty or contaminated with fuel residue and varnish, soak for short periods only in
carburetor cleaner, and rinse in hot water.
3. Replace the jets if they are extremely dirty or have a buildup of fuel residue or bacterial growth. Even a small
amount of residue will reduce the flow characteristics of the jet.
4. Verify all passages and jets are unobstructed by spraying electrical contact cleaner through the passages.
CAUTION: Do not use wire or welding tip cleaners on the jets as the orifice size may be altered.
5. Use low pressure air to dry carburetor body and all components.
Carburetor Inspection
1. Inspect the diaphragm for holes, deterioration, or
damage. Make sure the diaphragm is pliable but not
swollen. The diaphragm should fit properly in the
carburetor body. Replace diaphragm assembly if
diaphragm is damaged.
2. Inspect the diaphragm return spring for damage or
distortion of the coils.
3. Inspect the slide for wear, scratches, or damage. It
should move freely in the jet block. Replace if
necessary.
4. Inspect jet needle for wear, bending, or other damage.
5. Inspect needle jet. Air bleed holes must be clear.
Check for wear at the top inside surface where the jet
needle enters the needle jet.
6. Inspect the inlet needle seat for wear, damage and
foreign material. Check the inside for abrasion or wear
from the needle.
7. Inspect O-ring for cuts, nicks and abrasions. The
O-ring must fit snugly on the needle seat and in the
carburetor body to ensure a leak-free sea\. The screen
must be clean and fit snugly on the needle seat.
Replace needle and seat assembly if necessary.
4.33 7/96
8. Inspect the inlet needle tapered surface for any sign of
wear or damage. Be sure the spring loaded pin is free
moving and returns freely when pushed. The inlet
needle and seat should be pressure tested after
assembly. See Carburetor Assembly/Adjustment,
pages 4.36 - 4.38.
9. Inspect the pilot mixture screw for damage. Make sure
the small tip is not bent or missing. The washer must
be in place between the O-Ring and spring on
reassembly. Check the O-Ring for cracks, damage or
wear. Replace if necessary.
10. Inspect the float, float pin, and pin mounting boss for
wear or damage. The float should pivot freely on the
pin without binding. Replace the float assembly, pin, or
carburetor body if worn.
11. Inspect the starter plunger for wear, cracks, foreign
material or bending. Check the seating surface in the
carburetor for damage, burrs, or foreign material.
Inspect return spring, making sure it is not damaged or
weak.
7/96
4.34
Good Condition
Worn, Deposits
#
12. Check the overflow stand pipe in float bowl for cracks
or bending. Be sure the pipe is clear. Fill the bowl with
liquid and check for leakage out the drain orifice. If the
bowl drain leaks, inspect tapered surface of the screw
and seating surface. Check the bowl sealing O-Ring
for damage or wear.
13. Check the starter jet to be sure it is clear.
14. Check the vent passages and impulse source for
cracks or obstructions.
15. Inspect the throttle shaft. It should return freely and
completely when opened and released. Check the
shaft for excess play or movement.
16. Inspect the throttle plate and retaining screws. Make
sure the plate is closed all the way and is centered in
the bore. Check to be sure the screws are tight.
4.35
7/96
Carburetor Assembly - Mikuni CV
1. Install the needle jet making sure the slot is aligned with
the tab in the jet block.
2. Install the main jet and washer.
3. Install the pilot mixture screw, spring, washer, and
a-ring as an assembly. Lubricate the a-Ring with oil or
light grease before installation. CAUTION: Do not
damage the a-ring during installation. Turn the screw
in until it lightly contacts the seat. Back out the
specified number of turns 1.
4. Install the pilot jet and pilot air jet.
5. Install the inlet needle seat with screen and a-ring.
Lubricate the a-ring with oil or a light film of grease.
6. Install the plate and retaining screw.
7. Install the float with inlet needle and install the pin.
CAUTION: Do not bend the float during installation.
1 NaTE: The final pilot (idle) mixture must be adjusted witr
the engine running. Refer to Page 2.12a.
5/98
4.36
Carburetor Assembly/Adjustment - Mikuni CV
Float Height Adjustment
1. Place the carburetor on a level surface in the position
shown. In this position, the float tongue will lightly
contact the inlet needle valve pin without compressing
the pin spring.
2. Measure the height from the float bowl mating surface
to the top of step in float (highest point) as shown. Both
sides of float should be parallel to each other. The
measurement should be made at the mid-point on the
top of the float using a vernier caliper. When
measuring the height be sure the inlet needle valve
spring is not compressed .
.,
...
FIQafHeight:
Std:BST34. , . rtlJil
B,ST40
3. If adjustment is necessary, bend the tongue slightly.
4. Install the float bowl. Invert the carburetor and install a
Mity-Vac (PN 2870975) to the fuel inlet fitting. Apply
5 PSI pressure to inlet fitting. The needle and seat
should hold pressure indefinitely. If not, inspect needle
and seat and seat O-ring.
5. Install the "E" clip on the jet needle in the proper
position. Inspect the needle closely for wear and
replace both needle and needle jet if needle is worn.
4.37
Bend tongue to adjust.
2
3
4
5
Needle Grooves
5/98
Carburetor Assembly - Mikuni CV
Float Height Adjustment, Cont.
6. Install the plastic spacer washer on the bottom
of the needle and slide it up to the "E" clip.
7. Install the jet needle assembly into the vacuum
slide and install the slide into the carburetor body.
Be sure the tab on the outer edge of the
diaphragm is positioned properly in the
carburetor body.
8. Fit the diaphragm sealing lip into the groove in the
carburetor body.
9. Install the spring seat washer and install the spring.
Forward
Spring
/ '"
Pilot Screw /
Idle Speed Screw
10. Install the diaphragm chamber cover and tighten the screws.
11. Check for free movement of the slide and make sure it returns smoothly and completely.
12. Install the idle stop screw with spring until it lightly contacts the throttle shaft stop arm. Turn the screw in 1 1/2
turns from this point to provide a base setting. Final idle speed must be adjusted with the engine running and
warmed to operating temperature. Move the throttle actuator arm to full open and make sure operation is
smooth and arm returns quickly and completely to closed position (against the idle speed screw).
5/98
4.38
CV Carburetor Installation
CV Carburetor Installation
1. Install the throttle cable by screwing the adjuster into carburetor body completely. Lightly grease the end of
the throttle cable and install the cable into the end of the throttle actuator arm.
2. Install the throttle shaft cover.
3. Apply a light film of oil to the choke plunger and install the plunger and cable assembly.
4. Install fuel line and fuel line clamp.
5. Remove the shop towel from the carburetor flange.
6. Install carb into flange and install rear air duct onto the back of the carburetor. Be sure carburetor is pushed
completely into flange and tighten the clamp.
7. Loosely install two bolts into carburetor bracket. Do not tighten.
8. Install clamp on rear air duct and tighten.
9. Tighten bracket bolts.
10. Install impulse line and clamp.
11. Perform throttle cable adjustment and choke adjustment. See Maintenance Chapter 2. Make sure throttle
operates smoothly and returns completely.
12. Install fuel tank, cover, and panels, and re-check throttle operation.
13. Turn handlebars completely left to right and check for free movement and full return to idle stop screw.
14. Set parking brake with gear selector in neutral.
15. Start engine and adjust idle speed when engine is warm. Check for fuel leaks.
16. Adjust idle mixture. Refer to page 2.12a.
4.39 5/98
Needle and Seat Pressure Test Mikuni CV
Needle and Seat Pressure Test
1. Invert the carburetor and install a Mity-Vac to the fuel
inlet fitting. Apply 5 PSI pressure to inlet fitting. The
needle and seat should hold pressure indefinitely. If
not, inspect needle and seat.
Inlet Needle and Seat
If foreign matter is caught between the sealing surfaces
of the needle valve seat and needle valve, or if they are
worn, the fuel will continue flowing and cause overflow.
Conversely, if the inlet needle sticks closed, the fuel will
not flow into the float chamber. If overflow occurs, clean
the float chamber, float parts and fuel passages, and in-
spect the needle and seat for wear or damage.
Inspect float height and pressure test needle and seat as-
sembly prior to carb installation. See page 4.37.
Fuel Level
A fuel level test can be performed on some models if the
drain hose fitting is accessible. Be sure to re-attach the
bowl drain hose after performing the test. A fuel level test
allows you to observe the height of the fuel in the float bowl
without removing the carburetor. The fuel level can be ob-
served with the engine either running or shut off, however,
engine must run briefly to allow fuel level to stabilize. Be
sure to review all fuel warnings on page 4.41 and 4.44.
1. Attach a clear line to drain fitting. Be sure line fits tightly
on fitting. Position hose along side of carburetor as
shown.
2. Open bowl drain screw by turning counterclockwise
approximately two turns. Start and run engine for 3 to 5
seconds to allow fuel level to stabilize in the line. If level
is out of specification, remove carburetor and inspect
inlet needle and seat, float height, passages, etc.
5/98
4.40
Fuel Level
1.5 mm
.060"
\
Bowl Mating
Surface
Float Bowl Draining
Carburetor Float Bowl Draining
.A. WARNING
Always stop the engine and refuel outdoors or in a well ventilated area.
A
A
gasoline is stored.
Do not overfill the tank. Do not fill the tank neck.
If you get gasoline in your eyes or if you swallow gasoline, see your doctor immediately.
A
A
A
A
If you spill gasoline on your skin or clothing, immediately wash it off with soap and water and change clothing.
Never start the engine or let it run in an enclosed
area. Gasoline powered engine exhaust fumes are
poisonous and can cause loss of consciousness and
death in a short time.
A Never drain the float bowl when the engine is hot.
Severe burns may result.
The carburetor float bowl should be drained periodically to
remove moisture or sediment from the bowl, or before ex-
tended periods of storage.
NOTE: The bowl drain screw is located on the bottom left
side of the float bowl.
1. Turn fuel valve to the off position.
2. Remove left side body panel. See Body Panel
Removal, page 5.3.
3. Place a clean container beneath the bowl drain spigot
or bowl drain hose.
4. Turn drain screw out two turns and allow fuel in the
float bowl and fuel line to drain completely.
5. Inspect the drained fuel for water or sediment.
6. Tighten drain screw.
1. Turn fuel valve to "on".
8. Start machine and check for leaks.
4.41
Drain tube
attached
here
Drain Screw
"RES
1 I F
tt-e U
OlE
~ O N L
Fuel valve decal, located on
left side of machine
7/96
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
10/96
4.42
4 - - - ~ ; r ; ; J 1:::1--- 5
7
6-----
4.43
Fuel Pump
Fuel Pump
Exploded View
1. Fuel Pump Assembly
2. Diaphragm, Gasket Set
3. Screw and Washer Assembly
6. Pressure Regulator
7. Fuel Inlet
8. Fuel Outlet
7/96
Fuel Pump
The fuel pump is located under the headlight cover at the front of the machine on 425 Magnums; at lower left side
of fuel tank (near oil tank) on 500 Sportsman. To test the fuel pump:
1. Remove headlight cover. (425s only)
2. Turn fuel off.
3. Disconnect impulse line from pump.
4. Connect Mity-Vac (PN 2870975) to the impulse line fitting on the pump.
5. Apply 5 inches of mercury vacuum to the pump fitting. The diaphragm should hold vacuum indefinitely.
If fuel is present in the impulse line or vacuum chamber of the pump, the diaphragm is ruptured and the pump
diaphragms must be replaced.
A WARNING
gasoline is stored.
If you get gasoline in your eyes or if you should swallow gasoline, see your doctor immediately.
If you spill gasoline on your skin or clothing, immediately wash it off with soap and water and change
clothing.
Fuel Pump Disassembly
1. Refer to illustration on page 4.43.
2. Remove the screws from the pump diaphragm cover. Note the location of the two longer screws.
3. Remove the diaphragm cover gasket, diaphragm, and valve body gasket.
4. Remove the outlet check valve cover, diaphragm, and gasket.
Fuel Pump Inspection/Assembly
1. Inspect inlet and outlet check valves for cracks,
warpage or damage. Inspect the diaphragms for
cracks, holes or swelling.
2. To clean the valves or pump body, remove the set
screw and washer. Remove the valve and wash
with soap and water. Carburetor cleaner may be
used to clean the pump body when the check valves
are removed. CAUTION: Some carburetor
cleaners are very caustic and should not be used to
clean the non-metal parts of the fuel pump.
3. Check the sealing surfaces of the pump body and
covers. Carefully remove all traces of old gasket
and check the surfaces for damage. Replace
diaphragms and gaskets as a set.
4. Reassemble the pump in the reverse order of
disassembly. Tighten all screws evenly.
10/96
4.44
425 Fuel Pump Location
500 Fuel Pump Location
Troubleshooting
Fuel Starvation/Lean Mixture
Symptoms: Hard start or no start; Bogs, Backfires, Pops; Hesitation; Detonation; Low power; Spark plug ero-
sion; Engine runs hot; Surging; Idles high, Idle varies.
No fuel in tank
Restricted tank vent, or routed improperly
Fuel lines or fuel valve restricted
Fuel filter plugged
Carburetor vent line(s) restricted
Plugged or restricted inlet needle and seat screen or inlet passage
Clogged jets or passages
Float stuck, holding inlet needle closed or inlet needle stuck
Float level too low
Fuel pump inoperative (4 Strokes)
Air leak at impulse line (4 Strokes)
Restricted impulse line (kinked, pinched) (4 Strokes)
Intake air leak (throttle shaft, intake ducts, airbox or air cleaner cover)
Ruptured vacuum slide diaphragm; Vacuum slide stuck closed or sticky (4 Strokes)
Improper spring (4 Strokes)
Jet needle position incorrect
I ncorrect pilot screw adjustment
Rich Mixture
Symptoms: Fouls spark plugs; Black, sooty exhaust smoke; Rough idle; Poor fuel economy; Engine runs rough/
misses; Poor performance; Bogs; Engine loads up; Backfires, Pops.
Air intake restricted
Air filter dirty/plugged
Choke plunger sticking, incorrectly adjusted choke
Choke cable binding or improperly routed
Incorrect pilot air/fuel screw adjustment
Faulty inlet needle and seat
Faulty inlet needle seat O-Ring
Float level too high
Poor fuel quality (old fuel)
Loose jets
Worn jet needle/needle jet or other carburetor parts
Dirty carburetor (air bleed passages or jets)
Weak or damaged vacuum piston return spring (4 Strokes)
Fouled spark plug
Poor Idle
Symptoms: Idles too high.
Idle adjusted improperly/idle mixture screw damaged
Sticky vacuum slide (4 Strokes) or throttle valve (2 strokes)
Throttle cable sticking, improperly adjusted, routed incorrectly
Choke cable sticking, improperly adjusted, routed incorrectly
4.45 7/96
Troubleshooting
Idle Too Low
Choke cable bending or incorrectly adjusted
Idle speed set incorrectly
Idle mixture screw misadjusted or damaged
Belt dragging
Worn jet needle/needle jet
Erratic Idle
Choke cable bending or incorrectly adjusted
Throttle cable incorrectly adjusted
Air leaks, dirty carburetor passages (pilot circuit)
Pilot mixture screw damaged or adjusted incorrectly
Tight valves
Belt dragging
Dirty air cleaner
Engine worn
Spark plug fouled
Idle speed set incorrectly (speed limiter)
Worn jet needle/needle jet
7/96
4.46
CHAPTER 5
BODY AND STEERING
Torque Specifications and Special Tools ............ 5.1
Body Styles ..................................... 5.1
Gen II Body Assembly, Exploded View ............. 5.2
Gen II Cover/Panel Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5.3
Gen III Cover/Panel Removal ..................... 5.3a
Gen IV Cover/Panel Removal ..................... 5.3b
Gen III Body Assembly, Exploded View ............. 5.4
Gen IV Body Assembly, Exploded View. . . . . . . . . . . .. 5.5-5.6
Headlight Pod Service (Gen IV Typical) . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5.6a-5.6b
Gen IV Side Panel Removal ...................... 5.7
Toe Alignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5.8-5.9
Steering Assembly, Exploded View ................ 5.10-5.12
Steering Stop Adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5.13
Rear Drive Axle Exploded View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5.14
Concentric Swingarm Rear Axle Exploded View ..... 5.14a
Concentric Swingarm Exploded View. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5.14b
Rear Strut Stabilizer Exploded View, 6x6 ........... 5.16
Rear Swing Arm Weldment Exploded View, 6x6 ..... 5.17
Front Swing Arm Weldment Exploded View, 6x6 . . . .. 5.18
Swing Arm and Rear Suspension Exploded View .... 5.19
Swing Arm Removal/Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5.20-5.21
Swing Arm Assembly/Installation .................. 5.22
Concentric Swingarm Removal .................... 5.22a
Concentric Swingarm Assembly/Installation ......... 5.22b
Strut Assembly Exploded View, 4x4 ................ 5.23
Front Strut Weldment Replacement ................ 5.24
Front Strut Removal/Installation ................... 5.24a-5.24b
Front Strut Ball Joint Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5.25
FoxTM Shock Service ............................. 5.29-5.36
Optional Suspension Springs, 1996 ................ 5.37
Optional Suspension Springs, 1997 ................ 5.37a
Paint Codes, 1996 ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5.38
Paint Codes, 1997 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5.38a
BODY AND STEERING
Torque Specifications, Special Tools
*Suspension I Steering
Front A-Arm Attaching Bolt .................. 30 ft. Ibs. (4.14 kg-m)
Front A-Arm Ball Joint Stud Nut .............. 25 ft. Ibs. (3.45 kg-m)
Handlebar Adjuster Block ................... 10-12 ft.lbs. (1.38-1.66 kg-m)
Master Cylinder ........................... 45-55 in. Ibs. (.52-.63 kg-m)
Rear Axle Nut and Lock Nut ................. 150 ft. Ibs. (20.70 kg-m)
Rear Axle Nut - Concentric Swingarm (Tapered Roller Bearings)
(Left side) ................................. 120 ft. Lbs.
(Right side) ................................ 8-10 ft. Ibs.
Rear Shock Bolt (upper) ..................... 25 ft. Ibs. (3.45 kg-m)
Rear Shock Bolt (lower) ..................... 25 ft. Ibs. (3.45 kg-m)
Rear Wheel Hub Nut (Shaft Drive Models) ..... 100 ft. Ibs. (13.83 kg-m)
Rear Wheel Hub Nut ....................... 80 ft. Ibs. (11.06 kg-m)
Rear Wheel Nuts (Chain Drive Models) ....... 50 ft. Ibs. (6.91 kg-m)
Rear Wheel Nuts (Shaft Drive Models) ........ 15 ft. Ibs. (2.07 kg-m)
Strut Rod Retaining Nut (Top) ................ 15 ft. Ibs. (2.07 kg-m)
Strut Casting Pinch Bolt ..................... 15 ft. Ibs. (2.07 kg-m)
Swing Arm Pivot Bolt (standard swingarm) .... 55 ft. Ibs. (7.59 kg-m)
Swing Arm Pivot Bolt (concentric swingarm) ... 150 ft. Ibs. (20.70 kg-m)
Tie Rod End Jam Nut ....................... 12-14 ft. Ibs. (1.66-1.93 kg-m)
Tie Rod End Castle Nut ..................... 23-24 ft. Ibs. (3.18-3.31 kg-m)
Tie Rod End Attaching Bolt .................. 25-30 ft. Ibs. (3.45-4.14 kg-m)
NOTE: Refer to exploded views throughout this chapter for identification and location of components.
Special Tools
Description Part No.
Strut and Ball Joint Tool Set .......... 2870871
Shock Spanner Wrench .............. 2870872
Shock Spring Compressor Tool ....... 2870623
Strut Rod Holding Wrench ............ 2871572
Strut Spring Compressor Tool (LH) .... 2871573
Strut Spring Compressor Tool (RH) .... 2871574
Body Holding Tool ................... 2871017
Safety Needle ...................... 7052069
Shock Spring Compressor Tool ....... 2870623
Gas Shock Recharging Kit ............ 2200421
Damper Rod Holding Tool ............ 2871352
FoxTM Shock IFP Tool ................ 2871351
5.1 5/98
BODY AND STEERING
Body Styles
1996 Body Styles
Body Style
Gen II
Gen III
Gen IV
1997 Body Styles
Body Style
Gen II
Gen III
Gen IV
1998 Body Styles
Body Style
Gen II
Gen III
Gen IV
5/98 5.1a
Model
Trail Boss, Magnum 2x4, Magnum 4x4, Magnum
6x6,4006x6,Sportsman4x4
Trail Blazer, Sport, Scrambler
Xpress 300, Xplorer 300, Xpress 400, Xplorer 400,
Sportsman 500
Model
Trail Boss, Sportsman 4x4, Magnum 2x4, Magnum
4x4, Magnum 6x6, 400 6x6,
Trail Blazer, Sport, Scrambler 4x4, Scrambler 500
Xpress 300, Xplorer 300, Xpress 400, Xplorer 400,
Xplorer 500, Sportsman 500
Model
Trail Boss, Magnum 2x4, Magnum 4x4,
Big Boss 500 6x6,
Trail Blazer, Sport 400, Scrambler 400,
Scrambler 500
Xpress 300, Xplorer 300, Xplorer 400,
Sportsman 500
BODY AND STEERING
5.1b
5/98
BODY AND STEERING
Body Assembly Exploded View (Gen II - Typical)
Rear Cab Assembly
Front Cab Assembly
Side Cover
All warning information labels must be in place when body parts are assembled.
7/96
5.2
BODY AND STEERING
Cover/Panel Removal (Gen II .. Typical)
To Remove: Perform These Steps:
Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Pull release lever at the rear of the seat
Lift and pull seat rearward, disengaging seat from tabs at the rear of the fuel tank
Fuel tank cover ............. Remove: Seat
Ignition key
Side panels
Fuel cap
2 retaining screws at rear of fuel tank cover
2 retaining screws at side of fuel tank cover
Disengage tabs at front of cover on left and right side
Side panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Remove: Seat
1 screw on left side front
1 screw on right side front
Headlight cover ............. Remove: Seat
Fuel tank cover
2 TorxTM screws at rear of cover
1 screw on left front
1 screw on right front
Disconnect headlamp wiring harness
Radiator cap access panel Turn fastener at front 114 turn
Rear rack .................. Remove: Seat
2 bolts, nuts and washers at rear of rack
2 bolts, nuts and washers at front of rack
Rear cab assembly .. . . . . . . .. Remove: Seat
Rear rack
3 screws, nuts and washer plate at rear of left footrest
2 screws, nuts and washer plate at rear of right footrest
6 bolts and flat washers from top of cab assembly, under seat
2 screws at front of muffler guard
Front rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Remove: 4 bolts, nuts and washers
Front cab assembly. . . . . . . . .. Remove: Seat
Side panels
Fuel tank cover
Headlight cover
Front rack
Fuel pump bracket
3 screws, nuts and washers from left footrest
2 screws, nuts and washers from right footrest
2 rivets at top of cab beneath fuel pump bracket
5.3 10/96
BODY AND STEERING
Cover/Panel Removal (Gen III - Typical)
Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Pull release lever at left rear of seat
Headlight cover ............. Remove: Oil tank cap
Disengage tabs on both sides and rear
Disconnect headlamp wiring harness
Rear cab assembly .... . . . . .. Remove: Seat
3 screws, nuts and washer plate at rear of left footrest
2 screws, nuts and washer plate at rear of right footrest
4 bolts and flat washers from top of cab assembly
2 screws at rear of muffler guard
2 screws at rear of front cab on each side
Disconnect taillight harness
Front cab assembly .......... Remove: Seat
10/96
Fuel tank cap
Headlight cover
3 screws, nuts and washers from left footrest
2 screws, nuts and washers from right footrest
2 rivets at top of cab beneath fuel pump bracket
2 screws at rear of front cab on each side
2 screws in front top of cab
2 Torx screws on key switch face plate
Key
Key switch face plate
5.3a
BODY AND STEERING
Cover/Panel Removal (Gen IV .. Typical)
Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Pull release lever at the rear of the seat
Side panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Remove: Seat
Disengage tabs at front and rear
Headlight pod. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Remove: 2 Phillips screws at front
3 Phillips screws at rear
Lift upper half of pod and disconnect speedometer cable
Disconnect indicator lamp wiring harness connector
Disengage side tabs
Remove upper half of pod
Remove 2 screws from mounting bracket
Disconnect connector at rear of headlamp
Remove lower half of pod
Radiator cap access panel ... Remove: Front rack
Disengage tabs at front and rear
Lift panel out
Rear rack .................. Remove: Seat
2 bolts at rear of rack
2 bolts at front of rack
Rear cab assembly . . . . . . . . .. Remove: Seat
Rear rack
1 screw, nut and washer at rear of inner left footrest
4 screws at bottom of left rear mudflap
1 screw, nut and washer at rear of inner right footrest
4 screws at bottom of right rear mudflap
4 bolts and flat washers from top of cab assembly, under seat
2 screws at rear bottom of cab assembly near taillight
Disconnect taillight harness
Front rack ............ . . . . .. Remove: 4 screws, lock washers, and flat washers
Front cab assembly. . . . . . . . .. Remove: Seat
Side panels
2 screws at rear of cab at fuel tank mount bracket
Front rack
Front bumper
Front panel
3 screws from bottom left mudflap
3 screws from bottom right mudflap
1 inner screw from front cab to foot rest on each side
2 screws under front panel
5.3b
10/96
BODY AND STEERING
Body Assembly Exploded View (Gen III Typical)
Mud Flap
Front Cab Assembly
7/96
~
r I
I
~
t
1
~ Seat Release Latch
\a,
\
\
Rear Cab Assembly
~ ~
5.4
Front Cover
Rear Mud Guard
BODY AND STEERING
Body Assembly Exploded View (Gen IV - Typical)
Rear Cab

Release r
.
l .
Rear Cab Assembly
Front Cover
Side Cover
Front Cab Assembly
Footrest
Front Mud
Guard
5.5 7/96
BODY AND STEERING
Body Assembly Exploded View (Gen IV .. Headlight Pod)
10/96
Torque bolts evenly so gap
is equal at front and rear of
handlebar block
11 -13 ft. Ibs. ~
(1.52 - 1.79 kg-m) ,""
~
\
. ~
..:::::.------'!-- Clean knurling when
repositioning handlebars
Adjuster
I
( .
~
5.6
Disassembly
1. Remove two front Phillips screws.
2. Remove three rear Phillips screws.
3. Lift top half of pod.
4. Disconnect speedometer cable.
5. Disconnect indicator light wire coupler.
6. Remove ignition switch and choke cable.
7. Remove three screws securing bottom half of
pod.
5.6a
BODY AND STEERING
Headlight Pod Service (Gen IV - Typical)
\
/1
Remove 2 front Screws
10/96
BODY AND STEERING
Headlight Pod Service (Gen IV - Typical)
Installation
1. Install bottom of pod onto handlebar and secure
to brackets.
Do not over tighten screws or holes may strip.
2. Install key switch, choke cable, and headlight.
3. Connect indicator light wire coupler to indicator
lights in top half of pod.
4. Connect speedometer cable to speedometer.
5. Install top of pod onto bottom half, making sure
interlocking tabs mate properly.
6. Install two front Phillips screws.
NOTE: When assembling a new pod, use the screw
to pre-thread the two front holes in the top pod before
mating halves.
7. Install three rear Phillips screws, aligning with
Tinnerman clips.
8. To adjust headlight, refer to procedure outlined
in Maintenance chapter.
10/96
5.6b
Side panel removal may be difficult until the locking
tabs and receivers have been snapped and un-
snapped a few times.
1. Remove seat. Grasp rear of side panel near rear
cab. With a quick and firm motion, pull the panel
forward and outward to disengage the two rear
tabs.
2. Place hand on top of side panel behind the fuel
tank. With a quick and firm motion, push down
on the side panel to disengage the top rear two
tabs. Then pull up on side panel to disengage
front upper and lower tab.
3. To reinstall side panel, align panel tabs with slots on
front cab. Push panel upward and forward until tabs
lock. Bend rear of side panel and insert the two tabs
into the rear cab.
5.7
BODY AND STEERING
Side Panel Removal (Gen IV - Typical)
Step 1.
Pull forward and out to disengage
two rear tabs.
Step 2.
Push down to disengage top rear
two tabs.
Step 3.
To reinstall, align panel tabs with
slots. Push upward and forward
until tabs lock.
7/96
BODY AND STEERING
Toe Alignment
component repair and adjustment be performed by an authorized Polaris Dealer.
Method 1
Be sure to keep handlebars centered.
If adjustment is required refer to page 5.9 for procedure and cautions.

CiQ 0 'q
0'-.:.'/0

c;)
\:.:./ C;;
00
NOTE: String '0 \:::::J (j
should just touch
side surface of rear
tire on each side of....... 00
machine. ..

Measure from string
to rim at front and
rear of rim.
Rear rim measure-
ment should be
1/16" to 1/8" (.2 to
.3 cm) more than
front rim measure-
ment.

-&]-
@J
I

NOTE: The steering frog can be used as an indicator of whether the handlebars are
straight. The frog should always point straight back from the steering post.
7/96
5.8
BODY AND STEERING
Toe Alignment Method 2
component repair and adjustment be performed by an authorized Polaris Dealer.
Method 2
1. Place machine on a smooth level surface.
2. Set handlebars in a straight ahead position and
secure handlebars in this position. NOTE: The
steering frog can be used as an indicator of whether
the handlebars are straight. The frog should always
point straight back from the steering post.
3. Place a chalk mark on the face of the front tires
approximately 1 0" (25.4 cm) from the floor as close to
the horizontal center line as possible. Call this
measurement "A". NOTE: It is important that both
marks be equally positioned from the ground in order
to get an accurate measurement.
4. Measure the distance between the marks.
Chalk Line
Measurement
"A"
Measurement "B"
5. Rotate the tires 180
0
by moving vehicle forward or backward. Position chalk marks approximately 10" (25.4
cm) from the floor. Call this measurement "B".
6. Again measure the distance between the marks. Subtract measurement "B" from measurement "A", The
difference between measurements "A" and "B" is called vehicle toe alignment. The recommended vehicle toe
tolerance is 1 18" to 1 14" (.3 to .6 cm) toe out. This means the measurement at the front of the tire (A) is 1/8" to
1 14" (.3 to .6 cm) wider than the measurement at the rear (B).
Toe Alignment
7. If toe alignment is incorrect, measure the distance between vehicle center and each wheel. This will tell you
which tie rod needs adjusting. NOTE: Be sure handlebars are straight ahead before determining which tie
rod(s) need adjustment.
CAUTION: During tie rod adjustment it is very important that the following precautions be taken when tightening
tie rod end jam nuts. If the rod end is positioned incorrectly it will not pivot, and may break.
To adjust toe alignment, the jam nuts must be loos-
ened and the tie rod either shortened or lengthened
for proper toe setting.
When the tie rod end jam nuts are tightened, be
sure to hold tie rod ends so they are parallel with
the steering arm or the steering frog, respectively.
8. After alignment is complete, torque jam nuts to 12-14 ft.
Ibs. (1.66-1.93 kg-m).
5.9
Correctly
Tightened
Jam Nut
Incorrectly
Tightened
Jam Nut
7/96
BODY AND STEERING
Typical Steering Assembly, Exploded View, Trail Boss 250
Always use new
patch lock bolts
upon reassembly
7/96
5.10
NOTE: For all 2x4 vehicles with
aluminum struts (except
Magnum): To avoid damage to
tie rods and other steering
components, be sure to install
stud ends correctly.
~
@ ~
25 ft. Ibs.
V (3.45 kg-m)
........,0
Always use new
cotter pins upon
reassembly.
~ ~
BODY AND STEERING
Steering Assembly, Exploded View, 2x4 Models (Except Trail Boss 250)
Steering Post Arm
Always use new
cotter pins upon
reassembly.
NOTE: To avoid damage to tie rods
and other steering components, be
sure to install tie rod end stud in the
proper direction.
"i
~ Loctite 242
I
25 ft. Ibs. ____
(3.45 kg-m) ..-0
~ @ \ 8 ft. Ibs.
~ / (1.10 kg-m)
I:
5.11 10/96
BODY AND STEERING
Steering Assembly, Exploded View, All 4x4 and 6x6 Models
NOTE: To avoid damage to tie rods and
other steering components, be sure to
25-30 ft. Ibs.
install tie rod end studs in the proper
direction. The steering post arm bolt (8)
Steering Post - 4\.14 kg-m) up; the rod end studs (A) point
I
Steering Post
I J Arm
Right Hand Tie Rod /' /' -'t({
End Positioned Be- ;1 I ; Left Hand Tie
tween Steering -' Rod End
Post Arms ,-(7 ,I Positioned
// Steer-
I I I mg Post
I _ Arms
: J I
\
\ I tJ
\ II --- -' Ik--B

f '.J "-
/0 --
/' /
1::::::0

30 ft. Ibs.
(4.14 kg-m)
Always use new bolts
upon reassembly
10/96
(3
71- I
- j 25 ft. Ibs . .-------"
(), (3.45 kg-m)

Always use new
cotter pins upon
reassembly.
5.12
23-24 ft. Ibs.
'i

"- Loctite
V 242
8 ft. Ibs.
(1.10 kg-m)
BODY AND STEERING
Steering Stop Adjustments
Rear Axle Bend
The rear axle shaft is hardened to approximately 3" to 4/1 (7.6 to 10 cm) from the outer ends. This allows the shaft
to bend in case of impact or accident. Small amounts of axle runout can be straightened using V blocks, a hydrau-
lic press, and a dial indicator. CAUTION: Do not use heat on any part of the axle. Heat will destroy the temper
and cause the shaft to become brittle.
Replacement
1. Lay a pad or tarp on floor and carefully tip vehicle onto its side with the A-arm to be replaced in the upright
position. NOTE: To be sure fuel spillage does not occur, only perform this operation when the fuel tank is half
full or less.
2. Remove cotter pin from ball joint stud at wheel end of A-arm and loosen nut until it is flush with end of stud.
3. Using a soft face hammer, tap nut to loosen A-arm from bolt. Remove nut and A-arm from hub strut assembly.
CAUTION: On 4x4 models, when removing the A-arm from the ball joint stud, do not over extend the CV axle
assembly. Over extension may disengage the CV joint. If the CV joint is disengaged, it must be disassembled
and repaired. To prevent over extension, tie a wire between the lower strut casting pinch bolt and the inner axle
universal joint.
4. Loosen two bolts on A-arm tube by alternating each about 1/3 of the way until A-arm can be removed.
5. Examine A-arm shaft. Replace if worn. Discard hardware.
6. Insert A-arm shaft into new A-arm. NOTE: On 4x4 models the CV joint shields will need to be attached to the
A-arm. See III.
f \J IJ '- Vehicle Frame Bolt 30 ft. Ibs.
/0 (4.14kg-m)
T/ .'-.)- -
/0 II '-..,
t::::" 'L / ---- \...--- )

Bolt 30 ft. Ibs. - / _.----:
Fitting
e Ball Joint
r- Stud
(4.14 kg-m) / \
Washer
- ,($11 Loctite 242
I 8 ft. Ibs.
25 ft. Ibs ---Q9)-- /(1.10 kg-m)
(3.45 kg-m). .
A-Arm Shaft
CV Joint Shield Cotter Pin
(AWD Models)
7. Install new A-arm assembly onto vehicle frame. Torque bolts to 30 ft. Ibs. (4.14 kg-m).
A WARNING
The locking features on the existing bolts were destroyed
during removal. DO NOT reuse old bolts. Serious injury
or death could result if fasteners come loose during opera-
tion.
8. Attach A-arm to hub strut assembly. Tighten ball joint
nut to 25 ft. Ibs. (3.45 kg-m). If cotter pin holes are not
aligned, tighten nut slightly to align. Install a new cotter
pin with open ends toward rear of machine. Bend both
ends in opposite directions around nut.
9. Locate grease fitting in center of A-arm tube and pump
A-arm full of grease.
10. Carefully return vehicle to upright pOSition.
A WARNING
Upon A-arm installation completion, test vehicle at low speeds before putting into regular service.
5.13
10/96
Rear Drive Axle, Hub and Wheel Assembly, - 2x4 and 4x4 (Except Sportsman 500)
Retainer
........-
Out
Cone
Washer
10/96
150 ft. Ibs. (20.7 kg-m)
with Loctite
5.14
Replace all cotter
pins if removed .
BODY AND STEERING
Concentric Swingarm Rear Axle Assembly, Exploded View
Left Axle Nut 120 ft. Ibs.
Brake Disc
Snap Ring 00
1998 Scrambler 400/500
Refer to axle removaVassembly
procedure page 7.52.
Lock Collar I i DiSCS Hub R'
top Ing
C!J C!J Q / Seal
/ O-Ring ,
to / S I Beanng
I" 0000 a /a Bearing Race
, Eccentric Housing
l , Grease Fitting
18 ft. Ibs.
(2.49 kg-m)

Left identified
by groove in spti:n,ft

I
I
I
Axle

1

'''-J
l Caliper

< /q, .
Foam Seal
b{ Axle Nut (8-10 ft. Ibs)
V I / Lock Collar
o
frt;! /
'''v / Caliper Mount, Upper
f(}./,
" j! C@
'y.
'l l' "ttC,
I
'(
, 0 ,
IJ'
Caliper Mount, Lower
10-12 ft.lbs. (1.38-1.65kg-m)
5.14a
Clf.()
/
Snap Ring
Torque: 80 ft. Ibs.
(11.06 kg-m)
5/98
Pivot Bushing, Left
5/98
BODY AND STEERING
Concentric Swingarm, Exploded View
Bushing, Left
Two-piece bushing
Pivot Bolt
S.14b
BODY AND STEERING
Rear Drive Axle, Hub and Wheel Assembly, .. Shaft Drive Models
NOTE: When servicing, check model number for correct replacement parts. Be sure fasteners are properly
torqued.
17 ft. Ibs.
(2.35 kg-m)
15 ft. Ibs.
(2.07 kg-m)
100 ft. Ibs.
(4.83 kg-m)

17 ft. Ibs.
(2.35 kg-m)
Index
Bushings
Correctly
5.15
35 ft. Ibs.
(4.83 kg-m)
'"

30 ft. Ibs.
(4.14 kg-m)
,
. Ibs.

30 ft. Ibs.
(4.14 kg-m)
5/98
BODY AND STEERING
Rear Strut Stabilizer, 6x6 Models
Grease Fittings
30 ft. Ibs.
,. (4.14 kg-m)
" ~
~ "
~
30 ft. Ibs.
(4.14 kg-m)
7/96
5.16
BODY AND STEERING
Rear Swing Arm Weldment, 6x6 Models
16 ft. Ibs.
(2.21 kg-m)
~ U i d e
Rear strut (1) and weldment (2) can only be replaced as an assembly. They are pressed and
welded together at the factory and cannot be disassembled.
Grease fittings (3 and 4). Check lubrication guide for service intervals.
5.17 7/96
BODY AND STEERING
Front Swing Arm Weldment, 6x6 Models
7/96
55 ft. Ibs.
(7.59 kg-m)
/
5.18
55 ft Ibs,
(7.59 kg-m)
55 ft. Ibs.
(7.59 kg-m)
/
60 ft. Ibs.
(8.28 kg-m)
BODY AND STEERING
Swing Arm and Rear Suspension Exploded View
25 ft. Ibs.
(3.45 kg-m)
25 ft. Ibs.
(3.45 kg-m)
5.19
Scrambler
55 ft. Ibs.
(7.59 kg-m)
/
7/96
BODY AND STEERING
Axle Housing and Swing Arm Removal and Inspection
Swing Arm Removal
1 . Remove seat.
2. Remove two nuts, bolts and washers at rear and front
of rack and remove rack.
3. Remove three screws and nuts, and washer plate at
rear of left footrest.
4. Remove two screws and nuts, and washer plate at rear
of right footrest.
5. Remove six bolts and flat washers from top of rear cab
assembly.
6. Remove two screws at front of muffler guard.
7. Remove rear cab.
8. Referto PVT Disassembly, page 6.9, and disassemble
PVT system and inner cover.
9. Carefully support the rear of the vehicle off the ground.
CAUTION: Severe personal injury may result if
vehicle tips or falls.
10. Remove pinch bolts (8).
11. Remove chain clip, master link and drive chain (C).
12. Remove wheels.
13. Support swing arm and remove rear shock assembly
lower mounting bolt.
7/96
5.20
Swing Arm Removal/Inspection
14. On AWD models, remove auxiliary brake arm, middle
chain guard, middle chain, and sprockets.
15. Remove output shaft brake caliper and guard, circlip
and brake rotor.
16. Bend tab washers open and remove swing arm pivot
bolts.
NOTE:The left side swingarm bolt is shorter than the right.
17. Remove the swing arm. Remove grease fittings
before pressing bushings and spacers out. Inspect
bushings, spacer, and pivot bolts for wear.
18. Note orientation of grease fittings for reassembly.
5.21
BODY AND STEERING
Swing Arm Removal/Inspection
7/96
BODY AND STEERING
Swing Arm Assembly and Installation
Swing Arm Assembly/Installation
1 . Lubricate and install new bushings with spacer into
swingarm.
2. Install thrust bushings with tab washer as shown.
Reinstall grease fittings.
3. Install swingarm. Make sure thrust bushing
remains in place.
4. Use new swing arm pivot bolt tab washers. Bend
to secure to frame and head of bolt after torquing.
5. Torque swing arm pivot bolts to 55 ft. Ibs. (7.59
kg-m).
6. Torque rear shock mount bolt to 25 ft. Ibs. (3.45 kg-m).
7. Torque center chain drive sprocket to 17 ft. Ibs. (2.35
kg-m).
8. Torque center chain driven sprocket to 30 ft. Ibs. (4.14
kg-m).
9. Apply a small amount of RTV silicone sealant to the
spline area of the output shaft where the brake rotor is
positioned, install the brake rotor.
10. Install the brake caliper and guard. Torque bolts to
10-12 ft. Ibs. (1.38-1.66 kg-m)
11. Torque wheel nuts to 50 ft. Ibs. (6.9 kg-m).
12. Refer to PVT section, pages 6.10-6.11, for proper
assembly procedure and torque values.
7/96
5.22
Pi Bolt
Tab sher
Removal I Disassembly
BODY AND STEERING
Concentric Swing Arm Removal
1. Lift rear of machine and support securely with wheels off the floor.
2. Remove drive chain.
3. Remove rear caliper.
CAUTION: Do not allow the caliper to hang by the brake line. Brake line damage may result.
4. Remove rear wheels and/or hubs.
5. Remove lower shock bolt.
6. Loosen both swingarm pivot bolts (5 and 8) and then remove both bolts while supporting
swingarm.
7. Remove swingarm.
8. Remove LH pivot bushing (7) and swingarm bushing (6) from swingarm.
9. Place flats of right side pivot bushing (4) in a vise to hold while removing nut (1)
10. Remove two-piece bushing (3) and RH pivot bushing (4) from swingarm.
11. Clean and inspect parts for wear. Replace worn parts.
(3) Two-piece bushing
(4) Pivot Bushing, Right
Place flats of pivot bushing in
~ V ~ d while removing nut
~
(5) Pivot Bolt
5.22a 5/98
BODY AND STEERING
Concentric Swing Arm Assemblyllnstallation
Assembly !Installation
1. Lubricate and install bushing (6) in left side of swingarm and two-piece bushings (3) in right side.
2. Clean threads of nut (1), pivot bolts (5) and (8), and pivot bushings (4) and (7) with Loctite Primer Tor
Primer N. Apply Loctite 262 to end threads of pivot bushing (4).
3. Install right pivot bushing (4) through the two-piece bushing (3).
4. Install washer and nut. Hold pivot bolt (5) in vise and torque nut (1) to 150 ft. Ibs. (20.74 kg-m).
5. Install left pivot bushing (7).
Note: There are stop plates attached to the inside of the frame to prevent the pivot bushings from turning
when the pivot bolts are tightened. The flats of the pivot bushings must be oriented correctly to align with
the frame plate, or the pivot bolt holes will not be aligned. The top flat on the nut should be approximately
parallel with top surface of the swingarm.
6. Install swingarm assembly in frame.
7. Apply Loctite 262 to threads of pivot bolts (5 and 8). Install and tighten pivot bolts slowly until the flats of
the pivot bushings (4) and (7) engage the stop plate on the frame.
8. Torque pivot bolts (5) and (8) to 150 ft. Ibs. (20.74 kg-m).
9. Install lower rear shock bolt. Torque to 25 ft. Ibs. Assemble rear axle, brake caliper and mount, hubs,
wheels and chain. (Refer to Chapter 7)
150 ft. Ibs. (20.74 kg-m)
(8) Pivot Bolt
5/98 5.22b
(3) Two-piece bushing
(4) Pivot Bushing, Right
Place flats of pivot bushing in
to while removing nut
(5) Pi ot Bolt
BODY AND STEERING
Strut Assembly - 400L AWD, Magnum AWD
15 ft. Ibs.
(2.07 kg-m)
18 ft. Ibs.
(2.48 kg-m)
NOTE: Be sure steel insert notch (1) and strut casting notch are lined up and provide a channel for the
magnetic coil wires to lie in. If insert and strut do not match, strut replacement will be necessary.
Grease fitting (2) location. Check lubrication guide for recommended service intervals.
Specified pole gap for 1996 to current models is 0-.001" (0-.02S4mm)
5.23 10/96
BODY AND STEERING
Front Strut Weldment Replacement
Front Strut Cartridge Replacement
1 . Hold strut rod with holder wrench and remove top
nut.
2. Compress spring using strut spring compressor
tools.
3. Remove upper strut pivot assembly.
4. Remove coil spring and collapse strut cartridge.
5. Scribe a line on the strut cartridge level with the top
of the aluminum strut casting. This line can be used
as a reference for installed height of the new
cartridge upon reassembly.
6. Remove two pinch bolts and tap upper and lower
pinch bolt boss with a 3/8"-16 tap.
7. Install a large, thick flat washer as shown in photo at
right.
8. Use a 3/8"-16 bolt to spread the strut casting just
enough to allow the old cartridge to be removed and
the new one to be installed. Install cartridge until
bottomed in strut casting or to the same level as the
one removed.
9. Torque pinch bolts to 15 ft. Ibs. (2 kg-m).
10. Reassemble spring and top pivot assembly. Be
sure all parts are installed properly and seated fully.
11. Torque strut rod nut to specification. Do not over
torque nut.
Strut Assembly - 2x4 Models
Self locking nuts (1 and 2) should not be reused as the
locking properties will be destroyed. If these nuts are
removed, make sure to replace with new nuts.
Grease fitting location (3). Check lubrication guide for
recommended service intervals.
7/96
5.24
15 ft. Ibs.
(2.07 kg-m)
15 ft. Ibs.
(2.07 kg-m)
. ~
2
Front Strut Removal
1. Elevate and safely support machine under
footrest/frame area.
Serious injury may result if machine tips or falls. Be sure ma-
chine is secure before beginning this service procedure.
2. Remove wheel.
Spring may be under compression. Use compression tools
to remove tension before disassembling strut. Both left and
right tools are required to compress each strut spring.
3. Hold strut rod with tool. Remove top nut securing strut
rod to strut tower.
4. Remove strut by lowering out of frame.
5.24a
BODY AND STEERING
Front Strut Service
10/96
BODY AND STEERING
Front Strut Service
Installation
1. Assemble strut in proper order. See illustration at right.
2. Compress spring using compression tool.
3. Install spring retainer, bottom pivot ball, and bottom
threaded spacer.
4. Install strut assembly into strut tower on frame.
5. Install top pivot ball, rubber spacer, and washer.
6. Tighten strut retention nut. Hold strut rod with holder.
7. Torque strut rod retention nut to specification.
10/96
5.24b
Nut (Torque to 15 ft Ibs (2.07 kgm))
Spring Retainer
Spring
Strut
1. Remove front wheel, cotter pin, castle nut and
A-arm. NOTE: On 4x4 models be sure to wire
A-arm to disc as shown in photo 2. This will prevent
CV joint disengagement.
2. Remove ball joint retaining plate.
3. Install ball joint puller as shown.
4. To pull ball joint out, hold bolt head (A) while
tightening jam nut (8).
5. To reinstall ball joint, position new joint onto driver
as shown.
6. Install sleeve with top plate removed, as shown.
7. Using a large hammer, drive ball joint in until it
bottoms in casting bore.
8. Reinstall retaining plate cap and A-arm.
9. Torque A-arm ball joint castle nut to 25 ft. Ibs. (3.5
kg-m).
10. Reinstall cotter pin with open ends toward rear of
machine.
5.25
BODY AND STEERING
Front Strut Ball Joint Replacement
7/96
BODY AND STEERING
2x4 Hub Bearing Service
2x4 Front Hub Disassembly/Inspection
1. Stop engine, place machine in gear and set
parking brake.
2. Loosen front wheel nuts slightly.
CAUTION: Serious injury may result if machine tips
or falls. Be sure machine is secure before beginning
this service procedure. Wear eye protection when re-
moving and installing bearings and seals.
4. Remove wheel nuts and wheels.
5. Check bearings for play by grasping hub firmly
and checking for movement. Rotate the hub. It
should rotate smoothly without binding or rough
spots.
6. Remove hub cap, cotter pin, front spindle nut, and
washer. Remove the hub.
7. Rotate each bearing by hand and check for
smooth rotation. Visually inspect bearing for
moisture, dirt, or corrosion. Replace bearing if
moisture, dirt, corrosion, or roughness is evident.
NOTE: If bearings are removed, they must be replaced.
8. Pry seal out back of hub.
9. Using a brass drift, tap bearing spacer to one side
to expose inner bearing race. Drive bearing out
using a drift through opposite side of hub.
10. Remove spacer and drive other bearing out.
11. Clean hub and spacer thoroughly.
7/96 5.26
2x4 Front Hub Disassembly, Cont.
12. Inspect spacer for wear or damage. Measure
length of spacer and replace if worn beyond service
limit or if ends are rounded.
2x4 Front Hub Assembly
1. Pack bearings with Polaris Premium All Season
Grease. Drive one of the bearings into rear of hub
using a 1.180 (46 mm) bearing driver. CAUTION:
Do not drive on the inner race of the bearing.
2. Coat bearing spacer with grease and install into
hub. Drive other bearing into hub until seated.
3. Install seal into hub (with numbers facing out) until
flush with end of seal bore.
5.27
BODY AND STEERING
7/96
BODY AND STEERING
2x4 Front Hub Installation
1. Apply grease to washer and install with spindle
nut. Torque nut to 40 ft. Ibs. (5.52 kg-m) and install
cotter pin. Tighten nut slightly if necessary to align
cotter pin holes. Rotate wheel and check for
smooth operation. Bend both ends of cotter pin
around nut in opposite directions.
2. Inspect O-Rings on hub cap for wear, cracks or
damage and replace if necessary.
3. Apply a light film of grease to hub cap and install
until fully seated.
4. Rotate hub. It should rotate smoothly without
binding or rough spots.
5. Install wheel and wheel nuts and torque evenly in
a cross pattern to 15 ft. Ibs. (2.07 kg-m).
7/96
5.28
BODY AND STEERING
FOXTM Shock Service
Oil in the FOXTM shock should be changed annually to maintain a high level of performance, minimize wear, and
prevent corrosion of internal components. When performing maintenance on FOXTM shocks, use the Gas Shock
Recharging Kit (PN 2200421). It consists of the necessary valves, pressure gauge, and fittings to deflate and
pressurize the shocks.
WARNING: FOXTM shocks contain high pressure nitrogen gas. Extreme caution must be used while handling and
working with FOXTM shocks and the related high pressure service equipment. The pressure must be released from
the shock before disassembly. We strongly recommend you wear safety glasses and ear protection during ser-
vice of these shocks.
CAUTION: Extreme cleanliness is of utmost importance during all disassembly and reassembly operations to
prevent dirt or foreign particles from entering the shock.
Tools Required:
Body Holding Tool (PN 2871017)
Shock Spring Compressor Tool (PN 2870623)
Damper Rod Holding Tool (PN 2871352)
Top Shock Eye -_--.l
Jounce Bumper-----;..
Lock Nut (replace if
removed) - - - - - + ~
Main Shock Body
Polaris Industries Inc. 5.29
Safety Needle (PN 7052069)
Gas Shock Recharging Kit (PN 2200421)
FOXTM Shock IFP Tool (PN 2871351)
Bushing and Sleeve
Damper Rod
Bearing Cap (with seal)
Valve Piston
Reservoir Cap
Reservoir
IFP
10/96
BODY AND STEERING
FOX Shock Service
1. Clean shock thoroughly to remove all dirt, oil, and grease.
Dry completely with compressed air.
2. Inspect the upper and lower shock bushings and inner
sleeves for wear or damage and replace if necessary.
Remove the lower shock bushings and sleeve.
3. Position and clamp lower shock mount in a soft jawed
vise with reservoir and shock body upright.
4. Install shock spring compressor tool (PN 2870623).
Compress spring and remove spring retainer, spring, and
protector sleeve from shock body.
5. Remove cap screw from pressure valve located in the
reservoir cap.
6. Install safety needle into pressure gauge assembly.
Install red fitting (on the end of the safety needle
assembly) squarely into the pressure valve recess.
7. With valve outlet pointed in a safe direction, depress and
hold the safety release detent pin on safety needle and
push gauge assembly forward to compress the unit. This
will fully insert the needle through the rubber core of the
pressure valve. NOTE: Be sure to hold the gauge
assembly at a 90 angle to the pressure valve to avoid
damage to the safety needle. When pressure gauge
registers zero, the shock has been de-pressurized.
8. Push the reservoir cap down just enough to expose the
retaining circlip. Remove the circlip being careful not to
damage the reservoir chamber bore or circlip groove.
7/96
5.30
9. Remove the reservoir cap carefully with a pliers.
10. Remove bleeder screw from internal floating piston (I FP)
using IFP Holding Tool (PN 2871351) and a 1/8" hex
wrench. To remove IFP from reservoir, install holding
tool, rotate tool 114 turn, and pull the piston slowly
upward. Be prepared to catch IFP piston ring when
piston is remove from reservoir.
11. Using a 1/1 wrench, loosen shaft bearing cap. NOTE: If
the shock body starts to unscrew from the reservoir
casting, install body holding tool (PN 2871071). Position
the tool approximately 1 1/2" below the bearing cap as
shown, tighten securely in the vise and loosen the
bearing cap.
5.31
BODY AND STEERING
FOX Shock Service
7/96
BODY AND STEERING
FOX Shock Service
12. Unscrew the bearing cap completely and pull shock rod
and piston straight out to avoid seal or valve damage.
NOTE: Be prepared to catch the valve assembly piston
ring. It may fall out when the valve assembly is removed
from the shock body.
13. Remove shock from vise, drain oil from shock body and
dispose of properly.
14. Clean shock body with clean high flash point solvent and
dry thoroughly with compressed air. Inspect walls of
shock and reservoir body for wear or damage.
15. To clean the damper valve assembly, slide the jounce
bumper away from the top shock eye toward the valve
assembly. Position the holder with the valve assembly
facing upward. CAUTION: Be sure the shaft and tool are
clean and free of debris before installing the tool, or shaft
damage may result.
16. Remove the valve assembly locknut to allow thorough
cleaning of individual valving washers. Clean with
solvent and dry thoroughly with compressed air.
CAUTION: Pay close attention to the order of valving
washers and the direction of the holes in the valve piston.
All parts must be replaced in the same order as removed
to maintain proper dampening characteristics.
17. Remove and clean all valve washers and valve piston
with solvent and dry thoroughly with compressed air.
Assemble in the same order as removed.
18. Replace lock nut with a new one (PN 1500016) and
tighten to 18 ft. Ibs. CAUTION: Locking properties of nut
will be reduced when nut is loosened or removed.
Replace lock nut before reassembly. Do not re-use old
nut.
19. Mount shock in vise a t a1 0to 15angle. Pour oil (PN
2870995 only) down the side of reservoir slowly until
level is equal in main shock body. Continue to fill
reservoir within 1/4/1 from top, and set the shock upright in
vise.
7/96
5.32
Valve Piston
Side with most holes toward 1
damper rod nut
20. Lubricate QHRing and piston ring on IFP with clean shock
oil. Compress the piston ring and install carefully in
reservoir
21. Push piston into reservoir slowly, allowing air to escape
from beneath piston through bleed hole as piston is
installed. Continue to push piston into reservoir
approximately 2". Piston will be submerged in oil.
22. Inspect bleeder screw QHRing for damage and replace if
necessary. Install bleeder screw and Q-Ring lightly in
piston. Do not tighten at this point.
23. Tip shock to a 15angle and fill main shock body to 1 1/2"
from top. Always add oil slowly to minimize air bubbles in
oil.
24. Slide jounce bumper to top of damper rod and position
bearing cap in middle of rod.
25. Compress piston ring and insert rod into shock body until
half submerged in oil. Rotate rod and wiggle piston and
rod to help disperse air from valve piston.
26. Continue to slide piston in until completely submerged.
Tip shock upright.
27. Slowly push rod and valve piston assembly into shock
body and screw bearing cap in until Q-Ring touches
shock body.
5.33
BODY AND STEERING
FOX Shock Service
7/96
BODY AND STEERING
FOX Shock Service
8. Support shock with one hand and strike top shock eye
with a soft face hammer two to three times. This will force
oil through the valve piston and push remaining air out.
9. Unscrew bearing cap and lift rod slowly upward, adding
oil as necessary to keep the valve piston assembly
submerged in oil. IMPORTANT: Do not allow valve
piston assembly to come out of the oil.
1 O. Add oil as rod is lifted upward until valve piston is just
below threads in shock body. fill shock completely and
wrap a shop cloth around the shock body. If air bubbles
are present, wipe them away or push them over the edge
of shock body.
11. Fully extend damper rod and screw bearing cap into
shock body. Tighten cap to 8 ft. Ibs. using a 1" crowfoot
wrench.
12. Extend shock damper rod completely.
13. Remove bleeder screw from IFP.
14. Set depth gauge on I FP holder tool to specified depth.
10/96
5.34
35. Install holder tool in reservoir and push IFP in slowly until
depth gauge contacts reservoir body. Hold IFP with tool
and tighten bleeder screw securely.
36. Drain and clean residual oil from reservoir.
37. Install reservoir cap and retaining circlip. CAUTION: Be
sure circlip is in good condition and firmly seated in
groove.
38. Insert the FOXTM Safety Needle and charge with nitrogen
to 200 PSI. Pull the needle straight outward and remove
from the pressurizing valve while holding the pressure
hose on the fitting. Do not insert the needle again to
check pressure as the volume inside the gauge will
reduce pressure in the shock.
39. Install cap screw in pressure valve.
5.35
BODY AND STEERING
FOX Shock Service
7/96
BODY AND STEERING
FOX Shock Service
FOX Shock Standard Valving Chart
Ref. Part No. Qty. Description
1. 1500033 1 Valve, Shock .90 x .375 x .008
2. 1500032 1 Valve, Shock 1 .0 x .375 x .008
3. 1500031 1 Valve, Shock 1.1 x .375 x .008
4. 1500026 1 Valve, Shock 1 .25 x .375 x .010
5. 1500047 1 Valve, Shock .80 x .375 x .010
6. 1500046 1 Valve, Shock .90 x .375 x .010
7. 1500049 1 Valve, Shock 1.1 x .375 x .006
8. 1500052 1 Valve, Shock1 .3 x .375 x .006
9. 1500095 2 Valve, Shock 1.25 x .375 x .012
10. 1500060 1 Valve, Shock 1.1 x .375 x .012
11. 1500096 1 Valve, Shock 1.0 x .375 x .015
12. 1500094 1 Valve, Shock .90 x .375 x .015
13. 1500057 1 Valve, Shock .80 x .375 x .012
7/96
5.36
Shaft
_...:..-. _____ 1.
2.
3.
I -4.
--+--- 5
---f---- 6.
----"--- -- 7.
--l----8.
Piston
-+-----10.
--t--- __ 11.
_ ~ 1 _ - - - 1 2 .
__ 13
I
Nut
~
BODY AND STEERING
1996 Optional Suspension Springs
The following accessory springs are available to better suit individual riding preferences. NOTE: Optional springs
may be a different color than standard springs. Springs may be painted to desired color. See chart above.
SOFT ..... i-------------... FIRM
Trail Rear Compression Spring N/A 7041470-067
STANDARD 150 Ib/in OPTION 175 Ib/in
Trail Blazer - Front Strut Spring NIA 7041471-067 7041238-067
Trail Boss Rear Compression Spring 7041518-067 7041204-067 7041303-067
OPTION 175 Ib/in STANDARD 190 Ib/in OPTION 250 Ib/in
Trail Boss - Front Strut Spring 7041471-067 7041238-067 7041375-067
OPTION 41 Ib/in STANDARD 61 Ib/in OPTION 64/113 Ib/;n
Xpress 300- Rear Compression Spring 7041518-067 7041204-067 7041303-067
Xpress 300 Front Strut Spring 7041238-067 7041375-067 7041450-067
OPTION 61 Ib/in STANDARD 64/1131b/in OPTION 101 Ib/in
Xplorer 300- Rear Compression Spring 7041518-067 7041204-067 7041303-067
Xplorer 300 - Front Strut Spring 7041238-067 7041375-067 7041450-067
OPTION 61 Ib/in STANDARD 64/113 Ib/in OPTION 101 Ib/in
Sport 400L- Rear Compression Spring 7041470-067 7041518-067 7041204-067
Sport 400L - Front Strut Spring 7041471-067 7041238-067 7041375-067
OPTION 41 Ib/in STANDARD 61 Ib/in OPTION 64/113 Ib/in
Scrambler 4x4- Rear Compression Spring 7041470-067 7041389-067 7041204-067
Scrambler 4x4 - Front Strut Spring 7041238-067 7041375-067 7041450-067
Xpress 400 - Front Strut Spring 7041238-067 7041375-067 7041450-067
Xplorer 400L Rear Compression Spring 7041518-067 7041204-067 7041303-067
Xplorer 400L - Front Strut Spring 7041238-067 7041375-067 7041450-067
Sportsman 400L 4x4 - Rear Compression Spring 7041204-067 7041303-067 NIA
STANDARD 190 Ib/in OPTION 250 Iblin
Sportsman 400L 4x4 - Front Strut Spring 7041238-067 7041375-067 7041450-067
Magnum 2x4 - Rear Compression spring 7041518-067 7041204-067 7041303-067
Magnum 2x4 - Front Strut Spring 7041238-067 7041375-067 7041450-067
OPTION 61 Ib/in STANDARD 64/113 Ib/in OPTION'01 Ib/in
Magnum 4x4 - Rear Compression Spring 7041518-067 7041204-067 7041303-067
Magnum 4x4 -- Front Strut Spring 7041238-067 7041375-067 7041450-067
Magnum 6x6 - Rear Compression Spring 7041204-067 7041303-067 NIA
OPTION 190 Ib/in STANDARD 250 Ib/in
Magnum 6x6 - Front Strut Spring 7041375-067 7041450-067 NIA
OPTION 64/113 Ib/in STANDARD 101 Ib/in
400L 6x6 - Rear Compression Spring 7041204-067 7041 303-067 NIA
400L 6x6 - Front Strut Spring 7041375-067 7041450-067 N/A
Sportsman 500 4x4 - Rear Compression Spring 7041517-067 7041453-067 7041519-067
Sportsman 500 4x4 - Front Strut Spring 7041238-067 7041375-067 7041450-067
5.37 7/96
BODY AND STEERING
1997 Optional Suspension Springs
SOFT ...... I-------------....... FIRM
Trail Blazer- Rear Compression Spring N/A 7041470-067 7041389-067
Trail Blazer Front Strut Spring N/A
.. "-
7041471-067 7041238-067
Trail Boss Rear Compression Spring 7041518-067 7041204-067 7041303-067
Trail Boss - Front Strut Spring 7041471-067 7041238-067 7041375-067
Xpress 300- Rear Compression Spring
_ ..
7041518-067 7041204-067 7041303-067
Xpress 300 - Front Strut Spring 7041238-067 7041375-067 7041450-067
OPTION 61 Ib/in STANDARD 64/113Ib/in OPTION 101 Ib/in
Xplorer 300- Rear Compression Spring 7041518-067 7041204-067 7041303-067
Xplorer 300 - Front Strut Spring 7041238-067 7041375-067 7041450-067
Sport 400L- Rear Compression Spring 7041470-067 7041389-067 7041204-067
Sport 400L - Front Strut Spring 7041471-067 7041238-067 7041375-067
Scrambler Compression Spring 7041470-067 7041389-067 7041204-067
OPTION 150 Ib/in STANDARD 1751b/in OPTION 190 Ib/in
--
Scrambler 4x4 - Front Strut Spring 7041648-067 7041603-067 7041647-067
OPTION 75/100 Ib/in STANDARD 75/110 Ib/in OPTION 80/120 Ib/in
Xpress 400" Front Strut Spring 7041238-067
..
---
7041450-067 7041375-067
Xplorer 400L Rear Compression Spring 7041518-067 7041204-067 7041303-067
", ..,--
Xplorer 400L Front Strut Spring 7041238-067 7041375-067 7041450-067
Sportsman 400L 4x4 Rear Compression Spring 7041204-067 7041303-067 N/A
Sportsman 400L 4x4 - Front Strut Spring 7041238-067 7041375-067 7041450-067
400L 6x6 - Rear Compression Spring 7041204-067 7041305-067 N/A
400L 6x6 - Front Strut Spring 7041375-067 7041450-067 N/A
Magnum 2x4 - Rear Compression spring I 7041518-067 7041204-067 7041303-067
Magnum 2x4 - Front Strut Spring 7041238-067 7041375-067 7041450-067
,-, ..... -----
Magnum 4x4 - Rear Compression Spring 7041518-067 7041204-067 7041303-067
Magnum 4x4 -- Front Strut Spring 7041238-067 7041375-067 7041450-067
Magnum 6x6 - Rear Compression Spring 7041204-067 7041305-067 N/A
Magnum 6x6 - Front Strut Spring 7041375-067 7041450-067 N/A
Scrambler 500- Rear Compression Spring 7041470-067 7041389-067 7041204-067
OPTION 50 Ib/in STANDARD 1751b/in OPTION 190 Ib/in
Scrambler 500 - Front Strut Spring 7041648-067 7041603-067 7041647-067
OPTION 75/100 Ib/in STANDARD 75/110 Ib/in OPTION 80/120 Ib/in
Xplorer 500 Rear Compression Spring 7041517-067 7041546-067 7041519-067
Xplorer 500 Front Strut Spring 7041238-067 7041375-067 7041450-067
Sportsman 500 - Front Strut Spring 7041238-067 7041375-067 7041450-067
Sportsman 500 Rear Compression Spring 7041517-067 7041546-067 7041519-067
10/96
5.37a
MODEL PAINTED PART COLOR
DESCRIPTION
Rims Bright White
Trail Boss Springs Aqua Marine
Rims Bright White
Rack Aqua Marine
Sport Springs Purple Velvet
Xpress 400 Springs Blue-green
Xplorer 300 Springs Eddie Bauer Green
Xplorer 400 Springs Fire Red
Scrambler Springs Lavender
Rims Bright White
Sportsman 4x4 Springs Black
Rims Black
Rack Black
Sportsman 500 Springs Black
Rims Black
Big Boss 6x6 Springs Eddie Bauer Green
Rack Eddie Bauer Green
Box Eddie Bauer Green
Magnum 2x4 Springs Eddie Bauer Green
Rack Steel Gray
Magnum 4x4 Springs Bonnie Blue
Rack Bonnie Blue
Big Boss 6x6 Springs Eddie Bauer Green
Rack Eddie Bauer Green
Box Eddie Bauer Green
5.38
BODY AND STEERING
1996 Pai nt Codes
DITZLER POLARIS
NUMBER NUMBER
72060 8520149
2185 8520153
46975 8520159
2185 8520153
46975 8520159
51467 8520160
N/A N/A
12908 8520148
N/A N/A
N/A 8520202
N/A N/A
44931 8520150
N/A N/A
72060 8520149
N/A N/A
N/A 8520157
2185 8520153
9440 8520147
9440 8520147
9440 8520147
9440 8520147
9440 8520147
44931 8520150
N/A N/A
44931 8520150
44931 8520150
44931 8520150
N/A N/A
N/A 8520151
12908 8520148
N/A N/A
12908 8520148
44931 8520150
N/A N/A
44931 8520150
44931 8520150
10196
BODY AND STEERING
1997 Paint Codes
MODEL PAINTED PART
Trail Blazer Springs
Rims
Trail Boss Springs
Rims
Rack
Xpress 300 Springs
Rims
Xplorer 300 Springs
Rims
Sport Springs
Rims
Xpress 400 Springs
Rims
Xplorer 400 Springs
Rims
Scrambler 4x4 Springs
Rims
Sportsman 4x4 Springs
Rims
Rack
4006x6 Springs
Rims
Rack
Box
Magnum 2x4 Springs
Rims
Rack
Magnum 4x4 Springs
Rims
Rack
Magnum 6x6 Springs
Rims
Rack
Box
Scrambler 500 Springs
Rims
Xplorer 500 Springs
Rims
Sportsman 500 Springs
Rims
10/96
COLOR
DESCRIPTION
Fire Red
Bright White
Aqua Marine
Bright White
Aqua Marine
Bonnie Blue
Brushed Aluminum
Eddie Bauer Green
Brushed Aluminum
Purple Velvet
Brushed Aluminum
Blue-green
Brushed Aluminum
Eddie Bauer Green
Brushed Aluminum
Lavender
Bright White
Black
Black
Black
Eddie Bauer Green
Brushed Aluminum
Eddie Bauer Green
Eddie Bauer Green
Fire Red
Brushed Aluminum
Black
Eddie Bauer Green
Brushed Aluminum
Eddie Bauer Green
Eddie Bauer Green
Brushed Aluminum
Eddie Bauer Green
Eddie Bauer Green
Screamin' Yellow
Brushed Aluminum
Screamin' Yellow
Brushed Aluminum
Black
Black
5.38a
DITZLER POLARIS
NUMBER NUMBER
72060 8520149
2185 8520153
46975 8520159
2185 8520153
46975 8520159
12908 8520148
N/A N/A
44931 8520150
N/A N/A
51467 8520160
N/A N/A
N/A 8520202
N/A N/A
44931 8520150
N/A N/A
N/A 8520157
2185 8520153
9440 8520147
9440 8520147
9440 8520147
44931 8520150
N/A N/A
44931 8520150
44931 8520150
72060 8520149
N/A N/A
9440 8520147
44931 8520150
N/A N/A
44931 8520150
44931 8520150
N/A N/A
44931 8520150
44931 8520150
N/A 8520241
N/A N/A
N/A 8520241
N/A N/A
9440 8520147
9440 8520147
CHAPTER 6
CLUTCHES
Service Tools and Supplies .................... 6.1
PVT Specific Torque Chart ..................... 6.1
1996 Clutching Specifications .................. 6.1
1997 Clutching Specifications .................. 6.1 a
1998 Clutching Specifications .................. 6.1 b
Shift Weights ................................. 6.2-6.3
Drive Clutch Spring Specifications .............. 6.4
Clutch System Operation Overview ............. 6.5-6.6
Clutch Maintenance ........................... 6.7
Clutch Sealing and Ducting Components ........ 6.8
PVT Disassembly ............................. 6.9-6.10
PVT Assembly ............................... 6.10-6.11
Drive Belt Tension ............................ 6.12
Drive Belt Removal/Inspection .................. 6.12
Clutch Alignment /Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 6.13
Driven Clutch Disassembly/Inspection ........... 6.14-6.15
Driven Clutch Assembly ....................... 6.16
Drive Clutch Disassembly/Inspection ............ 6.17-6.21
Drive Clutch Assembly ........................ 6.22
Drive and Driven Clutch Bushing Installation ..... 6.23-6.30
Engine Braking System (EBS) .................. 6.31-6.40
Troubleshooting .............................. 6.41-6.43
Special Service Tools and Supplies
CLUTCHES
Specifications
Description Part Number
Drive Clutch Puller ......................... 2870506
Clutch Holding Fixture ...................... 2871358
Spider Removal Tool ........................ 2870341
Offset Alignment Tool ....................... 2870654
Driven Clutch Puller ........................ 2870913
Spider Pin Tool ............................. 2870910
Clutch Bushing Removal & Installation ........ 2871226
Piston Pin Puller (Also used with 2871226) .... 2870386
401 Loctite ................................ 2870769
RTV Silicone Sealer ........................ 2870661
Loctite/Chisel Gasket Remover .............. 2870601
1996 Production Specifications OJ
PVT System Fastener Torques
Drive Clutch Retaining Bolt ... 40 ft. Ibs.
Driven Clutch Retaining Bolt .. 17 ft. Ibs.
PVT Inner Cover Bolts ....... 12 ft. Ibs.
Drive Clutch Spider ......... 200 ft. Ibs.
Drive Clutch Spider (Eng.brake) 185 ft. Ibs.
Drive Clutch Cover Plate .... 90 in. Ibs.
Machine Engine Model Operating RPM Drive Clutch Shift Wt. I.D. Driven Clutch Helix Angle
Model +/- 200 Spring Color and Gram Spring Position
Wt.
Trail Boss EC25PFE-08 6000 Blue/Green 16 40
43 gr 2-2
Trail Blazer EC25PFE-09 5800 Blue/Green G 40
48 gr 2-2
300s EC28PFE-01 5600 Blue/Green G 44-36
48 gr 2-2
400s Except EC38PLE-04 5700 Blue/Green S-55 44-36
Scrambler/Sport 55 gr 2-2
Scrambler/ EC38PLE-05 5700 White S-55 40
Sport 55 gr 2-2
425s EH42PLE-01 6000 Blue/Green 10MH 40
(Magnums) 50.5 gr 2-2
500 EH50PLE-01 6000 Blue/Green 10MH 40
Sportsman 50.5 gr 2-2
1996 Clutch Recommendations for Altitude* OJ
Meters/Feet Trail Blazer ES Trail Boss 300 400 Except Scrambler/ 425/500
Scramb/Sport Sport 400L
Weight G (48 gr) 16 G 48 gr S55 55 gr S55 - 55 gr 10MH 50 gr
0-900
Drive Spring Blue/Green Blue/Green Blue/Green Blue/Green White Blue/Green
0-3000'
Driven Spring/ (Red) 2-2 (Red) 2-2 (Red) 2-2 (Red) 2-2 (Red) 2-2 (Red) 2-2
Position
Weight G (48 gr) 16 G 48 gr S55 55 gr S55 - 55 gr 10MB
900-1800
Spring Blue/Green Blue/Green Blue/Green Blue/Green White Blue/Green
3000-6000'
Driven Spring/ (Red) 2-1 (Red) 2-1 (Red) 2-2 or (Red) 2-2 or (Red) 2-2 or (Red) 2-2
Position 2-1 2-1 2-1
Weight 16 16 Mod F 45 gr S 53 gr S 53 gr 10MW
1800-2700
-- -,.,. "".,,'._- - -
6000-9000'
Position
Weight 16 16 Mod F 45 gr S 53 gr S orC 10MR
2700-3700
9000-12000'
Position
* NOTE: Shift weights BH, RH, and WH (recommended for some 1998 models at high elevation)
supercede the 10MB, 10MR, and 10MW listed in the charts for some 1996 and 1997 models. Refer to page
6.3 for more information.
OJ Refer to Page 6.31 for Engine Braking Clutch instructions, maintenance, and specifications.
6.1 5/98
CLUTCHES
Specifications
1997 Production Specifications OJ
Machine Engine Model
Model
Trail Boss EC25PFE-08
Trail Blazer EC25PFE-09
3005 EC28PFE-01
4005 Except EC38PLE-04
Scrambler/Sport
Scrambler/ EC38PLE-05
Sport
4255 EH42PLE-01
(Magnums)
Sportsman 500 EH50PLE-05
Xplorer 500
500 EH50PLE-02
Scrambler
Operating RPM
+/- 200
6000
5800
5600
5700
5700
6000
6000
6000
Drive Clutch Shift Wt.I.D. Driven Clutch Helix Angle
Spring Color and Gram Spring Position
Wt.
Blue/Green 16 40
43 gr 2-2
Blue/Green G 40
48 gr 2-2
Blue/Green G 44-36
48 gr 2-2
Blue/Green S-55 44-36
55 gr 2-2
White S-55 40
55 gr 2-2
Blue/Green 10MH 40
50.5 gr 2-2
Blue/Green 10MH Compound
50.5 gr 2-2
White 10MH Compound
50.5 gr 2-2
1997 Clutch Recommendations for Altitude * OJ
Meters/Feet Trail Blazer Trail Boss 300 400 Except Scrambler/ 425 Xplorer/ 500
ES Xpress Scrambler/ Sport 400L Sportsman Scrambler
Xplorer Sport 500
Weight G (48 gr) 16 G 48 gr S55 55 gr S55 - 55 gr 10MH 50 gr 10MH 50 gr 10MH 50 gr
0-900
Spring Blue/Green Blue/Green Blue/Green Blue/Green White Blue/Green Blue/Green White
0-3000'
Driven (Red) 2-2 (Red) 2-2 (Red) 2-2 (Red) 2-2 (Red) 2-2 (Red) 2-2 (Red) 2-2 (Red) 2-2
Position
Weight G (48 gr) 16 G 48 gr S55 55 gr S55 - 55 gr 10MW 10MB 10MB
900-1800
3000-6000'
----
Driven (Red) 2-1 (Red) 2-1 (Red) 2-2 (Red) 2-2 or (Red) 2-2 or (Red) 2-2 or (Red) 2-2 (Red) 2-2
Position or 2-1 2-1 2-1 2-1
Weight 16 16 Mod F 45 gr S 53 gr S 53 gr 10MR 10MW 10MW
1800-2700
6000-9000'
Position
Weight 16 16 Mod F 45 gr S 53 gr S orC 10MR 10MR 10MR
2700-3700
9000-12000
Position
* NOTE: Shift weights BH, RH, and WH (recommended for some 1998 models at high elevation)
supercede the 10MB, 1 OMR, and 10MW listed in the charts for some 1996 and 1997 models. Refer to page
6.3 for more information.
Refer to Page 6.31 for Engine Braking Clutch instructions, maintenance, and specifications.
5/98
6.1a
1998 Production Specifications *
Machine Operating RPM Drive Clutch Shift Wt.I.D,
Model +/- 200 Spring Color and Gram
Wt
Trail Boss 6000 Blue/Green 16
43 gr
Trail Blazer 5800 Blue/Green G
48 gr
3005 5600 Blue/Green G
48 gr
Sport 400 5700 White S-55
55 gr
Scrambler 400 5700 White S-55
55 gr
Xplorer 5700 Blue/Green S-55
55 gr
4255 6000 Blue/Green 10MH
(Magnums) 50.5 gr
Sportsman 500 6000 Blue/Green 10MH
50.5 gr
Scrambler 6000 Blue/Green 10MH
500 50.5 gr
1998 Clutch Recommendations for Altitude *
Meters Trail Boss Trail 300 Scrambler/
(Feet) Blazer Xpress Sport 400L
Xplorer
Weight 16 G G S55
0900 (48 gr) (48 gr) (55 gr)
(0-3000)
Spring Blu/Grn Blu/Grn Blu/Grn White
Driven (Red) (Red) (Red) (Red)
Spring 2-2 2-2 2-2 22
(Color)
Position
Weight 16 G G S55
900-1800 (48 gr) (48 gr) (55 gr)
(3000-6000)
Spring Blu/Grn Blu/Grn Blu/Grn White
Spring 2-1 2-1 2-2 2-2
(Color) or or
Position 2-1 21
Weight 16 Mod 16 F S
1800-2700 (45 gr)
(6000-9000) Spring Blu/Grn Blu/Grn Blu/Grn White
Spring 2-2 2-2 2-2 21
(Color)
Position
Weight 16 Mod 16 F S
27003700 (45 gr) or C
9000-12000 Spring Blu/Grn Blu/Grn Blu/Grn White
Spring 2-2 2-1 2-1 21
(Color)
Position
CLUTCHES
Specifications
Driven Clutch Helix Angle Spring Position
40
2-2
40
22
44-36
2-2
40
2-2
40
2-2
44-36
2-2
40
2-2
Compound
2-2
Compound
22
Xplorer Magnum Sports Scrambler Big Boss
400 2x4/4x4 man 500 500
500 6x6
S55 10MH 10MH 10WH 10MH
(55 gr) (50 gr) (50 gr) (50 gr) (50 gr)
Blu/Grn Blu/Grn Blu/Grn Blu/Grn Blu/Grn
(Red) (Red) (Red) (Red) (Red)
22 2-2 2-2 1-1 2-2
S55 10WH 10BH 10WH 10BH
(55 gr)
2-2 2-2 2-2 2-1 2-2
or or
21 2-1
S 10RH 10WH 10RH 10WH
2-1 2-1 2-1 11 21
S 10RH 10RH 10RH 10RH
2-1 2-1 2-1 2-1 21
* Refer to Page 6.31 for engine braking clutch maintenance, and specifications.
6.1b 5/98
CLUTCHES
Shift Weights
Shown below are the shift weights which have been designed for, or which may be used in the PVT system. These
shift weights have many factors designed into them for controlling engagement RPM and shifting patterns. Some
of these weights require modifications to spider spacing when installed, which will affect clutch balance. Shift
weights should not be changed or altered without first having a thorough understanding of their positioning and
the effects they may have on belt to sheave clearance, clutch balance and shifting pattern.
PN 5630295
35.5 gr
Mod.
PN 5630515
45 gr
(High Altitude)
/
PN 5630292
38.5 gr
Mod.
PN 1321530
44 gr
(High Altitude)
PN 5630144
39 gr
PN 1321527
46 gr
(High Altitude)
PN 5630280
40 gr
Mod.-(High Alt.)
PN 1321529
47.5 gr
(High Altitude)
PN 5630279
43 gr
PN 5630514
48 gr
Although these (snowmobile) weights are specified for some 1996 and 1997 models at high elevation, the
RH, WH, and BH weights (specified for some 1998 models) should be substituted when MR, MW, and MB
are specified.
The "H" weights have a thicker heel which reduces clearance between the shift weight surface and spider roller
when the drive clutch is in the neutral or "de-clutched" position.
If 10 MR (1321530) is specified, use 10 RH (5630709)
If 10 MW (1321527) is specified, use 10 WH (5630710)
If 10 MB (1321529) is specified, use 10 BH (5630711)
5/98
6.2
PN 5630418
50 gr
(High Alt. 350L)
PN 5630581
58 gr
PN 5630513
50.5 gr
PN 5630709
44 gr
PN 5630095
53 gr
PN 5630710
46 gr
CLUTCHES
Shift Weights
PN 5630509
55 gr
PN 5630711
47gr
Use these weights when 10 MR, 10 MW, and 10MB are specified.
Refer to page 6.2.
6.3 5/98
CLUTCHES
Drive Clutch Spring Specifications
The drive clutch spring has two prima-
ry functions:
1. To control clutch engagement
RPM. The springs which have a
higher rate when the clutch is in
neutral will increase clutch
NEUTRAL
300 ,. ......., ........., ............ .
engagement RPM.
2. To control the rate at which the
drive belt moves upward in the
drive clutch sheaves. This is
referred to as drive clutch upshift.
There are other components which
control upshift, but the spring is one of
the primary components in insuring
optimum performance. It is very im-
portant that the spring is of the correct
design and is in good condition.
CAUTION: Never shim a drive clutch
spring to increase its compression
280: ur
c
z
260':"":::) .,.
g
240; w
()
a:
220'
v
.. f! ..
200'
180'
1601
rate. This may result in complete 80 '
stacking of the coils and subsequent
clutch cover failure.
The drive clutch spring is one of the 40 '
FULL
ATV TRAVEL .. ............. ..........J:'?
O'v._ ... , ...... , ..., .c .... , ............ " ......... , ................... " ... , ...... , ............. ' ..', ........... , .................... , ...... , ..
most critical components of the PVT
system. It is also one of the easiest to 20
service. Due to the severe stress the
spring is subject to during operation, it
should always be inspected for toler-
ance limits during any clutch operation
diagnosis or repair.
2.5 2.25 2.00 1.75 1.50
COMPRESSED SPRING LENGTH (INCHES)
With the spring resting on a flat surface, measure its free
length from the outer coil surfaces as shown. Refer to
the spring specification chart for specific free length
measurements and tolerances. Also check to see that
spring coils are parallel to one another. Distortion of the
spring indicates stress fatigue, requiring replacement.
PART NUMBER COLOR WIRE DI- FREE LENGTH
CODE AMETER .125/1
7041021 Plain .157/1 4.38/1
7041022 Black .140/1 4.25"
7041063 Purple .168" 4.37"
7041062 Silver .208/1 3.12/1
7041065 Pink .177/1 4.69/1
7041060 Orange .196/1 3.37"
7041080 Blue/Gold .207/1 3.50/1
7041083 Red .192/1 3.7T'
7041102 Yellow .192/1 2.92/1
7041061 Brown .200/1 3.06/1
7041132 White .177" 2.92"
7041168 Green .177" 3.05/1
7041148 Gold .207" 3.25/1
7041150 Red/White .192" 3.59/1
7041157 Blue/Green .177" 2.53"
1.25 1.19
Blue/Blue
Gold
7041080
Silver
7041062
7/96
6.4
CLUTCHES
Overview
Relationship of Drive Clutch Weights and Spring in Maintaining Operating RPM
The drive clutch is an RPM and torque sensing unit designed to transfer the maximum amount of horsepower
from the engine to the ground. This is accomplished through weights and a spring inside the unit which react to
the centrifugal force applied to the clutch from the engine RPM.
The spring and weights work in combination. In a properly set up clutch, the maximum desired operating RPM
will be reached immediately after clutch engagement, under full throttle conditions. To gain optimum power this
RPM should be maintained. As centrifugal force pushes the weights against the rollers, the moveable sheave
will force the belt to climb up the drive clutch sheave and increase vehicle speed.
If the weights and spring are matched
properly, the engine RPM will go to the Example: Engine Operating RPM 6000 200
desired range and remain there on both
the upshift and backshift. 8000 ---------------
If the weights are too light, or the spring
rate too high, the maximum RPM will be
too great and the drive belt will not move
into high gear at the top of the clutch.
If the weights are too heavy, or the spring
rate too low, the engine RPM will be low
and the drive clutch will upshift too fast,
keeping the engine out of its power
band.
::E
7000
c.
cc: 6000
5000
CLUTCH
4000
ENGAGEMENT
3000
2000
1000
8000------------------------
::E 700Q.. ___ _
c.
cc: 6 0 0 0 - - - - - - ~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
5 0 0 0 - - - - ~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
CLUTCH
ENGAGEMENT 4000
:e
c.
cc:
CLUTCH
ENGAGEMENT
6.5
3 0 0 0 - - - - ~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
2 0 0 0 - - - - ~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
1000--------------------------
8000
7000
6000
--------------
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
7/96
CLUTCHES
PVT System Introduction
The Polaris variable transmission (PVT) consists of three major assemblies: 1) drive clutch; 2) drive belt; and
3) driven clutch. The internal components of the drive clutch and driven clutch control clutch engagement (for
initial vehicle movement), clutch upshifting and backshifting. During the development of an ATV, the PVT system
is matched first of all to the engine power curve; then to average riding conditions and to vehicle design usage.
Modifications to the PVT or variations of components at random are never recommended. Proper PVT system
setup and careful inspection of existing components must be the primary objective when troubleshooting and tun-
ing.
A WARNING
A All PVT system maintenance repairs must be performed only by an authorized Polaris service technician
who has attended a Polaris sponsored service training seminar and understands the proper procedures as out-
lined in this manual. Because of the critical nature and precision balance incorporated into the PVT sys-
tem, it is absolutely essential that no attempt at disassembly or repair be made without factory autho-
rized special tools and service procedures.
Drive Clutch Operation
The drive clutch primarily senses engine RPM. The two major components which control its shifting function are
the shift weights and the coil spring. When the engine RPM is increased, the centrifugal force of the shift weights
working against the coil spring increases. When this force reaches a force higher than the preload in the spring,
the moveable sheave of the drive clutch will move inward, contacting the drive belt. The force will pinch the belt
between the spinning sheaves and cause the drive belt to move. This movement in turn rotates the driven clutch.
At light throttle settings the drive belt will stay low in the drive clutch and high in the driven clutch. As engine RPM
increases, so does the centrifugal force on the shift weights, causing the drive belt to be forced upward in the drive
clutch and downward into the driven clutch. The forces in the driven clutch will now affect the upshift.
Driven Clutch Operation
The driven clutch primarily senses torque. It opens and closes according to the forces applied to it from the drive
belt and the transmission input shaft. If the torque resistance on the input shaft is greater than the load from the
drive belt, it will keep the drive belt outward at the top of the driven clutch sheaves. As the throttle setting and
engine horsepower increase, there will be a greater load on the drive belt, pulling the belt down into the driven
clutch and up on the drive clutch. This action, which increases the driven clutch speed, is called upshifting.
If the throttle setting remains the same and the vehicle is subjected to a heavier load, the driven clutch senses
this load, moving the belt back up on the sheaves of the driven clutch and down into the sheaves of the drive clutch.
This action, which decreases the driven clutch speed, is called downshifting.
In situations where loads vary (such as uphill and downhill) and throttle settings are constant, the drive and driven
clutches are continually shifting to maintain optimum engine RPM. At full throttle a perfectly matched PVT system
will hold the engine RPMs at the peak of the power curve. This RPM should be maintained during clutch upshift
and backshift. In this respect the PVT system is similar to a power governor. Rather than change throttle position,
as a governor does, the PVT system changes engine load requirements by either upshifting or downshifting.
7/96
6.6
PVT Maintenance/Inspection
CLUTCHES
Maintenance
Under normal operation the PVT system will provide years of trouble free operation. Periodic inspection and main-
tenance is required to k8ep the system operating at peak performance. The following list of items should be in-
spected and maintained to ensure maximum performance and service life of PVT components. Refer to the trou-
bleshooting checklist at the end of this chapter for more information.
1. Belt Tension, Drive to Driven Clutch Offset, Belt Width. See pages 6.12-6.13.
2. Drive and Driven Clutch Buttons and Bushings, Drive Clutch Shift Weights and Pins, Drive Clutch
Spider Rollers and Roller Pins, Drive and Driven Clutch Springs. See pages 6.14-6.22.
3. Sheave Faces. Clean and inspect for wear.
4. PVT System Sealing. Refer to appropriate illustration below and on the following pages. The PVT system is
air cooled by fins on the drive clutch stationary sheave. The fins create a low pressure area in the crankcase
casting, drawing air into the system through an intake duct. The opening for this intake duct is located at a high
point on the vehicle (location varies by model). The intake duct draws fresh air through a vented cover. All
connecting air ducts (as well as the inner and outer covers) must be properly sealed to ensure clean air is
being used for cooling the PVT system and also to prevent water and other contaminants from entering the
PVT area. This is especially critical on units subjected to frequent water forging.
PVT Drying
If water is ingested, shift transmission to neutral and rev engine slightly to expel the moisture and air-dry the
belt and clutches. Allow engine RPM to settle to idle speed, shift transmission to low range and test for belt
slippage. Operate ATV in low range for a short period of time until PVT system is dry.
PVT Overheating
During routine maintenance or whenever PVT system overheating is evident, it's important to check the inlet
and outlet ducting for obstructions. Obstructions to air flow through the ducts will significantly increase PVT
system operating temperatures. The ATV should be operated in LOW RANGE when pulling or plowing heavy
loads, or if extended low speed operation is anticipated.
PVT Sealing and Ducting Components
Type I
Typical of Gen II and Gen IV
Liquid Cooled 2-Strokes
Inner Cover
Seal
6.7 5/98
C L U T C H E ~ Dueting Components
Sealing an
PVT Sealing an
P
onents d Ducting Com
I Type II I
. f Gen II 4-strokes TYPical 0
Inlet Duct
Inner Cover
Inner Cover
Seal
Outer Cover
Seal
Outer Cover
Type IV I
Typical of Gen IV Air Cooled
(Xpress I Xplorer 300)
Gen II and Gen III Air Cooled "
(Trail Boss I Trail Blazer)
5/98
6.7b
CLUTCHES
Sealing and Dueting Components
1996 Trail Boss
Dueting Components
Sealing an
Polaris . Industries Inc.
I Type IV I
IV 4 Strokes
Typical of I Xplorer 500)
(Sportsman 5
6.8 5/98
Typical PVT Disassembly
CLUTCHES
PVT Disassembly
NOTE: Some fasteners and procedures will vary. Refer to the appropriate parts manual for proper fasteners and
fastener placement.
1 . Remove seat.
2. Remove six bolts and washers from the top of the rear
cab assembly.
3. Remove three screws, nuts and backing plate from the
left footrest.
4. Remove screws, retainer clips, and cable tie from PVT
air outlet duct, Remove outer cover.
numbers can be easily read. To remove drive belt,
apply brake, pull upward and rearward on belt to open
driven clutch sheaves, push down on belt to hold
sheaves open, and slip belt over driven clutch outer
sheave.
6. Remove drive clutch retaining bolt and remove drive
clutch using puller.
7. Remove driven clutch retaining bolt and driven clutch
using puller.
8. Remove driven clutch offset spacers from the
6.9 7/96
CLUTCHES
PVT Assembly
5. Bend back retainer tabs on three screws at the front of
the inner cover and remove screws and retainer plate.
6. Loosen three inner cover retaining bolts at the rear of
the cover only enough to allow cover removal.
7. Remove cover. NOTE: Some covers (pre 1996) have
removable inner cover spacers. Do not lose spacers or
spacer retaining O-rings located on the outside of the
inner cover.
PVT Assembly
1. Inspect PVT inner cover seal. Replace if cracked or
damaged.
2. Use RTV silicone to ensure a watertight fit between
the seal and the cover. Surfaces must be clean to
allow proper adhesion of the silicone sealant. Allow
at least 12 hours for sealant to cure before
operating vehicle.
3. Make sure the spacers and O-rings are in place on
the inner cover rear bolts (where applicable).
4. Reinstall cover and tighten rear cover bolts just
enough to hold it in place.
5. Fit lip of inner cover seal to engine. Install seal
retainer plate and tighten screws.
10/96
6.10
6. Bend screw retainer tabs over screws.
7. Torque inner cover bolts to specification.
8. Install clutch offset spacers on transmission input
shaft.
9. Clean splines inside driven clutch and on the
10. Apply a light film of grease to the splines on the
shaft.
11. Install the driven clutch, aligning the boss spline on
the input shaft.
12. Install driven clutch retaining bolt, washer, and lock
washer. Torque to specification.
13. Clean the end of the taper on the crankshaft and
taper bore inside the drive clutch.
14. Install the drive clutch and torque the retaining bolt
to specification.
15. Reinstall drive belt noting direction of rotation. If a
new belt is installed, install so numbers can be
easily read.
16. Inspect PVT outer cover rubber gasket for cracks or
damage. Replace if necessary. When installing a
new gasket, position the ends at the top rear of the
inner cover (highest point) and apply a small
amount of RTV silicone to the ends. NOTE: The
square side of the gasket faces the outer cover.
17. Reinstall PVT outer cover and secure with screws.
18. Reinstall rear cab assembly and seat.
6.11
CLUTCHES
PVT Assembly
10/96
CLUTCHES
Drive Belt
Drive Belt Tension
1 . Remove PVT outer cover. See PVT Disassembly, page
6.9.
2. Place a straight edge on top of the belt between drive and
driven clutch.
3. Push down on drive belt until it is lightly tensioned.
4. Measure belt deflection as shown in photo.
If belt deflection is out of specification, adjust by removing or
adding shims between the driven clutch sheaves.
Remove shims to decrease belt deflection
Add shims to increase belt deflection
See Driven Clutch Disassembly/Inspection, pages 6.14 -
6.15.
NOTE: At least one shim must remain between the inner and
outer sheave of the driven clutch. If proper belt deflection
cannot be obtained, measure drive belt width, length, and
center distance of drive and driven clutch, outlined in this sec-
tion; all have an effect on belt deflection.
Drive Belt Removal/Inspection
1 . Remove outer PVT cover as described in PVT
Disassembly, page 6.9.
2. Mark drive belt direction of rotation so that it can be
installed in the same direction. NOTE: Normally
positioned so part numbers are easily read.
3. To remove drive belt, apply brake, pull upward and
rearward on belt to open driven clutch sheaves, push
down on belt to hold sheaves open, and slip belt over
driven clutch outer sheave.
4. Inspect belt width, measuring across the top of the belt
with a dial caliper.
7/96
6.12
5. Measure belt length with a tape measure around the outer
circumference of the belt. Belts which measure longer
than nominal length may require driven shimming or
engine adjustment for a longer center distance to obtain
proper belt deflection. Belts which measure shorter than
nominal length may require driven shimming or a shorter
center distance. Remember, proper belt deflection is the
desired goal - not a specific center distance.
6. Replace belt if worn past the service limit. Belts with thin
spots, burn marks, etc., should be replaced to eliminate
noise, vibration, or erratic PVT operation. See
Troubleshooting Chart at the end of this chapter for
possible causes. NOTE: If a new belt is installed, check
belt deflection.
Clutch Alignment
1. Remove belt and install offset/alignment tool as shown.
2. With tool touching rear of driven clutch inner sheave, the
distance at point "A" should be 1/8".
It the distance is greater than 1 /8" or less than 1 /16", clutch
alignment must be adjusted as follows:
3. Remove drive and driven clutch. See PVT Disassembly,
page 6.9.
4. Remove PVT inner cover.
5. Loosen all engine mounts. Move front of engine to the
right or left slightly until alignment is correct.
6. Tighten engine mounts and verify alignment is correct.
7. Measure belt deflection and offset and adjust if
necessary.
NOTE: On some models, minor adjustments can be made by
adding shims between the frame and front lower left engine
mount to increase the distance at point "A". If a shim is pres-
ent, it can be removed to decrease the distance at point "A".
Shirn "KitPN2200126
Clutch Offset
Important: Inspect clutch alignment and center distance be-
fore adjusting offset.
1. Install offset alignment tool as shown.
Offset is correct when rear of tool contacts rear of inner
sheave with driven clutch pushed completely inward on shaft
and bolt torqued. Adjust offset by adding or removing spacer
washers between back of driven clutch and spacer as shown.
Spacervvasher'PN755;6401
6.13
CLUTCHES
Clutch Alignment/Offset

.............

(103 .. 8C:n1f .48cm) .
Offset Alignment
Tool PN 2870654
B
A
1/81/ +0 / 1/16
3.2mm +0 / - 1.6 mm)
Offset Alignment Tool
(PN 2870654) should
contact rear edge of
driven clutch sheave
Driven Clutch Offset
To adjust, add or remove
washers from behind the
driven clutch
5/98
CLUTCHES
Driven Clutch Disassembly
Used to adjust
belt tension. One must
always be installed.
Wear eye protection when removing snap ring to prevent serious personal injury.
1. Apply and hold downward pressure on the helix.
2. Remove snap ring retainer.
3. Note location of spring and remove helix.
4. Note location of spring in the moveable sheave, and
remove the spring.
10/96
6.14
5. Check alignment of tabs on spring. Replace the
spring if tabs are misaligned or the spring coils are
distorted.
6. Inspect ramp buttons in the moveable sheave and
replace if worn. NOTE: The ramp buttons are
secured by Torx screws. The buttons can be
turned 180
0
to provide a new wear surface. When
both are worn, they must be replaced.
7. Remove moveable sheave and note the number of
spacer washers. One spacer must remain
between the sheaves when adjusting belt
deflection.
8. Inspect the Teflon coating on the moveable
sheave bushing.
9. Inspect driven clutch faces for wear or damage"
1 O. Clean and inspect splines on helix and
11. Lube splines with a light film of grease.
6.15
CLUTCHES
7/96
CLUTCHES
Driven Clutch Assembly
1. Install moveable sheave with spacer washers.
Important: At least one spacer washer must be
installed. Teflon bushings are self-lubricating. Do
not apply oil or grease to the bushings.
2. Install spring, inserting spring tab into proper hole in
moveable sheave.
3. Insert spring tab into proper hole in helix. See
specifications at the beginning of this section.
The driven clutch, helix/moveable assembly has several
different spring locations which affect clutch shifting and
RPMs. The greatest amount of spring tension will raise
engine RPMs during clutch upshift and allow quicker
backshift or downshift when pulling or negotiating a hill,
for example. The least amount of tension will create a
slower downshift and a harder upshift.
4. Line up boss spline and push helix down until it
engages the splines 1/2" to 3/4".
5. While holding downward pressure on helix, wind
moveable sheave counterclockwise approximately
1/3 turn (120).
6. Push helix into place and install snap ring.
7/96
6.16
Moveable
Example: Helix Sheave
2 1
Spring/ 2 - 2
Position 1 - 1
2 - 3
1 2
1 3
Production settings are 2-2
Spring
Tension
Heavy
!
Soft
Drive Clutch
CLUTCHES
Drive Clutch Disassembly
To maintain proper clutch balance
and belt-to-sheave clearance, be
sure to reinstall original quantity
and thickness washers
~ a r k w ~ h permanent ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
marker before disassembly
1. Using a permanent marker, mark the cover, spider,
and moveable and stationary sheaves to verify
balance after assembly. See illustration above.
2. Install clutch in holding fixture. Remove cover plate
bolts evenly in a criss-cross pattern.
3. Inspect cover bushing. The outer cover bushing is
manufactured with a Teflon coating. Bushing
wear is determined by the amount of TeflonTM
remaining on the bushing.
6.17 10/96
CLUTCHES
4. Inspect area on shaft where bushing rides for wear,
galling, nicks, or scratches. Replace clutch
assembly if worn or damaged.
5. Remove and inspect spring.
With the spring resting on a flat surface, measure its
free length from the outer coil surfaces as shown. Refer
to the spring specification chart for specific free length
measurements and tolerances. Also check to see that
spring coils are parallel to one another. Distortion of the
spring indicates stress fatigue, requiring replacement.
Spring Specifications
PART NUMBER COLOR WIRE DIAMETER FREE LENGTH
CODE .125"
7041021 Plain .157" 4.38"
7041022 Black .140" 4.25"
7041063 Purple .168" 4.37"
7041062 Silver .208" 3.12"
7041065 Pink .177" 4.69"
7041060 Orange .196" 3.37"
7041080 Blue/Gold .207" 3.50"
7041083 Red .192" 3.77"
7041f02 Yellow .192" 2.92"
7041061 Brown .200" 3.06'1
7041132 White .177" 2.921'
7041168 Green .177" 3.05"
7041148 Gold .207" 3.25"
7041150 Red/White .192" 3.59"
7041157 Blue/Green .177" 2.53
'1
7/96
6.18
Spider Removal
1. Install clutch in holding fixture and loosen the spider
using spider removal tool.
2. To remove, turn spider counterclockwise.
NOTE: It is important that the same number and thickness
of washers are reinstalled beneath the spider during as-
sembly to maintain clutch balance. Be sure to note the
number and thickness of these washers.
Teflon Coated
Brass Bushing
Moveable Sheave Bushing Inspection
3. Inspect the Teflon coating on the moveable sheave
bushing.
6.19
CLUTCHES
Drive Clutch Inspection
To maintain proper clutch balance
and belt-to-sheave clearance, be
sure to reinstall original quantity
and thickness washers
10/96
CLUTCHES
Roller, Pin and Thrust Washer Inspection
4. Inspect all rollers, bushings and roller pins by pulling a
flat metal rod across the roller. Turn roller with your
finger. If you notice resistance, galling, or flat spots,
replace rollers, pins and thrust washers in sets of
three. Also inspect to see if roller and bushing are
separating. Bushing must fit tightly in roller. Use pin
removal tool PN 2870910 to replace rollers and pins.
Take care not to damage roller bushing or bearing
surface of the new pin during installation.
Direction of Rotation
Trailing Side
Washer
I \
Driving Side
5. Shown at right is a typical spider button used on Trail
Boss and Trail Blazer models. Some models will have
a different style button or damping device (O-Ring).
NOTE:Some models use an O-ring (on the driving side
of the spider) and a flat rubber washer (on the trailing
side of the spider). Refer to the illustration above.
Pre-mature wear will result if the heat resistant O-rings
are substituted with another type. Use only genuine
Polaris parts. Do not install a flat washer on the driving
side of the spider. Refer to the appropriate parts
manual for placement and part numbers.
6. Rubber backed buttons (introduced in mid-1995
production) can be used in all ATV clutches if the
hollow roller pin is changed to the solid roller pin.
NOTE: The rubber side of the button is positioned
toward the solid roller pin.
5/98
6.20
6o
/
Flat washer
O-Ring
7. Remove shift weight bolts and weights. Inspect as
shown. The contact surface of the weight should be
smooth and free of dents or gall marks. Inspect the
weight pivot bore and pivot bolts for wear or galling.
If weights or bolts are worn or broken, replace in
sets of three with new bolts. NOTE: A damaged
shift weight is usually caused by a damaged or
stuck roller in the spider assembly. See roller
inspection, page 6.20.
8. Inspect spider button to tower clearance. If
clearance exists, replace all buttons and/or O-rings
and inspect surface of towers. The leading edge
button has an O-Ring behind it. The trailing edge
button has a flat rubber washer behind it. See
spider removal page 6.19.
9. Inspect sheave surfaces. Replace the entire
service clutch if worn, damaged or cracked.
A WARNING
The clutch assembly is a precisely balanced unit. Never
replace parts with used parts from another clutch as-
sembly!
All PVT system maintenance repairs must be per-
formed only by an authorized Polaris service technician
who has attended a Polaris sponsored service training
seminar and understands the proper procedures as
outlined in this manual. Because of the critical nature
and precision balance incorporated into the PVT
system, it is absolutely essential that no attempt at
disassembly or repair be made without factory au-
thorized special tools and service procedures.
6.21
Broken
CLUTCHES
Bad Good
10/96
CLUTCHES
Drive Clutch Assembly
NOTE: It is important that the same number and thick-
ness of washers are reinstalled beneath the spider dur-
ing assembly. The Teflon bushings are self-lubricating.
Do not apply oil or grease to the bushings.
1. Reassemble drive clutch in the following sequence,
making sure the "X" marks are aligned:
1 ) "X" mark cover
2) "X" mark spider
3) "X" mark under weight (moveable sheave)
2. Install moveable sheave.
3. Install spider, making sure spacers installed are the
same quantity and thickness, and that "X" mark on
spider aligns with "X" mark in moveable sheave.
Do not lubricate. Lubrication can get on the drive belt and clutch sheaves causing excessive slippage and wear.
Lubrication also collects dirt and abrasive material, accelerating component wear.
4. Torque spider to specification using the holding
fixture and spider tool.
Be sure the spider spacer washers are fully seated in
the recessed area in the spider. Any misalignment will
alter clutch balance. Inverting the clutch while tighten-
ing the spider will help position the washers.
5. Install shift weights using new lock nuts on the
bolts.
6. Reinstall clutch spring.
7. Reinstall cover, aligning "X" mark with other marks.
Torque cover bolts evenly to specification.
10/96
6.22
CLUTCHES
Clutch Bushing Removal and Installation
Polaris Kit PN 2871226
Item
2
3
5
8
9
10
~
Part Description
P-90 Drive Clutch and Driven Clutch
Bushing Installation Tool
Drive Clutch Cover Bushing Removal and
Installation Tool (for all drive clutches)
P-90 Driven Clutch Bushing Removal Tool
Main Puller Adapter
Adapter Reducer
Number Two Puller Adapter
Drive Clutch Moveable Sheave - Bushing Removal
1. Install handle end of piston pin puller securely into
bench vise and lightly grease puller threads.
2. Remove nut from puller rod and set aside.
3. Install main adapter (Item 8) onto puller.
4. Insert adaptor #2 into bushing from belt side as
shown. With towers pointing toward vise, slide
sheave and bushing onto puller rod.
5. Install nut removed in step 2 onto end of puller rod and
hand tighten. Turn puller barrel to increase tension on
sheave if needed. Nut is left hand thread.
6.23
Part No.
5020628
5020629
5020631
5020632
5010279
5020633
7/96
CLUTCHES
Clutch Bushing Removal and Installation
6. Turn sheave and puller barrel together
counterclockwise on puller rod until bushing is
removed.
8. Pull bushing removal tool and adapter from puller rod.
Remove bushing from tool and discard.
Drive Clutch Moveable Sheave - Bushing
Installation
9. Place main adapter (Item 8) on puller.
10. Push bushing into center of sheave on tower side by
hand.
11. Insert installation tool (Item 2) into center of sheave and
with towers pointing away from vise, slide sheave onto
puller rod.
12. Install nut on puller rod and hand tighten. Turn barrel
to apply additional tension if needed.
13. Turn sheave and barrel together counterclockwise
until bushing is seated.
15. Remove sheave from puller.
16. Remove installation tool.
7/96
6.24
Drive Clutch Cover Bushing Removal
1. Install main adapter (Item 8) on puller.
2. From outside of clutch cover, insert removal tool
(Item 3) into cover bushing.
3. With inside of cover toward vise, slide cover onto
puller.
4. Install nut onto puller rod and hand tighten. Turn
puller barrel to increase tension as needed.
5. Turn clutch cover counterclockwise on puller rod
until bushing is removed.
7. Remove bushing and bushing removal tool from
puller. Discard bushing.
6.25
CLUTCHES
Clutch Bushing Removal/Installation
7/96
CLUTCHES
Drive Clutch Cover Bushing Installation
8. Working from inside of cover, insert bushing and
bushing installation tool into center of clutch cover.
9. With main adapter on puller, insert cover onto puller
rod, placing outside of cover toward vise.
10. Install nut on rod and hand tighten. Turn puller
barrel to apply more tension if needed.
11. Turn clutch cover and barrel together
counterclockwise on puller rod until bushing is
seated.
12. Remove nut from puller rod and take installation
tool and clutch cover off rod.
7/96
6.26
Driven Clutch Moveable Sheave-
Bushing Removal
NOTE: Bushings are installed at the factory using Loc-
tite. In order to remove the bushing it will be necessary
to apply heat.
13. Install main adapter (Item 8) onto puller.
14. Insert adapter reducer (Item 9) onto puller, sliding it
inside the main adapter ..
15. Remove ramp buttons from moveable sheave.
16. Using a hand held propane torch, apply heat
directly on bushing until tiny smoke tailings appear.
Clutch components will be hot! In order to avoid serious
burns, wear some type of insulated gloves for the rest of
the removal process.
6.27
CLUTCHES
Main Adapter
\
Adapter
Reducer
7/96
CLUTCHES
Clutch Bushing Removaillnstallation
8. Working from the top, install bushing removal tool
(Item 5) into center of clutch sheave with smaller
diameter toward bushing to be removed. See
illustration at right.
9. Install sheave onto puller.
10. Install nut onto puller rod and tighten by hand. Turn
puller barrel for further tension if needed.
11. Turn clutch sheave counterclockwise until bushing
is removed. Flip sheave over to remove wide
bushing, repeating steps 17. -20. NOTE: Apply
heat to soften Loctite.
13. Remove adapters from puller.
14. Remove bushing and removal tool from adapters.
Discard bushing.
10/96
6.28
CLUTCHES
Driven Clutch Moveable Sheave - Bushing Installation
24. Working from the top, insert adapter number ten
onto puller. See illustration at right.
25. Start new bushing evenly in moveable sheave.
Apply Loctite 262 or 271 to the outer surface of
the bushing.
26. Install sheave onto puller with new bushing upward
as shown. Install adaptor number two.
6.29
Adapter
Number Ten
7/96
CLUTCHES
27. Install nut onto puller rod and hand tighten against
installation tool.
28. Turn clutch sheave counterclockwise until bushing
is seated.
30. Remove installation tool and clutch sheave from
puller.
31. Repeat installation procedure for other moveable
bushing.
7/96
6.30
Theory Of Operation
CLUTCHES
Engine Braking System (EBS)
The Engine Braking System (EBS) combines the standard "no-shift" feature of the Polaris Variable Transmission
(PVT) system with the added benefit of engine braking. Outwardly, both drive and driven clutch resemble those
used in a standard PVT system, however, there are some important differences in the EBS clutches:
Belt Deflection - It's important to note that the belt is always "tight" in an EBS system. Belt deflection is not
adjustable. Consequently, there are no shims in the driven clutch for changing drive belt deflection.
Special Drive Belt - The bottom side of the belt is grooved for better contact with the one-way clutch (A).
One-Way Clutch One-way clutch (A) located on the drive clutch shaft is the key to system operation.
In a standard PVT system, engine braking occurs briefly on deceleration until engine RPM falls below belt
engagement speed and the drive clutch returns to the neutral position (sheaves open). At this point the drive
belt is no longer engaged with the drive clutch, and no further engine braking occurs.
Drive clutch operation is the same on a machine equipped with EBS at engine speeds above belt engagement.
However, the difference with EBS is evident when engine RPM is below engagement speed and the drive clutch
sheaves are open in the neutral position. In a standard PVT system, the belt is loose on the drive clutch shaft
when the clutch is disengaged due to the nominal belt deflection of 1 1/4" (loose belt). If the vehicle is moving
downhill or coasting, the belt simply freewheels on the drive clutch shaft and engine braking does not occur.
With EBS, the belt is tight and engaged with the one-way clutch. If the vehicle is moving downhill or coasting,
the drive train turns the driven clutch, belt, and one way clutch in the direction of engine rotation. When
the one-way clutch rotational speed exceeds drive clutch rotational speed, the one-way clutch locks to the
drive clutch shaft, and engine braking occurs. Essentially, the driven clutch has become the "driving" clutch.
Engine braking will continue until drive clutch speed exceeds one-way clutch speed, or until the throttle is
applied and engine RPM reaches clutch engagement speed, lifting the belt off the one-way clutch.
When the engine is idling and the vehicle is at rest, the one-way clutch simply "freewheels" on the drive clutch
shaft.
One-way clutch locks to shaft
in forward direction only.

(lliQnmf3ot.are
$ysterns.> .
Drive Clutch Rotation
When the forward rotational speed of the one-way
clutch (A) exceeds the speed of the engine (and
drive clutch), the one-way clutch locks to the drive
clutch shaft, and engine braking occurs.
. . . ... . '9.."(J.FF"
pp$.jtiBn . .. . .
. . frOnl

Driven Clutch Spring - Unlike a standard PVT driven clutch spring, the EBS driven clutch spring has no
torsional wind. It is a compression spring only. The only difference between a 2-stroke and a 4-stroke EBS
kit is the color (and tension) of the driven spring. Like the EBS drive clutch, the driven clutch also utilizes a
one-way clutch, which locks to the shaft during engine braking. To check it, remove the belt and try to rotate
the stationary sheave counterclockwise (as viewed from the left side of the machine). The sheave should lock
to the shaft when rotated counterclockwise, and turn freely when rotated clockwise.
High Elevation Setup - As with a standard PVT system, calibration changes are required for optimum
performance at elevations above 3000 feet (900 meters). EBS clutch setup is the same as a standard PVT
system for a given model. For example, if you install an EBS kit on a Magnum 4x4, use the drive clutch setup
information provided for a Magnum 4x4 with standard PVT. Disregard the driven clutch setup information (the
EBS driven spring has no torsional wind).
5/98
6.31
Drive Clutch Disassembly - EBS
CLUTCHES
NOTE: Most of the disassembly and inspection procedures for the EBS drive clutch are the same as with a stan-
dard PVT drive clutch. This section will cover only the disassembly and inspection procedures unique to the EBS
drive clutch. Assembly notes are included when different from standard PVT assembly procedures. Refer to page
6.17 -6.22 for information common to both the standard and EBS type.
Drive Belt Removal- EBS
numbers can be easily read. To remove drive belt,
push moveable sheave inward to open driven
clutch sheaves, push down on belt to hold sheaves
open, and slip belt over driven clutch outer sheave.
One-Way Clutch Inspection (Drive Clutch)
1 . Rotate one-way clutch clockwise (as viewed from
the cover plate side). The clutch should rotate on
the shaft with only slight amount of drag. There
should not be any binding or rough spots. When
rotated counterclockwise, the clutch should lock to
the shaft without slipping. If problems are noted in
either direction, continue with disassembly.
2. Remove drive clutch. Refer to page 6.9.
3. Remove spider assembly. Refer to page 6.19.
NOTE: SPIDER TORQUE: Torque EBS drive clutch spi-
der to 180-190 ft. Ibs. (24.9-26.3 Kg-m) upon assembly.
4. Remove spacer sleeve and the 2" PTFE washer.
Visually inspect the washer for damage. Measure
the thickness and compare to specification.
Replace if worn or damaged.
PTFEWssherThickness
(.76mm)
$enticet;i>mi.t=<02511 . (.64mm)
NOTE: Some early EBS drive clutches use two wash-
ers beneath the spacer sleeve. Late production use only
one. Reinstall the same number as were removed. If you
are not sure how many were removed measure the depth
of the spacer sleeve and refer to the chart below.
Spacer Sleeve Depth Washers Required
1.000" (25.40 mm) 1 (Late to current)
1.030" (26.16 mm) 2 (Limited # of Early)
5/98
6.33
Measure Depth
L , .. J
Spacer Sleeve - Drive Clutch
CLUTCHES
One-Way Clutch Inspection, cont.
5. Lift one-way clutch off shaft. Replace as an
assembly if worn, damaged, or if problems were
noted in Step 1 above.
6. Inspect surface of shaft for pitting, grooves, or
damage. Measure the outside diameter and
compare to specifications. Replace the drive clutch
assembly if shaft is worn or damaged.
Standard:
Servicel.1m't:
7. Remove 2 1/2" PTFE washer from shaft. Visually
inspect the washer for damage. Measure the
thickness and compare to specification. Replace if
worn or damaged.
Moveable Sheave Bushing Inspection
1. Inspect moveable sheave bushing and surface of
sleeve. Compare to specifications and replace if
worn or damaged.
6.34
5/98
Driven Clutch Disassembly - EBS
CLUTCHES
CAUTION: The driven clutch should be disassembled from the helix end to lessen the chance of damage to seals
in the one-way clutch. Review all information below before proceeding.
One-Way Clutch Preliminary Inspection (Driven)
1. With drive belt removed and transmission in
neutral, hold the outer sheave and rotate the inner
sheave of the driven clutch (moveable) in a
counterclockwise direction as shown at right. The
sheave should rotate on the shaft with only a slight
amount of drag. There should not be any binding or
rough spots.
2. When rotated clockwise, the inner (moveable)
sheave should lock to the shaft and outer sheave
without slipping.
3. Remove driven clutch from the transmission input
shaft. Do not disassemble the driven clutch from
the outside snap ring at this time. The driven clutch
must be disassembled from the helix side or the
one-way clutch seals may be damaged.
4. Push helix inward. Remove snap ring, washer,
helix, and spring. The spring is a compression
spring only and has no torsional wind.
5/98
6.35
CLUTCHES
Engine Braking System (EBS) Disassembly
One-Way Clutch Inspection (Driven), cont.
5. Remove washer, needle bearing, and spring seat
washer. Inspect bearing and surfaces of washer
and spring seat for wear or damage. Replace all
parts if any are worn. Apply a light film of grease to
the needle bearing upon assembly.
6. Inspect surface of rollers for flat spots and wear.
Rollers must rotate freely on pins without excessive
clearance. Check the roller pin and roller bore for
wear and replace if necessary.
NOTE: ROLLER PIN DISASSEMBLY New roller
taining bolts have a dry locking agent applied to the
threads. Before attempting to remove the roller pins,
heat the threaded area lightly with a propane torch. Use
a high quality hexagonal wrench (Allen TM) in good con-
dition to avoid screw damage. A small amount of valve
grinding compound can be applied to the tip of the hex
wrench to ensure a tight fit. Always use new bolts if they
are removed for inspection. Apply Loctite 680 retaining
compound sparingly to the tapered head portion of the
roller retaining screws. Do not allow locking agent to
contact the inside of the rollers. Do not lubricate the roller
or roller pin.
7. Inspect moveable sheave bushing for wear.

8. Check for movement of the driven clutch shaft in
the one-way clutch. If the shaft can be moved
laterally, or if the one-way clutch does not function
properly as described in Step 1 and 2 above,
disassemble the one-way clutch for further
inspection.
6.36
5/98
9. Remove snap ring, flat washer, and PTFE washer.
10. Carefully rotate shaft clockwise and pull outward to
remove.
11. Inspect surface of shaft for pitting, grooves, or
damage. Measure the outside diameter and
compare to specifications. Replace the driven
clutch assembly if shaft is worn or damaged.
12. Inspect the bushings on each end of the one-way
clutch for wear.
13. Inspect all other drive clutch components as
outlined in this section.
5/98
6.37
CLUTCHES
CLUTCHES
Engine Braking System (EBS) Operator Guidelines
OPERATION GUIDELINES FOR EBS CLUTCHES
EBS clutches have a slightly higher starting gear ratio between the drive and
driven clutch due to the location of the one-way clutch on the clutch shaft. For
best performance and belt life, a/ways use low-range in hilly terrain and when
towing or hauling a load. In fact, High Range should only be used
when traveling on level ground with light or no load.
EBS kits are recommended for models equipped with High / Low / Reverse
transmissions. Engine braking is enhanced when operating in low range-espe-
cially with 2 stroke model ATVs.
When an operator makes the transition to and from engine braking engagement,
the driven clutch helix changes from the acceleration side to the deceleration
side. An audible engagement noise may be heard during this transition and is a
normal condition.
Changes to drive clutch calibration are recommended if the vehicle will be oper-
ated at elevations above 3000 ft (900 meters). Refer to the model specific clutch-
ing chart for type of drive clutch weight and/or drive clutch spring to install for
high elevation.rn
A WARNING
&. All PVT system maintenance repairs must be performed only by an authorized
Polaris service technician who has attended a Polaris sponsored service training
seminar and understands PVT system maintenance and repair procedures.
Because of the critical nature and precise balance of components within the
PVT system, it is absolutely essential that no attempt at disassembly or repair
be made without factory authorized special tools and service procedures.
Refer to your Owner's Safety and Maintenance Manual for system maintenance
intervals.
rn Disregard references to the driven clutch helix position. Helix adjustments do not
apply to the EBS driven clutch.
6.38
5/98
Situation Probable Cause
Engine RPM -Wrong or broken drive clutch spring.
below specified
operating -Drive clutch shift weight too heavy.
range, although
engine is prop- -Driven clutch spring broken or installed in
erly tuned. wrong helix location.
-Converter sheaves greasy; belt slippage.
Erratic engine -Drive clutch binding.
operating RPM
during accelera-
tion or load vari-
ations.
-Belt worn unevenly - thin/burnt spots
-Driven clutch malfunction.
-Sheave face grooved.
Engine RPM -Incorrect drive clutch spring (too high
above specified spring rate).
operating
range. -Drive clutch shift weights incorrect for ap-
plication (too light).
-Drive clutch binding.
-Driven clutch binding.
Harsh drive -Drive belt worn too narrow.
clutch engage-
ment. -Excessive belt/sheave clearance with new
belt.
Drive belt turns -Wrong belt for application.
over
-Clutch alignment out of spec.
-Engine mount broken or loose.
PVT cover -Plugged air intake or outlet
overheating
(melting) -Belt slippage due to water, oil, grease,
etc., rubbing on cover
-Clutches or weight being applied to cover
while in operation
Water ingestion -Cover seals or ducts leaking
Belt slippage -Belt worn out
-Belt deflection excessive
-Water ingestion
-Belt contaminated with oil or grease
Belt burnt, thin -Abuse (continued throttle application when
spots vehicle is stationary, excess load
-Dragging brake
PVT noise -Belt worn or separated, thin spots, loose
belt (too much deflection)
-Broken or worn clutch components, cover
hitting clutches
Engagement -Thin spots on belt, worn belt
erratic or stabby
-Drive clutch bushings stick
6.39
CLUTCHES
Troubleshooting
Remedy
-Replace with recommended spring.
-Install correct shift weight kit to match engine application.
-Replace spring; refer to proper installation location.
-Install new belt and/or adjust belt tension.
a. Disassemble drive clutch; inspect shift weights for wear
and free operation.
b. Clean and polish stationary shaft hub; reassemble clutch
without spring to determine problem area.
Replace belt
a. Replace ramp buttons.
b. Inspect movable sheave for excessive bushing clearance/
replace.
-Replace the clutch.
-Install correct recommended spring.
-Install correct recommended shift weights.
-Disassemble and clean clutch, inspecting shift weights and
buttons. Reassemble without the spring and move sheaves
through entire range to further determine probable cause.
-Disassemble, clean, and inspect driven clutch, noting worn
sheave bushing and ramp buttons and helix spring location.
-Replace belt.
-Perform belt/sheave clearance adjustment with shim wash-
ers beneath spider.
-Replace with correct belt.
-Adjust alignment offset.
-Inspect/adjust or replace.
-Clear obstruction.
-Inspect system. Clean, repair or replace as necessary.
Seal PVT system.
-Remove weight. Inform operator.
-Find leak and repair as necessary.
-Replace belt.
-Adjust belt deflection.
-Inspect and seal PVT system.
-Inspect and clean.
-Caution operator to use low gear when pulling heavy loads,
and operate machine within guidelines.
-Vehicle operated with park brake on. Inspect brake system.
-Replace or adjust belt.
-Inspect and repair as necessary.
-Replace belt. Adjust belt deflection.
-Inspect and repair clutches.
5/98
CHAPTER 7
FINAL DRIVE
Final Drive Torque Specifications ............... 7.1
Front Hub Exploded View ...................... 7.2
Demand 4 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 7.3
Front Hub Disassembly (4x4) .................. 7.4
Hilliard Clutch Disassembly/Inspection .......... 7.5
Hilliard Clutch Assembly Testing ................ 7.6
Strut Seal Sleeve Replacement ................. 7.6-7.7
Magnetic Coil Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 7.8
Wheel Hub Seal Replacement .................. 7.9
Strut Casting Seal Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 7.10
Drive Shaft Boot Replacement ................. 7.11-7.12
HublWheel Bearing Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 7.12-7 .13a
Front Axle Identification ....................... 7.14-7.15
Front Drive Axle Removal ...................... 7.16-7.17
Front Drive Axle Installation .................... 7.17
U-Joint Disassemlby .......................... 7.18
U-Joint Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 7.19-7.20
2x4 Front Hub Disassembly/Inspection .. , ....... 7.21-7.22
2x4 Front Hub Assembly ...................... 7.22
2x4 Front Hub Installation ...................... 7.23
Rear Axle Removal ........................... 7.24-7.25
Rear Axle Installation ......................... 7.26-7.28
6x6 Middle Axle Sprocket Service ............... 7.28a-7.28n
Rear Eccentric Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 7.29
Rear Eccentric Disassembly ................... 7.29-7.30
Rear Eccentric Assembly ...................... 7.30-7.31
Rear Eccentric Installation ..................... 7.32
Center Eccentric Removal/Disassembly ........ 7.33-7.34
Center Eccentric Assembly .................... 7.34-7.36
Center Eccentric Installation ................... 7.36-7.37
Front Eccentric Removal/Disassembly ......... 7.38-7.40
Front Eccentric Assembly ...................... 7.40-7.41
Front Eccentric Installation ..................... 7.42-7.43
Front Gearcase Removal ...................... 7.44-7.45
Front Gearcase Disassembly ................... 7.45-7.47
Front Gearcase Assembly / Installation .......... 7.48-7.51
Concentric Swingarm Rear Axle Removal . . . . . . . . 7.52-7.53
Concentric Swingarm Rear Axle Installation ...... 7.54-7.55
FINAL DRIVE
Specifications
Final Drive Torque Specifications
*Front Hub Nut 4x4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Refer to page 7.13-7.13b for torque procedure.
Rear Axle Retaining Nut (Except 1998 Scrambler 400/500 .. 150 ft. Ibs. (20.7 kg-m)
Sprocket, Transmission Output Shaft ..................... 17 ft. Ibs. (2.35 kg-m)
Sprocket, Center Eccentric Inner and Outer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 30 ft. Ibs. (4.14 kg-m)
*Sprocket, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 35 ft. Ibs. (4.8 kg-m)
*Sprocket, 6x6 Rear .................................... 35 ft. Ibs. (4.8 kg-m)
Wheel, Hub, and Spindle Torque Table
Model Item Specification
Front Wheel Nuts 15 Ft. Lbs.
2x4
Rear Wheel Nuts 50 Ft. Lbs.
Front Spindle Nut 40 Ft. Lbs.
Rear Hub Retaining Nut 80 Ft. Lbs.
4x4
Chain Drive
Front Spindle Nut Refer to procedures listed on following pages
and
Chain/Shaft Models
Rear Hub Retaining Nut 80 Ft. Lbs.
4x4
Shaft Drive Front Spindle Nut Refer to procedures listed on following pages
"\.. \ 30ft.lbs. (4.14
\ \kg-m) \
30 ft. Ibs. (4.14
kg-m)
, \
45 ft. Ibs.
6.2 kg-m
100 Ft. Lbs.
\
\ 45 ft. Ibs.
\ 6.2 kg-m
\/
*Rolling Torque The torque values indicated with a * do not include rolling torque values of self-locking nuts.
The locking features of these nuts create resistance when installing the nut, called rolling torque. It is necessary
to determine the rolling torque of these fasteners and add it to the torque specification listed above. For example,
if a self-locking nut has 5 ft. Ibs. of resistance, and a torque specification of 35 ft. Ibs., the formula would be:
Torque specification = 35 ft. Ibs.
Plus rolling torque = 5 ft. Ibs.
Final nut torque = 40 ft. Ibs.
NOTE: Rolling torque values are only accurate if threads are clean and not damaged. Checking rolling torque
on a damaged fastener may cause final torque to exceed recommended value. Always replace worn or damaged
fasteners.
CAUTION: Locking nuts should be replaced if removed. The self-locking properties of the nut are reduced or
destroyed during removal. Some front hub nuts on AWD models use FlexLoc nuts which require a minimum of
75 in. Ibs. of rolling torque. Refer to page 7.13 for procedure.
7.1 5/98
FINAL DRIVE
Exploded View
Brake Disc
Front Hub Clutch
5/98
AWD Front Hub
Armature Plate
Bearing
Before Jan. 1, 1997
Flex Loc Nut and
retaining ring
7.2
e ~ ~ @
DETAIL A ' \
Splined Drive Shafts
Spacer
Retaining Ring
FINAL DRIVE
Demand 4 Operation - AWD Models
With the Polaris Demand 4 Drive System, the ma-
chine operates as a 2 wheel drive vehicle as long as
the front wheel rotational speed remains greater
than the front drive axle speed. If the rear wheels
lose traction and AWD is selected (button de-
pressed), the front wheel rotational speed will de-
crease, causing the front drive axle speed to exceed
front wheel speed. Restricting the rotation of the
drive clutch roller cage (2) (see Electric Hub Opera-
tion) will cause the rollers (3) to climb the ramps of
the cam (5), and become squeezed between the
ramps and the ring in the hub. See III. 1.
When the demand 4 clutch assembly, wheel hub,
and drive axle are engaged, the front wheels will
drive and stay engaged until rear wheel traction is
regained. When traction is regained, the front
wheels will overdrive the front drive axle, pushing
the clutch rollers (3) toward the lower part of the cam
(5), disengaging the Demand 4 clutch. The rollers
are held in place by the spring (4). See III. 2.
.&. WARNING
It is important that the front and rear axle drive ratio
and tire size are not changed. Changing this ratio III. 1
will cause erratic engagement, which could result in
serious injury or death.
Cam (5)
Electric Hub Engagement (4x4)
When AWD is selected in a forward gear,
current flows through a coil of wire located
in the strut housing, creating a magnetic
field. An armature plate (1) coupled to the
roller cage (2) is attracted to the magnetic
field, and resists rotation, creating drag on
the drive roller cage assembly. This
causes the roller to climb the ramps of the
cam, engaging the hub. NOTE: In reverse
gear the override button must be pushed to
deliver power to the wheel coil. Electric
hub engagement offers an advantage over
mechanical systems. When the AWD but-
ton is switched off, the machine will have
the steering ease of a 2 wheel drive unit;
and with the switch turned on, 4 wheel
drive will be engaged whenever the rear
wheels lose traction.
1. Armature Plate NOTE: Armature plate is positioned with
tabs in round holes of cage.
2. Roller Cage
3. Roller
4. Garter Spring
5. Cam
Tabs go into the round holes
Spacer
3
5
~
~
2
III. 2
7.3 7/96
FINAL DRIVE
Front Hub Disassembly
Front Hub Disassembly (4x4)
If an AWD problem is encountered, thoroughly inspect
the electrical portion of the system as well as the front
hubs.
1. Carefully lift and support the front end of the
machine as shown with the jack stands under the
front end of the foot rests. CAUTION: Make sure
the machine is solidly supported before proceeding.
Serious injury could occur if the machine tips orfalls.
2. Remove the front wheels and thoroughly clean the
area around the hub, strut casting, brake caliper and
brake disc.
3. Remove the two brake caliper attaching bolts (A).
CAUTION: Do not hang the caliper by the brake
hose. Use wire to hang the caliper to prevent
possible damage to the brake line.
4. Place a catch pan beneath the front hub and remove
the hub cap.
5. Remove retaining ring from drive axle.
6. Remove FlexLoc nut. CAUTION: The FlexLoc nut
must be replaced if removed. The self-locking
properties of the nut are destroyed upon removal.
Refer to page 7.12 for AWD front hub installation
procedure.
7. Remove front hub, bearings, and Hilliard clutch
assembly. Be sure to note the proper positioning of
the armature plate for reassembly.
7/96
7.4
FINAL DRIVE
AWD Hilliard Assembly
Hilliard Clutch Disassembly/Inspection
1. Disassemble the roller clutch and thoroughly clean all parts. CAUTION: Do not remove the garter spring. If
the spring is removed it will become over stressed and will require replacement.
2. Inspect roll cage sliding surface (A). This surface must be clean and free of nicks, burrs or scratches. Use a
small file or emery cloth to remove any imperfections.
3. Inspect rollers (3). The rollers must slide up and down freely within the roller cage sliding surfaces.
4. Without removing the garter spring,
inspect the coils for consistency. If
coils are distorted or uneven, cut the
old spring with a side cutter to remove
it, and replace it.
1. Armature Plate NOTE: Armature plate is positioned with
tabs in round holes of cage.
2. Roller Cage
3. Roller
4. Garter Spring
5. Cam
Tabs go into the round holes
Spacer
3
~
~ - .
5. If garter spring replacement is necessary, it is very
important that the correct installation procedure
and special tool be used. Hold rollers in place on
roller cage with a light film of grease. Gently and
evenly roll the spring down the tapered tool (PN
2870888) and into the groove of the rollers and
cage. WARNING: If this procedure is not followed
the spring will be over stressed and lose it's
tension. Springs with incorrect tension may allow
rollers to move outward at high vehicle speeds. If
the rollers move outward, the front hub(s) will
engage and cause vehiCle instability, which could
result in serious injury or death.
WARNING: Current all wheel drive models have a
heavier garter spring than previous 4x4s. These
springs are very similar in appearance to those used on
earlier models. If the old, lighter springs were installed
on a machine requiring the heavier spring the front
wheels may engage at high speed, possibly resulting
in serious injury or death. Check springs before
installation. Always verify the correct replacement
spring part number by referring to the appropriate
parts manual.
Current electro-mechanical spring, PN 3250032; wire
diameter .018" (.46 mm); spring free length end to end
inside hooks 6.968" (177 mm).
7.5
Measure wire diameter
....- Measure free length to inside of
loops as shown
6/98
FINAL DRIVE
Hilliard Clutch Assembly Testing I Seal Sleeve Replacement
Hilliard Clutch Assembly Testing
1. Reassemble Hilliard clutch assembly and lubricate with Polaris Premium Demand Drive Lubricant or Type F
Automatic Transmission Fluid. WARNING: Make sure the rollers move up and down freely in the roll cage. If
they do not move freely the front hubs may not engage or disengage properly, causing vehicle instability.
2. Hold clutch as shown and rotate roller cage to
simulate clutch engagement. NOTE: The roller is
now in the engaged position on the cam ramp and
the garter spring tension against the roller has
increased.
3. Release the roller cage to simulate clutch
disengagement. When the cage is released the
roller should move down the ramp and into its
neutral position. If not, check the following:
Roll cage to roller sliding surfaces.
Roll cage to cam mating surfaces, including
the cam shoulder and cage to cam mating
surfaces.
Garter spring condition. Spring must have
more than enough tension to pull rollers to
neutral. (See inspection and
replacement on page 7.5.)
Seal Sleeve Replacement
1 . If front axle sleeves become damaged they are
replaceable. Using a hammer and drift punch,
remove the seal sleeve by driving it off evenly being
careful not to nick or damage the sleeve mounting
area (A).
2. Coat the sleeve mounting area (A) with silicone and
using extreme care, press the new seal sleeve onto
area (A) until it bottoms. Allow 12 hours for silicone
to cure.
7/96
7.6
_ ~ i 3 J
! Seal Sleeve
Seal Sleeve Replacement, Cant.
3. When servicing the all-wheel drive strut assembly
(replacing seal sleeve or installing new coils) it is
important that the inner and outer poles of the
electrically engaged front drive system be properly
adjusted.
4. As the armature plate is engaged, it should contact
the outer magnet pole (seal sleeve) and may
contact the inner magnet pole. Also, the armature
plate must be flat when placed on a flat surface.
Bent armature plates should be replaced. It is not
unusual to see a double wear ring on the armature
plate.
5. To check the gap between the inner and outer poles
place a straight edge on the outer pole so that it just
intersects with the inner pole. The gap between the
straight edge and inner pole should be 0 to .001"
(0-.025mm). This measurement should be
checked in three different positions around the pole
assemblies. The three measurements must be
within .0005" (.013 mm) of each other. If the gap is
excessive, the hub may not engage.
6. The outer magnet pole (seal sleeve) is adjustable
by either tapping inward or placing a small punch to
the inside edges and tapping the outer pole (sleeve)
outward.
7. Install the roller clutch assembly and be sure the
armature plate (A) is positioned properly. Also,
when installing the hub assembly, be sure the
armature plate tabs remain engaged with the roller
cl utch cage.
CAUTION: After the hub is installed, the slightest
movement outward with the hub may cause the
armature plate tabs to disengage from the roller clutch
cage. If the unit is driven with the armature plate out of
position it will cause roller clutch damage.
7.7
FINAL DRIVE
Strut Seal Sleeve Replacement
Not Unusual To See
Two Wear Rings
I I
Inner Magnet P o l ~ i
(Fixed)
Seal Sleeve &
Outer Magnet
Pole (Adjustable)
7/96
FINAL DRIVE
Magnetic Coil Replacement
Magnetic Coil Replacement
Remove the seal sleeve from the strut casting
using a drift punch and hammer, tapping evenly on
each side until the sleeve slides off. Remove the
existing coil and clean the coil wire channel, coil
mount area and the seal sleeve mounting area of
all silicone and foreign matter.
1. Apply 1/4" (.6 cm) bead of silicone in the coil
wire channel.
2. Install the coil to the coil mount surface and
press the coil wires into the silicone in the coil
wire channel.
3. Apply 1/4" (.6 cm) bead of Loctite Ultra Blue
silicone around the seal sleeve mounting area.
NOTE: This includes applying silicone over
the coil lead wires again. Always allow 12
hours cure time for silicone.
4. Press on the seal sleeve until the desired pole
gap is achieved. See page 7.7 for additional
information. Once the seal sleeve is properly
positioned, a 1/16" (.16 cm) bead of silicone
should remain around the inner edge. Clean
off all excess silicone. The seal sleeve area
must be free of silicone.
NOTE:
- Always install a new seal sleeve when
replacing the coil.
- It may be necessary to apply more silicone
to the wire channel area to properly secure
and protect the coil wires.
5. Apply 401 Loctite (super glue) to the inside of
the strut ribs and press the foam block to
contain the coil wires. Make sure the foam
block is bonded well to protect the coil wires.
NOTE: Coil wires must be contained in the brake
line clip on the back side of the upper strut casting
and the wires must be snug against the casting.
7/96
7.B
Strut Ribs
Coil Wire
Channel
Coil Mounting
Surface
(Inner Magnet Pole)
(Fixed)
Electromagnet Coil
Brake Line
Clip Location
Hub Seal Replacement
1 . Disassemble front hub. Refer to page 7.4.
2. Remove brake disc attaching bolts and brake
disc. Clean brake disc. NOTE: If the
attaching bolts are difficult to remove, it may
be helpful to heat the outer surfaces of the hub
in the area shown. Using valve grinding
compound on the end of the Allen wrench will
also aid in bolt removal.
3. When the hub becomes too hot to touch, pry out
the old seal as shown. Do not damage the surface
of the seal cavity. Clean the hub in the seal mating
area.
4. With spring side of new seal facing toward hub
casting, press it in until flush with brake disc
mating surface. CAUTION: Do not use a hammer
as damage to the seal will result.
5. Thoroughly clean the brake disc with brake
cleaner. It is very important that the brake disc be
free of any oil or solvents.
6. Reinstall the brake disc.
7. Apply a medium strength thread locking
compound to the bolts.
8. Reinstall attaching bolts and torque to 18 ft. Ibs.
(2.5 kg-m).
7.9
FINAL DRIVE
Wheel Hub Seal Replacement
7/96
FINAL DRIVE
Strut Casting Seal Replacement
Strut Casting Seal Replacement
1. Disassemble front hub. Refer to page 7.4.
2. Remove the cotter pin and castle nut from the A
arm ball joint. Separate A-arm from ball joint.
3. Remove the spindle and axle assembly from the
strut casting bearing by pulling the strut outward
as shown. Drive out the old seal, taking care not
to damage the tapered roller bearing. Install the
new seal until it bottoms against the shoulder in
the strut casting.
4. Apply grease to the seal inner lip, reinstall the
spindle and axle assembly.
5. Reinstall the A arm to the ball joint. Torque to 25 ft.
Ibs. (3.5 kg-m).
NOTE: If the cotter pin hole does not align at the
above torque, tighten slightly until the cotter pin hole
aligns and install the pin with open ends toward rear of
machine.
7/96
7.10
Front Drive Shaft CV Joint Boot Replacement (4x4 Models)
1. Removewheel, brake caliper and wheel hub. Refer
to front hub disassembly page 7.4 for procedure.
2. Remove cotter pin and castle nut from A arm ball
joint.
3. Disconnect A-arm from ball joint.
4. Slide strut off end of drive shaft and tie it up out of
the way of the shaft.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the wheel coil wires
when positioning the strut.
5. Remove clamps from rubber boot using the proper
boot clamp pliers.
6. Remove the large end of the boot from the CV joint,
slide the boot back and remove the wheel spindle
and CV joint assembly by pulling it sharply outward,
away from the axle. It may be necessary to tap the
CV joint assembly outward with a soft faced
hammer.
7. Remove small clamp and boot from driveshaft.
7.11
FINAL DRIVE
Drive Shaft Boot Replacement
7/96
FINAL DRIVE
Hub/Wheel Bearing Installation
Front Drive Shaft CV Joint Boot Replacement Cont. (4x4 Models)
8. Before installing the new boot, remove the grease
from the shaft and CV joint banding areas.
NOTE: Before assembly, make sure the CV jOint has a
sufficient quantity of grease. The grease will aid in
assembly by holding the internal parts of the CV joint in
place. If the ATV has been operated with the damaged
boot, the CV joint grease may be contaminated. The CV
joint must be thoroughly cleaned and the grease
replaced.
9. Slide the new clamp and boot (small end first) over
the splined shaft, then slide (tap) the CV jOint into
the splines of the axle.
10. Position large end of boot on CV joint and secure
both clamps.
Hub/Wheel Bearing Installation (4x4 Models)
1. Thoroughly inspect the hub internally. If the hub
bearing sleeve is damaged or shows signs of
movement, the hub assembly must be replaced.
When the sleeve is pressed into the hub it should
be flush with the outside surface of the hub.
2. Grease hub seal to allow itto slide over roller clutch
components.
3. Install wheel hub inner bearing. NOTE: All
bearings must slide freely onto the spindle. If
bearings do not slide freely, wheel bearing torque
will be affected.
4. Install wheel hub, outer bearing, washer, and
attaching nut. NOTE: It is very important that the
hub is not moved outward once installed, or the
seal on the hub will disengage the armature plate.
A WARNING
The following bearing adjustments are very important.
Incorrect adjustment will increase bearing wear, re-
duce braking action, and may affect front drive hub en-
gagement, which could result in serious personal injury
or death.
7/96
7.12
Front Hub Bearing Adjustment (AWD Models)
FINAL DRIVE
NOTE: Some 1996 to present AWD models use a cotter pin and castle nut to secure the hub. Refer to page
7.13a.
FlexLoc Nut Axles
1. Torque spindle nut (A) to 400 inch Ibs. and back nut
off 1/2-3/4 turn.
2. Tighten nut again and read the force it takes to
rotate the lock nut (nut rolling torque)using a dial or
beam style torque wrench. NOTE: Rolling torque
on FlexLoc nuts should be 75 to 150 inch Ibs. If the
rolling torque is less than 75 inch Ibs. the nut
should be replaced. To achieve the final torque,
add the nut rolling torque plus 100 inch Ibs. and
record this reading.
3. Rotate hub several revolutions. Rotate front drive
axles by elevating rear of machine and turning rear
axle. Re-torque to the reading recorded in step 2.
4. Reinstall hub cap.
5. Remove fill check plug and rotate hole to either
6. Fill with Polaris Premium Demand Drive Hub Fluid
or Type F Automatic Transmission Fluid until fluid
trickles out. NOTE: Do not force the oil into the
hub under pressure. This can cause seal damage
and leaking.
7. Reinstall plug.
8. Reinstall brake caliper assembly. Torque retaining
bolts to 18 ft. Ibs. (2.5 kg-m).
9. Reinstall front wheels. Torque retaining nuts to 15
ft. Ibs. (2.1 kg-m).
10. Carefully lower vehicle.
11. Field test vehicle for proper operation of brake
system and AWD operation.
12. Some 1996 to present models use three screws to
secure the hub cap in place. Install screws and
torque to specification.
7.13 10/96
FINAL DRIVE
Front Hub Bearing Adjustment (AWD Models Equipped with Cotter Pins)
1. Torque nut to 100 in. Ibs. and proceed to step 2.
2. Rotate hub several revolutions. Rotate axle
several revolutions by raising rear of machine and
rotating rear wheels.
3. Re-torque hub nut to 100 in. Ibs.
4. Install cotter pin. Bend each leg of cotter pin
around castle nut in different directions.
NOTE:lf cotter pin hole does not align, tighten slightly
to align and install pin.
10/96
7.13a
FINAL DRIVE
Front Axle Identification
Front Axle Identification
CAUTION: The left and right front drive axles are not
interchangeable. The LH side axle has the letters "LH"
stamped in the end. The axle has a left hand thread and
must be installed on the left side of the vehicle only.
When replacing a front drive axle, check the
identification letters stamped on the beveled area of the
CV joint housing next to the large boot clamp.
There are different types of axles used and they are not
interchangeable. You will find either "USA" or "BTB"
stamped on the housing. Refer to the following chart
and the appropriate parts manual for the correct part
number and drive axle application.
9
10 11 7 8 6 3 12 2
NOTE: Reference Only Revised Parts/Microfiche Manuals
(Rev. 01 or later)
Ref Description
No.
1 L.H. Drive Shaft Assembly with Sleeve
1 R.H. Drive Shaft Assembly with Sleeve
2 Weld Shaft Replacement
3 Weld Cardan Replacement
4 Cross and Bearing Kit
5 Yoke
6 Small Band Clamp
7 Large Band Clamp
8 CV Boot
9 LH CV Housing with Sleeve
9 RH CV Housing with Sleeve
10 Drive Shaft Seal Sleeve
11 Kit- Repl Boot, CV Joint
12 Circlip
7/96
7.14
Axle Identification Area
Seal Sleeve
4 5
NEAPCO
BTB
Marked USA or NEAPCO
Marked BTB on CV Be\\
on CV Bell
Long Long Long Short
Splined Keyway Splined Splined
1380066 1380075 1380085 1380083
1380063 1380058 1380086 1380084
1380060 1380060 1380094 1380095
1380061 1380061 1380092 1380093
3260104 3260104 2200771 2200771
3260101 3260101 3260130 326013\
3260123 3260123 7080627 7080627
3260121 3260121 3260115 3260115
3260120 3260120 5411106 5411106
1380068 1380076 1380098 1380098
1380069 1380048 1380099 1380099
5222299 5222299 5222299 5222299
3260108 3260108 2200773 2200773
7670092 7670092 7670091 7670091
Front Axle Identification, Cant.
I0Il------- 19.50" (Minimum) To 20.25" (Maximum)
SHORT
20.50" (Minimum) To 21.25/1 (Maximum)
LONG
7.15
FINAL DRIVE
Front Drive Axle
7/96
FINAL DRIVE
Front Drive Axle
Front Drive Axle Removal
1 . Loosen front wheel nuts slightly.
2. Elevate and support machine under footrest/frame
area with front wheels elevated.
CAUTION: Serious injury may result if machine tips or
falls. Be sure machine is secure before beginning this
service procedure. Wear eye protection when remov-
ing and installing drive axles or component parts.
4. Remove hub cap.
5. Remove outer hub nut.
6. Remove hub, bearings, Hilliard assembly, and
armature plate.
7/96
7.16
7. Remove cotter pin and castle nut from lower A arm
ball joint. Remove lower A-arm from ball joint.
8. Using a drift punch remove roll pin at eccentric
housing.
Front Drive Axle Installation
1. Install spring washer and drive shaft. Align hole in
U-joint yoke with hole in eccentric shaft, and install
new roll pin.
2. Install new seal in strut casting.
3. Install drive shaft in strut.
4. Install lower ball joint, torque nut to 25 ft. Ibs. (3.45
kg-m) and install new cotter pin.
5. Follow procedure to install Hilliard clutch
components and hub as outlined on page 7.6.
7.17
FINAL DRIVE
Front Drive Axle
7/96
FINAL DRIVE
U-Joint Service
U-Joint Disassembly (Typical)
CAUTION: Always wear eye protection.
1. Remove internal or external snap ring from all
bearing caps.
NOTE:lf yoke or bearing is removed, cross bearing
must be replaced. Note orientation of grease fitting and
mark inner and outer yoke for correct re-positioning dur-
ing installation.
2. Support inner yoke as shown and drive outer yoke
down (bearing cap out) with a soft face hammer.
3. Support U-joint in vise as shown and drive inner
yoke down to remove remaining bearing caps.
4. Force U-joint cross to one side and lift out of inner
yoke.
7/96
7.18
U ... Joint Inspection
FINAL DRIVE
U ... Joint Service
NOTE: When rebuilding Type IV shaft drive rear U-Joints it is necessary to inspect the yoke cap bores for align-
ment or warpage. If a yoke cap bore is warped or twisted, the yoke must be replaced.
1. Make sure yoke bores are free of nicks or burrs from
disassembly.
2. Slide the appropriate tool through both bores as
shown. Hold the tool so the flat portion is in line with
the yoke centerline. If yoke tool does not slide freely
in both bores, replace yoke.
3. Pull tool out and turn 90. Slide tool through both
bores. Tool must slide freely into both bores.
U-Joint Assembly (Typical)
1. Install new bearing caps in yoke by hand. Carefully
install U-joint cross with grease fitting properly
positioned. Take care not to dislodge needle
bearings upon installation of cross joint. Tighten vise
to force bearing caps in.
2. Using a suitable arbor, fully seat bearing cap in one
side. Continually check for free movement of
bearing cross as bearing caps are assembled.
3. Install snap ring to contain bearing cap just installed.
Repeat procedure for other side.
4. Install outer yoke, aligning marks made before
disassembly.
7.19 5/98
FINAL DRIVE
U-Joint Service
U-Joint Assembly (Typical)
5. Repeat steps 1-3 to install bearing caps on outer
yoke.
6. Seat all bearing caps against snap rings by
supporting cross shaft and tapping on each corner
as shown.
7. When installation is complete, Yokes must pivoi
freely in all directions without binding.
7/96
7.20
2x4 Front Hub Disassemblyllnspection
parking brake.
5. Check bearings for play by grasping hub firmly
and checking for movement. Rotate the hub. It
should rotate smoothly without binding or rough
spots.
6. Remove hub cap, cotter pin, front spindle nut, and
washer. Remove the hub.
7. Rotate each bearing by hand and check for
smooth rotation. Visually inspect bearing for
moisture, dirt, or corrosion. Replace bearing if
moisture, dirt, corrosion, or roughness is evident.
NOTE: If bearings are removed, they must be replaced.
8. Pry seal out back of hub.
9. Using a brass drift, tap bearing spacer to one side
to expose inner bearing race. Drive bearing out
using a drift through opposite side of hub.
10. Remove spacer and drive other bearing out.
11. Clean hub and spacer thoroughly.
7.21
FINAL DRIVE
7/96
FINAL DRIVE
2x4 Front Hub Disassembly, Cant.
12. Inspect spacer for wear or damage. Measure
length of spacer and replace if worn beyond service
limit or if ends are rounded.
2x4 Front Hub Assembly
1. Pack bearings with Polaris Premium All Season
Grease. Drive one of the bearings into rear of hub
using a 1.180 (46 mm) bearing driver. CAUTION:
Do not drive on the inner race of the bearing.
2. Coat bearing spacer with grease and install into
hub. Drive other bearing into hub until seated.
3. Install seal into hub (with numbers facing out) until
flush with end of seal bore.
7/96
7.22
2x4 Front Hub Installation
1. Apply grease to washer and install with spindle
nut. Torque nut to 40 ft.lbs. (5.52 kg-m) and install
cotter pin. Tighten nut slightly if necessary to align
cotter pin holes. Rotate wheel and check for
smooth operation. Bend both ends of cotter pin
around nut in opposite directions.
2. Inspect O-Rings on hub cap for wear, cracks or
damage and replace if necessary.
3. Apply a light film of grease to hub cap and install
until fully seated.
7.23
FINAL DRIVE
7/96
FINAL DRIVE
Rear Axle
Rear Axle Removal
1. Stop engine. Place machine in gear and set
parking brake.
2. Loosen rear wheel nuts slightly.
3. Remove both hub caps and cotter pins, and loosen
hub nuts 1-2 turns.
5. Remove wheel nuts and rear wheels.
6. Remove both hub nuts, cone washers, and flat
washers. Remove hubs.
7. Remove rear axle lock nut using 1 3/4" axle nut
wrench.
7/96
7.24
Rear Axle Removal
8. Remove axle nut and washer.
9. Place a block of wood on end of axle or use a soft
face hammer, and drive axle out from right to left.
10. Tap locating collar on left side of axle toward the
right enough to expose the circlip retainer.
Remove retainer and locating collar.
11. Inspect locating collar on left side of axle and
replace if worn or damaged. A worn collar will
allow dirt to enter axle bearing area.
7.25
FINAL DRIVE
Rear Axle
7/96
FINAL DRIVE
Rear Axle
Rear Axle Installation
1 . Slide locating collar on left end of axle with recess
facing outward.
2. Install a new circlip.
3. Tap locating collar back towards left end of axle
until it captivates circlip.
4. Apply a light coat of grease to axle and install a
new O-Ring.
S. Insert axle from left to right.
6. Install O-Ring, sprocket hub, and washer.
7/96
7.26
7. Clean axle nut threads with a wire brush. Apply
Loctite 242 to threads and install axle nut. Torque to
150 ft. Ibs. (20.7 kg-m). Rotate axle and check for
smooth operation.
8. Install lock nut and torque to 150 ft. Ibs.
9. Lightly grease splines of axle and install wheel
hubs, flat washers, and cone washers with concave
side facing flat washer.
10. Torque hub nuts to 80 ft.lbs. (11.04 kg-m) and install
new cotter pin, bending one leg of cotter pin inward
and one outward against end of axle.
7.27
FINAL DRIVE
Rear Axle
7/96
FINAL DRIVE
Rear Axle
5. Install hub cap.
6. Place wheels on hubs and install wheel nuts with
tapered side facing in. Torque evenly to
specifications.
Rija ....
. ..
''} '.' .. ''': ", :' . " ,', " ';;' .<'/.',' ,': ",
RE!Clr .
aOft . lbs.(11Q411J<Q-I11)

50ft. .. m)
5/98
7.28
6x6 Middle Axle/Sprocket Removal
1. Disconnect taillight harness.
2. Remove cargo box. Note location of hinge shims
between hinge and frame (where applicable).
3. Remove both chain guards.
4. Remove rear chain.
5. Remove middle axle eccentric bolt and front chain
guard.
6. Remove chain, making sure to note location of
O-Rings on master link.
7.28a
FINAL DRIVE
6x6 Middle Axle Sprocket Service
Remove Both Chai n
Guards
10/96
FINAL DRIVE
7. Remove rear swing arm end caps on both sides.
8. Lower rear swing arm down out of the way.
9. Remove rear brake caliper(s) and safely secure
caliper(s) to frame as shown.
10. Remove wheels.
11. Remove cotter pin from RH hub nut.
10/96
7.28b
12. Loop chain around sprocket and apply LH brake.
13. Remove RH hub nut.
14. Note position of washers. Cone washer is
positioned with domed side facing outward.
15. Hold inner lock nut and remove outer nut. Remove
inner nut and middle chain.
16. Remove axle from right to left. Note position of
spacer O-Ring on assembly.
7.28c
FINAL DRIVE
10/96
FINAL DRIVE
17. Inspect sealing surfaces of sprocket hub.
NOTE: When installing a new sprocket, be sure to align
eccentric adjustment access holes in sprockets.
Brake Disc Hub Removal
1. With axle removed, tap spacer, LH bearing housing
and disc hub inward to expose wire retainer clip.
2. Remove wire clip from groove.
3. Slide clip, spacer, O-Ring, bearing housing and disc
hub off LH side of axle.
4. Inspect sealing surface on brake disc hub.
Reverse disassembly procedure to assemble. Be sure
to install rear swing arm bearing housing with grease fit-
ting outward.
10/96
7.28d
Middle Axle Assembly
1. Install new O-Ring on brake caliper mount plate.
2. Install caliper on axle. Install spacer.
3. Install axle from left to right.
4. Lubricate splines of axle and sealing surfaces on
sprocket hub with a light film of grease. Install hub
(large sprocket inward).
5. Lube and install O-Ring on axle with spacer
(tapered side in). Apply Loctite 242 to axle
threads and loosely install inner axle nut.
6. Install drive chain with closed end of link clip leading
(in forward gear).
7. Install brake caliper(s) and torque retaining bolts to
specification.
8. Apply brake to prevent axle from turning. Torque
inner axle nut to specification.
9. Apply Loctite 242 to threads of axle and install jam
nut. Hold inner axle nut and torque jam nut to
specification.
7.28e
FINAL DRIVE
Align brake caliper
mounting plate
wit
10/96
FINAL DRIVE
Middle Axle Assembly
10. Set rear swingarm in place on pivot bearing
housings.
11. Install retainer caps and torque bolts to
specification.
12. Grease wheel hub splines and install hubs on axle
followed by flat washer and dome washer with
dome side out. Torque nut to specification. Install a
new cotter pin. Tighten nut slightly to align cotter pin
if necessary.
13. Install wheel nuts (tapered side in) and torque to
specifications.
10/96
7.28f
grease zerk is visib
installing rear swing arm.
Rear Hub/Bearing Carrier Removal (Type IV Shaft Drive)
1. Lock the parking brake. Remove rear hub cap.
2. Remove cotter pin.
3. Loosen the hub retaining nut.
4. Loosen - but do not remove - the wheel nuts.
5. Safely support the rear of the ATV.
Serious injury could occur if machine tips or falls.
6. Remove wheel.
7.28g
FINAL DRIVE
Rear Hub - Shaft Drive
10/96
FINAL DRIVE
Rear Hub/Bearing Carrier Removal (Type IV Shaft Drive)
7. Remove hub.
8. Remove upper control arm bolt as shown.
9. Remove both lower control arm bolts.
10. Remove bearing carrier.
10/96
7.28h
Rear Hub Disassembly (Shaft Drive)
1. Remove outer snap ring.
2. From the back side, tap on the outer bearing race
with a drift punch in the reliefs as shown.
NOTE: Drive bearing out evenly by tapping on outer
race only. Once bearing is at bottom of casting, support
casting on outer edges so bearing can be removed.
3. Inspect bearing.
NOTE: Due to extremely close tolerances and mini-
mal wear, the bearings must be inspected visually, and
by feel. While rotating bearings by hand, inspect for
rough spots, discoloration, or corrosion. The bearings
should turn smoothly and quietly, with no detectable
up and down movement and minimal movement side-
ways between inner and outer race.
4. Inspect bearing housing for scratches, wear or
damage.
7.28i
FINAL DRIVE
10/96
FINAL DRIVE
Assembly
1. Support bottom of bearing carrier housing.
2. Start bearing in housing.
3. Press bearing into place until outer race bottoms on
housing.
Use an arbor and press only on the outer race, as bear-
ing damage may occur.
4. Install snap ring into groove.
10/96
7.28j
Installation
1. Start bearing carrier on drive shaft.
2. Align bottom of carrier housing and lower control
arm. Grease and slide lower control arm bushings
into place, securing corner housing.
3. Install and torque both lower control arm bolts.
4. Lift bearing carrier until top aligns with upper control
arm. Install and torque upper control arm bolt and
torque to specification.
5. Pull drive shaft outward and install hub onto
driveshaft splines.
6. Install cone washer with domed side facing
outward.
7. Install retainer nut, wheel and wheel nuts.
8. Remove jackstand and torque axle nut and wheel
nut.
9. Install a new cotter pin. Tighten nut slightly to align
holes if required.
10. Install hub cap.
7.28k
FINAL DRIVE
10/96
FINAL DRIVE
Rear Drive Shaft
Rear Drive Shaft Removal
1. Lock the parking brake. Remove rear hub cap.
2. Remove cotter pin.
3. Loosen the hub retaining nut.
4. Loosen - but do not remove - the wheel nuts.
5. Safely support the rear of the ATV.
Serious injury could occur if machine tips or falls.
6. Remove wheel.
7. Remove inner drive shaft bolt.
8. Slide drive shaft out of transmission splines. Lift
drive shaft up and toward center of ATV. Turn
bearing carrier down to disengage outer end of
drive shaft. Once drive shaft is free from bearing
carrier, pull out side of machine.
10/96
7.281
Rear Drive Shaft Disassembly
FINAL DRIVE
Rear Drive Shaft
NOTE: Drive shaft must be aligned properly to avoid vibration. Before disassembling driveshaft, be sure to mark
the shaft and all U-joints, taking note of the position of grease fittings to ease assembly.
1 . Remove shaft boot clamp.
2. Separate drive shaft halves.
3. Inspect the inner and outer splines.
4. Refer to page 7.18 for axle cardan U-Joint
disassembly procedure. When disassembling
U-Joint, the yoke bore alignment must be
inspected. Refer to page 7.19 for procedure.
Assembly
NOTE: When assembling U-Joints, be sure to position
grease fittings correctly.
1 . Assemble axle cardan U-Joints as described on
page 7.19. Be sure to inspect yoke bore alignment
on all yokes. If a yoke is twisted, warped, or
misaligned, it must be replaced or pre-mature joint
failure will result.
2. Install drive shaft boot on one of the drive shaft
halves.
3. Grease splines of shaft with Polaris Premium
U-Joint Lubricant.
NOTE:The only recommended lubricant for the U-joints is
Polaris Premium U-Joint Lubricant. Do not use inferior lu-
bricants in U-Joints or pre-mature failure may result.
4. In order to prevent driveline vibration, the inner and
outer yokes must be aligned properly (refer to
illustration on page 8.42). Assemble rear drive
shaft, aligning inner and outer yokes and grease
fittings.
5. Install boot clamps using boot clamp pliers.
6. Collapse driveshaft assembly and grease until
grease starts to run out of hole on end of shaft.
7.28m 10/96
FINAL DRIVE
Rear Drive Shaft
Rear Drive Shaft Installation
1. Slide shaft assembly into bearing carrier hub.
2. Apply anti-seize compound to splines of shaft.
3. Apply Loctite 272 to threads of driveshaft mounting
bolt. Install and tighten bolt to 35 ft.lbs. (4.83 kg-m).
4. Lift bearing carrier into place and install bolt to upper
control arm. Torque bolt to 35 ft. Ibs. (4.83 kg-m).
5. Install rear wheel and torque wheel nuts to
specification.
6. Grease all fittings thoroughly with Premium U-Joint
Lubricant.
10/96
7.28n
Rear Eccentric Removal
1. Remove rear axle. See page 7.24.
2. Completely remove rear eccentric pinch bolts.
3. Mark direction hub is installed for ease of
installation.
4. Rotate eccentric hub until projections line up with
slots in eccentric clamp.
5. Slide eccentric assembly out of clamp.
Rear Eccentric Disassembly
NOTE: Bearings and seals must be replaced if re-
moved.
1 . Pry out drive axle seals. Be careful not to damage
seal bore or eccentric housing.
2. Using a brass flat punch and a hammer, tap bearing
spacer sideways until loose.
3. Drive bearing outward from opposite end of
housing.
7.29
FINAL DRIVE
Rear Eccentric
5/98
FINAL DRIVE
Rear Eccentric
Rear Eccentric Disassembly
4. Remove spacer. Check spacer length. Replace
spacer damaged or worn beyond the service limit.
Rear Eccentric Assembly
1. Place new bearings in a freezer for 10 minutes
before installation. Warm eccentric housing evenly
to ease bearing installation.
CAUTION: Wear protective gloves and eye protection.
2. Install bearing until seated.
7/96
7.30
Rear Eccentric Assembly
3. Turn housing over and support outer race of
bearing.
4. Apply a light film of grease to spacer and install.
5. Heat end of housing without bearing.
6. Install other bearing until fully seated.
7. Install seals in both ends until flush with housing.
7.31
FINAL DRIVE
Rear Eccentric
7/96
FINAL DRIVE
Rear Eccentric
Rear Eccentric Installation
1. Slide eccentric housing into swingarm with short
side toward the sprocket. The alignment tabs on
eccentric must align with slots in eccentric clamp.
2. Turn the eccentric 1/2 turn clockwise, as viewed
from left side of machine.
3. Install clamp bolts and tighten nuts until snug (do
not tighten at this time).
4. Refer to axle installation on page 7.26 to install
axle.
5. Refer to chain adjustment in Maintenance section
to adjust rear drive chain.
7/96
7.32
Center Eccentric Removal
1. Remove cab screws at front and rear of right side
foot rest.
2. Remove chain guard.
3. Remove chain and sprockets from center drive as
an assembly. NOTE: Loosen center eccentric inner
sprocket bolt before removing center drive chain.
4. Remove center eccentric inner sprocket from center
eccentric.
5. Remove center eccentric bolts and eccentric
assembly out right side of frame.
7.33
FINAL DRIVE
Center Eccentric
7/96
FINAL DRIVE
Center Eccentric
Center Eccentric Disassembly
NOTE: AWD units in 1996 were built with both two bear-
ing and four bearing center eccentrics. Disassembly pro-
cedure is basically the same for both types. Note the
placement of a spacer washer between bearings on the
four bearing models.
1. Remove spacers from each end.
2. Remove O-ring on both ends of shaft.
NOTE:Bearings should be replaced if removed.
3. Drive shaft, bearings, and seals out with a soft face
hammer. Note direction of seal with lip facing
outward.
4. Remove bearing from shaft and use shaft to drive
bearing and seal out other end.
5. Clean shaft and housing thoroughly.
Center Eccentric Assembly
NOTE: AWD units in 1996 were built with both two bear-
ing and four bearing center eccentrics. Although two
bearing assembly is shown, assembly procedure is the
basically the same for four bearing types with the excep-
tion of placing the spacer washer between bearings on
the four bearing models.
1. Place new bearings in a freezer for ten minutes
before installation. Warm eccentric housing evenly
to ease bearing installation. Install bearing until outer
race bottoms in housing.
2. On four bearing housings install only the inner
bearing at this time.
7/96
7.34
Center Eccentric Assembly
3. Install short end of shaft into bearing housing until
shaft bottoms on inner race of bearing.
4. Support bearing in housing with bearing installation
tool PN 2870676 or similar tool that supports outer
race of bearing.
5. Install other bearing using Magnum PTa end
crankshaft installation tool. Seat bearings
completely.
6. Install both end seals using seal and bearing
installation tool. NOTE: Do not support assembly by
housing. Support outer race of bearing, otherwise
seals and bearings may not be fully seated.
7.35
FINAL DRIVE
Center Eccentric
7/96
FINAL DRIVE
Center Eccentric
Center Eccentric Assembly, Cont.
7. Lubricate and install new O-rings in grooves on both
ends of shaft.
8. Grease housing until grease begins to flow through
bearings and into seal area.
9. Install spacers in each end large chamfer inward.
NOTE:lnstalllong spacer on long splined end of shaft.
Center Eccentric Installation
1. Thoroughly clean eccentric housing surface and
clamp housing with alcohol or lacquer thinner to
remove any grease or dirt.
2. Install eccentric housing with long end of shaft
facing right side of machine as shown.
NOTE: Do not tap or press on eccentric shaft to install
assembly in frame. This may force seal out of housing
and cause premature bearing failure.
3. Loosen front eccentric pinch bolt and rotate front
eccentric to loosen front drive chain.
7/96
7.36
Center Eccentric Installation Cant.
4. Install front drive chain sprocket on center eccentric
shaft. Using blue Loctite 242 install and hand
tighten bolt.
5. With center eccentric turned to loose setting, install
center drive chain and sprockets. Using blue
Loctite 242 install center sprocket bolt and torque
both sprocket bolts to specification.
6. Adjust center eccentric to achieve 1 14-1 12"
(6.35-12.70mm) deflection at center of drive chain
when an 18 lb. force is applied to the chain (see
Maintenance section for adjustment procedure).
7. Tighten and torque center eccentric pinch bolts
evenly and re-check adjustment.
8. Adjust the front eccentric to achieve 1/4-1/2"
(6.35-12.70mm) deflection at center of drive chain
when an 18 lb. force is applied to the chain (see
Maintenance section for adjustment procedure).
9. Torque the front eccentric pinch bolt and re-check
adjustment.
10. Install chain guard and reattach mudflaps.
7.37
FINAL DRIVE
Center Eccentric
7/96
FINAL DRIVE
Front Eccentric
Front Eccentric Removal
1. Carefully lift and support front end of machine as
shown.
2. Remove front chain guard.
3. Remove cotter pin, lower ball joint nut and A-arm
from ball joint.
4. Drive roll pin from both front drive shafts.
NOTE: There are wave washers located between
drive axle and spacer on left side, and between
drive axle and sprocket on right side.
7/96
7.38
Remove 3 bolts holding cover in place
Front Eccentric Removal
5. Remove front eccentric pinch bolt.
6. Pull black plastic spacer out left hand side of
eccentric housing.
7. Rotate front eccentric assembly until opening in
eccentric casting aligns with stop bracket.
8. Remove eccentric out of left side of frame.
7.39
FINAL DRIVE
Front Eccentric
7/96
FINAL DRIVE
Front Eccentric
Front Eccentric Disassembly
1 . Remove spacers and O-rings from both sides.
2. Using a soft face hammer tap seal and bearing out
other side.
3. Remove bearing from shaft and use eccentric shaft
to remove bearing and seal out opposite side.
4. Clean all parts and rotate each bearing by hand to
check for smooth rotation. Visually inspect bearing
for moisture, dirt, or corrosion, and replace if
required.
5. Inspect shaft for wear in bearing area.
Front Eccentric Assembly
1. Heat eccentric housing around left side bearing
area (grease fitting side).
2. Install bearing until outer race is fully seated in left
side of eccentric housing (grease fitting side).
7/96
7.40
Front Eccentric Assembly
3. Support bearing on inner race, and turn over.
4. Install short splined end of shaft in eccentric
housing until shaft is firmly seated on inner race of
left hand bearing.
5. Install right hand bearing until inner race is fully
seated on shaft.
6. Install seals in both sides of eccentric with seal lip
facing outward.
NOTE: Seals should be installed to a depth of 1/8"
(3.17mm) past end of eccentric housing.
7. Grease eccentric housing until grease appears at
both end seals.
8. Lubricate and install new O-rings on both sides.
9. Install spacers with large chamfer toward O-rings
as shown.
7.41
FINAL DRIVE
Front Eccentric
7/96
FINAL DRIVE
Front Eccentric
Front Eccentric Installation
1 . Align slot in eccentric assembly with tab on frame
and slide eccentric assembly into frame with long
splines to right of machine (grease fitting facing left
side of machine).
NOTE: Install the sprocket and chain as an assembly
at same time.
NOTE:Do not tap or press on eccentric shaft to install
assembly in frame. This may force seal out of housing
and cause premature bearing failure.
2. Rotate eccentric assembly until chain begins to
tighten.
3. Install plastic spacer.
7/96
7.42
Front Eccentric Installation
4. Install pinch bolt and lightly tighten to hold eccentric
in place.
5. Set chain tension and torque pinch bolt to 50 ft. Ibs.
6. Install spring washers and both drive shafts. Align
hole in U-joint yoke with hole in eccentric shaft, and
install new roll pin.
7. Install lower ball joint, torque nut to specification
and install new cotter pin. Install wheels and torque
wheel nuts to specification.
7.43
FINAL DRIVE
Front Eccentric
7/96
FINAL DRIVE
Front Gearcase
Front Gearcase Removal
NOTE: The front gearcase io.Q.u1 (pinion) shaft seal can be replaced without removing gearcase from frame.
1 . Remove prop shaft (see below)
2. Loosen pinion shaft nut set screws, top and bottom. See page 7.50.
3. Remove gearcase front cover.
4. Note depth to which seal is installed and pry out old seal.
5. Install new seal to depth of old.
6. Install front cover and torque to specification. It is not necessary to re-set backlash unless RH side cover of
front gear case is removed.
parking brake.
3. Elevate and support machine under
5. Remove cotter pin, lower ball joint nut and A-arm
from ball joint.
Prop Shaft Removal
6. Using a drift punch, remove the roll pin from prop
shaft at rear of gearcase. Slide prop shaft back
and away from front gearcase. Pull sharply
forward to remove from transmission shaft.
NOTE: If removing front gearcase, use a drift punch
to remove the roll pins from both front drive axles.
10/96
7.44
7. Remove all bottom bolts securing gearcase to
frame. Remove vent line, and remove gearcase
out right side of frame.
Front Gearcase Disassembly
1. Drain and properly dispose of used gearcase oil.
Loosen both Allen set screws on input side of
gearcase.
2. Mount gearcase to front gearcase holding fixture
as shown.
7.45
FINAL DRIVE
Front Gearcase
7/96
FINAL DRIVE
Front Gearcase
7. Using an 1/8" drill bit, remove rivet securing side
cover to front gearcase.
8. Loosen both Allen screws securing side cover to
front gearcase (1996 models only).
NOTE: There are no Allen screws on output cover on
1997 front gearcase.
9. Install spanner tool on side cover. Use 2 1/8"
wrench on spanner tool to remove side cover.
Turn cover counterclockwise as viewed from the
right side (standard threads).
1 O. Remove cover, thrust washer, steel spacer, ring
gear assembly and shaft. Clean all parts and
inspect spacers for wear. Inspect ring gear for
chipped, broken, or missing teeth.
10/96
7.46
7. Some gearcases may have a pinion shaft retainer
with three holes. It will be necessary to remove
three drive pins on spanner tool to match these
covers.
8. Install spanner tool on pinion shaft retainer. Use
2-1/8" wrench and turn spanner socket counter
clockwise (as viewed from end of pinion shaft) to
remove retainer.
9. Remove pinion shaft assembly. Inspect pinion
gear for chipped broken or missing teeth.
Remove cover, brass spacer, steel spacer, ring
gear assembly and shaft. Clean all parts and
inspect spacers for wear. Inspect ring gear for
chipped, broken, or missing teeth.
7.47
FINAL DRIVE
Front Gearcase
7/96
FINAL DRIVE
Front Gearcase
Front Gearcase Assembly
1. Replace all O-rings, seals, and worn components.
2. Install needle bearing, snap ring, and left side
seal.
3. Press bearing on pinion shaft, install both snap
rings, and slide outer bearing into place.
NOTE: Thoroughly lubricate cover O-ring and
cover threads before installation.
4. Install pinion shaft assembly in case and tap lightly
to seat. Grease O-ring on pinion shaft retainer nut
and install. Tighten nut securely (se.e
specification above) until all end play is removed
from pinion shaft. Tighten top set screw.
NOTE:For proper back lash measurement, both ring
gear and pinion gear should be free of oil and grease
when installed. Do not install seal in pinion shaft re-
tainer nut until backlash is properly set.
7/96
7.48
5. Install ring gear assembly, steel spacer, brass
spacer and side cover. Make sure lock bolt on
holding fixture is backed out of the way. Rotate
pinion shaft while slowly turning side cover inward
until gears mesh. As gear backlash is reduced to
zero, the shaft will begin to bind. At this point back
off 1/4 turn.
6. Tighten locking bolt on holding fixture against
drive shaft until shaft is held securely and will not
rotate. This will also force ring gear against cover
to maximize backlash.
7. Install backlash tool on pinion shaft as shown.
Position dial indicator 1.875" (47.63mm) from
center line of shaft which is indicated by first mark
on tool. Be sure dial indicator shaft is
perpendicular to surface of tool. If dial indicator is
placed any other distance or angle, backlash
measurement will be inaccurate.
8. Rotate pinion shaft back and forth to read total dial
indicator movement. Backlash must be between
.004"-.007" total movement.
NOTE:When changing backlash:
To reduce backlash loosen lock bolt securing
output shaft and rotate side cover clockwise
as viewed from cover side.
To increase backlash loosen lock bolt secur-
ing output shaft and rotate side cover counter-
clockwise as viewed from cover side.
Be sure to tighten the lock bolt against shaft
when rechecking backlash.
When backlash is properly set, rotate output
shaft 180
0
and verify proper backlash at this
paint on the ring gear.
7.49
FINAL DRIVE
Front Gearcase
7/96
FINAL DRIVE
Front Gearcase
11. Install pinion shaft seal, and both output shaft
seals. Electrical tape can be applied to all shafts
to protect seals during installation.
12. On 1996 models, tighten both set screws and
install 1/8" steel rivet. On 1997 models, secure
cover with rivet.
Do not overtighten set screw (if so equipped) or cover
damage will result.
13. On 1996 models, remove front gearcase from
holding fixture and tighten bottom pinion shaft
retaining nut set screw.
10/96
7.50
Front Gearcase Installation
1. To install gearcase reverse removal procedure.
Use new roll pins in drive shafts.
2. Add Polaris Premium Front Gearcase Lubricant
or GL5 80-90 (non-hypoid) to front gearcase. Fill
to bottom of fill hole threads. Check drain plug for
proper torque.
7.51
FINAL DRIVE
Front Gearcase
10/96
FINAL DRIVE
Concentric Swingarm Rear Axle
Concentric Swingarm Rear Axle Removal
1. Refer to exploded view on page 7.55. Securely
support rear of machine with rear wheels off the
floor. Remove rear wheels and hubs.
2. Remove drive chain, rear brake caliper (A), and
caliper bracket (8). Secure caliper to rear shock
with wire or tie strap. Do not hang caliper by brake
line.
3. Remove snap ring (C) and pull back the lock sleeve
(0) from right side of axle.
4. Remove sprocket hub assembly from right side of
axle.
5. Note sealing O-ring on axle. Remove axle
assembly from left side of eccentric housing.
5/98
7.52
Concentric Swingarm Rear Axle Assembly
1. (Refer to exploded view on page 7.55). Install
stop ring in groove on left side of axle.
2. Install disc hub assembly on axle. Place axle in a
soft jawed vise. Apply Loctite 262 to threads,
install left axle nut and tighten to 120 ft. Ibs. Install
foam seal and axle nut lock sleeve with taper
toward nut as shown. Install snap ring to retain the
lock sleeve. Slide disc hub seal sleeve and then a
new O-ring onto the axle.
Concentric Swingarm Rear Axle Installation
1. Place brake caliper pivot bushing on stud with
flange inward as shown.
2. Loosely assemble upper and lower brake caliper
mount. Do not tighten at this time.
7.53
FINAL DRIVE
Ring
Groove
5/98
FINAL DRIVE
Concentric Swingarm Rear Axle Installation, Cant.
3. Lubricate seal sleeve and a-ring and install axle
from left to right.
4. Lubricate and install a new a-ring on right side of
axle. Slide O-ring against RH axle bearing. Apply
grease to sealing area on inside of sprocket hub
and slide sprocket hub assembly onto right side of
axle. Seat the hub against a-ring and bearing.
5. Apply Loctite Th1 262 to threads of right side axle nut
and install nut. Tighten nut with wrench to
approximately 8-10 ft. Ibs. (1.10-1.38 kg-m). Axle
must rotate smoothly without binding. If axle binds
the nut is too tight. If axle movement (up and down
or side to side) is detected, axle is too loose.
6. Install foam seal and slide lock sleeve onto hub
and install lock sleeve with taper inward. Install
snap ring.
7. Install brake caliper and drive chain. Torque brake
caliper mounting bolts (A) to 18 ft. Ibs.
8. Install rear wheel hubs. Torque center hub nut to
80 ft. Ibs. and install a new cotter pin. Torque
wheel nuts to 50 ft. Ibs.
9. Adjust drive chain (refer to Maintenance Chapter
2 for procedure). Torque eccentric pinch bolts (8)
to 60 ft. Ibs.
10. Torque lower caliper bracket bolts to 10-12 ft. Ibs.
11. Lubricate eccentric housing grease fitting with
Polaris Premium All Season Grease.
5/98
7.54
FINAL DRIVE
Concentric Swingarm Rear Axle Assembly, Exploded View
18 ft. Ibs.
(2.49 kg-m)
l

Caliper
Disc Hub
Stop Ring
/
Seal Sleeve
/
O-Ring
n / Bearing
/seal Bearing Race
a Eccentric Housing
, ': Grease Fitting
Left identified
by groove in

I

l

I
''-J

II" "'::1,"-
f '0.,J: "
"v , / Caliper Mount, Upper

,co- I) 0
I I':' '
, 0 "
r

Caliper Mount, Lower
10-12 tt.lbs. (1.38-1.65kg-m)
7.55
Torque: 80 ft. Ibs.
(11.06 kg-m)
5/98
CHAPTER 8
TRANSMISSION SERVICE
Torque Specifications ............................... 8.1
Lubrication Chart ................................... 8.1
Gear Ratios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 8.2
Torque Stop/Shift Linkage Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 8.3-8.4
Shift Linkage Rod End Positioning .................... 8.5
Troubleshooting .................................... 8.6
Gear Shift Selector Removal ......................... 8.7
Gear Shift Selector Disassembly ...................... 8.7-8.8
Gear Shift Selector Assembly ........................ 8.9
Gear Shift Selector Installation ....................... 8.10
Boot Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 8.10
Type III, EZ Shift Transmission Removal ............... 8.11-8.12
Type III, EZ Shift Transmission, Exploded View. . . . . . . .. 8.13
Type III, EZ Shift Transmission Disassembly ........... 8.14-8.15
Type III, EZ Shift Transmission Assembly .............. 8.15
Type III, EZ Shift Transmission Installation ............. 8.16-8.17a
Type V, (1998 Scrambler 400/500 Transmission Removal) 8.17b
Type IV, Shaft Drive Transmission Removal ............ 8.18-8.20
Type IV, Shaft Drive Transmission Disassembly ........ 8.21-8.28
Type IV, Shaft Drive Transmission, Exploded . . . . . . . . . .. 8.29-8.29a
Type IV, Shaft Drive Transmission Tensioner Installation . 8.29b
Type IV, Shaft Drive Transmission Assembly ........... 8.30-8.39
Type IV, Shaft Drive Transmission Installation .......... 8.40-8.43
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
Torque Specifications I Lubrication Chart
Transmission Case Bolts ......................................... 12 ft. Ibs. (1.66 kg-m)
Bell Crank Nut .................................................. 12 ft. Ibs. (1.66 kg-m)
Transmission Drain Plug ......................................... 14 ft. Ibs. (1.93 kg-m)
Speedometer Angle Drive ........................................ 11 ft. Ibs. (1.52 kg-m)
Transmission Mounting Bolts ..................................... 25 ft. Ibs. (3.45 kg-m)
Drive Sprocket Bolt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 17 ft. Ibs. (2.35 kg-m)
Output Shaft Bearing Mounting Nuts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 12 ft. Ibs. (1.66 kg-m)
Swing Arm Pivot Bolts (Std) ...................................... 55 ft. Ibs. (7.59 kg-m)
Swing Arm Pivot Bolts (Concentric Swingarm 1998 Scrambler 400/500) 150 ft. Ibs. (20.75 kg-m)
Lubrication
Item Capacity
HLR .................. Premium Synthetic Chaincase Lube ... 20 fl. oz
Notes
Dipstick
HR ................... Premium Synthetic Chaincase Lube ... 16 fl. oz. . . . . . .. Dipstick
Shaft Drive ............ Premium Synthetic Chaincase Lube ... 32 fl. Oz.1 ...... Dipstick
Chain/Shaft Drive ...... Premium Synthetic Chaincase Lube ... 32 fl. oz ........ Fill to bottom of fill hole
threads.
Front Gearcase ........ GL5 80-90 gear lube ................. 4.0 fl. oz. ...... Fill to bottom of fill hole
threads.
Shift Selector .......... OW40 Synthetic or .................. Fill selector box to the middle of shift selec-
10W Non-Detergent tor slide. Do not overfill. Shift slides may
hydro-lock.
Capacity after draining is approximately 20-24 ounces. 32 ounces when disassembled and completely dry.
8.1 5/98
Gear Ratios
Polaris ATVs have utilized different transmissions in various models. To assist with identification and repair proce-
dures, use the following guide.
NOTE: When ordering replacement parts, always reference the applicable parts manual by model number.
1996 Models Model # Part No. Type Gear Ranges*
Trail Blazer W967827 1341161 Type III HR
Trail Boss W968527 1341151 Type III HR
Xpress 300 W969530 1341147 Type III HLR
Xplorer 300 W969130 1341146 Type III HLR
Sport W968540 1341174 Type III HR
Scrambler 4x4 W967840 1341167 Type III HR
Xpress 400 W969540 1341158 Type III HLR
Xplorer 400L W969140 1341157 Type III HLR
Sportsman 4x4 W968040 1341157 Type III HLR
4006X6 W968740 1341157 Type III HLR
Magnum 2x4 W967544 1341185
Type "'
HLR
Magnum 4x4 W968144 1341184 Type III HLR
Magnum 6x6 W968744 1341184 Type III HLR
Sportsman 500 W969244 1341189 Type IV HLR Shaft Drive
*HR = High/Reverse
*HLR = High/Low/ Reverse
Type 3 Gear/Chain USA (EZ Shift)
1997 Models Model # Part No. Type Gear Ranges*
Trail Blazer W97BA25C 1341161 Type III HR
Trail Boss W97AA25C 1341151 Type III HR
Xpress 300 W97CA28C 1341147
Type "'
HLR
Xplorer 300 W97CC28C 1341146 Type III HLR
Sport W97BA38C 1341174 Type III HR
Scrambler 400 W97BC38C 1341167
Type "'
HR
Xpress 400 W97CA38C 1341158 Type III HLR
Xplorer 400L W97CC38C 1341157 Type III HLR
Sportsman 400 W97AC38C 1341157 Type III HLR
4006X6 W97AE38A 1341157 Type III HLR
Magnum 2x4 W97AA42A 1341185 Type III HLR
Magnum 4x4 W97AC42A 1341184 Type III HLR
Magnum 6x6 W97AE42A 1341184 Type III HLR
Scrambler 500 W97BC50A 1341189 Type III HR
Xplorer 500 W97CD50A Type IV HLR Shaft Drive
Sportsman 500 W97CD50A 1341217 Type IV HLR Shaft Drive
*HR = High/Reverse
*HLR = High/Low/ Reverse
Type III Gear/Chain USA (EZ Shift)
Gear Ratios Forward Reverse Low
Polaris Gear/Chain USA H/UR 3.29/1 5.13/1 6.64/1
H/R 2.68/1 3.4211 -
Sportsman 500 H/UR 3.29/1 5.13/1 6.64/1
Scrambler 500 H/R 2.68/1 3.4211 -
Xplorer 500 H/UR 3.29/1 5.13/1 6.64/1
10196
8.2
Torque Stop Adjustment (Except Sportsman 500)
Adjust the torque stop:
Prior to shift linkage adjustment;
When shifting difficulties are encountered;
If transmission has been removed from the frame.
NOTE: The torque stop is located on the bottom left hand
side of the transmission.
1 . Loosen jam nut (A).
2. Turn adjuster bolt (8) until it touches the frame, and
then an additional 112 turn.
3. Tighten the jam nut securely while holding the
adjuster bolt.
Torque Stop/Shift Linkage Adjustment
Forward
Frame
III. 1 Bottom View
Shift Linkage Adjustment (All High/Low/Reverse Transmissions)
Linkage rod adjustment is necessary when symptoms include:
No All Wheel Drive light;
Noise on deceleration;
Inability to engage a gear;
Excessive gear clash (noise);
Shift selectors moving out of desired range.
NOTE:When adjusting linkage, always adjust both linkage rods. The adjustment of one rod can affect the other.
Remove necessary components to gain access to shift linkage rod ends (Le. exhaust heat shield, exhaust pipe,
etc.).
1 . Perform torque stop adjustment above.
2. Inspect shift linkage tie rod ends, clevis pins, and
pivot bushings and replace if worn or damaged.
Lubricate the tie rod ends with Polaris Cable Lube PN
2870510.
3. Loosen all rod end adjuster jam nuts see III. 2.
4. Note orientation of tie rod end studs with stud up or
down. Remove both rod end studs from
transmission bell cranks.
NOTE: It is important to disconnect both rod ends from
the transmission bell cranks. If one linkage rod is incor-
rectly adjusted, it can affect the adjustment of the other
rod. (Disconnect Low range linkage rod end from pivot
arm on Sportsman 500).
5. Position shift selector in neutral. (In neutral, the shift
box actuator slide ends should be even.) Make sure
the transmission bell cranks are positioned in the
neutral position detents. (The bell cranks will be
perpendicular to the transmission case parting line
(except Low range on Sportsman 500. See III. 5. on
page 8.4).
8.3
Low Range:
Rearmost Bellcrank
Arm
Linkage rod end studs align with holes
NOTE: Rod end orientation (uP or
down) depends on model. See chart
on page 8.5 for proper positioning.
III. 2
7/96
Torque Stop/Shift Linkage Adjustment
Shift Linkage Adjustment, Cont.
3. Type III Transmissions: Be sure the shift linkage rod
ends are firmly attached to the shift selector slides.
Adjust the High/Rev range (outside) rod so the rod end
is precisely centered on the forwardmost transmission
bell crank. Install the lock nut to the rod end and torque
to 35 in. Ibs. Perform steps 7-10 on High/Rev range
shift linkage rod for final adjustment.
Type IV Transmissions: Be sure the shift linkage rod
ends are firmly attached to the shift transmission bell
cranks and low range pivot. Adjust the high range
(outer) rod so rod end stud is precisely centered on
hole in shift actuator slide. Install lock nut and torque to
35 in.lbs. Perform steps 7-10 on High/Rev range shift
linkage rod for final adjustment.
4. Rotate the linkage rod clockwise until resistance is
felt. Mark the rod so revolutions can be easily
counted. See III. 4 at right.
5. Rotate the linkage rod counterclockwise until the
same resistance is felt, counting the revolutions as
the rod is turned.
6. Turn the rod clockwise again one half of the
revolutions counted in Step 8.
7. Tighten the rod end jam nuts securely while holding
the rod end. The jam nuts must be tightened with
both front and rear rod ends parallel to each other.
See III. 4 at right. If jam nuts are properly tightened,
the rod should rotate freely 1/4 turn without binding.
8. Repeat steps 6-10 for Low range linkage rod.
Type IV Low Range Adjustment Note: After completing
steps 6-9 on Low range rod, turn rod counter clockwise
(as viewed from rear) until slight resistance can be felt.
This will bias freeplay toward the shift selector box and
ease shifting in and out of Low gear.
Transmission Case Parting Line
In neutral:
Centerline of----
Bellcrank
Perpendicular
to Parting
Li ne of Cases
to align linkage rod end studs
holes in bellcrank(s).
NOTE: Rod end orientation (up or
down) depends on model. See chart
on page 8.5 for proper positioning.
III. 3
Place
mark
on rod
F".._ A correctly tightened
, ,rod end will rotate
1 /4 turn
Parallel
Correctly Tightened Incorrectly Tightened
Jam Nut Jam Nut
III. 4
In neutral:
Centerline of
Bellcrank
Perpendicular
to Parting
Transmission Case
Parting Line ~
Line of Cases ----4--(,.
Type III High/Reverse Transmissions
Forward
H igh/Reverse
(forward lower
bellcrank)
Type III High/Low/Reverse Transmissions
111.5
10/96

In neutral:
Centerline of 1
H/R Bellcrank
Perpendicular
to Parting
Line of Cases
Low Bellcrank
Offset From
Centerline As
Shown
Type IV Transmissions
8.4
Shift Linkage Rod End Positioning
Shift Selector
Slides
Linkage Rod Ends
Align with Holes
300s and
All Magnums
u
AII400s
Except Sport
and Scrambler
Model Transmission Bellcrank
All 400s (Except From top down (nut on bottom)
Sport and Scram-
bier)
AII300s From top down (nut on bottom)
All Magnums
Trail Blazer Clevis pin or rod end from top down
Trail Boss (nut on bottom)
Sport 400L
Scrambler
Sportsman 500 Clevis pin (on pivot arm) and rod end
on bell cranks from top down (nut on
bottom)
8.5
High/Reverse
Bellcrank
Rod from
top down
Low Bellcrank
Pivot Arm
Sportsman 500
High/Reverse
Transmission
Shift Selector Slide
(inner rod) from top down (nut on bottom)
(outer rod) from bottom up (nut on top)
(inner rod) from bottom up (nut on top)
(outer rod) from top down (nut on bottom)
From top down (nut on bottom)
Horizontal nut towards motor
(inner rod) from bottom up (nut on top)
(outer rod) from top down (nut on bottom)
7/96
Troubleshooting
If shifting difficulty is still encountered after adjustment, per-
form the following steps:
1 . Disconnect shift rods from transmission bellcrank.
Check torque required to move bellcrank (should be 10
ft. Ibs.). Select gear and hold 10ft. Ibs. torque on
bel/crank. Roll machine in the opposite direction of the
gear selected (roll machine backward if a forward gear
is selected - roll machine forward if reverse is selected).
NOTE: Be sure to hold torque on bellcrank while rolling
until the transmission gears are fully engaged.
2. Start machine and test ride. If transmission operation is
satisfactory during the test ride, the shifting problem is
outside the transmission. Check travel of the shift
selector slides, re-check transmission adjustment,
fasteners, torque stop, etc.
Travel of shift selector slides should be .600/1 (15.2
mm) full movement, or .300" (7.6 mm) one way.
Troubleshooting
Check the following items when shifting difficulty is encountered.
Transmission oil type/quality
Torque stop adjustment
Loose fasteners on rod ends
Loose fasteners on selector box
Worn rod ends, clevis pins, or pivot arm bushings
Linkage rod adjustment and rod end positioning
Shift selector rail travel
*Worn, broken or damaged internal transmission components
*NOTE: To determine if shifting difficulty or problem is caused by an internal transmission problem, isolate the
transmission by disconnecting linkage rods from transmission bellcranks. Manually select each gear range using
the procedure in Step 1 above, and test ride vehicle. If it functions properly, the problem is outside the transmis-
sion. Refer to troubleshooting checklist above.
7/96
8.6
Gear Shift Selector Removal (Typical)
Gear Shift Selector
NOTE: The shift selector switch can be replaced with the shift selector box remaining in the frame. Perform steps
1-5 of removal, 1-4 of Disassembly, and 5-7 of Assembly. To change fluid, remove selector box assembly and
follow Steps 1 ,2,3,S, and 6 of Disassembly, and Steps 2-7 of Assembly.
1. Remove seat, right side panel, and exhaust heat
shield.
2. Remove exhaust pipe if it interferes with access to
shift selector.
3. Cut cable ties securing gear shift selector switch
wiring harness to frame. Note proper routing.
4. Disconnect wiring harness from terminal board,
noting the color and location of the wires on the
terminal board.
S. Pull the wiring harness through to gear shift
selector side of machine.
6. Disconnect the two linkage rods from the gear shift
selector slides.
7. Remove three bolts attaching gear shift selector to
the mounting bracket.
8. Lift gear selector out of mounting bracket and away
from frame.
Gear Shift Selector Disassembly
Wear eye protection during this procedure. Read each
step completely before proceeding. Essential parts
may be lost or damaged if you do not heed this caution!
1 . Clamp gear selector body lightly in a soft jawed
vice. Using a criss-cross pattern, loosen each of
the five screws holding the gear shift selector
cover to the gear shift selector body. Loosen each
screw only a few turns, then proceed to another
screw.
NOTE: These parts are under pressure from the inter-
nal spring.
8.7 7/96
Gear Shift Selector
Gear Shift Selector Disassembly, Cont.
2. Carefully pull the gear shift selector cover and rod
from the gear shift selector body.
CAUTION: Be very carefulto pull the cover away verti-
cally and slowly to avoid damage to the internal gear
selector switch. The selector switch is easily dam-
aged.
3. Set the cover/rod assembly aside.
4. Very carefully remove the gear shift selector
switch from gear shift selector body.
5. Remove the white plastic bearing cup and three
springs from gear shift selector.
6. Slowly tilt gear shift selector body sideways to
drain oil.
NOTE: Do nottip gear shift selector body upside down
or detent bullets and stop pin may fallout. Check for
signs of moisture in the selector body. Inspect shift
boot closely if moisture is present in selector box.
7. Tap gear shift selector body, top down, against a
hard, smooth, flat surface to jar the stop pin and
two detent bullets loose. Pull the detent bullets
and the stop pin out of the gear shift selector body.
8. Hold the interlock butterfly out of the way and
remove the two slides, one at a time.
9. Remove interlock butterfly and inspect for wear or
damage.
NOTE: The LH slide has two notches and the RH slide
has three. The slides must be replaced in the proper
channels.
10. Inspect O-rings for damage. Replace if any
damage is found.
11. Flush housing with parts washer fluid or
penetrating oil to remove all moisture.
12. Dry all gear shift selector parts and remove any
corrosion with a wire brush.
7/96
8.8
Cap

Handle/Striker
Assembly
Bearing CUR
Interlock
Interlock
Butterfly
Low
2 Notches
Detent Spring
Detent Pin
Selector Slides
Gear Shift Selector Assembly
1. Install interlock butterfly.
2. Insert slides into gear shift selector body, taking care
not to cut or tear O-rings in the process.
NOTE: The LH slide has two notches and the RH side
has three. The slides must be replaced in the proper
channels for the shifter to function properly.
3. Replace detent bullets, stop pin, springs and white
plastic bearing cup by reversing steps 5 - 7 of Gear
Shift Selector Disassembly.
4. Clamp gear shift selector body lightly in a soft jawed
vise.
5. Fill selector body with 1 OW40 motor oil. The oil level
should be at one half the height of the slides.
CAUTION: Too much oil could cause the selector to hy-
drolock. Be sure the selector box is level when adding
oil.
6. Carefully reinstall the gear shift selector switch. The
hook on the switch faces downward toward shift
slides. This hook catches on the selector body to
prevent the switch from moving out of place.
NOTE: Switch must be positioned properly or AWD may
not function.
7. Wipe gear selector dry, clean surfaces of cover and
selector box with Loctite Primer T and place a bead
of Loctite 515 Gasket Eliminator completely
around the edge of the gear shift selector body.
8. Carefully reattach cover/rod assembly to gear shift
selector body. Make sure slides are in neutral, or
butterfly may be damaged.
CAUTION: Be very careful not to damage the selector
switch while assembling these parts. Tab end of selector
switch must be positioned in hole of striker as shown at
right. If not, assembling cover will damage switch.
Torque cover screws to 12 ft. Ibs. (1.7 kg-m).
8.9
Gear Shift Selector
7/96
Gear Shift Selector
Gear Shift Selector Installation
1 . Place gear shift selector back into the mounting
bracket and replace three bolts.
2. Reconnect linkage rods to gear shift selector
slides. Adjust as required. See linkage
adjustment procedures.
3. Route gear shift selector switch wiring harness
properly and secure in place with cable ties.
4. Reconnect the wiring harness leads to the
terminal board. Follow the color codes when
installing wire leads to terminal board.
5. Using cable ties (PN 7080138), secure the gear
shift selector switch wiring harness to the frame.
6. Remount the exhaust pipe using a new gasket,
or high temp silicone to seal joints that do not
have a gasket.
7. Secure heat shield to frame with two screws.
8. Replace covers and side panels.
Boot Replacement
NOTE: If moisture is found in the gear shift selector
the boot should be replaced.
1. Using a slotted screwdriver, remove cap from
gear shift knob.
2. Remove torx screw securing knob to selector
rod.
3. Pull selector knob off selector rod.
4. Remove band clamps on rubber boot.
5. Slide boot off selector rod and replace with a
new one.
6. Apply RTV silicone to selector rod to seal top of
boot.
7. Place band clamps in position and tighten using
CV boot clamp pliers.
8. Replace shift knob, securing it to selector rod
with screw removed in step 2.
9. Push shift knob cover back into place. Allow
approximately 12 hours for RTV silicone to cure.
7/96
8.10
Terminal Board
(Typical)
PUR
Cap

Spring
Handle/Striker
Assembly
Low
2 Notches
BRN
Clamps
Boot
Cover (Apply
Loctite 515)
J
Detent Spring
Detent Pin
Selector Slides
Transmission Removal (Typical)
Type III, EZ-Shift Transmission
Remove the following items. Refer to Body & Steering Section for details.
Rear rack
Rear cab assembly
Air filter pre-cleaner
Air box assembly
Exhaust pipe
Linkage rod ends from transmission bell cranks
PVT inner cover (refer to PVT Section for details)
Auxiliary brake adjuster bolt, jam nut, washer, and
auxiliary brake arm (arm may remain attached to
brake rod)
NOTE: Gen IV style shown.
1. Remove center drive chain guard (4x4).
2. Loosen center eccentric to obtain slack to remove
center chain and sprockets if necessary.
3. Remove caliper mounting bolts and rear caliper
shield. Remove caliper assembly by rotating from 9
o'clock position to 11 o'clock and lifting off brake
disk.
4. Remove brake disk snap ring. Peel off excess
silicone from shaft and remove brake disk. Note
direction of disc installation or mark outside disc
before removal.
8.11 10/96
Removal (Typical), Cant.
5. Remove output shaft bearing assembly (where
applicable) along with any alignment shims. Note
location of shims (where applicable) for reassembly,
I nspect bearing for wear and replace if necessary.
6, Open bolt lock plate on right side and back out swing
arm bolt until it is flush with swing arm, Do not remove
completely,
7. Remove rear drive chain from sprocket.
8. Remove six bolts attaching skid plate and remove skid
plate.
9. Remove 3/8-16 x 3/4" bolt from top left transmission
mount.
10. Remove jam nut, roller chain guide and washer.
Remove 3/8" bolt from front top right transmission
mount.
11. Remove drain plug and drain transmission lubricant
into suitable container.
12. Remove lower transmission mounting bolt.
13. Loosen and remove speedometer cable from angle
drive.
14. Remove dust seal and driven clutch spacer from
15. Open bolt lock plate on left side and back out swing
arm bolt until it is flush with swing arm. Do not remove
completely.
16. Remove nut and washer from swing arm pivot bolt.
17. Loosen transmission torque stop jam nut and turn
torque stop in as far as possible to allow transmission
removal.
18. Turn fuel valve to OFF position. Remove carburetor
19. Remove vent line from transmission and secure.
20. Transmission may now be removed by rotating the
case, and moving the output shaft side down and the
input shaft side up toward the top right rear opening of
the frame, Remove the transmission from the right
side of the vehicle.
10/96
8.12
Type III Transmission Exploded View
I
/
Input Shaft
Seal
Output
Gear
Output
Shaft
Shift Fork
__ ..., (High/Rev)
Low Shift Shaft
(Upper, Rearmost)
Shift Fork on Transmission
Shaft (Low)
t:l
Low Gear
Low Engagement
Dog
8.13
Vent
High/Reverse
Shift Shaft (Lower,
Forward most) on
Transmission
/ O-Ring

Bushing Dipstick
Output Shaft
Seal
7/96
Type III, EZ .. Shift Transmission
Disassembly (Typical)
1 . Remove speedometer angle drive, sprocket
retaining circlip and sprocket.,
2. Remove the transmission cover bolts.
3. With a soft face hammer tap on the cover bosses
and carefully walk the cover off. See III. 1.
4. Using the battery cable clamp puller, remove the
bearing from the sliding gear shaft. See III. 2.
5. Remove outer thrust washer.
6. To remove the needle bearing from the low gear, tip
transmission to point end of shaft downward. Work
gear back and forth as shown until bearing is
exposed and slide bearing out. See III. 3.
7. Remove the low gear and inner thrust washer.
8. Place a 1/2" wrench on each of the transmission bell
crank retaining nuts to aid in removing the shift fork
shaft.
NOTE: Transmission must be in neutral to remove shift
forks.
9. Remove the low range shift fork shaft with
engagement dog by rotating the low gear shift arm
clockwise and pulling outward on shift fork shaft.
1 O. Remove output shaft and gear assembly by tapping
on shaft with a soft faced hammer, from the back
side of the gear case assembly.
11. Remove sliding gear shaft with high/reverse shift
shaft and input shaft assembly as a unit by gradually
walking assemblies from their bearing mounts while
rotating the high/reverse shift arm counterclockwise.
NOTE: Make sure input shaft gear clears oil deflector, but
do not remove the oil deflector. See assembly photo at
top of next page.
7/96
8.14
Tap with soft
face\;r
o
Tap with soft ~
face hammer
III. 1
Tap with soft
face hammer
/
o
Bearing
III. 2
III. 3
Work gear back
and forth until bearing
is exposed
Disassembly (Typical), Cant.
12. Clean all components in a parts washer and inspect
for wear.
13. Inspect engagement dogs of gears and replace if
edges are rounded.
14. Inspect gear teeth for wear, cracks, chips or broken
teeth.
15. Remove seals from transmission case.
NOTE: New seals should be installed after the transmis-
sion is completely assembled.
16. Inspect bearings for smooth operation. Check for
excessive play between inner and outer race.
Assembly (Typical)
1 . Carefully install high/reverse shaft assembly and
gear cluster (removed in step 11) as a unit into their
respective bearing case areas. Make sure input shaft
clears oil deflector. Tap with a soft face hammer to
seat shaft assemblies.
NOTE: Make sure high/reverse shift shaft pin is properly
positioned within spring retainers.
2. Seat the shafts and shift the assembly into neutral
position.
NOTE: The assembly must be in neutral at this time to
complete reassembly.
3. Install the output shaft and gear assembly into the
gear case.
4. Install engagement dog on low range shift shaft.
NOTE: Dogs should face toward the mating gear.
5. Install low shift shaft assembly aligning shaft pin with
spring; engagement dog splines with the sliding gear
shaft splines; and shift shaft to the gearcase.
See III. 1.
6. Install large I. D. washer on sliding gear shaft.
7. Install low gear on shaft with engagement dogs
inward. See photo at right.
8. Lubricate and install needle bearing into gear.
9. Install smaller 1.0. washer and bearing.
NOTE: The bearing should be flush with the shaft when
seated correctly.
10. Prior to reinstalling the cover make sure the mating
cover surfaces are clean and dry. Apply Loctite 515 or
518 to mating surfaces.
11. Reinstall cover and torque bolts to 12 ft. Ibs. (1.66
kg-m).
12. Install transmission and fill with Polaris Premium
Synthetic Gear Case Lubricant.
8.15
III. 1
7/96
Type III, EZ .. Shift Transmission
Installation (Typical)
1. Install transmission from right side of ATV with output
shaft side down and input shaft side up toward right
rear corner of frame.
NOTE: As you are guiding the output shaft into its mount-
ing, the rear drive chain can be installed onto shaft and
sprocket. Make sure chain is properly positioned on axle
sprocket.
2. Loosely install lower mounting bolt and nut.
Be sure bolts are proper length or transmission damage
may occur.
3. Loosely install right side 3/816 x 3/4" mounting bolt
in top right hole.
4. Attach washer, nut and roller chain guide to the right
side swing arm bolt.
5. Align transmission case bushing with bolt and torque \
nut to 55 ft. Ibs. (7.6 kg-m). Bend the tab washer to
lock the bolt in place.
6. Loosely install left side 3/816 x 3/4/1 top mounting
bolt.
7. Install washer and nut on the left side swing arm bolt.
8. Align transmission case bushing with bolt and torque
nut to 55 ft. Ibs. (7.6 kg-m). Bend the tab washer to
lock the bolt in place.
9. Align transmission with engine (See Clutch Section
for center distance and alignment procedure. Torque
lower mounting bolt to 25 ft. Ibs. (3.45 kg-m). Torque
right and left 3/8-16 x 3/4" bolts to 25 ft. Ibs. (3.45
kg-m).
10. Adjust torque stop by adjusting bolt until it contacts
the frame. Then tighten an additional one half turn
using a wrench. Hold the adjuster bolt and tighten the
jam nut.
11. Attach speedometer cable to angle drive and tighten.
12. Install skid plate and torque bolts to 5 ft. Ibs. (.7
kg-m).
13. Install driven clutch spacer and dust seal(s).
14. Install inner cover and all PVT system components.
Refer to PVT Section for procedure.
10/96
8.16
Front
Nut
Bolt
Transmission Torque Stop Adjustment
Drive Key
Adapter (LH
Thread)
Drive \ 01

r<V) --

Drive
8-10 ft. Ibs.
(1.10-1.38 kg-m)
15. Grease support bearing and install on output shaft.
16. Slide output shaft support bearing inward against
frame. Be sure to hold bearing square with shaft.
17. Visually inspect gap between frame and upper or
lower mounting boss on support bearing. If a gap
exists on upper or lower boss, measure with a feeler
gauge and add shim(s) as required to maintain
proper alignment when mounting nuts are tightened.
Torque to specification.
18. Apply silicone to splines of brake disk and reinstall
disk.
19. Install brake caliper on disk and bolt to frame with the
rear caliper shield. Torque to specification.
8.17
10/96
Installation (Typical), Cont.
20. Install snap ring onto output shaft securing brake
disk.
21. On 4x4 Models, install sprockets and middle chain.
Install sprocket with bolt, lock washer and retaining
washer and torque output shaft sprocket bolt to 17 ft.
Ibs. (2.35 kg-m). Torque center eccentric sprocket
bolt to 30 ft. Ibs. (4.14 kg-m). Install chain guard with
spacer. Adjust rear and center chains. Refer to
Maintenance Section for details.
22. Install brake disk cover.
23. Install top mounting bolts of brake disk cover, rear
caliper shield and caliper to frame. Torque caliper
mounting bolts to 12 ft. Ibs. (1.7 kg-m).
24. Attach brake caliper arm to moveable cam and adjust
foot pedal to 1/2" deflection. (See Maintenance
Section) Lock the jam nut.
25. Install air cleaner assembly, making sure carb boot
seals on air box correctly. Tighten hose clamp.
26. Reinstall pre-cleaner duct work and pre-cleaner.
27. Proceed with linkage rod adjustment found on page
8.3.
Speedometer Service
1 . Remove speedometer cable from the
speedometer head and lubricate it periodically
with Polaris cable lube (PN 2870510).
2. Use a generous bend (radius) when installing
cable. Do not kink cable.
3. If cable is binding or routing is incorrect, the
small drive key may twist off at the drive
adaptor. It will be necessary to remove the
drive key adaptor out of the transmission shaft
NOTE: The drive adapter has left hand threads.
10/96
B.17a
Speedo Head
Lube Here
Drive Key
Adapter (LH
Thread)
, Drive Key \_
~
" ~ - ~ Y - -
. \ -- -
Angle Drive _ - - - - - - - ~ --
_---@J--
8-10 ft. Ibs.
(1 .10-1 .38 kg-m)
Type V EZ .. Shift Transmission (1998 Scrambler 400/500)
Transmission Removal (Type V; 1998 Scrambler 400/500)
1 . Remove seat, cab and air box.
2. Remove right side shield and auxiliary brake master
cylinder and reservoir.
3. Remove PVT outer cover, both drive and driven
clutch, and inner PVT cover.
4. Loosen left side swingarm mounting bolt and slide out
away from transmission (do not remove the bolt
completely.
INSTALLATION NOTE: Apply Red Loctite 262
and torque to 150 ft. Ibs.
5. Remove drive chain.
6. Remove (2) transmission mounting bolts from each
bulkhead.
7. Remove through-bolt from bottom of transmission.
8. Remove both extruded transmission mounting
brackets.
9. Remove wire connector from transmission position
sensor.
10. Remove shift linkage rod from bell crank.
11. Remove front prop shaft from front gearcase (refer to
prop shaft removal this section).
12. Remove transmission through right side of vehicle.
5/98
8.17b
Type IV, Shaft Drive Transmission
Shaft Drive Transmission Removal
All operations regarding transmission front output housing assembly can be performed with transmission installed
in frame.
1 . Remove the inner PVT cover. Refer to Clutch
Chapter. Remove speedometer cable.
2. Remove complete airbox assembly and
transmission vent line.
3. Loosen rear wheel nuts slightly.
4. Elevate and support machine under
footrest/frame area,
6. Remove auxiliary brake linkage rod from caliper,
caliper, and brake disk. Support caliper on right
hand foot rest. Disconnect transmission shift
linkage rods. Remove right hand shock absorber.
7. Disconnect the sway bar from both sides. Remove
right side upp'er control arm.
7/96
8.18
Shaft Drive Transmission Removal, Cant.
8. Remove left side upper control arm attaching bolts
at transmission. Pivot upper control arm away
from transmission as shown.
9. Remove both lower transmission mounting bolts
from each side.
10. Remove al18 bolts attaching the stabilizer support
bracket, and remove support.
11. Remove front transmission support bracket.
8.19
7/96
Shaft Drive Transmission Removal, Cont.
12. Using open end of a 9/16
H
wrench, loosen both
side bolts securing drive shafts to transmission,
and remove drive shafts.
13. Lift right side drive shaft and hub up and out of the
way. This will provide access to remove
transmission out right side of frame.
14. Remove bottom transmission bolts as shown in
illustration.
15. Lift and remove transmission out right side of
frame.
7196
8.20
Shaft Drive Transmission Disassembly
1. Drain and properly dispose of transmission oil.
2. Remove all cover bolts. Tap cover with soft face
hammer to remove. Note 2 bolts in center of cover.
Do not pry on gasket face.
3. Mark chain rotation direction for reassembly. Note
location of chain tensioner. If fully extended,
replace chain.
4. Compress chain tensioner by releasing locking tab
and forcing roller assembly in.
5. Insert 1/8/1 drill bit or similar tool in locking hole to
secure tensioner and remove tensioner.
8.21
7/96
Shaft Drive Transmission Disassembly, Cant.
4. Holding pawl open , check for free movement of
tensioner arm. With pawl closed, check locking
action of ratchet. Replace tensioner assembly if not
functioning correctly.
5. Inspect surface of roller for wear, discoloration, or
grooving. Inspect roller and needle bearing. Be sure
it rotates smoothly and fits tightly on roller pin.
Replace tensioner assembly if worn.
6. Inspect ratchet pawl and ratchet teeth for wear.
Replace tensioner assembly if worn.
10/96
8.22
9. Remove rear output gear and chain as an assembly
by lifting straight outward.
10. Remove oil deflector.
11. Make sure hole in oil deflector is clear and
unobstructed.
12. Using a puller remove Hillo/Reverse (HlR) shaft
bearing, and bearing thrust washer.
8.23
7/96
13. Turn transmission so shafts are painting down. Slide
the Low gear in and out until needle bearing is visible.
Remove needle bearing, low gear, and inner thrust
washer.
14. Inspect shift dogs for excessive rounding on the
leading edges.
15. Remove low range shift fork and dog.
16. Inspect face of shift fork for excessive wear,
discoloration, or bending.
7/96
8.24
Shaft Drive Transmission Disassembly, Cont.
7. Remove center shaft assembly by tapping on
opposite side with a soft face hammer.
NOTE: Drain plug must be removed, or magnet will inter-
fere with gear.
8. Remove the remaining shift components as an
assembly. Use a 1/2" wrench on shift bellcrank to aid
in removal.
9. Remove pinion gear retaining plate and pinion gear
assembly.
10. Inspect pinion gear for broken, chipped, or worn
teeth. Check bearing condition, and snap ring
location.
8.25
10(96
11. Loosen front output housing pinch bolts.
NOTE: 1996 Model shown with pinch plate.
12. Mark housing and casting for reference when
reassembling.
13. Using 2 1/8" wrench (PN 2871701) unscrew the
front drive housing from the transmission casting
until O-ring is exposed 1/2" (13mm).
14. Remove bottom access plate.
10/96
8.26
15. Use a strap wrench on splines to hold shaft. Bend
lock tab away from front output ring gear retaining
bolt and remove bolt.
16. Remove front output ring gear. Inspect for broken,
chipped, or worn teeth.
17. Unscrew front drive output and protect threads with
electrical tape.
18. Slide seal off shaft and remove snap ring noting
shims and thickness.
8.27
10/96
19. Using a brass hammer or a press, drive the shaft out
front of output housing.
NOTE: Spacer shown is used on 1996 and early 1997
models only. Later models with extended hub gear do not
use a spacer.
20. Inspect center shaft bushing for wear. If necessary,
remove with the large end of bushing drive tool.
21. Remove all remaining seals and clean all parts
thoroughly.
10/96
8.28
Type IV, Shaft Drive Exploded View
1996 .. Early 1997 Type IV Shaft Drive Transmission Exploded View
Bearings
Seals
Chain
Input Shaft
L
HR Shift 1,
Sh\ Y
@ i / Low Shift Fork
HR Shift Fork

Pins
Center Drive Reverse Gear
High Gear
l/Jy1JJi /;,. Oil Deflector
Retainer" IF(fJ

Needle
Ratchet Pawl
Tensioner Assembly
Dipstick
Pinion Gear
Seal (Can be replaced
with transmission in
the frame. Refer to
Front Output Shims

/1
pageS.44 \
Shaft "'"
"'" @
,i
/

"- Bushing I Spacer
iy
'-/..,
d, '.'7_-)JI Front Output Ring
/' Gear
Seal
Front Output
Housing
Front Output Gear Access Plate
8.29 10/96
Type IV, Shaft Drive Exploded View
Late 1997 Type IV Shaft Drive Transmission Exploded View
Seal

10/96

@) 0
cg
Low Gear
Input Shaft
@fi ti
(1)@J f) @ M H/R
(2 Shift Shaft
Reverse Shaft
Chain

Reverse Gear- Shift
Tensioner
Assembly
H/UR Shaft (() Fork
o High Shift
Drive 0 @ of
(2
0VJ
@
High (',{' @
, ) @
t:J 11 Plate
Front Output
Pinion Gear
Seal (can be
replaced wI
transmission
in frame)
I
Dipstick b-
R
. ,,OOO'
Front Output U
Ring Gear . , \:
g Lock Tab (1 piece) \
/ (S) Housing
wasrr Front,Output

Bushing
Output Gear
Access Plate
8.29a
Bearing
1997 (Late) - Current Tensioner Installation
Tensioner Assembly
With chain and sprockets installed:
1. Place spacers in case.
2. Place tensioner cam on front spacer and
tensioner shoe on rear spacer.
3. Insert pins through cam and washer, and through
shoe and washer.
4. Place spring over front pin and hook spring leg under cam.
5. Lift leg of spring up and over the rear pin. Tensioner cam
will lift shoe and tension chain.
Chain Tensioner Installation
~ a r d
Tensioner
Lock Cam
Spacers
View From Left Side of Transmission
II
Forward
5/98
8.29b
\ Lift Spring Over Rear Mounting Pin
Hook Spring Leg Under Cam
Shaft Drive Transmission Assembly
1. Install center shaft bushing using small end of
bushing installation tool.
2. Bearing is a light press fit. Heat inner bearing on a hot
plate or with a heat gun to ease installation, Install
bearing on shaft until inner race bottoms on shaft
flange.
CAUTION: Do not use a torch - bearing damage may re-
sult.
7/96
8.30
Shaft Drive Transmission Assembly, Cont.
22. Install front spacer until it bottoms on bearing race
(1996-early 1997). Press into place if necessary
with bearing installation tool.
23. Install shaft with bearing and spacer in front output
housing.
24. Turn front output housing over and install bearing
until fully seated.
25. Install snap ring without shims in place. Clamp
housing lightly in soft jawed vise.
8.31
10/96
Shaft Drive Transmission Assembly, Cant.
7. Set up a dial indicator to measure shaft end play.
8. Measured end play will be between .030" -.070".
Shims must be added between bearing and circlip to
reduce end play. To calculate proper end play,
subtract total shim thickness from end play measured
in step 8. Add or subtract shims as required to obtain
specified end play (.000-.003/1). Remove snap ring,
install shims, reinstall snap ring. It may be necessary
to tap snap ring into place.
NOTE: Shaft should rotate freely when finished. Confirm
end play measurement with dial indicator. Do not install
seal in housing until backlash is adjusted.
9. Liberally apply anti-seize compound to the threads of
the output housing.
7/96
8.32
26. Screw in housing until O-ring is approximately 1/4"
(8mm) from transmission housing.
27. Install front output ring gear and retaining bolt. Hold
shaft with strap wrench and tighten retaining bolt.
Replace lock washer or lock tab washer, and use
Loctite Primer T on threads and shaft. Use
Loctite 242 on retaining bolt. Bend tab washer
against flat portion of bolt head.
28. Install pinion gear assembly and retaining plate. Use
Loctite Primer T on bolt and housing threads.
Apply Loctite 242 to bolts and torque to
specification.
29. Lubricate front housing O-ring thoroughly with
Polaris All Season grease. Continue to screw front
housing in, making sure O-ring enters housing, and
ring gear teeth mesh with pinion shaft teeth properly.
8.33
10/96
Shaft Drive Transmission Assembly, Cant.
30. Rotate front shaft while slowly turning housing
inward. As gear backlash is reduced to zero, the
shaft will begin to bind. At this point back off 1/4 turn.
Transmission Output Gear Backlash Adjustment
NOTE: This procedure can be performed with transmis-
sion installed in frame.
31. The following steps must be performed to obtain
proper front output gear backlash adjustment:
The pinion gear must be held securely.
Do not lubricate the gear teeth until backlash ad-
justment is complete. Both gears must be free
of grease and oil.
Perform adjustment with front output housing
seal removed.
Measure backlash using tool (PN 2871695).
The measurement point is 3.875/1 (98.43mm)
from shaft centerline.
Adjust backlash to .008" - .014" (.20 -.36mm).
Check backlash in several locations of ring gear.
32. Install special tool (PN 2871695) on shaft as shown.
With pinion gear held stationary rotate output shaft
back and forth reading the total movement of dial
indicator. The dial indicator must be positioned as
shown at the proper distance (aligned with
outermost mark on tool, and 90to the tool surface),
or backlash will be incorrect.
To reduce backlash rotate housing clockwise as
viewed from front of housing.
To increase backlash rotate housing counter-
clockwise.
33. Torque pinch bolts. Recheck backlash.
1996 Models: Make sure pinch plate is in place before
tightening.
10/96
8.34
Input Shaft
Front Gearcase Transmission
Use This Mark Front Output
Shaft Use
This Mark
.....---- 3.875" ------JIIoI
34. Make sure surface of access plate and transmission
are clean, and install bottom access plate with notch
to front as shown. Apply 10ctite 515/518 gasket
eliminator.
35. Using the Magnum crankshaft installation tool,
lubricate and install the front seal until flush with
housing.
36. Assemble Hi/Reverse assembly. Machined side of
circlip should face direction of thrust. Sliding shift
dog is symmetrical and can be installed either way.
The outer gear dogs must face each other.
37. Assemble the Hi/Reverse gear cluster as shown.
8.35
10/96
22. The two shift forks can be easily identified by the
indentations. Low/Neutral shaft has 2 detents, and
Hi/Neutral/Reverse has 3 detents.
23. Install Hi/Reverse cluster in transmission as an
assembly. If necessary use a soft face hammer to
install shafts until fully seated. Make sure the
hi/reverse shift pin is located between the spring tail
ends. Make sure Hi/Reverse shift assembly is in
neutral position. If not you will not be able to install
low range shift fork.
24. Install center shaft assembly.
25. Install Low shift fork with sliding dog in place. Dogs
must be positioned outward toward you. Slide the
shift dog overthe spline, and the low range shift shaft
into the detent lock. Make sure the shift shaft pin is
located between the spring tail ends.
7/96
8.36
26. Install inner thrust washer, low gear, and needle
bearing.
27. Install outer thrust washer and bearing.
28. Install plastic oil deflector. Apply Loctite 242 to all
four screws.
NOTE: Do not over tighten deflector screws, or deflector
may crack.
29. Assemble chain tensioner.
8.37
7/96
38. 1996 Models - Compress and lock tensioner in
retracted position with a 1/8" drill bit. I nstall chain
tensioner in transmission.
1997 to Current Models -Install tensioner assembly
with spacers. Be sure spring is fully seated against
ratchet or cover may bind.
39. Clean tensioner bolts and housing threads with
Loctite Primer T, and apply Loctite 242 to chain
tensioner bolts.
40. Install drive gear and chain.
41. Pre-lubricate all bearings with Polaris Premium
Synthetic Gear Case Lubricant before installing
cover.
10/96
8.38
42. Install cover with Loctite 515/518 and all cover
bolts, torque to specification. Remove drill bit from
chain tensioner and install plug (1996 models).
Lubricate input shaft seal with Polaris All Season
Grease, and install until flush using Magnum
crankshaft installation tool.
43. Install new greased seal on center drive shaft. Set
seal to a depth of 1/8" for speedometer angle drive
clearance. Refer to photo.
44. Install seal installation tool in drive gear as shown.
Lubricate new seal with grease and slide onto tool.
Drive seal carefully into place using large end of
seal driver. Repeat procedure for other side.
45. Grease and install center shaft seal flush with
transmission housing using seal installation tool.
8.39
10/96
Shaft Drive Transmission Installation
1. Apply anti-seize compound to splines of front
output shaft and insert into prop shaft.
2. .Rotate transmission into place from right side of
frame.
3. Loosely install bottom transmission bolts.
4. Install lower right and left transmission mounting
bolts, front transmission bracket, and rear
stabilizer support bracket. Tighten transmission
bolts securely in the following sequence.
Front support bracket upper and lower.
Stabilizer bracket upper and lower.
Bottom transmission bolts.
Lower left and right transmission mounting bolts.
7/96
8.40
Install -=----w
bolts
Shaft Drive Transmission Installation, Cant.
5. Apply Loctite 272 to right hand drive shaft bolt
and install internally threaded spacer onto bolt.
Torque to specification.
6. .Apply anti-seize to splines of drive shaft and
install right side drive shaft in transmission with
opening in U-joint upward. Support right hand hub
and install right hand upper control arm attaching
bolts. Install stabilizer bar arm on stabilizer bar.
7. Apply Loctite 272 to left hand drive shaft bolt and
install in transmission, aligning all U-joint yokes
and grease fittings with the right side. Install left
hand upper control arm attaching bolts.
NOTE: Start left hand driveshaft bolt before installing
driveshaft completely into splined hub. Torque left
drive shaft bolt to specification.
8.41
7/96
Shaft Drive Transmission Installation, Cont.
Internally Threaded
Collar
Transmission
Align
Whenever the drive shafts are disassembled, the inner and
outer U-joint yokes must be aligned
as shown to prevent excessive driveline vibration.
8. Attach speedometer cable.
9. Install brake disc, caliper, auxiliary brake linkage
rod, and transmission shift linkage rods. Install
right hand shock absorber.
10. Install PVT system. Refer to PVT section for
procedure.
7/96
8.42
Shaft Drive Transmission Installation, Cont.
11. Install airbox assembly and transmission vent line.
Be sure vent line is not kinked or pinched.
12. Add Polaris Premium Synthetic Gearcase
Lubricant to the proper level on dipstick.
(Approximately 1 quart). Do not overfill.
13. Install rear wheel nuts and torque to specification.
14. Refer to Maintenance Section to adjust
transmission linkage.
8.43
7/96
Front Drive Housing Seal Service
Front Drive Housing Seal Removal (In Frame)
1. Using a drift punch, remove roll pin from prop shaft
at front gearcase. Slide prop shaft back and away
from front gearcase. Pull sharply forward to
remove from transmission front output shaft.
2. Tightly wrap electrical tape over splines of output
shaft to protect sealing surface.
3. Pry front output housing seal out and discard.
4. Inspect the shaft and housing sealing areas for
nicks, burrs, or damage.
Front Drive Housing Seal Installation (In Frame)
1. Make sure the sealing areas on the front output
shaft and housing are clean and free of nicks,
burrs, or damage. Wrap splines of shaft tightly
with electrical tape to prevent seal damage during
installation.
2. Apply a light film of grease to shaft surface and
seal lip. Carefully slide new seal on output shaft
with spring side in - toward transmission. Take
care not to dislodge spring from seal lip.
3. Slide seal into position against output housing.
Using the Magnum crankshaft installation tool,
drive seal in until outer edge is flush with housing.
4. Remove electrical tape from shaft.
5. Lubricate prop shaft O-ring and install prop shaft.
6. Align roll pin holes on front gearcase and prop
shaft.
7. Drive new roll pin into place until flush with prop
shaft.
10/96
8.44
CHAPTER 9
BRAKES
Specifications, 1996 ............................. 9.1-9.2
Torque Specifications ............................ 9.2
Hydraulic Brake System Operation ................. 9.3
Fluid Replacement/Bleeding Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . .. 9.4-9.5
Front Pad Replacement .......................... 9.6-9.9
Output Shaft Brake Pad Replacement/Adjustment ... 9.10-9.12
6x6 Rear Brake Pad Replacement ........ , ........ 9.13-9.14
6x6 Middle Axle Brake Pad Replacement ........... 9.15
Master Cylinder Disassembly ..................... 9.16-9.17
Master Cylinder Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 9.18
Master Cylinder Assembly ........................ 9.18-9.19
Master Cylinder Installation ....................... 9.20
Front Caliper Disassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 9.21-9.22
Front Caliper Inspection .......................... 9.22
Front Caliper Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 9.23
Front Caliper Installation .......................... 9.23-9.24
Output Shaft Caliper Service (Auxiliary Brake) ....... 9.25-9.27
6x6 Rear Caliper Service ......................... 9.28-9.30
Dual Hydraulic Caliper Operation .................. 9.30a-b
Troubleshooting ................................. 9.31
Front Brake Caliper
All 1996 to Current Models/1997 Rear caliper 6x6
Item Standard
Brake Pad Thickness .275" / 7.0mm
Caliper Piston Bore 1.0. 1.191-1.192" / 30.252-30.277mm
Caliper Piston 0.0. 1.186-1.1875" / 30.125-30.163mm
Brake Disc Thickness .150-.164/1 / 3.81 0-4.166mm
Brake Disc Thickness Variance Between -
Measurements
Brake Disc Runout -
Output Shaft Brake Caliper
All 1996 to Current Models
Item Standard
Caliper Piston Bore 1.0. 1.003-1.004" 125.476-25.502mm
Caliper Piston 0.0. .9970
N
.9985" / 25.324-25.362mm
Brake Disc Thickness .177-.187" /4.496-4.750mm
Measurements
Brake Disc Runout -
Rear Axle Brake Caliper
1996 6X6 Models
Item Standard
Caliper Piston Bore 1.0. 1 .745-1 .746" / 44.32 -44.35mm
Caliper Piston 0.0. 1.740" / 44.20mm
Brake Disc Thickness .177 -.187" /4.496-4.750mm
Measurements
Brake Disc Runout -
9.1
BRAKES
Specifications
Service Limit
.150"/3.81mm
1.193/1
1.1855"
.140" / 3.556mm
.002" / .051 mm
.020" / .50mm
Service Limit
.150"/3.81mm
1.005"
.9965
.167/1 /4.242mm
.002" / .051 mm
.010" / .2Smm
Service Limit
.150" / 3.81 mm
1.748" / 44.40
1.739/44.17
.167" I 4.242mm
.002" / .051 mm
.010" / .25mm
10/96
BRAKES
Specifications
Type Application
III
All 1996 (L.H.) Except:
Trail Blazer ES, Sport, and
Scrambler
IV 1996
Trail Blazer ES, Sport,
Scrambler
All 1997
V
1998 Scrambler 400/500;
1998 Sportsman 500
Hydraulic Auxiliary Brake
VI 19966X6
(Right Hand Side)
Item
Front Caliper Mounting Bolts
Output Shaft Caliper Mounting Bolts
Rear Axle Caliper Mounting Bolts
(6x6) and Dual Hydraulic Rear Axle
Caliper (1998 Scrambler 400/500)
Master Cylinder Mounting Bolts
Master Cylinder Reservoir
Cover Bolt
Brake Line Banjo Bolt
Front Brake Disc
Rear Brake Disc (6x6)
5/98
Master Cylinder
Bore 1.0. Piston Fluid Type Identification
0.0.
.750 .746 Dot 3 Black;
Cast Aluminum Reservoir
.750 .746 Dot 3 Black;
Aluminum Body; Plastic
Reservoir
.500 .496 Dot 3 Auxiliary (Foot) Brake
Remote Reservoir
.625 .621 Dot 3 Black;
Aluminum Body; Plastic
Reservoir
Torque Torque
(ft. Ibs. except where noted*) (kg-m)
18.0 2.48
15.0 2.07
18.0 2.48
*55 in. Ibs. .62
*45 in. Ibs. .52
12.0 1.66
18.0 2.48
24.0
9.2
Typical Hydraulic Brake System
Must be clear to allow ~
proper diaphragm
movement ______
F
A
B
E
BRAKES
Hydraulic Brake System Operation
Compensating port compensates
for temperature changes by allowing
fluid back to master cylinder
C---------
Moveable -1 0--"'"
Brake Pad G
r = - ~ ~
The Polaris brake system consists of the following components or assemblies: brake lever; master cylinder; hy-
draulic hose; brake calipers (slave cylinder); brake pads; and brake discs, which are secured to the drive line.
When the hand activated brake lever (A) is applied it contacts a piston (8) within the master cylinder. As the mas-
ter cylinder piston moves inward it closes a small opening (compensating port) (C) within the cylinder and starts
to build pressure within the brake system. As the pressure within the system is increased, the piston (D) located
in the brake caliper moves outward and applies pressure to the moveable brake pad. This pad contacts the brake
disc and moves the caliper in its floating bracket, pulling the stationary side pad into the brake disc. The resulting
friction reduces brake disc and vehicle speed. As the lever pressure is increased, the braking affect is also in-
creased.
The friction applied to the brake pads will cause the pads to wear. As these pads wear, the piston within the caliper
moves further outward and becomes self adjusting. Fluid from the reservoir fills the additional area created when
the caliper piston moves outward.
Brake fluid level is critical to proper system operation. Too little fluid will allow air to enter the system and cause
the brakes to feel spongy. Too much fluid could cause brakes to drag due to fluid expansion.
Located within the master cylinder is the compensating port (C) which is opened and closed by the master cylinder
piston assembly. The port is open when the lever is released and the master cylinder piston is outward. As the
temperature within the hydraulic system changes, this port compensates for fluid expansion (heated fluid) or con-
traction (cooled fluid). During system service, be sure this port is open. Due to the high temperatures created
within the system during heavy braking, it is very important that the master cylinder reservoir have adequate space
to allow for fluid expansion. Never overfill the reservoir! Fill to 1/4" - 5/16" (.64 - .80 cm) from top of the cylinder.
This system also incorporates a diaphragm (E) as part of the cover gasket; and a vent port (F) located between
the gasket and the cover. The combination diaphragm and vent allow for the air above the fluid to equalize pres-
sure as the fluid expands or contracts. Make sure the vent is open and allowed to function. If the reservoir is
over filled or the diaphragm vent is plugged the expanding fluid may build pressure in the brake system leading
to brake failure.
When servicing Polaris ATV brake systems use only Polaris DOT 3 high temperature brake fluid (PN 2870990).
Polaris brake fluid is sold in 5.5 oz. bottles. WARNING: Once a bottle is opened, use what is necessary and
discard the rest in accordance with local laws. Do not store or use a partial bottle of brake fluid. Brake fluid is
hygroscopic, meaning it rapidly absorbs moisture from the air. This causes the boiling temperature of the brake
fluid to drop, which can lead to early brake fade and the possibility of serious injury.
9.3 7/96
BRAKES
Fluid Replacement/Bleeding Procedure
NOTE: When bleeding the brakes or replacing the fluid always start with the furthest caliper from the master
cylinder.
Always wear safety glasses.
Brake fluid will damage finished surfaces. Do not allow brake fluid to come in contact with finished surfaces.
Brake Bleeding - Fluid Change
This procedure should be used to change fluid or bleed brakes during regular maintenance.
1 . Clean reservoir cover thoroughly.
2. Remove screws, cover, and diaphragm from
reservoir.
3. Inspect vent slots (A) in cover and remove any
debris or blockage.
4. If changing fluid, remove fluid from reservoir with a
Mity Vac pump or similar tool.
NOTE: Do not remove brake lever when reservoir fluid
level is low.
5. Add brake fluid to within 1 /4-5/16" (6 - 8 mm) of
reservoir top.
6. Install a box end wrench on caliper bleeder screw
fitting. Attach a clean, clear hose to fitting and place
the other end in a clean container. Be sure the hose
fits tightly on fitting.
NOTE:Fluid may be forced from compensation port (B)
when brake lever is pumped. Place diaphragm (C) in
reservoir to prevent spills. Do not install cover.
7/96
9.4
C
o
Brake Bleeding - Fluid Change Cont.
7. Slowly pump lever (D) until pressure builds and holds.
8. While maintaining lever pressure, open bleeder
screw. Close bleeder screw and release brake lever.
NOTE: Do not release lever before bleeder screw is
tight or air may be drawn into caliper.
9. Repeat prncedure until clean fluid appears in bleeder
hose and all air has been purged. Add fluid as
necessary to maintain level in reservoir.
Maintain at least 1/2" (1.27 cm) of brake fluid in the reser-
voir to prevent air from entering the master cylinder.
10. Tighten bleeder screw securely and remove bleeder
hose.
11. Repeat procedure steps 5-9 for the front right caliper.
12. Repeat procedure steps 5-9 for the front left caliper.
13. Add brake fluid to the proper level.
14. Install diaphragm, cover, and screws. Tighten screws
to specification.
15. Field test machine at low speed before putting into
service. Check for proper braking action and lever
reserve. With lever firmly applied, lever reserve
should be no less than 1/21/ (1 .3 cm) from handlebar.
16. Check brake system for fluid leaks.
9.5
BRAKES
Fluid Replacement/Bleeding Procedure
7/96
BRAKES
Front Pad Replacement
Front Pad Removal
1. Elevate and support front of machine.
Use care when supporting vehicle so that it does not tip or
fall. Severe injury may occur if machine tips or falls.
2. Remove the front wheel and take pad adjuster
screw out.
3. Remove caliper.
4. Push caliper piston into caliper bore slowly using a
C-clamp or locking pliers with pads installed.
NOTE:Brake fluid will be forced through compensating
port into master cylinder fluid reservoir when piston is
pushed back into caliper. Remove excess fluid from
reservoir as required.
6. Push upper pad retainer pin inward and slip outer
brake pad past edge. Remove inner pad.
6. Measure the thickness of the pad material.
Replace pads if worn beyond the service limit.
7/96
9.6
Measure
Thickness
Front Pad Removal Cont.
7. Remove mounting bracket and pin assembly.
8. Remove dust boots.
9. Clean and inspect pins. They must be free of rust
or corrosion. Replace boots.
Inspection
1. Visually inspect the brake disc for nicks,
scratches, or damage.
2. Measure the disc thickness at 8 different points
around the pad contact surface using a O ~ 1 "
micrometer. Replace disc if worn beyond service
limit.
3. Mount dial indicator as shown to measure disc
runout. Slowly rotate the disc and read total
runout on the dial indicator. Replace the disc if
runout exceeds specifications.
9.7
BRAKES
7/96
BRAKES
Assembly
1. Lubricate mounting bracket pins with a light film of
Polaris Premium All Seasons Grease, and install rubber
dust seal boots.
2. Compress mounting bracket and make sure dust seals
are fully seated. Install pads with friction material facing
each other. Be sure pads and disc are free of dirt or
grease.
3. Install caliper on hub strut, and torque mounting bolts.
4. Slowly pump the brake lever until pressure has been
built up. Maintain at least 1/2" (12.7 mm) of brake fluid
in the reservoir to prevent air from entering the brake
system.
5. Install the adjuster screw and turn until stationary pad
contacts disc, then back off 1/2 turn.
7/96
9.8
Polaris Industries Inc.'
Assembly Cont.
6. Install wheels and torque wheel nuts.
7. It is recommended that a burnishing procedure be
performed after installation of new brake pads to extend
service life and reduce noise. Start machine and slowly
increase speed to 30 mph, gradually apply brakes to
stop machine. Repeat procedure 10 times.
9.9
BRAKES
7/96
BRAKES
Output Shaft Brake Pad Replacement! Adjustment
Removal
1. Remove fenders, guards, footrests, etc. as
required to gain access to caliper mounting bolts.
2. Disconnect the auxiliary brake lever linkage rod.
3. Remove caliper.
NOTE: When removing caliper, be careful not to dam-
age brake line. Support caliper so as not to kink or bend
brake line.
4. Push caliper piston into caliper bore slowly with
C-clamp or locking pliers with pads installed.
NOTE: Brake fluid will be forced through compensating
5. Using a pair of needle nose pliers, slide pad
retaining pins out rear of caliper. Press the pads
against the anti-rattle spring to make it easier to
remove the pins.
6. Clean pad retainer pins with a wire brush.
7. Clean the caliper wI brake cleaner or alcohol.
7/96
9.10
Measure
Thickness
BRAKES
Inspection
1. Visually inspect disc for scoring, scratches, or
gouges. Replace the disc if any deep scratches are
evident.
2. Use a 0-1/1 micrometer and measure disc thickness
at 8 different points around perimeter of disc.
Replace disc if worn beyond service limit.
3. Mount dial indicator and measure disc runout.
Replace the disc if runout exceeds specifications.
9.11 7/96
BRAKES
Assembly
1. Install new pads in caliper body. Make sure pins
slide freely into body. Do Not Force. Press the
pads against the anti-rattle spring to make it easier
to install the pins.
2. Install caliper and torque mounting bolts.
built up. Maintain at least 1/2/1 (12.7 mm) of brake fluid
in the reservoir to prevent air from entering the master
cylinder.
increase speed to 30 mph, gradually apply brakes to stop
machine. Repeat procedure 10 times.
7/96
9.12
Removal
1. Clean caliper area before removing pads. Using a dull,
flat instrument between the old pads and brake disc,
slowly pry back the pads to push caliper piston into bore.
Be careful not to damage brake disc.
NOTE:Brake fluid will be forced through compensating
2. Remove brake pad retaining pin. Do not open pin farther
than is necessary to remove the pin or pin tension may be
lost.
4. Clean disc and caliper with brake cleaner or alcohol.
9.13
BRAKES
6x6 Rear Brake Pad Replacement
7/96
BRAKES
6x6 Rear Brake Pad Replacement
Inspection
1. Visually inspect disc for scoring, scratches, or
gouges. Replace the disc if any deep scratches are
evident.
2. Use a 0-1" micrometer and measure disc thickness
at 8 different pOints around perimeter of disc.
Replace disc if worn beyond service limit.
3. Mount dial indicator and measure disc runout.
Replace the disc if runout exceeds specifications.
7/96
9.14
BRAKES
6x6 Middle Axle Brake Pad Replacement
Assembly
1. Install brake pads in caliper body so they are facing each
other. Hold brake pads in place and install retaining pin.
built up. Maintain at least 1/2" (12.7 mm) of brake fluid
in the reservoir to prevent air from entering the brake
system.
increase speed to 30 mph, gradually apply brakes to stop
machine. Repeat procedure 10 times.
9.15 7/96
BRAKES
Master Cyl i nder
1. Clean master cylinder and reservoir assembly. Make
sure you have a clean work area to disassemble
caliper.
2. Loosen brake line 114 to 1/2 turn. On models with
banjo bolt, remove bolt and sealing washers.
Do not rotate line any further at this time or damage may
result. Brake fluid will damage finished surfaces. Do not
allow brake fluid to come in contact with finished surfaces.
3. Remove master cylinder from handlebars.
4. Place shop towels beneath master cylinder to protect
painted surfaces. Hold brake line upright and continue
to remove master cylinder. Cover brake line to avoid
spillage.
5. Remove cover and diaphragm from master cylinder
and dispose of the fluid properly.
6. Be sure vents in cover are clean and unobstructed.
7. Remove brake lever.
7/96
9.16
Disassembly Cant. (Typical)
8. Remove reservoir screws and reservoir.
9. Inspect reservoir seal and replace if worn or damaged.
Clean surfaces of the reservoir and master cylinder
body. Be sure compensating (A) and supply (B) ports
are clean before reassembly.
10. Remove outer dust seal. Be ready to catch piston
assembly. NOTE: The return spring will force piston
out when dust seal has been removed.
11. Remove piston, return spring, and washer from
master cylinder. Remove primary and secondary
seals from piston and discard.
12. Clean seal grooves thoroughly to remove all residue.
Do not use a sharp instrument or grooves in piston
may be damaged.
9.17
BRAKES
Master Cylinder
7/96
BRAKES
Master Cylinder
Inspection (Typical)
1. Clean the master cylinder assembly with clean Dot 3
brake fluid, brake parts cleaner, or alcohol. Dry
thoroughly. Inspect the bore for nicks, scratches or
wear. Measure master cylinder bore size and
compare to specifications on page 9.1 Replace if
damage is evident or if worn beyond service limit.
2. Measure piston diameter in several locations and
compare to specifications on page 9.1. Replace if
damage is evident or if worn beyond service limit.
3. Inspect parking brake for wear. If teeth are worn,
replace lever.
Assembly (Typical)
1. Install new primary and secondary seals on the piston.
2. Install washer into master cylinder bore (where
applicable). Select the appropriate master cylinder
piston installation tool (see page 9.2 for master
cylinder type) and insert into master cylinder bore. A
typical installation tool is shown at right.
5/98
lristallationToolP1N
Typemg87()962
l'ypeJV 2200879
TYReV .................. 2 ~ Q 9 8 . 8 Q
(Hydra:UlicAuxiliary B{ake)
9.18
Assembly (Typical)
3. Dip piston in clean DOT 3 brake fluid, attach spring to
piston, and install assembly into installation tool.
Do not attempt to install the piston without the required
installation tool. Do not allow the lip of the seals to turn in-
side out or fold.
4. Push the piston assembly through the installation tool
sleeve using the plunger handle (included with
installation tool kit). Continue pushing until plunger is
solid against installation tool. Both tools can now be
removed.
5. Hold piston assembly inward, and install a new dust
seal. Be sure dust seal is completely seated in the
groove.
NOTE: The Piston assembly should spring back against
the seal when compressed.
6. Install reservoir with new seal. Be careful to install and
torque screws evenly.
7. Apply a light film of grease to the lever bolt. Install
lever and tighten bolt securely.
8. Install parking brake lever assembly.
9.19
BRAKES
Master Cyl i nder
7/96
BRAKES
Master Cyl i nder
NOTE: To speed up the brake bleeding procedure the master cylinder can be purged of air before it is installed
on the brake line. Fill with DOT3 brake fluid and pump lever slowly two to three times with finger over the outlet
end to purge master cylinder of air.
1. Install master cylinder on brake line hand tight.
2. Install master cylinder on handlebars, torquing
mounting bolts to 55 in. Ibs. (.62 Kg-m).
3. Using a line wrench, tighten brake line an additional
112 turn.
4. On models with banjo bolt, replace sealing washers
and torque bolt to specification.
5. Fill reservoir with DOT 3 fluid.
6. Follow bleeding procedure on page 9.4.
7/96
9.20
Disassembly
1. Clean and support front of machine.
Use care when supporting vehicle so that it does not tip or
fall. Severe injury may occur if machine tips or falls.
2. Remove front wheel.
3. Using a line wrench, loosen and remove brake line to
caliper. Place a container under caliper to catch fluid
draining from brake line.
4. Remove brake pad adjuster screw.
S. Remove caliper.
6. Push upper pad retainer pin inward and slip brake
pads past edge.
9.21
BRAKES
Front Caliper
7/96
BRAKES
Front Caliper
Disassembly Cont.
7. Remove mounting bracket, pin assembly and dust
boot.
8. Remove piston, dust seal and piston seal.
9. Clean the caliper body, piston, and retaining bracket
with brake cleaner or alcohol.
NOTE: Be sure to clean seal grooves in caliper body.
Inspection
1. Inspect caliper body for nicks, scratches or wear.
Measure bore size and compare to specifications.
Replace if damage is evident or if worn beyond service
limit.
2. Inspect piston for nicks, scratches, wear or damage.
Measure diameter and replace if damaged or worn
beyond service limit.
3. Inspect the brake disc and pads as outlined for brake
pad replacement this section.
7/96
9.22
Assembly
1. Install new O-rings in the caliper body.
2. Coat piston with clean DOT 3 brake fluid and install in
caliper body.
3. Lubricate the mounting bracket pins with Polaris
Premium All Seasons Grease, and install the rubber
dust seal boots.
4. Compress the mounting bracket and make sure the
dust seals are fully seated. Install the pads as shown.
Clean the disc and pads with brake parts cleaner or
alcohol to remove any dirt, oil or grease.
Installation
1. Install caliper on hub strut, and torque mounting bolts.
9.23
BRAKES
Front Caliper
7/96
BRAKES
Front Caliper
Installation Cont.
2. Install brake line and tighten securely with a line
wrench.
3. Install the adjuster screw and turn until stationary pad
contacts disc, then back off 112 turn.
4. Follow brake bleeding procedure outlined on page
9.4.
5. Install wheels and torque wheel nuts to specification.
NOTE: If new brake pads are installed, it is recommended
that a burnishing procedure be performed to extend pad ser-
vice life and reduce noise. Start machine and slowly in-
crease speed to 30 mph, gradually apply brakes to stop ma-
chine. Repeat procedure 10 times.
7/96
9.24
BRAKES
Output Shaft Caliper Service (Auxiliary Brake)
Disassembly
1 . Make alignment marks on stationary ramp and caliper
housing as shown in 111.1.
2. Remove cotter pin and washer from actuator rod at
brake arm.
3. Remove stationary ramp attaching screws (C).
4. Remove ramp assembly (D). It is not necessary to
remove auxiliary brake arm unless brake arm or piston
pin are being replaced. NOTE: To remove auxiliary
brake arm or pin, turn the adjuster screw clockwise with
a 3/16/1 Allen wrench until the piston pin falls out. To
remove brake arm, insert a deep well socket into
moveable cam to hold lock nut while backing out the
adjuster screw.
5. Apply downward pressure on brake pads directly over
retaining pin, releasing pin pressure. Shake pin out of
caliper or use a needle nose pliers to remove pin.
NOTE: If pins are corroded it may be necessary to
spray penetrating oil on pins.
6. Remove pins and brake pads.
7. Insert a drift punch in piston pin hole and tap with a soft
face hammer. This will drive out the caliper piston. See
III. 3.
8. By hand, walk caliper piston back and forth until it can
be pulled out of caliper or remove with a caliper piston
pliers (internal expanding).
9. Straighten a large paper clip and form a small hook on
one end. Polish the end of the Clip so there are no sharp
edges. CAUTION: Extreme care must be used to
avoid scratching the cylinder bore seal ring groove
surfaces.
10. Position clip in cylinder bore. With a pushing, twisting
action remove large inside seal and small outer dust
seal and two small O-ring seals from brake caliper pin
hole.
11. Important: Flush cylinder bore with brake fluid and
clean with compressed air.
Inspection
1. Inspect cylinder bore for scoring, pitting, or corrosion. A
corroded or scored casting should be replaced; light
scores and stains may be removed by polishing. Polish
any discolored or stained area with crocus cloth only.
CAUTION: If you are cleaning the cylinder bore, use
finger pressure and rotate the cloth. Do not slide the
cloth in or out of bore while applying pressure as
scratches may result. Do not use any other type of
abrasive or abrasive cloth.
2. Inspect piston.
9.25
Suggested area
to make align-
ment marks
III. 1
III. 2
III. 3
III. 4
Insert Drift
Punch
Adjuster
Screw
Auxiliary
Brake
Arm
7/96
BRAKES
Reassembly
NOTE: Clean and inspect all components before reas-
sembling.
1. Lubricate new O-rings (A) with brake fluid and
install into caliper pin bore.
2. Lubricate new seals (B) with brake fluid and install
into caliper.
3. If piston pin or axillary brake arm were removed,
lubricate all sliding surfaces of stationary and
moveable brake ramps with a thin coat of Polaris
high temp grease.
4. Align mark of stationary and moveable cam so long
side of lobe is in the up position and just to the right
of mark on stationary. Alignment marks must be
matched and cam positioned correctly, as there
are six possible combinations.
5. Reassemble adjuster screw through arm and
moveable cam. Install washer on screw inside of
cam. Reinstall lock nut and tighten until seated,
then turn an additional 112 turn tighter.
6. Using a new gasket, assemble ramp to brake
caliper. NOTE: Align marks of stationary and
caliper made in step 1. Torque bolts to 5-6 ft. Ibs.
7. Hold caliper so that the brake line fitting hole can be
covered with your finger. Close bleeder fitting and
add approximately 114 ounce of brake fluid to
piston bore. CAUTION: Brake fluid will cause
damage to painted surfaces. Wipe up any spills at
once.
8. Lubricate piston with brake fluid and install in
caliper piston bore, flat beveled end first.
Suggested area
to make align-
ment marks
Long Side
of Moveable
Ramp Lobe
Stationary
Ramp
9. Compress piston until seated in caliper and wipe off excess brake fluid from piston area.
10. Attach brake line to caliper assembly and tighten fitting with a flare nut wrench. CAUTION: Brake fluid will
cause damage to painted surfaces. Wipe up any spills at once.
11. Reinstall spring plate, brake pads and pad pins to caliper.
12. Pump the handle 10 to 15 times to purge any fluid which may have accumulated between the seals during
assembly.
13. Thoroughly wipe the piston and caliper dry.
14. Pressurize the brake system for approximately one minute. NOTE: The parking brake may be used to hold
the pressure.
15. Check for "low pressure" leaks by lightly pumping the handle 5 to 10 times.
16. Compress piston into caliper until seated.
NOTE: The brake pads will need to be spread enough to accept the brake disc when reinstalling the caliper as-
sembly.
7/96
9.26
BRAKES
Installation
1 . Reinstall caliper assembly onto brake
disc.
2. Install upper and lower caliper bolts,
lock washers, and flat washers (G) to
caliper shield (H) and secure caliper
assembly to its mounting.
3. Torque caliper mount bolts to
specification.
4. Install pedal rod on brake arm with
existing washer and a new cotter key.
5. Adjust foot pedal at 1/2" to 3/4/1 (12.7-
19.05 mm) travel of the pedal by turning
adjuster screw clockwise.
6. (4 x 4 Models) Reinstall the middle
chain guard (D) with rear most bolt,
lock washer, flat washer (A) and spacer
(B). Bolt the forward end of chain guard
to the mounting brackets with
hardware (C).
7. Reinstall right front and rear mud flap bolt in
footrest.
8. Refill master cylinder with DOT 3 brake fluid and
reinstall cover and diaphragm.
9. Refer to brake bleeding instructions in this chapter
and bleed system.
10. Field test unit for proper braking action before putting
into service. Inspect for fluid leaks and firm brakes.
Make sure the brake is not dragging when
lever/pedal is released. If the brake drags, re-check
assembly, installation and adjustment.
11. Machine should be stopped at least ten (10) times
from at least 30 miles per hour using the auxiliary
brake pedal only.
9.27 7/96
BRAKES
6x6 Rear Caliper
Removal
1. Clean caliper area before removal.
2. Using a flare nut wrench, remove brake line. Place a
container to catch brake fluid draining from brake line.
3. Remove caliper.
4. Remove brake pad retaining pin.
NOTE: This is a spring pin, do not spread apart farther than
necessary to remove it.
5. Separate caliper halves and remove pistons with piston
pliers.
NOTE: The 6 x 6 rear caliper pistons can be removed without
separating the caliper halves. Slowly pump brake lever to
force pistons out of caliper.
6. Remove O-ring and clean O-ring groove.
7. Clean disc, caliper body, and pistons with brake cleaner
or alcohol.
Inspection
1. Visually inspect the brake disc and replace if cracked,
deeply scored, or damaged.
2. Measure brake disc thickness at 8 different points
around perimeter of disc. If thickness varies more than
the service limit, replace disc.
7/96
9.28
Inspection Cont.
3. Mount a dial indicator so indicator is measuring the disc
runout as shown. Replace the disc if runout exceeds
specified service limit.
4. Measure total thickness of brake pad. Replace brake
pads if worn beyond the service limit.
5. Inspect caliper piston bore for scratches, severe
corrosion, or galling and replace if necessary. Measure
bore with a telescoping gauge or an inside micrometer,
and replace caliper if worn beyond service limit.
6. Inspect surface of caliper piston for nicks, scratches, or
damage and replace if necessary. Measure diameter of
piston and replace if worn beyond service limit.
9.29
BRAKES
6x6 Rear Caliper
7/96
BRAKES
6x6 Rear Caliper
Assembly
1. Install new O-ring in caliper body. Apply brake fluid to
pistons and install until fully seated. Be sure O-ring
groove is thoroughly cleaned of all residue or piston may
bind in bore.
2. Install new O-ring between caliper halves.
3. Carefully assemble caliper body making sure O-ring is
properly positioned in groove. Torque body screws
evenly to 18 ft. Ibs.
4. Install brake pads in caliper body with friction material
facing each other. Install retaining pin.
5. Install caliper and torque mounting bolts.
6. Install brake line and tighten with a flare nut wrench.
7. Follow bleeding procedure outlined on page 9.4 of this
section.
8. Field test unit for proper braking action before putting into
. service. Inspect for fluid leaks and firm brakes. Make
sure the brake is not dragging when lever is released. If
the brake drags, re-check assembly and installation.
7196
9.30
BRAKES
Dual Hydraulic Brake Caliper
Dual Hydraulic Caliper Bleeding
The new Dual Hydraulic or "DH" rear brake caliper is used on the 1998 Sportsman 500 and 1998 Scrambler 400 and 500.
This caliper is a dual opposed piston design, with two independent hydraulic systems contained in the same caliper body
(see 111.1). The caliper pistons are T-shaped, which allows both hand and foot brake to use the same caliper piston, but
remain separated by seals. The hand brake system applies hydraulic pressure to both front calipers and only the outer diam-
eter of the rear caliper pistons. The auxiliary (foot) brake applies pressure to the inner portion of the rear caliper pistons.
Because the hand and foot brake hydraulic systems are separate, there are also two bleed screws - one for the outer fluid
chamber (hand brake), and one for the inner fluid chamber (foot brake). The basic procedure for bleeding the brake
system is the same as outlined on page 9.4 - 9.5, however, each system must be bled separately.
Hydraulic Auxiliary Brake inspection and adjustment is outlined on page 9.30b.
Foot Brake
Bleed Screw
Foot
Brake Line
TOP VIEW Hand Brake Bleed
Fitting
/'
Sealing "0" Rings
':. ':. ~ -------."
II
" ,I
.1
.:
I.
'!.J
Piston
Seals
Bleeder (Hand Brake) positioned
higher on caliper)
Brake Pedal (Foot
Line in from
hand brake
master cylinder
III. 1 III. 2
Cutaway View Of DB Caliper
NOTE: Caliper style and location of brake lines and bleeder screws may differ
Upper bleed screw and brake line (A) is for hand brake system.
Lower bleed screw and brake line (B) is for auxiliary (foot) brake
system.
9.30a
Scrambler Style DH Caliper
5/98
BRAKES
Dual Hydraulic Brake Caliper
Auxiliary Brake Adjustment (Hydraulic)
Use the following procedure to inspect the auxiliary (foot)
brake system and adjust or bleed if necessary.
1. First check foot brake effectiveness by applying a
50 lb. (approx.) downward force on the pedal. The
top of the pedal should be at least 1, (25.4mm)
above the surface of the footrest (see III. 1). If less
than one inch, two things need to be examined:
Free Play:
118/1 to 114"
Ill. 1
Free play of the brake pedal should be 1/8 ~ 114 inch (3.2 ~ 6.35 mm).
Floorboard
Free play is adjusted by altering the length of the link connected to the brake pedal (the link is located behind the
footrest).
To adjust, remove the cotter pin and clevis pin at the brake pedal. Loosen clevis adjuster lock
nut. To increase free play, shorten the link. To decrease free play, lengthen the link. Install the clevis on
the brake pedal and secure with a new cotter pin.
Bleeding:
If the free play is correct, then air is trapped somewhere in the system. Bleeding the auxiliary brake system is
accomplished in a conventional manner, except that there are two brake lines and bleeder screws on the Dual
Hydraulic caliper. Refer to page 9.30a for theory of operation and page 9.4 - 9.5 for bleeding procedure.
5/98
9.30b
Brakes Squeal
Dirty/contaminated friction pads
Improper alignment
Worn disc
Worn disc splines
Poor Brake Performance
Air in system
Water in system (brake fluid contaminated)
Caliper/disc misaligned
Caliper dirty or damaged
Brake line damaged or lining ruptured
Worn disc and/or friction pads
Incorrectly adjusted lever
Incorrectly adjusted stationary pad
Worn or damaged master cylinder or components
Improper clearance between lever and switch
Lever Vibration
Disc damaged
Disc worn (runout or thickness variance exceeds service limit)
Caliper Overheats (Brakes Drag)
Compensating port plugged
Pad clearance set incorrectly
Auxiliary brake pedal incorrectly adjusted
Brake lever or pedal binding or unable to return fully
Parking brake left on
Residue build up under caliper seals
Operator riding brakes
Brakes Lock
Alignment of caliper to disc.
9.31
BRAKES
Troubleshooting
7/96
CHAPTER 10
ELECTRICAL
Special Tools .................................... 10.1
Alternator/Ignition Specifications .................. 10.2-1 0.2b
Stator Resistance Specifications, 1996 ............. 10.3
Stator Resistance Specifications, 1997 ............. 10.3a
Flywheel Identification ............................ 10.3b
Headlamp Service, Gen II ........................ 10.4-10.5
Headlamp Service, Gen III ........................ 10.6-10.7
Headlamp Service, Gen IV ........................ 10.8
Indicator Lamp Service ........................... 10.9
Timing Check Procedures ........................ 10.10
Typical Ignition Timing Curves ..................... 10.11
Crankshaft Degree to Piston Position Conversion .... 10.12
Alternator, Exploded Views ....................... 10.13-10.16
Ignition System Testing ........................... 10.17-10.18
Ignition System Troubleshooting ................... 10.19
Battery Service .................................. 10.20-10.23
Charging System Testing ......................... 10.24-10.25
Starter System Troubleshooting ................... 10.26
Starter System Testing ........................... 10.27
Starter Motor Removal ........................... 10.28
Starter Motor Disassembly ........................ 10.28-10.29
Brush Inspection/Replacement .................... 10.29
Armature Testing ................................ 10.30
Starter Assembly ................................ 10.30
Starter Motor Installation (EC38PL) ................ 10.30a
Starter Drive .................................... 10.31
Speed Limiter System / LR Module Identification ..... 10.32
Speed Limiter / ETC System Theory ............... 10.33
Speed Limiter System Testing ..................... 10.34
All Wheel Drive System .......................... 10.35-10.37
Switch Testing ................................... 10.38-10.41
Component Location Photos ...................... 10.42
Wiring Diagrams, 1996 ........................... 10.43-10.48
Wiring Diagrams, 1997 ........................... 10.49-10.57
Wiring Diagrams, 1998 ........................... 10.58-10.67
Special Tools
See page 1.18 for tool ordering information.
Tektronix DMM 155 Digital Multi-Meter . . . . .. PN 2870659
Strobe Timing Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. PN 2870630
Hydrometer .............................. PN 2870836
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. PN 8712100 or
PN 8712500
10.1
ELECTRICAL
Special Tools
10/96
ELECTRICAL
Specifications
1996 Electrical Specifications
Alternator/Ignition
Machine Engine Alternator
Model Model Output
(Watts)
Trail Blazer E.S. EC25PFE-09 150
Trail Boss 250 EC25PFE-OS 150
Xpress 300 EC2SPFE-01 150
Xplorer 300 EC2SPFE-01 150
Sport 400L EC38PLE-05 150
Scrambler 4x4 EC38PLE-05 150
Xpress 400L EC3SPLE-04 200
Xplorer 400L EC3SPLE-04 200
Sportsman 4x4 EC3SPLE-04 200
Big Boss 6x6 EC38PLE-04 200
400L
Magnum 2x4 EH42PLE-01 200
Magnum 6x6
Sportsman 500 EH50PLE-01 200
Headlamp Flywheel
(Watts) 1.0.**
Cast Mark
(1.0. Stamp)
12V 55W FF45
(64)
12V 60/60W FF45
(64)
(2) FF95
12V 30/30W (4574)
(2) FF95
12V 30/30W (4574)
12V 55W FF95
(4576)
12V 60W FF95
(4576)
12V 60/55W FF95
(04)
12V 60W FF95
(2) 37.5W (04)
12V 60W FF95
(2) 37.5W (04)
12V 60W FF95
(2) 37.5W (04)
12V 60/60W FF95
(02)
12V 60W FF95
(2) 37.5W (02)
12V 60W FF95
(2) 37.5W (02)
COl Box Ignition Spark Spark
1.0. Timing* Plug Plug
Degrees Type Gap
BTOC (InJmm)
CU2167 25 @ NGK .02S/.7
3000 BRSES
CU2167 25 @ NGK .02S/.7
3000 BRSES
CU2513 25 @ NGK .02S/.7
3000 BRSES
CU2513 25 @ NGK .028/.7
3000 BRSES
CU2515 23.5 @ NGK .02S/.7
3000 BRSES
CU2515 23.5 @ NGK .02S/.7
3000 BRSES
CU2510 23.5 @ NGK .028/.7
3000 BRSES
CU2510 23.5 @ NGK .02S/.7
3000 BRSES
CU2510 23.5 @ NGK .028/.7
3000 BR8ES
CU2510 23.5 @ NGK .02S/.7
3000 BRSES
CU2535 30 @ NGK .0251.6
3500 BKR5ES
CU2535 30 @ NGK .025/.6
3500 BKR5ES
CU2535 30 @ NGK .025/.6
3500 BKR5ES
* Ignition timing must be inspected with engine at room temperature (68F / 20C) and at proper RPM. See page
10.12 for degrees-to-piston position (BTOC) conversion chart.
** Refer to Flywheel Identification on page 10.3b.
Typical COl Module Shown
Identifiction "CU" number is located at "A".
12/97
10.2
Alternator/Ignition
Machine Engine Alternator
Model Model Output
(Watts)
Trail Blazer EC25PFE-09 150
Trail Boss EC25PFE-08 150
Xpress 300 EC28PFE-01 150
Xplorer 300 EC28PFE-01 150
Sport EC38PLE-07 150
Scrambler 400L EC38PLE-07 150
Xpress 400L EC38PLE-06 200
Xplorer 400L EC38PLE-06 200
Sportsman 400 EC3BPLE-06 200
400L 6x6 EC38PLE-06 200
Xplorer 500 EH50PLE-01 200
Sportsman 500 EH50PLE-01 200
Scrambler 500 EH50PLE-02 250
Headlamp Flywheel
(Watts) 1.0.**
Cast Mark
(1.0. Stamp)
12V 55W FF45
(64)
12V 60/60W FF45
(64)
(2) FF95
12V 30/30W (4574)
(2) FF95
12V 30/30W (4574)
12V 55W FF95
(4576)
(2) FF95
12V 30/30W (4576)
12V 60/55W FF95
(04)
12V 60W FF95
(2) 12V 30/30W (04)
12V 60W FF95
(2) 12V 30/30W (04)
12V 60W FF95
(2) 12V 30/30W (04)
12V 60/60W FF95
(02)
12V 60W FF95
(2)12V 30/30W (02)
12V 60W FF95
(2) 12V 30/30W (02)
(2) FF95
12V 30/30W (02)
12V 60W FF95
(2)12V 30/30W (02)
12V 3 0/3 OW FF97
(06)
COl Box Ignition
1.0. Timing*
Degrees
BTOC
CU2167 25 @
3000
CU2167 25 @
3000
CU2513 25 @
3000
CU2513 25 @
3000
CU2515 23.5 @
3000
CU2515 23.5 @
3000
CU2510 23.5 @
3000
CU2510 23.5 @
3000
CU2510 23.5 @
3000
CU2510 23.5 @
3000
CU2544 30 @
3500
CU2544 30 @
3500
CU2544 30
0
@
3500
CU2535 30 @
3500
CU2535 30 @
3500
CU2544 30 @
3500
ELECTRICAL
Specifications
Spark Spark
Plug Plug
Type Gap
(In.lmm)
NGK .028/.7
BR8ES
NGK .028/.7
BR8ES
NGK .028/.7
BRBES
NGK .028/.7
BRBES
NGK .028/.7
BR8ES
NGK .02B/.7
BR8ES
NGK .028/.7
BR8ES
NGK .028/.7
BR8ES
NGK .028/.7
BR8ES
NGK .028/.7
BR8ES
NGK .025/.6
BKR5ES
NGK .025/.6
BKR5ES
NGK .025/.6
BKR5ES
NGK .025/.6
BKR5ES
NGK .025/.6
BKR5ES
NGK .025/.6
BKR5ES
*Ignition timing must be inspected with engine at room temperature (68F / 20C) and at proper RPM. See page
10.12 for piston position chart.
Typical COl Module Shown
A
10.2a 12197
ELECTRICAL
Specifications
Alternator/Ignition
Machine Engine Alterna-
Model Model tor
Output
(Watts)
Trail Boss EC-25PFE-10 150
Trail Blazer EC-25PFE-11 150
Xpress 300 EC-28PFE-02 150
Xplorer 300 EC-28PFE-02 150
Sport 400 EC38PLE-07 150
Scrambler 400 EC38PLE-09 150
Xplorer 400 EC38PLE-06 200
Magnum 2x4 EH-42PLE-02 200
Magnum 4x4 EH-42PLE-02 200
Scrambler 500 EH-50PLE-04 250
Sportsman 500 EH-50PLE-07 250
Big Boss 500 EH-50PLE-06 250
6x6
Headlamp Flywheel
(Watts) 1.0.**
Cast Mark
(1.0. Stamp)
12V 60/60W FF45
(64)
12V 55W FF45
(64)
(2) FF95
12V 30/30W (4574)
(2) FF95
12V 30/30W (4574)
12V 55W FF95
(4576)
(2) FF95
12V 30/30W (4576)
12V 60W FF95
(2)12V 27W (04)
12V 60/60W FF95
(02)
12V 60W FF95
(2)12V 27W (02)
(2) FF97
12V 30/30W (06)
12V 60W FF97
(2)12V 27W (06)
12V 60W FF97
(2)12V 27W (06)
COl Box Ignition Spark Spark
1.0. Timing* Plug Plug
Degrees Type Gap
BTDC (InJmm)
CU2167 25 @ NGK .028/.7
3000 BR8ES
CU2167 25 @ NGK .028/.7
3000 BR8ES
CU2513 25 @ NGK .028/.7
3000 BR8ES
CU2513 25 @ NGK .028/.7
3000 BR8ES
CU2515 23.5 @ NGK .028/.7
3000 BR8ES
CU2515 23.5 @ NGK .028/.7
3000 BR8ES
CU2510 23.5 @ NGK .028/.7
CU2558 3000 BR8ES
CU2544 30 @ NGK .025/.6
CU2557 3500 BKR5ES
CU2544 30 @ NGK .025/.6
CU2557 3500 BKR5ES
CU2544 30 @ NGK .025/.6
CU2557 3500 BKR5ES
CU2544 30 @ NGK .025/.6
CU2557 3500 BKR5ES
CU2544 30 @ NGK .025/.6
CU2557 3500 BKR5ES
* Ignition timing must be inspected with engine at room temperature (68F / 20C) and at proper RPM. See page
10.12 for degrees-to-piston position (BTDC) conversion chart.
Typical COl Module Shown Below
12/97
10.2b
1996 Stator Resistance Specifications
NOTE: Refer to wiring diagrams for more information.
250 300 400
(150W)
ELECTRICAL
Stator Specifications
400 425/500
(200W) (200W)
RESISTANCE (OHMS)
Exciter (R to Grn) - - - - 3.2
Exciter ........ (SlkiR to Green) - - - - 446
Exciter (SlkiR to R) - 226 450
Exciter (SlkiR to SrnlW) 120 120 120 - -
Pulser (Trigger) (W/R to W) - - - 97 97
Lighting (Y to Y/R) .3 .3 .3 .34 .37
Lighting (Y to Y/Srn) - - - .17 .17
Primary (Coil Tab to Coil Ground) .3 .3 .3 .3 .3
Secondary (Coil Tab to Plug Wire End) 6.3 K 6.3 K 6.3 K 6.3 K 6.3 K
(Spark Plug Cap Re-
moved)
Spark Plug Cap Resistance 3.7 K - - - - - - - - - to - - - - - - - - - - - 6.3 K 5.0 K
Engine Timing @ 3000 RPM 25 25 23.5 23.5 30 (3500
RPM)
Engine Timing @ 6000 RPM 20 17 18 18 -
NOTE: All resistance readings are +/- 20% @ 68 F (20
0
C).
Readings were obtained using a Fluke 73 Digital VOM or Tektronix DMM155. Readings obtained with
other meters may differ.
Battery Type
All batteries are Yuasa YB14A-A2 - Maximum charge rate 1.4 amps
All Tail/Brake Lamps Are 8.26/26.9W
10.3 12/97
ELECTRICAL
Stator Specifications
NOTE: Refer to wiring diagrams for more information.
250 300 400 400 425/500 500
(150W) (200W) (200W) (250W)
RESISTANCE (OHMS)
Exciter (R to Grn) - - - - 3.2 1.6
Exciter ..... , .. (BlklR to Green) - - - - 446 446
Exciter (BlklR to R) - 226 450 450
Exciter (BlklR to Brn/W) 120 120 120 - -
-
Pulser (Trigger) (W/R to W) - - - 97 97 97
Lighting (Y to Y/R) .3 .3 .3 .34 .37 .13
Lighting (Y to Y/Brn) - - - .17 .17
-
Primary (Coil Tab to Coil .3 .3 .3 .3 .3 .3
Ground)
Secondary (Coil Tab to Plug Wire End) 6.3 K 6.3 K 6.3 K 6.3 K 6.3 K 6.3 K
(Spark Plug Cap Re-
moved)
Spark Plug Cap Resistance 3.7 K - - - - - - - - - to - - - - - - - - - - - 6.3 K 5.0 K 5.0 K
Engine Timing @ 3000 RPM 25 25 23.5 23.5 30 (3500 30(3500
RPM) RPM)
Engine Timing @ 6000 RPM 20 17 18 18 - -
NOTE: All resistance readings are +/- 20% @ 68
0
F (20
0
C).
Readings were obtained using a Fluke 73 Digital VOM or Tektronix DMM 155. Readings obtained with
other meters may differ.
Battery Type
All batteries are Yuasa YB14A-A2 - Maximum charge rate 1.4 amps
All Tail/Brake Lamps Are B.26/26.9W
NOTE: Refer to wiring diagrams for stator resistance specifications and more information.
12/97
10.3a
A
Flywheel Identification Stamp Location
ELECTRICAL
Flywheel Identification
B
The flywheel can be identified by the stamp mark in location A or B. Refer to "1.0." location in chart below.
Do not use the cast mark to determine flywheel application.
Type Cast Stamp Comment Application 1.0.
FF4564 FF45 64 EC25 With EC25PFE05, EC25PFE08, EC25PFE09 B
Ring Gear EC25PFE10, EC25PFE11,
FF4568 FF45 68 EC25 W/O EC25PF07, EC25PF09 B
Ring Gear
FF4574 FF95 4574 EC28 EC28PFE01, EC28PFE02, A
FF4576 FF95 4576 EC38150W EC38PLE02,EC38PLE03, EC38PLE05,EC38PLE07, A
EC38PLE09,
FF9502 FF95 02 EH42/50 EH42PLE01,EH42PLE02,EH50PLE01,EH50PLE02 A
200W EH50PLE07,
FF9504 FF95 04 EC38200W EC38PLE01, EC38PLE04, EC38PLE06 A
FF9706 FF97 06 EH42/50 EH50PLE02, EH50PLE04, A
250W
10.3b 12/97
ELECTRICAL
Headlamp Service (Gen II)
Headlight Adjustment (Gen II)
The high beam headlight can be adjusted to any position
desired by turning the four screws at the outer corners of
the lamp housing. Use the following procedure:
1. Place the vehicle on a level surface with the headlight
approximately 25' (7.6 m) from a wall.
2. Measure the distance from the floor to the center of the
headlight and make a mark on the wall.
3. Shift transmission to neutral, start engine and turn
headlight switch to high beam.
4. Observe headlight aim. The most intense part of the
headlight beam should be aimed 2" (5.1 cm) below the
mark placed on the wall in step 2. NOTE: Riderweight
must be included on the seat. For machines with
separate low beam lights, the drop should be 8" (20.3
cm) in 25'.
5. Adjust screws at outer corners of lamp housing to
achieve proper aim.
Headlight Lamp Replacement (Gen II)
.&. WARNING: Due to the nature of ATVs and where
they are ridden, headlight lenses become dirty. Frequent
washing is necessary to maintain lighting quality. Riding
with poor lighting can result in severe injury or death.
1. Remove the seat.
2. Remove the plastic panel surrounding the upper portion
of the gas tank by first removing the gas tank cap.
3. Remove the Phillips screws on either side of the panel
at the junction of this panel, the lower panels, and the
rear of the front fenders.
4. Remove the Phillips screws on either side of the rear of
the upper panel which were revealed by the removal of
the seat.
5. Remove the door on the front of the ATV covering the
radiator cap by turning the fastener one quarter turn.
6. Disengage the tabs at the front of the upper panel where
they snap into the lower panel surrounding the headlight
assembly. Also disengage the tabs on the upper panel
which engage with the lower triangular panels on either
side of the machine. Lift off the upper panel and set it
aside.
7. Reinstall the gas tank cap.
8. Remove the panel surrounding the headlight by remov-
ing the Phillips screws from either side of this panel.
Also remove the two TorxTM screws at the rear of this
panel.
9. Ease the panel forward and up to allow you to reach the
socket connected to the headlight lamp.
7/96
10.4
25' (7.6 m)
Headlight Lamp Replacement (Gen II)
1 a.Carefully unplug the socket from the lamp. Remove the
panel and set it aside.
CAUTION: Do not service while headlight is hot. Serious
burns may result.
11. Stand the panel containing the headlight assembly on
end to allow access to the back of the headlight assem-
bly.
12. Disengage the wire bail holding the headlight lamp in
place and move it out of the way.
13.Grasp the base of the lamp and lift it out.
14. Reverse the previous steps to replace the lamp and
reassemble the panels.
NOTE: Do not touch a halogen lamp with bare fingers. Oil
from your skin leaves a residue, causing a hot spot which
will shorten the life of the lamp. Hold the lamp by the base.
10.5
ELECTRICAL
Headlamp Service - Gen II
7/96
ELECTRICAL
Headlamp Service ... Gen III
Headlight Adjustment (Gen III .. Scrambler, Trail
Blazer E.S. and Sport)
The headlight beam can be adjusted up and down and side
to side.
approximately 25' (7.6 m) from a wall.
headlight and make a mark on the wall at the same height.
3. Start the engine and turn the headlight switch to high
beam.
headlight beam should be aimed 2" (5.1 cm) below the
mark placed on the wall in step 2. NOTE: Rider weight
must be included on the seat.
5. On Scrambler models, loosen nut and bolt securing lamp
to handlebars.
6. Adjust beam to desired position.
7. Tighten nut and bolt.
Adjustment .. Trail Blazer E.S. and Sport
8. adjust beam to desired position by turning adjustment
screws in headlight cover. Turning right screw clockwise
moves the intense spot of light up to the left. Turning the
left screw clockwise moves intense spot of light up to the
right. Turning the bottom screw clockwise adjusts the light
upwards.
Headlight Lamp Replacement (Gen III)
NOTE: Do not touch a halogen lamp with bare fingers. Oil
from your skin leaves a residue, causing a hot spot which will
shorten the life of the lamp. Hold the bulb by the base only.
Trail Blazer E.S. and Sport
1. Remove rubber cap from back of headlight to reveal
retention screw.
2. Remove small phillips head screw and carefully remove
bulb from housing.
3. Unplug headlight lead wire from yellow jumper, and
ground wire from terminal board.
4. Insert new bulb into housing and tighten retention screw.
5. Plug lead and ground wire back into terminal board and
jumper.
6. Insert light assembly back into front cover and mount cov-
er on machine.
7. Properly adjust headlight aim.
7/96
10.6
25' (7.6 m)
2" (5.1 cm)
Below lamp
center height
Scrambler
Left headlight
adjustment
screw
Sport/trail Blazer
Headlight Lamp Replacement (Gen III)
Scrambler
1. Remove Phillips screw from bottom of headlamp.
2. Remove plastic lens retaining bracket.
3. Grasp base of bulb at back of housing and twist. Carefully
remove bulb from housing.
4. Gently pull back locking tabs on wire harness terminal un-
til base of bulb is released. Unplug bulb from harness.
5. Plug new bulb into wire harness, making sure it snaps into
place.
6. Carefully insert bulb into back of housing. Twist to lock in
place.
7. Reinstall plastic lens retaining bracket.
8. Reinstall Phillips screw in bottom of headlamp.
10.7
ELECTRICAL
Headlamp Service - Gen III
Screw
7/96
ELECTRICAL
Headlamp Service .. Gen IV
High Beam Headlight Adjustment (Gen IV)
The headlight beam can be adjusted to any position desired by turning the adjusting knob located on the bottom
right side of the headlight pod.
approximately 2S' (7.6 m) from a wall. 2S' (7.6 m)
headlight and make a mark on the wall at the same height.
3. Start the engine and turn the headlight switch to high
beam.
headlight beam should be aimed 2" (S.1 cm) below the
mark placed on the wall in step 2. NOTE: Rider weight
must be included on the seat. On machines with separate
low beam lights, the drop should be 8" (20.3 cm) in 2S'
from the center of the low beam lamp.
S. Adjust beam to desired position.
Headlight Lamp Replacement (Gen IV)
CAUTION: Do not service
while headlight is hot. Serious
burns may result.
1. Remove Phillips screw from
bottom of headlamp.
2. Remove plastic lens retaining
bracket.
3. Grasp base of bulb at back of
housing and twist. Carefully
remove bulb from housing.
4. Gently pull back locking tabs
on wire harness terminal until
base of bulb is released. Un-
plug bulb from harness.
Position
knob in
slot and
secure
in lock-
ing tabs
Headlight Housing Replacement (Gen IV)
1. Remove three Phillips screws at back of headlight pod.
2. Remove Phillips screws from bottom of headlight pod at each front
corner. NOTE: To aid in accessing these screws, it may be helpful
to turn handlebars to left or right and use a short, stubby screwdriver.
Removal of the front rack and cover will also allow easier access.
3. Lift pod cover up. Using a pliers, disconnect speedometer cable. Un-
plug indicator lights from harness and remove pod cover.
4. Unplug headlamp from wiring harness.
S. Remove a-Ring from headlight pivot pins.
6. Pull headlight housing up to release from locking tabs.
7. Lift adjusting knob up to remove from locking tabs.
8. Carefully pull assembly up and out of pod.
9. Reverse steps to install new housing and reassemble pod.
1 O.Adjust headlight aim by turning adjusting knob.
7/96
10.8
Slip O-Ring
over pin
O - R i n g ~
Distance from headlamp parting
line to end of adjustment knob stop
is 51/8" (13 em).
TaillightlBrakelight Lamp Replacement
If the taillight/brakelight does not work the lamp may need
to be replaced.
1. From the rear of the taillight remove two screws hold-
ing lens cover in place and remove lens cover.
2. Remove lamp and replace it with recommended lamp.
Apply dielectric grease PN 2871027.
3. Reinstall the lens cover removed in step 1.
4. Test the taillightlbrakelight to see that it's working.
Indicator Lamp Replacement (Gen II)
1. With a small, flat screwdriver gently pry loose the indi-
cator light cover.
2. Using a small flexible tube (such as an oil delivery
hose) grasp the burned out lamp and remove it.
3. Replace the removed lamp with a Polaris PN
4030042.
4. Replace the indicator light cover.
NOTE: Check all lights daily for proper operation replace
or repair if necessary.
Indicator Lamp Replacement (Gen III and Gen IV)
1. Follow steps 1 - 3 of Headlight Housing Replacement
above.
2. Unplug light from harness, depress locking tabs and
remove from pod.
3. Install new light and reassemble pod.
10.9
Bulb
ELECTRICAL
Indicator Lamp Service
, ~ o v e r
Jrj
~ / ,
Depress locking
tabs to remove.
7/96
ELECTRICAL
Timing Check Procedures
1, The ignition timing check hole is in the starter recoil/magneto housing. Remove the check plug.
NOTE: The ignition timing marks are stamped on the outside of the flywheel. Ignition timing must be inspected
with the engine at room temperature (68F / 20C).
2. With the transmission in neutral, start the engine and set engine speed to 3000 +/- 200 RPM (3500 200 RPM
for EH42PL, EH50PL).
3. Direct the timing light at the ignition timing check hole and check the ignition timing. NOTE: Do not allow the
engine to warm up. The timing will retard approximately 2when the engine is warm.
If the ignition timing is not within the specified range, adjust the stator plate position as described below.
Flywheel
Rotation
All Engines
EC38-PL
Flywheel
25.5 Rotation
23.5
1. Remove the magneto housing.
2. Remove the flywheel.
All EC25PFE- 09
and EC28PF(E)-01
EH42PL,
EH50PL
3. Loosen the stator plate screws and adjust the stator plate position. NOTE: Moving the stator plate clockwise
retards (delays) the ignition timing. Moving the plate counterclockwise advances it.
7/96
10.10
ELECTRICAL
Typical Ignition Timing Curves
* Actual advance point may vary by several hundred RPM either above or below 3000. Use the point of maximum
advance when checking ignition timing.
Typical 2 .. Stroke
MAXIMUM ADVANCE POINT (*)
26
0
24
c:i
22
r-:
a:i
fi)
20
UJ
UJ
0:
18
0
UJ
8
0
16
z
~ 14
f=
z
12
0
f=
Z
10
~
8
6
4
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000
Typical 4 .. Stroke
* Actual advance point may vary by several hundred RPM either above or below 3500. Use the point of maximum
advance when checking ignition timing.
30
/ MAXIMUM ADVANCE POINT (*)
0
28
c:i
26
t-:
co
fi)
24
UJ
UJ
0:
22
0
UJ
e.
20
0
z
~ 18
i=
z
16
0
E
z
14
~
12
10
8
0 1000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000
10.11 7/96
ELECTRICAL
Crankshaft Degree to Piston Position Conversion
Crankshaft Degree to Piston Position Conversion Chart (2 Stroke Engines)
120 MM Rod 120 MM Rod 130 MM Rod
Degrees
60 MM Stroke 65 MM Stroke 70 MM Stroke
EC25PF EC28PF EC35/38PL
MM Inch MM Inch MM Inch
1 .006 .0002 .006 .0002 .007 .0003
2 .023 .0010 .025 .0010 .027 .0011
3 .051 .0020 .056 .0022 .061 .0024
4 .091 .0040 .100 .0040 .108 .0043
5 .143 .0060 .157 .0062 .169 .0070
6 .205 .0080 .226 .0089 .243 .0100
7 .279 .0110 .307 .0121 .331 .0130
8 .365 .0140 .401 .0158 .432 .0170
9 .461 .0180 .508 .0200 .546 .0220
10 .569 .0220 .626 .0247 .674 .0270
11 .688 .0270 .757 .0298 .815 .0320
12 .818 .0320 .900 .0355 .969 .0380
13 .959 .0380 1.055 .0416 1.136 .0450
14 1.111 .0440 1.223 .0482 1.316 .0520
15 1.274 .0500 1.402 .0552 1.509 .0590
16 1.447 .0570 1.593 .0627 1.714 .0680
17 1.632 .0640 1.796 .0707 1.933 .0760
18 1.827 .0720 2.011 .0792 2.164 .0850
19 2.033 .0800 2.238 .0881 2.407 .0950
20 2.249 .0890 2.476 .0975 2.663 .1050
21 2.475 .0970 2.725 .1073 2.931 .1150
22 2.712 .1070 2.985 .1175 3.211 .1260
23 2.959 .1170 3.257 .1282 3.504 .1380
24 3.216 .1270 3.540 .1394 3.808 .1500
25 3.482 .1370 3.633 .1509 4.124 .1620
26 3.759 .1480 4.138 .1629 4.451 .1750
27 4.045 .1590 4.453 .1753 4.790 .1890
28 4.341 .1710 4.778 .1881 5.140 .2020
29 4.646 .1830 5.11,4 .2013 5.501 .2170
30 4.960 .1950 5.459 .2149 5.872 .2310
7/96
10.12
ELECTRICAL
Components of EC25/28PL 150 Watt Alternator (Exploded View)
o
Meter
5000 n
Stator
Plate
COl Plug
Lighting
Coil
Refer to wiring diagrams for
stator specified coil resistance
COl Box
NOTE: COl boxes may look the same but have
different internal circuitry. Be sure to always use
the correct COl box part number.
10.13
Flywheel and
Ring Gear Casting.
Refer to page 10.3b
for identification.
NOTE: When replacing exciter coil
position the numbers to the outside
(toward flywheel)
Secondary Coil
o
Meter
63000
Check coil mount for good
ground to engine (0-.20)
12/97
ELECTRICAL
Components of EC38PL 150 Watt Alternator (Exploded View)
specified stator coil resistance
Stator
Plate
Coil Lead
COl Box
Ignition Kill
Wire
(Black)
NOTE: When replacing exciter coil
position the numbers to the outside
(toward flywheel).
Exciter
Coil
Lighting
Coil Flywheel and
Ring Gear Casting.
Refer to page 10.3b
for identification.
Ignition Coil
Secondary Winding
Resistor
Cap
Q
Q
Ignition Coil
Primary
Winding
Q
Meter
5000n
ground to engine (O-.2Q)
12/97
10.14
ELECTRICAL
Components of EC38PL 200 Watt Alternator (Exploded View)
NOTE: COl boxes may look the same but have different internal circuitry. Be sure to always use the
correct COl box part number.
Stator Plate

: '"
Lighting Coils
I Exciter Coils
Flywheel and
Ring Gear Casting.
Refer to page 10.3b
for identification.

i Q
I (J:
' r-
.c:f

I

"',/
Pulse Coil (Trigger)
Air Gap: .016-.040"
(.4 - 1.0 mm)
Ignition Kill
Wire
(Black)
COl Box
10.15
Q
Meter
.30
Ignition Coil
Primary
Winding
Resistor Cap
Q
Meter
5000 n
Secondary Coil
Q
Meter
6300 n
ground to engine (0-.2Q)
12/97
ELECTRICAL
Components of EH42PLlEH50PL 200 1250 Watt Alternator (Exploded View)
Ignition Coil
Primary Winding
12/97
Ignition Kill
Wire
(Black)
~
Meter
.3D
Ignition
Coil
Meter
5kQ
Pulse Coil (Trigger) ~
Air Gap: .016-.040"
Meter
6300 )1------'
Ignition Coil
L...------I Secondary Winding
CDI Box
Magnetic
Switch
(.4 - 1.0 mm)
I
Stator ground to engine (0-.2Q)
Plate
Ignition Exciter
Coils
Battery Charging
Coils
Flywheel and
Ring Gear Casting.
Refer to page 10.3b
for identification.
10.16
Ignition System
ELECTRICAL
Ignition System
Whenever troubleshooting an electrical problem you should first check all terminal connections to be sure they
are clean and tight. Also be sure that colors match when wires are connected. Use the following pages as a guide
for troubleshooting. The resistance values are also given on the specification pages.
Condition: No Spark or intermittent spark
Replace Spark Plug
Disconnect the black wire at the COl module
to isolate the ignition from the kill system.
Does it have spark?
No
+
Disconnect the exciter coil and pulse coil connec-
tor from the COl module. Measure the resistance
of the exciter coil and pulse coil (where applica-
ble). Refer to the chart on page 10.3 or the wiring
schematic for meter connections and specifica-
tions. Compare results to the specifications on
the chart. Are all within specifications?
Yes
+
Yes---...
-Test the ignition switch, engine stop
switch, and speed limiter circuit for
shorts to ground.
-Check terminal board or connectors
for moisture, wire color matching or
corrosion.
No ---..
Inspect connectors, wiring and
grounds to the component in
question. Replace the compo-
nent if a wiring problem cannot
be found.
Check coil ground connection between engine and coil
mount using an ohmmeter. The coil mount should
have good continuity to ground on the engine (0-.2 Q).
No--"" Clean coil mounting area.
Repair ground wire connections.
Yes
Disconnect and check the secondary coil. Resis-
tance values should be:
Primary Side - Primary Wire Tab to Ground
(on coil mount or engine): .3 to .5 Ohms
Secondary Side High Tension Wire to engine
ground- Cap installed - 11 ,300Q
Cap removed - 6300Q
Are these values within specs?
Yes
No -.j Replace the ignition coil.
If all of the above tests are within specifications, and all grounds, connections, and wire color coding
have been inspected, perform voltage output tests on following page or replace the COl module.
10.17 12/97
ELECTRICAL
Ignition System
Cranking Output Test With Peak Reading Voltmeter
The following peak voltage tests will measure the amount of output directly from each component. A peak reading
A variety of peak reading adaptors are commercially available for
use with the Fluke 73 Digital Multitester, Tektronix DMM155, and other digital VOMs which will allow peak volt-
age tests to be performed accurately. Follow the directions provided with the adaptor. All measurements are
indicated in DC Volts. Readings obtained without a peak reading adaptor will be significantly different.
Disconnect the stator connectors from the CDI module. Test output from exciter coil, pulse (trigger) coil, and
compare to the chart. The following measurements are obtained when cranking the engine with the electric start-
er, spark plug installed. The starter system must be in good condition and the battery fully charged.
200/250 Watt 4 Stroke
Coil Connect Meter Reading
Wires To: (With Peak Reading Volt meter)
Exciter 1 Black/Red and Red 140 DCV
Exciter 2 Black/Red and Green 140 DCV
Exciter 3 Green and Red 5DCV
Pulse (Trigger) White/Red and White 2.5 DCV
200 Watt 2 Stroke
Exciter Black/Red - Red 140 DCV
Pulse (Trigger) White/Red -White 2.5 DCV
150 Watt 2 Stroke
Exciter Black/Red - BrnlWhite 130DCV
COl Output Test Using Peak Reading Adaptor
Re-connect all COl wires to stator wires. Disconnect COl module wire from ignition coil primary terminal. Connect
one meter lead to engine ground and the other to the ignition coil primary wire leading from the CDI module. Crank
engine and check output of COl wire to coil (130 DCV). Reconnect coil wire to COL
12/97
10.18
ELECTRICAL
Ignition System Troubleshooting
Ignition System Troubleshooting
No Spark, Weak or Intermittent Spark
-Spark plug gap incorrect
-Fouled spark plug
-Faulty spark plug cap or poor connection to high tension lead
-Related wiring loose, disconnected, shorted, or corroded
-Engine Stop switch or ignition switch faulty
-ETC switch misadjusted or faulty
-Terminal board or connections wet, corroded
-Poor ignition coil ground (e.g. coil mount loose or corroded)
-Faulty stator (measure resistance of all ignition related windings)
-Incorrect wiring (inspect color coding in connectors etc)
-Faulty ignition coil winding (measure resistance of primary and secondary)
-Worn magneto (RH) end Crankshaft bearings
-Sheared flywheel key
-Flywheel loose or damaged
-Trigger coil air gap too wide (where applicable) - should be .016-.040" (.4-1.0 mm)
-Excessive crankshaft runout on magneto (RH) end - should not exceed .005"
-White stator wire (150W alternators) not grounded to engine
-Faulty COl module**
NOTE: 200 and 250 Watt Alternators - If COl module is replaced, be sure to use the correct module for the
year and model you are working on. 1998-current COl modules are not compatible with pre-1998 Speed Limiter
Modules. If the COl module from a 1998 model is installed on a pre-199B model, intermittent ignition problems
may result unless the equivalent 1998 speed limiter module is installed with the COl module.
COl Module
Speed Limiter Module
Pre-1998 COl 1998-Current COl
Pre-1998 SLM Yes No (Yes if 1998 SLM is installed)
1998-Current SLM Yes Yes
10.19 12/97
ELECTRICAL
Battery Service
Initial Battery Service
. AWARNING
Battery electrolyte is poisonous. It contains sulfuric acid. Serious
burns can result from contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Antidote:
External: Flush with water.
Internal: Drink large quantities of water or milk. Follow with milk
of magnesia, beaten egg, or vegetable oil. Call physician immedi-
ately.
Eyes: Flush with water for 15 minutes and get prompt medical
attention.
Batteries produce explosive gases. Keep sparks, flame, ciga-
rettes, etc. away. Ventilate when charging or using in an enclosed
space. Always shield eyes when working near batteries. KEEP
OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN.
WARNING: The gases given off by a battery are explosive. Any spark or open flame near a battery can cause
an explosion which will spray battery acid on anyone close to it. If battery acid gets on anyone, wash the affected
area with large quantities of cool water and seek immediate medical attention.
CAUTION: Do not start the engine with battery disconnected. Damage will occur to lamps and electronic speed
limiter.
To ensure maximum service life and performance from a new battery, perform the following steps. NOTE: Do not
service the battery unless it will be put into regular service within 30 days. After initial service, add only distilled
water to the battery. Never add electrolyte after a battery has been in service.
1. Remove vent plug from vent fitting.
2. Fill battery with electrolyte to upper level marks on case.
3. Set battery aside and allow it to cool and stabilize for 30 minutes.
4. Add electrolyte to bring level back to upper level mark on case. NOTE: This is the last time that electrolyte
should be added. If the level becomes low after this point, add only distilled water.
5. Charge battery at 1/10 of its amp/hour rating. Examples: 1/10 of 9 amp battery = .9 amp; 1/10 of 14 amp
battery = 1.4 amp; 1/10 of 18 amp battery = 1.8 amp (recommended charging rates).
6. Check specific gravity of each cell with a hydrometer to assure each has a reading of 1.270 or higher.
Battery Terminals/Terminal Bolts
Use Polaris corrosion resistant dielectric grease (PN 2871027) on battery bolts. See Battery Installation on page
10.21.
7/96
10.20
ELECTRICAL
Battery Service
Battery Inspection/Removal
The battery is located under the left rear fender.
Inspect the battery fluid level. When the battery fluid nears
the lower level, the battery should be removed and distilled
water should be added to the upper level line. To remove
the battery:
1. Disconnect holder strap and remove cover.
2. Disconnect battery negative (-) (black) cable first,
followed by the positive (+) (red) cable.
&'CAUTION
Whenever removing or reinstalling the battery, disconnect
the negative (black) cable first and reinstall the negative
cable last!
3. Disconnect the vent hose.
4. Remove the battery.
Maintain
between upper
and lower level
marks
, . . " " " , . " . . " . . . ~ ~
.....,.. .-.-".
.". ... ." ........
........ ~ .....
5. Remove the filler caps and add distilled water only as needed to bring each cell to the proper level. Do not
overfill the battery.
&. To refill use only distilled water. Tap water contains minerals which are harmful to a battery.
&. Do not allow cleaning solution or tap water to enter the battery. It will shorten the life of the battery.
6. Reinstall the battery caps.
Battery Installation
1. Clean battery cables and terminals with a stiff wire brush. Corrosion can be removed using a solution of one
cup water and one tablespoon baking soda. Rinse will with clean water and dry thoroughly.
2. Reinstall battery, attaching positive (+) (red) cable first and then the negative (-) (black) cable. Coat terminals
and bolt threads with Polaris dielectric grease PN 2871027.
3. Install clear battery vent tube from vehicle to battery vent. WARNING: Vent tube must be free from
obstructions and kinks and securely installed. If not, battery gases could accumulate and cause an explosion.
Vent should be routed away from frame and body to prevent contact with electrolyte. Avoid skin contact with
battery electrolyte, severe burns could result. If electrolyte contacts the vehicle frame, corrosion will occur.
4. Route cables so they are tucked away in front and behind battery.
5. Reinstall battery cover and holder strap.
&. Do not start the engine with the battery disconnected. Vehicle lamps will burn out if battery is disconnected
during vehicle operation. Also, the reverse speed limiter can be damaged.
Battery Testing
Whenever a service complaint is related to either the starting or charging systems, the battery should be checked
first.
Following are three tests which can easily be made on a battery to determine its condition: OCV Test, Specific
Gravity Test and Load Test.
OCV .. Open Circuit Voltage Test
Battery voltage should be checked with a digital multitester. Readings of 12.6 or less require further battery testing
and charging. See charts and Load Test on page 10.22.
NOTE: Lead-acid batteries should be kept at or near a full charge as possible. Electrolyte level should be kept
between the low and full marks. If the battery is stored or used in a partially charged condition, or with low
electrolyte levels, hard crystal sulfation will form on the plates, reducing the efficiency and service life of the
b ~ e ~ -
10.21 7/96
ELECTRICAL
Battery Service
Specific Gravity Test
A tool such as a Battery Hydrometer (PN 2870836) can be used to measure electrolyte strength or specific gravity.
As the battery goes through the charge/discharge cycle, the electrolyte goes from a heavy (more acidic) state at
full charge to a light (more water) state when discharged. The hydrometer can measure state of charge and
differences between cells in a multi-cell battery. Readings of 1.270 or greater should be observed in a fully
charged battery. Differences of more than .025 between the lowest and highest cell readings indicate a need to
replace the battery.
OPEN CIRCUIT VOLTAGE
State of Conventional YuMicron
charge Lead-acid Type
100% 12.60V 12.70V
Polaris PN 2870876
Charged 12.40V 12.50V
75% Charged 12.10V 12.20V
50% Charged 11.90V 12.0V
25% Charged less than 11 .80V less than 11.9V Detail A
0% Charged
SPECIFIC GRAVITY
State of Conventional YuMicron
charge* lead-acid Type
100% 1.265 1.275
Charged 1.210 1.225
75% Charged 1.160 1.175
50% Charged 1.120 1.135
25% Charged less than 1.100 less than 1.115
0% Charged
* At 80F
NOTE: Subtract .01 from the specific gravity reading at 40" F.
Load Test
CAUTION: Remove spark plug high tension leads and connect securely to engine ground before proceeding.
NOTE: This test can only be performed on machines with electric starters. This test cannot be performed with
an engine or starting system that is not working properly.
A battery may indicate a full charge condition in the OCV test and the specific gravity test, but still may not have the
storage capacity necessary to properly function in the electrical system. For this reason, a battery capacity or load
test should be conducted whenever poor battery performance is encountered. To perform this test, hook a multitester
to the battery in the same manner as was done in the OCV test. The reading should be 12.6 volts or greater. Engage
the electric starter and view the registered battery voltage while cranking the engine. Continue the test for 15 seconds.
During this cranking period, the observed voltage should not drop below 9.5 volts. If the beginning voltage is 12.6
or higher and the cranking voltage drops below 9.5 volts during the test, replace the battery.
7/96
10.22
ELECTRICAL
Battery Service
Off Season Storage
To prevent battery damage during extended periods of non-use, the following basic battery maintenance items
must be performed:
-Remove the battery from the machine and wash the case and battery tray with a mild solution of baking
soda and water. Rinse with lots of fresh water after cleaning. NOTE: Do not get any of the baking
soda into the battery or the acid will be neutralized.
-Using a wire brush or knife, remove any corrosion from the cables and terminals.
-Make sure that the electrolyte is at the proper level. Add distilled water if necessary.
-Charge at a rate no greater than 1/10 of the battery's amplhr capacity until the electrolyte's specific
gravity reaches 1 .270 or greater.
-Store the battery either in the machine with the cables disconnected, or put it on a piece of wood and
store in a cool place. NOTE: Stored batteries lose their charge at the rate of 1 % per day. They
should be recharged to a full charge every 30 to 60 days during a non-use period. If the battery is
stored during the winter months the electrolyte will freeze at a higher temperature as the battery dis-
charges. The chart at right indicates freezing points by specific gravity.
Charging Procedure
Charge the battery with a charger no larger than 1/10 of the battery's amplhr rating for as many hours as needed
to raise the specific gravity to 1 .270 or greater.
Electrolyte Freezing Points
Specific Gravity Freezing
of Electrolyte Point
1.265 -75
0
F
1.225 -35
0
F
1.200 -17
0
F
1.150 +5
0
F
1.100 +18
0
F
1.050 +270 F
1. Install battery in vehicle with positive terminal toward the front. Coat threads of battery bolt with Polaris
corrosion resistant dielectric grease.
A WARNING
To avoid the possibility of explosion, connect positive (red) cable first and negative (black) cable last.
2. Connect battery cables.
3. After connecting the battery cables, install the cover on the battery and attach the hold down strap.
4. Install clear battery vent tube from vehicle to battery vent. WARNING: Vent tube must be free from
obstructions and kinks and securely installed. If not, battery gases could accumulate and cause an explosion.
Vent should be routed away from frame and body to prevent contact with electrolyte. Avoid skin contact with
battery electrolyte, severe burns could result. If electrolyte contacts the vehicle frame, corrosion will occur.
5. Route cables so they are tucked away in front and behind battery.
10.23 7/96
ELECTRICAL
Charging System
Charging System Testing
Whenever charging system problems are suspected, proceed with the following system check.
Using a multitester set on D.C. volts, mea-
sure the battery open circuit voltage (See
page 10.22). It should be 12.4 volts or
more. Is it?
Yes
,
Meter Setting: DC Volts
With the transmission in neutral, start the
engine and increase RPM to between 3000
and 4000. Read battery voltage with the
multitester. Readings should be between
13.0 and 14.6 V D.C.
Are thev?
No
,
Meter Setting: DC Amps
Perform system "Break Even Amperage"
test outlined on page 10.25.
Does charging occur as specified?
No
Meter Setting: AC Amps
Disconnect the Yellow/Red, Yellow, and Yel-
low/Brn (if applicable) wires from the regula-
tor/rectifier. Using a multitester, perform an
Alternator Output (AC amp) test. See test
procedure on page 10.25 for procedure.
Is output above 5 amps?
Yes
Meter Setting: DC Volts
Reconnect the alternator wires. Note: Red
wire must be connected to harness. Battery
voltage must be present on red wire terminal
on harness side of voltage regulator connector.
Is it?
Yes
,
If all of the previous tests indicate a
good condition, but the charging voltage
does not rise above battery voltage at the
connector or terminal board, replace the
voltage regulator.
12/97
Remove the battery and properly ser-
............. No ____ vice. Reinstall the fully charged battery
or a fully charged shop battery.
...--.. ::. .... Yes --....J Check Key off Current Draw
No --II-
10.24
Check for owner modification, and
discuss operating habits. The battery
will continually discharge if operated
below the "Break Even" RPM. Con-
tinued problems would call for battery
inspection.
Inspect the wiring harness be-
tween the panel and the stator for
damage. If no damage is found,
remove the recoil and flywheel.
Inspect the flywheel magnets, sta-
tor coils and stator wire harness
for damage. Repair or replace
any damaged components.
Check regulator/rectifier connections
and ground, battery connections, cir-
cuit breaker and connecting wires.
Repair or replace faulty wiring or
components.
Current Draw - Key Off
ELECTRICAL
Charging System
CAUTION: Do not connect or disconnect the battery cable or ammeter with the engine running. Damage will
occur to light bulbs and speed limiter.
Connect an ammeter in series with the negative battery cable. Check for current draw with the key off. If the draw
is excessive, loads should be disconnected from the system one by one until the draw is eliminated. Check com-
ponent wiring as well as the component for partial shorts to ground to eliminate the draw.
Charging System "Break Even" Test
CAUTION: Do not connect or disconnect the battery cable or ammeter with the engine running. Damage will
occur to light bulbs and speed limiter.
CAUTION: Never use the electric starter with the ammeter connected, or damage to the meter may result. Do
not run test for extended period of time. Do not run test with high amperage accessories.
The "break even" point of the charging system is the point at which the alternator overcomes all system loads
(lights, etc.) and begins to charge the battery. Depending on battery condition and system load, the break even
point may vary slightly. The battery should be fully charged before performing this test.
Connect an ammeter set to DC amps in series between the negative battery cable and terminal. Connect a
tachometer according to manufacturer's instructions. With engine off and the key and kill switch in the ON posi-
tion, the ammeter should read negative amps (battery discharge). Reverse meter leads if a positive reading is
indicated. Shift transmission into neutral. Start engine with recoil only. Increase engine RPM while observing
ammeter and tachometer. Note RPM at which the battery starts to charge (ammeter indication is positive). With
lights and other electrical load off, this should occur at approximately 1500 RPM or lower on both 150 and 200
watt alternators. Turn the lights on and lock parking brake to keep brake light on. Repeat test, observing ammeter
and tachometer. With lights on, charging should occur at or below 3000 RPM on 150 watt alternators and 2000
RPM on 200 watt alternators.
Alternator Output Test (AC amp)
This test measures AC amperage from the alternator.
Maximum alternator output will be indicated on the meter. It is not necessary to increase engine RPM above idle.
Place the red lead on the tester in the 1 OA jack. Turn the selector dial to the AC amps (A,,-,) position. Connect
the meter leads to the Yellow and Yellow/Red wires leading from the alternator. Start the engine and let it idle.
Reading should be a minimum of SA at idle.
10.25 7/96
ELECTRICAL
Starter System
Starter System Troubleshooting
Starter Motor Does Not Turn
-Battery discharged - low specific gravity
-Loose or faulty battery cables or corroded connections (see Voltage Drop Tests)
-Related wiring loose, disconnected, or corroded
-Poor ground connections at battery cable, starter motor or starter solenoid (see Voltage Drop
Tests)
-Faulty starter button
-Faulty ignition switch (Do other systems function?)
-Faulty starter solenoid or starter motor.
-Engine problem - seized or binding (Can engine be rotated easily with recoil starter?)
Starter Motor Turns Over Slowly
-Battery discharged - low specific gravity
-Excessive circuit resistance - poor connections (see Voltage Drop Test below)
-Engine problem seized or binding (Can engine be rotated easily with recoil starter?)
-Faulty or worn brushes in starter motor
-Automatic compression release inoperative
Starter Motor Turns Engine Does Not Rotate
-Faulty starter drive
-Faulty starter drive gears or starter motor gear
-Faulty flywheel gear or loose flywheel
Voltage Drop Test
The Voltage Drop Test is used to test for bad connections. When performing the test, you are putting the Volt
meter in place of the wire and connection you are testing (meter in parallel). Because electricity will flow in the
path of least reSistance, current will flow thru the meter if there is a poor or corroded connection. This will show
up as a voltage reading. Voltage shown on the meter when testing connections should not exceed .1 VDC Q.el
connection or component.
To perform the test, place the meter on DC volts and place the meter leads across the connection to be
tested. Refer to the chart on next page to perform voltage drop tests on the starter system.
7/96
10.26
ELECTRICAL
Starter System
Condition: Starter fails to turn motor. NOTE: Make sure engine crankshaft is free to turn before proceeding with
dynamic testing of starter system. A digital multitester must be used for this test.
With the tester on the VDC position, place the tes-
ter's black lead on the battery negative and the red
lead on the battery positive.
Reading should be 12.4 or greater.
No
Remove battery and properly service.
Install fully charged shop battery to continue
test.
Y e s ~ ______________________________________ ~
Disconnect White/Red engagement coil wire from
the starter solenoid. Connect tester black wire to
battery ground. Connect red tester lead to White/
Red harness wire at solenoid. Turn on ignition
switch and depress the starter button. Tester
should read battery voltage.
No---
Check voltage on both sides of circuit
breaker, ignition switch/engine stop switch
and starter button. The voltage on both
sides should be the same. NOTE: The igni-
tion switch and engine stop switch must be
on and the starter button depressed. Re-
place the defective component.
Voltage Drop Testing
See Pa e 10.26 for instructions.
Yes
Test starter solenoid coil by connecting an ohmmeter between the solenoid
red wire and the solenoid mounting plate. Resistance should be 3.40.
Check solenoid ground path by measuring resistance between mounting
plate and battery negative terminal (-).
Reconnect the solenoid. Connect the tester black
lead to the battery positive and the red lead to the
solenoid end of the battery-to-solenoid wire. De-
press starter button. Reading should be less than
.1 V D.C.
Yes
No -----
Clean the battery-to-solenoid cable ends or
replace the cable.
Connect the black tester lead to solenoid end of
battery-to-solenoid cable. Connect red tester lead
to solenoid end of solenoid-to-starter cable. De-
press starter button. Reading should be less than
.1 V D.C.
No ---.j Replace the starter solenoid.
Yes
,
Connect the black tester lead to the solenoid end of
the solenoid-to-starter cable. Connect the red teste
lead to the starter end of the same cable. Depress
the starter button. The reading should be less than
.1 V D.C.
Yes
,
No--""
If all of these indicate a good condition, yet the starter still fails to turn, the
starter must be removed for static testing and inspection.
10.27
Clean the solenoid-to-starter cable ends or
replace the cable.
7/96
ELECTRICAL
Starter System
Starter Motor Removal (EH42PL, EH50PL)
CAUTION: Turn ignition switch off and disconnect the bat-
tery ground (-) cable from the battery before removing the
starter motor.
1. Remove the two 6mm starter motor mounting bolts.
Note the position of the ground cable.
2. Disconnect starter motor positive (+) cable at the motor.
3. Remove starter motor.
4. Inspect the O-Ring on the end of the starter motor for
wear, cracks, or damage. Replace if necessary.
Starter Motor Removal (EC38PL)
1. Disconnect battery ground (-) cable.
2. Remove components to gain access to recoil housing
(Le. chains, chain cover, body panels, etc.)
3. Remove two starter bolts as shown.
4. Remove rock guard from bottom of vehicle.
10/96
10.28
Remove
Rock Guard
Starter Motor Removal, Cant. (EC38PL)
5. Remove starter cable.
6. Using a 1 Omm wrench, remove the two screws attaching
the starter support bracket to the engine.
7. Remove the bolt securing the starter to the magneto
housing.
8. Remove starter with bracket attached through bottom of
frame.
Starter Motor Disassembly (Typical)
NOTE: Use electrical contact cleaner to clean starter motor
parts. Some solvents may leave a residue or damage inter-
nal parts and insulation.
1 . Note the alignment marks on both ends of the starter
motor casing. These marks must align during
reassembly.
2. Remove the two bolts, washers, and sealing O-Rings.
Inspect O-Rings and replace if damaged.
3. Remove brush terminal end of housing while holding
other two sections together.
10.28a
ELECTRICAL
Starter System
10/96
4. Remove shims from armature shaft. NOTE: All shims
must be replaced during reassembly.
Brush Inspection/Replacement
1. Using a digital multitester, measure the resistance
between the cable terminal and the insulated brush. The
reading should be .3 ohms or less. Measure the
resistance between the cable terminal and brush
housing. Make sure the brush is not touching the case.
The reading should be infinite.
2. Remove nut, flat washer, large phenolic washer, two
small phenolic washers, and O-Ring from brush
terminal. Inspect the O-Ring and replace if damaged.
3. Remove brush plate and brushes. Measure length of
brushes and replace if worn past the service limit.
Replace springs if they are discolored or have
inadequate tension.
4. Inspect surface of commutator for wear or discoloration.
See steps 3-6 of armature testing on page 10.30.
5. Install a new carbon brush assembly in the brush
housing. NOTE: Be sure that the terminal bolt insulating
washer is properly seated in the housing, and the tab on
the brush plate engages the notch in the brush plate
housing.
6. Place a wrap of electrical tape on the threads of the
terminal bolt to prevent O-Ring damage during
reinstallation.
7. Install the O-Ring over the bolt. Make sure the O-ring is
fully seated.
8. Remove the electrical tape and reinstall the two small
phenolic washers, the large phenolic washer, flat
washer, and nut.
10.29
ELECTRICAL
Starter Svstem
7/96
ELECTRICAL
Starter System
Armature Testing
1 . Remove armature from starter casing. Note order
of shims on drive end for reassembly.
2. Inspect surface of commutator. Replace if
excessively worn or damaged.
3. Using a digital multitester, measure the resistance
between each of the commutator segments. The
reading should be .3 ohms or less.
4. Measure the resistance between each
commutator segment and the armature shaft. The
reading should be infinite (no continuity).
5. Check commutator bars for discoloration. Bars
discolored in pairs indicate shorted coils, requiring
replacement of the starter motor.
6. Place armature in a growler. Turn growler on and
position a hacksaw blade or feeler gauge
lengthwise 1/8" (.3 cm) above armature coil
laminates. Rotate armature 360. If hacksaw
blade is drawn to armature on any pole, the
armature is shorted and must be replaced.
Starter Assembly
1. Place armature in field magnet casing.
2. Place shims on drive end of armature shaft with
phenolic washer outermost on shaft. Engage tabs
of stationary washer in drive end housing, holding it
in place with a light film of grease.
3. Install case sealing O-Ring. Make sure O-Ring is
in good condition and not twisted on the case.
Lubricate needle bearing and oil seal with a light
film of grease, and install housing, aligning marks.
4. Install O-Ring on other end of field magnet casing.
Make sure it is in good condition and not twisted on
the case.
5. Align casing marks and install housing, pushing
back brushes while installing shaft in bushing.
6. Reinstall starter motor housing bolts.
EH42PL, EHSOPL: Make sure O-Rings are in good condition and seated in groove.
EC38PL, EC28PF, EC2SPF: Install new gasket on starter flange.
7. Inspect permanent magnets in starter housing. Make sure they are not cracked or separated from housing.
Use care when handling starter housing. Do not drop or strike the housing as magnet damage is possible. If
magnets are damaged, starter must be replaced.
7/96
10.30
Starter Motor Installation (EC38PL)
1. Loosely assemble support bracket to starter.
NOTE: Bracket bolts must be loose to allow installation of
support bracket to engine bolts.
2. Install a new gasket and place the starter motor in place.
3. Install the starter motor to magneto housing bolt first.
4. Install both support bracket to engine bolts.
5. Tighten all support bracket bolts.
6. Install starter motor cable. Make sure red protective
cover is properly in place.
7. Install rock guard.
8. Install two bolts to starter from inside magneto housing.
9. Install magneto housing.
10. Install all components removed to gain access to
magneto housing.
10.30a
ELECTRICAL
Starter System
10/96
Starter Drive
Pinion Gear - Anti Kick-out Shoe, Garter Spring
Replacement
If the garter spring is damaged, the overrun clutch
may fail to return properly. The replacement spring is
PN 7042039. Use eit,her of the following methods to
remove and install a new garter spring.
1. Screw the overrun clutch out to the engaged
position on the pinion shaft assembly. Use a
small piece of wire with the end bent in a hook and
pick the old spring out of its channel. Slide it off
the end of the shaft. Slide the new spring over the
overrun clutch and into the spring groove. Make
sure that the spring is positioned between the
shoe alignment pins and the back flange of the
anti kick-out shoes.
2. Remove the lock ring, end washer, spring
retainers and clutch return spring. Screw the
overrun clutch off the end of the pinion shaft.
Remove the old spring and install a new one.
Lightly grease the pinion shaft and reinstall the
clutch, spring, retainers, end washer and lock ring
in the reverse order. Make sure the end washer is
positioned properly so that it will hold the lock ring
in its groove.
Starter Solenoid Bench Test
It is difficult to test the high amp side of the solenoid
accurately on the bench. The only test which can be
done on the bench is the pull-in coil resistance. The
reading should be 3.4 ohms.
10.31
ELECTRICAL
Starter System
Starter Motor Exploded View
*Lubricate spiral gear with Polaris Premium Starter Drive Grease
10/96
ELECTRICAL
Speed Limiter System
Limiter Specifications
/
Speed Limiter
Module LR
ID Number
NOTE:The part number is printed on some late model
LR modules. Whenever possible, use part number
to identify the module. Modules may have same "LR"
I.D. number, with different part numbers, terminals, and
internal function.
Part number is printed
on some later modules
LIMIT SPECIFICATIONS
(Refer to parts manual or microfiche for part number and application.)
PART NO. TYPE FUNCTION I LIMIT RPM COMMENTS
4060085 LR44 Reverse Limit - 3500 1996 - Current 250 and 300cc Models (150 Watt alternators).
ETC Limit - 1900 Terminal board wire terminals.
4060112 LR44-2 Reverse Limit 3100 Terminal board wire terminals. (200 Watt alternators).
ETC Limit - 1200
4060159 LR44-2 Reverse Limit - 3100 Same as 4060112; except multi-pin connector wiring harness.
ETC Limit - 1200
4060203 LR44-2 Reverse Limit - 3100 "Anti-splash" version of 4060112. Can be used on models that
ETC Limit - 1200 originally used 4060112. Terminal board wire terminals.
4060204 LR44-2 Reverse Limit - 3100 Same as 4060203 except multi-pin connector wiring harness.
ETC Limit - 1200 Has Gray/orange reverse override wire (not Green).
4060114 LR49 Reverse Limit - 2800 1996 - Current Sport; Scrambler 400 (150 Watt alternators).
ETC Limit - 1200 Terminal board wire terminals.
4060135 LR83 Reverse Limit - 3100 Shaft Drive ATVs with hub engagement limiter function
ETC Limit - 1400 (Hub Limit - 3700) Terminal board wire terminals.
4060205 LR83 Reverse Limit - 3100 "Anti-splash" version of 4060135. Can be used on models that
ETC Limit 1400 originally used 4060135. Terminal board wire terminals.
4060201 LR83-2 Reverse Limit - 3100 Same as 4060205 except mUlti-pin connector wiring harness.
ETC Limit - 1400
4060199 LR83-1 For 150 Watt Alternators.
12/97
10.32
Speed Limiter System - Theory of Operation
The Speed Limiter system controls vehicle speed by
electronically limiting engine RPM in reverse, or in the
event of a mechanical problem in the throttle control
mechanism. There are two separate limiting systems -
the Reverse Speed Limiter system and the Electronic
Throttle Control (ETC) system. Although the two
systems are independent of each other, they share a
common part - the limiter module. When activated,
the limiter module grounds the ignition stop circuit
through the COl black wire, creating a "misfire" which
prevents engine RPM from going above the "Reverse
Limit" or "ETC Limit" RPM. The limits are designed into
the limiter module for a given model, and cannot be
changed or adjusted.
Reverse Speed Limiter System - In order to fully
understand and troubleshoot the Reverse Speed
Limiter system, it is important to remember that limiting
will occur whenever two input "signals" are present at
the limiter module:
1. The limiter module must receive voltage through the
reverse light circuit (Green or Gray/Orange wire).
and ...
2. Engine RPM must be at or above the "Reverse
Limit". The RPM signal is delivered to the limiter
module via the Yellow/Red alternator wire.
When both of these inputs are present, the system will
limit. Below the "reverse limit" RPM, the ignition
system will operate normally.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) - Theory of
Operation
The limiter also incorporates a throttle safety feature
called the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC). When
there is a mechanical problem in the throttle
mechanism (throttle plate, throttle shaft, or cable) and
the throttle lever is released, the ETC switch contacts
close. Power is delivered to the limiter module through
the white wire, and engine RPM is limited to the "ETC
limit". It is important to remember that ETC limiting will
occur whenever two input "signals" are present at the
limiter module:
1. The limiter module must receive voltage through the
ETC switch circuit (White wire).
and ...
2. Engine RPM must be at or above the "ETC Limit".
The RPM signal is delivered to the limiter module via
the Yellow/Red alternator wire.
Refer to following pages for test procedure.
ELECTRICAL
I
Speed Limiter I
Module
Y/R
RPM Signal
GRN or GRY/OR
OVERR I DE S'I/ ITCH
LEFT HANDL EBAR

L I
PUR
I W (To ETC)
BlkWire
COl
I-- Module
Gry/W
RI' I Ie I
GRN I'll
I ----t- GR Y I'll
Gear Selector Switch
(Reverse Selected)
Speed Limiter Circuit (Typical)
Speed Limiter Circuit Wires Shown In Bold
9
I
Speed Limiter
Module
I Batterv Volta 0'
Y/R
RPM Signal Blk
COl
I--
GRN or GRY/OR
Module
(From Override Switch)
-
-
Battery Voltage ETC SW ITCH
W

HOUS I NG I
CLOSE ON THROTTLE
CABLE SLACK
Electronic Throttle Control Circuit (Typical)
Electronic Throttle Control Circuit Wires
Shown I n Bold
NOTE: The reverse RPM limit will override the ETC Limit when both are receiving voltage.
10.33 12/97
ELECTRICAL
Speed Limiter System Testing
CAUTION: (except 1997 Scrambler 500) The speed limiter control module may be permanently
damaged if the machine is operated with the voltage regulator damaged and/or the battery disconnected.
WARNING: The speed limiter is a safety feature and should never be disabled, except for testing purposes.
Serious injury or death may result if the limiter system is disabled.
When problems occur that sound like a spark-related "miss", the speed limiter system may be at fault. To
determine if the limit system is causing the problem, the system can be temporarily disabled.
1. Disconnect the black wire from the COl module. The limiter system will then be disabled. If the problem still
exists, the limit system is not the cause. If the problem goes away, re-connect the black wire and proceed with
limiter system tests on the following pages. Verify all wires are clean and tight.
Module Wire Color Function
NOTE: Refer to the model specific wiring diagram for wire colors. Modules may not have all wires indicated below.
Black wire - provides ignition control to the COl module
Green or Gray/Orange wire - receives reverse gear indicator light signal from purple wire through override button
White wire - receives a voltage signal from the ETC switch
Yellow/Red wire - receives the engine speed/ RPM signal from alternator
SYMPTOM CAUSE CURE
Limits in forward High Limit -Voltage to Green or Gray/Orange -Check circuit to determine reason for voltage to
(Reverse Limit)
wire in forward gear green in forward gear
Law Limit
-Voltage to white wire. Most often -Clean, dry, repair or replace the ETC switch
(ETC Limit)
caused by moisture in ETC switch. assembly as required, inspect/adjust throttle
-Inadequate throttle cable tension. cable/ETC switch, or determine reason for voltage
on white wire
Engine miss at idle or rough -ETC switch adjusted incorrectly -Adjust ETC switch until switch plunger is completely
idle
-Idle speed adjusted incorrectly
depressed. No plunger Clearance. 1/16-1/8" throttle
lever free play. (Readjust Idle)
Backfire on deceleration -ETC switch adjusted incorrectly -Adjust ETC switch until switch plunger is completely
(disappears when black wire depressed. No plunger Clearance.1 /16-1 /8" throttle
is disconnected from speed lever free play. (Readjust Idle)
limiter)
-Faulty ETC switch -Dry out switch with electrical contact cleaner,
replace switch, or adjust throttle cable freeplay
No limit in reverse -12V not present on Green or -Check and repair reverse light circuit or gear
Gray/Orange speed limiter selector switch. NOTE: if reverse light functions
module wire properly, the gear selector switch is not the problem
-Black wire from limiter module not -Repair black wire between limiter and COl
connected to COl module black
-Yellow/Red wire on limiter module -Check wiring and alternator output
not receiving an RPM signal
-Override switch not closing -Test override switch function
-Faulty or incorrect limiter module -Replace module
Limits at wrong RPM -Improperly charged battery -Charge or replace battery
-Incorrect limiter module for -Check parts manual application
machine application
-Incorrect alternator output -Check wiring and alternator output
-Faulty limiter module -Replace limiter module
12/97
10.34
ELECTRICAL
All Wheel Drive System
All Wheel Drive Activation In Reverse: For AWD in reverse gear, the override button must be pushed in addition
to selecting "All Wheel Drive", Power is delivered through the transmission switch, the override button, the AWD
button, and then to the front wheel coils.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Testing
The All Wheel Drive (AWD) system is activated when battery voltage is supplied to the front wheel coils, Always
check battery voltage when an AWD problem is encountered. Charge battery and check charging system if nec-
essary. If only one wheel hub does not engage, test wheel coil resistance and inspect wheel coil wires for damage.
Check for a mechanical problem if resistance measurements are within specifications.
1. Remove cover(s) as required to gain access to terminal board.
2. Turn ignition key on and shift transmission to a forward gear.
3. Select AWD with AWD button.
4. Check for battery voltage on gray terminal at terminal board or harness connector. NOTE: If power is present
and bulb is good, All Wheel Drive lamp will be lit.
*If voltage is present:
-Disconnect Gray and Brown wheel coil wires and test resistance across the small wheel coil
wires. There should be 25-30Q of resistance.
-Test Gray wire to ground on strut casting. It should be an open circuit (00). Move wheel coil
wiring harness while performing the tests to check for an intermittent open or short.
AWDWheel Coil ResistanCe
G to Brown ..... ..
<N6continuity t6groundorlstrut casting)
-Repair wiring harness or replace wheel coil if necessary.
*If no voltage is present on the Gray terminal check the AWD switch and transmission switch. (If voltage is
present on the GraylWhite terminal transmission switch is functioning properly.) Refer to AWD and
Transmission Switch Testing this section.
No AWD in Reverse
If AWD functions properly in forward but not in reverse, perform the following tests:
NOTE: Override button must be pushed for AWD in reverse.
1. Turn ignition key on and shift transmission to reverse.
2. If reverse lamp is on, the gear selector switch is functioning properly. If reverse lamp is off (not illuminated),
check the bulb and test gear selector switch and related wiring (Page 10.38).
3. Check for battery voltage on Purple wire in left hand switch wire harness.
*If battery voltage is present:
4. Press the override button and check for voltage on any Gray/white wire.
-Check override switch and related wiring if voltage is not present on GraylWhite wire(s).
If the entire AWD circuit tests correctly, inspect the wheel hubs for a mechanical problem.
No All Wheel Drive (AWD) on Shaft Drive Models Equipped With Hub Safety Module
(Refer to specific wiring diagram for application).
1 . Perform circuit tests above. If the tests are within specifications, proceed with the following module by-pass test.
2. Inspect the RedlWhite and BrownlWhite wires leading from hub safety module to the terminal board.
Connections must be clean, tight, and properly color-matched to the terminals.
3. Disconnect BrownlWhite wheel coil wires from terminal board and connect to Brown (ground) terminals. If All
Wheel Drive functions properly, replace wires on proper terminals and proceed with next step.
4. Disconnect the Yellow/Red wire from the Hub Safety module.
5. Test AC voltage input at the Yellow/Red wire (on alternator side). Voltage should be a minimum 5 AC volts at
idle. Refer to charging system testing if voltage is below 5 AC volts.
6. If voltage is present on the Yellow/Red wire and the system does not function correctly, replace the module.
10.35 12/97
ELECTRICAL
Front Hub Engagement Limiter (Front Shaft Drive Models)
Front Shaft Drive Models are equipped with a front hub engagement limiter system which prevents engagement
of All Wheel Drive (AWD) if engine RPM is above 4000. This is accomplished by the use of an LR83 module
(attached to the bulkhead under the front cover), which monitors engine RPM via the Yellow/Red alternator wire.
AWD must be selected (button pushed) prior to reaching 4000 RPM, or the Hub Limiter Module will electronically
disconnect the ground path for the front hub coils (SrownIWhite wire) until RPM falls below 4000. If AWD is se-
lected (button pushed) below 4000 RPM, the connection to ground will be maintained by the module at any RPM.
The ground path is interrupted only if an attempt is made to engage the front hubs with engine RPM above 4000.
Refer to the diagram and test procedure below.
WARNING: The engagement limiter is a safety feature designed to protect the front drive components and should
never be disabled, except for testing purposes. Serious injury or death may result if the limiter system is disabled
or left in the testing mode. Return all wires to the proper terminal on the terminal board (according to color) and
verify proper neutral light operation after testing.
CAUTION: The speed limiter control module may be permanently damaged if the machine is operated with the
voltage regulator damaged and/or the battery disconnected.
* Indicates Terminal Board Connection
Y IR---------1
Blk RIW
R /W
SHIFTER
BRNIW
AWD
HUB
CO I LS
Hub Engagement Limiter RPM Test
Perlorm this test to check hub engagement limiter RPM.
WI CH
1 . To perlorm this test, the neutral light must function
properly and the battery must be in a good state of
charge. Turn the key and engine stop switch on. Shift
transmission to neutral and check for proper neutral light
function. Repair neutral light if necessary before
proceeding. Turn key to OFF position.
2. Remove front rack and terminal board cover (where
applicable).
3. Verify all electrical connections are clean, tight, and on
the proper terminal. Make sure voltage is present on the
RedlWhite terminal with the key on.
4. Locate shift selector switch harness (RIW, PUR,GRYIW,
and GRNIW wires.
5. Locate GreenIWhite wire in switch harness and follow it
to the terminal board. Disconnect this GreenIWhite wire
from the board and connect it to GraylWhite terminal on
terminal board.
12/97
10.36
GrnlW from Switch
Connect To GrylW

AWD LAMP
(RIGHT HANDLEBAR)
Terminal Soard
NEUTRAL
LAMP
BRN
Speed Limiter
Module LR
10 Number
1
Hub Engagement Limiter RPM Test Procedure, cont.
6. Disconnect the remaining (neutral light) GreenIWhite
wire from the GreenIWhite terminal on the board and
connect it to the BrownlWhite terminal on the board.
7. Connect the GreenIWhite wire disconnected in step 6 to
the BrownlWhite terminal on the terminal board.
8. Connect a tachometer following manufacturer's
instructions.
9. Apply and lock the parking brake.
10. Start the engine. Be sure the machine is in neutral before
starting.
11. Place the All Wheel Drive (AWD) switch in the OFF
position (button out - no AWD).
12. Slowly increase RPM above 4000.
13. Push the AWD button to select All Wheel Drive. The
neutral light should light up. indicating an interrupted
ground path through the LR83 (power on the
BrownlWhite terminal is finding ground through the
neutral light bulb.
14. Slowly let RPM drop back to idle. The neutral light should
go out below approximately 4000 RPM, indicating a good
ground through the LR83 module. The neutral light
should not illuminate whenever AWD is selected below
4000 RPM.
WARNING: The procedures outlined above are for testing
purposes only. Return all wires to the proper terminal on the
terminal board (according to color) after testing. Verify proper
neutral light operation.
10.37
ELECTRICAL
12/97
ELECTRICAL
Switch Testing
Most of the switches on the vehicle can be tested at the terminal board or at the harness connectors located under
the front panel (Gen 111/ Gen IV) or tank cover (Gen II). To access the terminal board or connectors:
-Remove seat and top fuel tank cover (Gen II models). Refer to Chapter 5.
-Remove front rack (if equipped) and front cover under headlight (Gen III & Gen IV models). Refer to Chapter 5.
Key Switch/Auxiliary Shut Off (Kill) Switch
Turn key (and engine stop switch) "ON" and check for battery voltage on RedlWhite terminal or harness side of
connector. If battery voltage is present, switch function is O.K. Disconnect switch wires at terminal board or con-
nector. Check continuity of wires in each switch position. Continuity should exist between color coded wires as
sh h h b I own in t IE C art el( w.
Blk Brn RIW R
Off
- -
... ...
-
-
On
-
-
"Off" Continuity between Black and Brown wires. No continuity between RedlWhite and Red wires.
"On" Continuity between RedlWhite and Red wires. No continuity between Black and Brown wires.
Starter Switch
Check starter switch at terminal board or at the harness connector. Terminal boards - Disconnect the White/Red
wire from the switch at the panel. Turn key (and engine stop switch) "ON", The wire should show battery voltage
when the starter button is depressed. Connector style harness - perform continuity test below with coupler discon-
nected.
Continuity Test" Turn key off. Disconnect RedlWhite and White/Red switch wires at terminal board or connector.
Continuity should exist between color coded wires as shown in the chart below.
RIW
Free
Pushed

W/R

Replace the switch if resistance is indicated or if voltage drop is greater than .1 DCV.
Override Button
Disconnect the Purple, GraylWhite, and Green wires at the terminal board or connector. Continuity should exist
between color coded wires as shown in the chart below. Make sure to verify no continuity as well as continuity.
Pur Gryf\N
Grn
Free -
-
-
-
Pushed
- -
... ...
12/97
10.38
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Switch (4x4 Model)
ELECTRICAL
Switch Testing
Disconnect the AWD switch at the terminal board or harness connector. Continuity should exist between color
coded wires as shown in the chart below.
GryIW
Gry
AWD
Brn
Light
Out (Off)
In (On)
.-

~ .- .-
... ... ...
Gear Selector Switch/Neutral Light
The transmission switch can be tested at the terminal board or harness connector. Turn ignition switch (and en-
gine stop switch) to "On" position. Shift transmission and check for battery voltage on each of the wires when
the specific range is selected.
RIW GryIW GrnIW Purple
Forward
.-
-
-
..
Neutral
-
-
:=
..
Reverse
...

NOTE: Make sure transmission linkage is adjusted correctly or disconnect linkage rods before testing switch.
Inspect wiring between switch and terminal board and repair or replace if damaged. Replace the switch if battery
voltage is not indicated or if voltage is present when the selector is moved out of the specific range.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Switch
The Emergency Throttle Control (ETC) system is designed to limit the engine RPM of an ATV in the event of a
mechanical problem with the throttle mechanism. The ETC switch is mounted independently of the throttle actua-
tor lever inside the throttle block assembly. This is a normally closed switch, and is held in the open position (micro
switch button depressed) by throttle cable tension. The switch is "open" in normal operation regardless of throttle
lever position. In the event of a mechanical problem in the throttle mechanism (cable tension is lost), the switch
contacts close (switch pin released) and deliver power to the Speed Limiter module via the white wire.
Test the ETC switch at the terminal board or harness connector. NOTE: Adjust throttle cable freeplay (ETC switch)
and make sure throttle mechanism is functioning properly before testing switch. Refer to Maintenance Chapter 2 for
procedure. Terminal board models - Disconnect White wire on terminal board that leads from the ETC switch. Turn
nition key (and e 19ine stop switc h) "On". If voltag ig e is present on the White wire, replace the ETC switch.
RIW
Normal
Fault
.-
-
ETC Operation Test
Remove throttle block cover.
W
.-
-
Place transmission in neutral and apply parking brake.
Start engine and open throttle lever slightly until engine RP
is above the "ETC Limit" (see page 10.32 for LR module
ETC limits.
Hold throttle cable with fingers at point "A" as shown at
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Switch
A
ETC Micro Switch
Button
right and release throttle lever. If the ETC system is functioning properly engine RPM will be limited to the speci-
fied "ETC Limit" RPM. Refer to Speed Limiter System Testing on page 10.34.
10.39 12/97
ELECTRICAL
Switch Testing
Oil Level Sensor Testing (2 Stroke Models)
1 . Disconnect PurpleIBlack and Rec:ilWhite sensor wires.
2. Test for continuity between the wires with the float on
the bottom (oil level empty or low), and off the bottom
(safe level).
3. The wires should have continuity when oil level is low
or empty, and no continuity when float is off the
bottom.
PUR/BLK RIW
Empty/Low
- -
Safe Level
Oil Level Warning Light Testing (2 Stroke Models)
1. Disconnect Purple/Black and RedlWhite wires from sensor to remove the sensor from the circuit.
2. With ignition key off, connect the wires (on the harness side) together.
3. Turn key (and auxiliary switch) on. The light should illuminate. If not, check for battery voltage on RIW wire to
sensor, check bulb condition, and related wiring.
Coolant Temperature Sensor Test (Hot Light)
With the ignition switch (and engine stop switch) "ON", power is delivered to the hot light via the RedlWhite wire.
The BluelWhite wire (ground) out of the light socket is connected to the coolant temperature sensor on the cylinder
head. In normal operating conditions, the temperature sensor is non-conductive (open). If engine coolant reach-
es the specified temperature, the sensor becomes conductive completing the ground path for the light.
With engine cold, disconnect lead and measure resistance of sensor between connector terminal and ground.
There should be no continuity or very high resistance (megohms). To test the HON" temperature, heat the switch
in a water bath to the temperature shown in table below. The switch should become conductive (low resistance)
at indicated temperature. Do not immerse switch past the threads or allow switch to contact container when heating.
All Liquid Cooled
Scrambler and Sport Except
. Scrambler and Sport
Hot Light On - 4 Strokes - 221
0
F (105
0
C)
Hot Light On - 2 Strokes 205
0
F (96
0
C) 205
0
F (96
0
C)
Hot Light Circuit Test
Disconnect temperature sensor wire lead and short it to ground on the cylinder head. Turn key and auxilliary
switch to "ON" position. The hot lamp should come on. Check the bulb and related wiring if the lamp does not
illuminate.
12/97
10.40
Fan Control Circuit Operation I Testing
ELECTRICAL
Switch Testing
The fan switch is located on top of the radiator on liquid cooled models, and at the rear of the cylinder head on
air cooled models. Power is supplied to the fan switch via the RedlWhite wire when the ignition key and auxiliary
shut off switch are ON. When the fan switch reaches the specified temperature, it becomes conductive and sends
power to the fan motor. The ground path for the fan motor is through the Brown harness wire.
CAUTION: Keep hands away from fan blades during this procedure. Serious personal injury could result.
NOTE: The fan switch may not function or operation may be delayed if coolant level is low or if air is trapped in the
cooling system. Be sure cooling system is full and purged of air. Refer to Maintenance chapter 2.
Fan Control Switch Bypass Test
Wire Harness Style Switch (Early)
1. Remove fuel tank if required for access to fan switch wire harness connectors. Disconnect the RedlWhite
wire.
2. Place a jumper wire between the RedlWhite wire (to the fan) and the RedlWhite terminal on the terminal board.
3. Turn ignition key (and engine stop switch) "ON". The fan should start running.
4. If the fan runs with the jumper wire installed (direct battery voltage applied), check the fan control switch and
related wiring. If the fan does not run or runs slowly with direct battery voltage applied, check the fan motor
wiring, ground, and motor condition (refer to Fan Motor Testing this section). Repair or replace as necessary.
Connector Style Switch (Late)
1. Disconnect harness from fan switch on radiator.
2. Place a jumper wire between the wires in the connector.
3. Turn ignition key (and engine stop switch) "ON". The fan should start running.
4. If the fan runs with the jumper wire installed, check the fan control switch and connector terminals. If the fan
does not run or runs slowly with the jumper wire installed, check the fan motor wiring, ground, and motor
condition (refer to Fan Motor Testing this section). Repair or replace as necessary.
Fan Control Switch Operation Test
1. Place switch in a water bath and submerse it to the base of the threads. Do not allow threads to contact
container or inaccurate reading will result.
2. Heat the coolant slowly and monitor the temperature with a thermometer or Fluke TM meter pyrometer. The
switch should be closed (conductive) at the "ON" temperature indicated in the chart, and stay conductive until
the uOFF" temperature is reached.
REFER TO PARTS MANUAL FOR FAN SWITCH APPLICATION
Fan Switch Part Number Continuity (On) No Continuity (Off)
4110099 174F (79C) 5F 154F (68C) 5F
4110114 235 F (113C) 10F 210F (99C) 8F
4110178 190F (92C) 5F 175F (79C) 5F
4110189 185
0
F (85C) 7F 165F (74C) 8F
4110201
4110225 185F (85 C) 7F 157
0
F (69C) 7F
4110226 174F (79C) 7F 146F (63C) 7F
4110256 185F (85C) 7F 165
0
F (74C) 8F
10.41 12/97
ELECTRICAL
Switch Testing
Fan Motor Current Draw
A current draw test will provide a good indication of fan
motor condition. A worn or damaged fan motor will draw
more current, which causes a reduction in blade speed
and reduced cooling.
1. Disconnect the RedlWhite wire from the fan motor.
2. Connect a DC ammeter in series between the
battery and fan motor as shown at right. Use the
RedlWhite wire in the wiring harness as the power
supply.
3. Be sure fan blade is free to rotate.
4. Turn ignition key and engine stop switch to "ON"
position. Read the current draw on ammeter with
fan running.
5. If the fan motor draws more than 6.5 Amps, replace
the motor.
Fan Motor. Current Draw:
Brake Light Switch
1. Remove fuel tank.
2. Disconnect wire harness from switch.
DMM
Connect ammeter to
RIW wire (battery power
side) of wiring harness.
Late model fan switch
and wire harness shown
3. Connect an ohmmeter across switch contacts. Reading should be infinite (00).
Fan Motor
4. Apply brake at handlebar lever and check for continuity between switch contacts. Replace switch if there is no
continuity or greater than .5 ohms resistance when the brake is applied with slight pressure.
Headlamp Switch
Remove the fuel tank and top cover. Disconnect the headlamp switch wires (RedlWhite, Green, and Yellow) at
the panel or connector (RIW) and from the headlamp high beam harness (Y) and low beam harness. Test the
switch connections and compare to the chart.
Continuity
RIW
Grn Y
Off
Low
- -
- -
High
- -
- -
Neutral Light Circuit Operation
Power is supplied to the transmission switch from the RedlWhite wire when the key is on. When neutral is se-
lected, power flows through the switch to the GreenIWhite wire, through the lamp and to ground via the Brown
wire.
If the light is not on when neutral is selected, check the bulb. If the bulb is good, check the wiring, transmission
switch, and lamp socket ground path.
12/97
10.42
1996 TRAIL BOSS
TRAI BLAZER ES
Y / R
OFF - RUN
SW ITCH
I LE FT
HANDLEBAR)
STATOR
CO I L
ELECTRICAL
Wiring Diagram 1996 Trail Boss, Trail Blazer
(LEFT HANDLEBAR)
RES I STANCES (20% @ 68 F 120 C)
BLK/R TO BRN/W 120 OHMS
Y/R TO Y 0.3 OHMS
BLK/R TO GROUND NO CONNECTION
Y TO GROUND NO CONNECTION
W TO GROUND 0 OHMS
PRIMARY 0.3 OHMS
SECONDARY 6300 OHMS PLUS
5000 OHMS (CAP)
COLOR CODE
BLK - BLACK
BRN BROWN
GRN - GREEN
PUR PURPLE
BLU BLUE
GRY GRAY
OR ORANGE
Y YELLOW
R RED
W WH I TE
TWO COLOR
WIRES ARE
SHOWN WI
MAl
COLORS.
EXAMPLE'
R/Y RED
ENGINE GROUND
- CHASSIS GROUND
NC
NO
SWITCH NORMALLY CLOSED WITH YELLOW
SW I TCH NORMALLY OPEN TRACER.
RN
10.43 7/96
ELECTRICAL
Wiring Diagram 1996 Xpress 300, Xplorer 300
1996 XPLORER 300
XPRESS 300
Y I R
7/96
(lEFT
OFF - RUN
SW ITCH
( LEFT
HANDLEBAR)
RES I STANCES (20X @ 68 F / 20 C) COLOR CODE
STATOR BLK/R TO BRN/W
Y/R TO Y
BLK/R TO GROUND
Y TO GROUND
W TO GROUND
CO I L PRIMARY
SECONDARY
FRONT WHEEL
DRIVE COILS GRY TO BRN
- ENGINE GROUND
CHASSIS GROUND
NC
NO
10.44
120 OHMS
0.3 OHMS
NO CONNECT I ON
NO CONNECT ION
o OHMS
0.3 OHMS
6300 OHMS PLUS
5000 OHMS (CAP)
24 OHMS (EACH)
BLK - BLACK
BRN BROWN
GRN GREEN
PUR - PURPLE
BLU BLUE
GRY GRAY
OR ORANGE
Y
R
W WHI
TWO COLOR
WIRES ARE
SHOWN WITH
MAIN(TRACE
COLORS.
EXAMPLE'
R / Y
SWITCH NORMALLY CLOSED WITH YELLOW
SWITCH NORMALLY OPEN TRACER
RN
RN
RN
1996 XPLORER
SPORTSMAN 400
400 6X6
XPRESS
RN
ELECTRICAL
Wiring Diagram 1996 Xpress 400, Xplorer 400, Sportsman 4x4, 400 6x6
OFF -RUN
SW ITCH
START BUTTON
NO
(LEFT HANDLEBAR)
CLOSED
RU N
I LEFT I---!-_I---I
HANDLEBAR)
RESISTANCES (20X @ 68FI20C)
STATOR R TO BLK/R 226 OHMS
W TO W/R 97 OHMS
Y TO Y/BRN 0,17 OHMS
Y/R TO Y/BRN 0, I 7 OH MS
R TO GROUND NO CONNECTION
W TO GROUND NO CONNECTION
CO I L PRIMARY 0.3 OHMS
5000 OHMS (CAP)
FRONT WHEEL
DRIVE COILS GRY TO BRN 24 OHMS (EACH)
SPEEDOMETER
LAMP
COLOR CODE
BlK BLACK
BRN BROWN
GRN GREEN
PUR PURPLE
BlU BLUE
GRY - GRAY
OR - ORANGE
Y - YELLOW
R RED
W - WH I TE
TWO COLOR
WIRES ARE
SHOWN WITH
MAINITRACE
COLORS,
EXAMPLE,
R/Y : RED
~ - ENGINE GROUND
~ : CHASSIS GROUND
NC SWITCH NORMALLY CLOSED WITH YELLOW
NO - SWITCH NORMALLY OPEN TRACER,
RN
RN
RN
10.45 7/96
ELECTRICAL
Wiring Diagram 1996 Scrambler, Sport
1996 SCRAMBLER,
SPORT
Y/R
7/96
(LEFT HANDLEBAR)
OFF -RUN
SW ITCH
(LE FT
HANDLEBAR)
NOT ON SPORT
~ ENGINE GROUND
~ : CHASSIS GROUND
COLOR CODE
NC - SWITCH NORMALLY CLOSED BLK
NO SWITCH NORMALLY OPEN BRN
GRN
PUR
BLACK
BROWN
GREEN
PURPLE
RESISTANCES (20% @ 68FI20C)
- BLUE
GRAY
- ORANGE
STATOR BLK/R TO BRN/W
Y/R TO Y
BLK/R TO GROUND
Y TO GROUND
W TO GROUND
CO I L PRIMARY
SECONDARY
FRONT WHEEL
DRIVE COILS GRY TO BRN
120 OHMS
0.3 OHMS
NO CONNECTION
NO CONNECTION
0 OHMS
0.3 OHMS
6300 OHMS PLUS
5000 OHMS (CAP)
24 OHMS (EACH)
y
R
W
- YELLOW
WH I
TWO COLOR
WIRES ARE
SHOWN WITH
MAINITRACE
COLORS.
EXAMPL
R/Y -
WITH
TRACER.
RN
RN
RN
10.46
1996 MAGNUM
Y I R
RN
CDI UNIT
(BELOW HEADlAMP)
BL K
ELECTRICAL
Wiring Diagram 1996 Magnum 2x4, 4x4, 6x6
AUX POWER PLUG
(BY TAILLAMP)
(LEFT HANDLEBAR I
(CONNECTOR BY
RM I NAL
.---+-_t----"B-";OAR D)
OFF-RUN
SW I TC H
( L EFT '---+--t---'
HANDLEBAR)
CLOS E D
RUN
I NOT ON
(R IGHT HANDLEBAR)
(PUSH ON-PUSH OFF)

ENGINE GROUND NC' SWITCH NORMALLl
CHASSIS GROUND NO - SWITCH NORMALLY
RESISTANCES (20X @ 68FI20C)
STATOR GRN TO BLK/R 446 OHMS
GRN TO R 3.2 OHMS
W TO W/R 97 OHMS
Y TO Y/BRN O. 17 OHMS
Y/R TO Y/BRN O. 17 OHMS
R TO GROUND NO CONNECT ION
W TO GROUND NO CONNECT ION
5000 OHMS (CAP)
FRONT WHEEL
DRIVE COILS GRY TO BRN 24 OHMS (EACH)
10.47
CLOSED
OPEN
BlK - BLACK
BRN BROWN
GRN GREEN
PUR PURPLE
BLU BLUE
GRY
OR -
Y
R
YEL LOW
RED
W WH I TE
TWO COLOR
WIRES ARE
SHOWN WITH
MAINITRACE
COLORS
EXAMPLE.
R/Y - RED
WITH YELLOW
TRACER.
7/96
RN
RN
RN
ELECTRICAL
Wiring Diagram Sportsman 500
1996 SPORTSMAN 500
BATTERY +
RN
7/96
20 A
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
(FRONT OF
BATTERY)
NC
R W
( I N THROTTLE
HOUSING)
~ ' ENGINE GROUND NC' SWITCH NORMALLY
CHASSIS GROUND NO - SWITCH NORMALLY
RESISTANCES (20% @ 68F 120C)
STATOR GRN TO BLK/R 446 OHMS
GRN TO R 3,2 OHMS
W TO W/R 97 OHMS
Y TO Y/BRN 0,17 OHMS
Y/R TO Y/BRN O. 17 OHMS
R TO GROUND NO CONNECTION
W TO GROUND NO CONNECTION
5000 OHMS (CAP)
FRONT WHEEL
DRIVE COilS GRY TO BRN 24 OHMS (EACH)
10.48
CLOSED
OPEN
PUR
COLOR CODE
BlK BLACK
BRN - BROWN
GRN - GREEN
PUR -
BLU -
GRY
OR
Y
R
W
GRAY
ORANGE
YEL LOW
RED
WH I TE
TWO COLOR
WIRES ARE
SHOWN WITH
MAINITRACE
IY
WITH YE LLOW
TRACER.
RN
R N
A
A-Arm Replacement ........................ .
Adaptor, Torque ............................ .
Air Filter Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ....... .
Air Filter Maintenance - 4 Strokes ............ .
Air Filter, Main Replace 4 Strokes ... .
Air Pre Filter Service ........................ .
Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio ....................... .
Alignment Fixture, Crankshaft, ATV ........... .
Alignment Tool, Clutch Offset, ATV .. .
All Wheel Drive Switch Testing ............... .
All Wheel Drive Testing ...................... .
Alternator, Exploded View ................... .
Armature Testing ........................... .
Auxiliary Brake Adjustment .................. .
Auxiliary Shut Off Switch Testing .............. .
B
5.13
1.17
2.22
2.25
2.25-2.26
2.22
4.13
1.13
1.20
10.38
10.34-10.36
10.13-10.15
10.30
2.34-2.35
10.37
Backlash Adjustment ........................ 8.34
Battery Charging ............................ 10.23
Battery Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 10.21
Battery Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2.16-2.17
Battery Service .............................. 10.2-10.23
Battery Terminal Bolts. . . . . . . . . . . .. ...... . .. 10.20
Battery Testing ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 10.21
Battery, Type ............................... 10.3-10.3a
Bearing Service, 2x4 Front Hub ............... 5.26-5.28,
7.21-7.23
Block, Piston Support ........................ 1.15
Body Assembly Exploded View .............. " 5.2-5.6
Body Styles, 1996 ........................... 5.1
Body Styles, 1997 ........................... 5.1
Brake Auxiliary ............................ " 2.33-2.35
Brake Bleeding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 9.4-9.5
Brake Fluid Change .......................... 9.4-9.5
Brake Fluid Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ... .... 2.33-2.34
Brake Front Pad Replacement .............. . 9.6-9.9
Brake Hose/Fitting Inspection ................. 2.34-2.35
Brake Light Switch Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 10.40
Brake Pad Inspection ........................ 9.7
Brake Pad Replacement, 6x6 ................. 9.13-9.14
Brake Pad Replacement, Middle Axle, 6x6 .... " 9.15
Brake Pad Replacement, Output Shaft ......... 9.10-9.12
Brake Pad Wear Line ........................ 2.33-2.34
Brake System Inspection .... . ............... 2.33-2.34
Brake System Operation ..................... 9.3
Brakelight Lamp Replacement ................ 10.9
Bushing Replacement Tool Kit, Clutch .......... 1.20
c
Cam Chain Tensioner Inspection .............. 3.44
Cam Chain Tensioner Installation .............. 3.87
Cam Chain Tensioner Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.43
Cam Chain/Camshaft Installation. . . ......... 3.82
Cam Chain/Tensioner Blade .................. 3.67
Camber And Caster ........................ 2.30-2.31
Camshaft Inspection .,. ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.49
Camshaft Removal ......................... 3.47
Camshaft Timing ............................ 3.83-3.85
Carburetor Assembly/Adjustment .............. 4.36-4.38
Carburetor Cleaning . .... . ............... .
Carb Component Effect vs. Throttle Opening ... .
Carburetor Component Function .............. .
Carburetor Disassembly ..................... .
Carburetor Draining ......................... .
Carburetor Exploded View .... ..... .. . .. .
Carburetor Float Bowl Draining ......... .
Carburetor Float System .................... .
Carburetor Function ........................ .
Carburetor Inspection ....................... .
Carburetor Installation -CV ................... .
Carburetor Main System ..................... .
Carburetor Operation ....................... .
Carburetor Pilot System ..................... .
Carburetor Removal ........................ .
Carburetor Starter System ............. . ... .
CDI Output Test. . . . . . . . . .. .... ..... . .... .
Center Drive Chain Inspection/Adjustment ..... .
Center Eccentric Assembly .................. .
Center Eccentric Disassembly ................ .
Center Eccentric Installation . . .... . .... .
Center Eccentric Removal .. ......... ... ..
Chain Adjustment - 6x6 Rear Axle ............ .
Charging Needle, Gas Shock ................ .
Charging System Testing .................... .
Choke Adjustment .......................... .
Clutch Alignment ........................... .
Clutch Offset ............................... .
Combustion Chamber ....................... .
Compression Release Removal/Inspection ..... .
Compression Test 2 Stroke ................. .
Compression Test 4 Stroke ................. .
Compression Tool, Shock Absorber Spring ..... .
Compressor, Piston Ring .................... .
Connecting Rod, Small End Inspection, Polaris ..
Controls Inspection .... ...... ...... . .... .
Conversion Table. . ..... .. .. ...... . ... .
Coolant Level Inspection .................... .
Coolant Strength ........................... .
Coolant Temperature Sensor ................. .
Cooling System Hoses ...................... .
Cooling System Pressure Test ............... .
Counter Balance Oil Change ................. .
Counter Balancer Installation ................. .
Counter Balancer Lubrication ................ .
Counter Balancer Shaft End Play .. . .. . ...... .
Counter Balancer Shaft Removal/Inspection ... .
Cover/Panel Removal ....................... .
Crankcase Assembly ....................... .
Crankcase Bearing Inspection ................ .
Crankcase Bearing Installation .... . .... . ..
Crankcase Disassembly ..................... .
Crankcase Installation ....................... .
Crankcase Separation ...................... .
Cranking Output Test ....................... .
Crankshaft Alignment, 2 Stroke ............... .
Crankshaft Degree to Piston Position .......... .
Crankshaft End Play Inspection/Adjustment .... .
Crankshaft Removal/Inspection .............. .
Cylinder Head Assembly .................... .
Cylinder Head Disassembly .................. .
Cylinder Head Disassembly/Inspection ........ .
Cylinder Head Installation ................... .
Cylinder Head Reconditioning ................ .
Cylinder Head Removal ..................... .
Cylinder Head Warpage . . . . . . .. . ........ .
Cylinder Honing . . . .. . .... . .............. .
4.33-4.35
4.21
4.13-4.15
4.30-4.32
2.14
4.23
2.13,4.41
4.27
4.12
4.33
4.39
4.27
4.25
4.26
4.29
4.26
10.18
2.37-2.38
7.34-7.36
7.34
7.36-7.37
7.33
2.38-2.39
1.23
10.24-10.25
2.12
6.13
6.13
3.55
3.48
2.15
2.15
1.21
1.16
3.34b
2.39-2.40
1.11
2.18
2.18
10.40
2.18
3.6
2.21
3.77
2.21
3.76
3.71
5.3-5.3b
3.74,3.77
3.73
3.74
3.65
3.77
3.68
10.18
3.13
10.12
3.74
3.72
3.59
3.52
3.51
3.81
3.55
3.50
3.52
3.33
Cylinder Inspection .. . ..................... 3.62
Cylinder Installation.. . ...................... 3.80
Cylinder Removal/Inspection .................. 3.60
D
Decimal Equivalent Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1.10
Demand 4 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 7.3
Drive Belt Removal/Inspection ................ 6.12
Drive Belt Tension ............ . ............. 6.12
Drive Chain Inspection ....................... 2.35-2.36
Drive Chain Inspection/Adjustment ......... " " .. 2.38-2.39
Drive Clutch Bushing Service ...... " ... "...... 6.23-6.30
Drive Clutch Disassembly ." .................. 6.17,
6.20-6.21
Drive Clutch Inspection ... " ................... 6.19
Drive Clutch Operation ....................... 6.6
Drive Clutch Reassembly ......... " ........... 6.22
o rive Shaft Boot Replacement .... " ......... "" 7.11-7.12
Driven Clutch Assembly .......... " ......... ". 6.16
Driven Clutch Disassembly ................... 6.14-6.15
Driven Clutch Operation ...................... 6.6
Driver, Transmission Seal/Bearing, SOmm . . . . . .. 1.26
E
Electric Hub Engagement (4x4) ............... 7.3
Electric Starter System Test ........... " . .. 10.27
Electrical Component Location ................ 10.42
Electronic Throttle Control Switch Testing . . . . . .. 10.39
Engine Assembly, 2 Stroke ................... 3.14
w
3.18
Engine Disassembly, 2 Stroke. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.12
Engine Disassembly/Inspection, Polaris ........ 3.34a-3.34b
Engine Exploded View - 4 Strokes ............. 3.35
Engine Fastener Torque Patterns .............. 3.2
Engine Installation .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 3.43
Engine Installation, 2 Stroke .............. .. 3.19
Engine Lubrication .............. , , , . . . . . . . . .. 3.36
Engine Mounts ...................... , . . . . . .. 2.17
Engine Oil Check - 4 Strokes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2.23
Engine Removal ............................ 3.8-3.10,
3.38,3.42
Engine Service Data .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.4-3.5
Engine Service Data - 4 Stroke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.4
w
3.S
Engine Service, 400L ........................ 3.25-3.28
ETC Switch Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 10.39
Exhaust System, Maintenance ................ 2.32-2.33
Exhaust Valve Adjustment .................... 2.28-2.29
F
Fan Control Circuit Testing ............... .
Fan Control Switch Testing .................. .
Final Drive Exploded View " .................. .
Fixture, Drive Clutch Holding ................. .
Float Height ............................... .
Float Height Adjustment, Mikuni CV ........... .
Float System .............................. .
Fluke Meter .................. " ........ " .... .
Flywheel Holding Tool ....................... .
Flywheel Installation ...... .
Flywheel Removal/Inspection ........... . ..
10.41
10.41
7.2
1.19
4.42
4.37-4.38
4.12
1.13
1.17
3.88
3.67
Fox Shock Service ......................... .
Fox Shock Valving Chart .................... .
Frame, Nuts, Bolts, Fasteners ................ .
Front Axle Identification ..... . .............. .
Front Axle Installation ....................... .
Front Axle Removal ......................... .
Front Axle Seal Sleeve Replacement .......... .
Front Caliper Assembly ..................... .
Front Caliper Disassembly ................... .
Front Caliper Inspection ..................... .
Front Caliper Installation ..................... .
Front Eccentric Assembly ..... .
Front Eccentric Disassembly . .. . . . . .
Front Eccentric Installation ................... .
Front Eccentric Removal .................... .
Front Gearcase Assembly ................... .
Front Gearcase Disassembly ............. .
Front Gearcase Installation .................. .
Front Gearcase Lubricant Change ............ .
Front Gearcase Lubrication Level ............. .
Front Gearcase Removal .................... .
Front Hub Bearing Adjustment (AWD Models) .. .
Front Hub Disassembly ...................... .
Front Hub Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ... .
Front Hubs (4x4), Maintenance. . . . .. . .. . ..
Front Strut Ball Joint Replacement ............ .
Front Strut Rod Holding Tool ................. .
Front Strut Service ........ . ............... .
Front Strut Spring Compressor ............... .
Front Strut Weldment Replacement ........... .
Front Swing Arm Weldment, 6x6 ............ .
Fuel Filter Ma.intenance ........... . ... . .. .
Fuel Flow Diagrams ........................ .
Fuel Line Maintenance ...................... .
Fuel Pump ................................ .
Fuel Pump Exploded View ................... .
Fuel Tank Removal ......................... .
G
Gauge, Compression ....................... .
Gauge, Precision Air ........... " ............ .
Gear Shift Boot Replacement ................ .
Gear Shift Selector ......................... .
Gear Shift Selector Assembly ................ .
Gear Shift Selector Disassembly ............. .
Gear Shift Selector Fluid Change ............. .
Gear Shift Selector Installation . . ........... .
Gear Shift Selector Removal ................. .
Glossary of Terms .......................... .
H
Headlamp Service .......................... .
Headlamp Switch Testing .................... .
Headlight Adjustment ....................... .
Headlight Adjustment - Gen III ................ .
Headlight Housing Replacement .............. .
Headlight Lamp Replacement ................ .
Headlight Pod Service, Gen IV . .. . ....... .
Hilliard Clutch Assembly Testing ........ .
Hone, Cylinder ............................. .
Hone, Replacement Set ..................... .
Honing Oil ................................. .
5.29-5.36
5.36
2.42-2.43
7.14
7.17
7.16
7.6
9.23
9.21-9.22
9.22
9.23-9.24
7.40-7.41
7.40
7.42-7.43
7.38-7.39
7.48-7.50
7.45
7.51
2.10
2.10
7.44-7.45
7.13
7.4-7.8
2.31w2.32
2.31w2.32
5.25
1.24
5.24a-S.24b
1.24
5.24
5.18
2.13
4.10
2.13
4.434.44
4.43
4.28
1.16
1.22
8.40-8.43
8.10
8.9
8.7-8.9
8.7-8.9
8.10
8.7
1.28-1.30
10.4-10.8
10.41
10.8
10.6
10.8
10.5,10.8
5.6a-5.6b
7.6
1.15
1.15
: .16
Hot Light Testing ............................ 10040
HubfWheel Bearing Installation ................ 7.12,7.20,
7046-7047
Hydrometer, Battery ... ................... . 1.25-1.26
Idle Speed Adjustment ..... . " ............ 2.11
Ignition System ............................. 10.17
Ignition System Components. ................ 10.16
Ignition Timing ...................... ....... 2.17
Ignition Timing Curve ........................ 10.11
Indicator Lamp Replacement .................. 10.9
Indicator Lamp Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 10.9
Indicator Lamp Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 10.9
Inlet Needle Valve ........................... 4040
I nstallation Kit, Crankshaft. ............... .. 1 .18
Installation Tool Set, Seal Sleeve .............. 1.22-1.23
Installation Tool, Clutch Garter Spring .......... 1.21
Installation Tool, Crankshaft, Mag .............. 1.18
I nstallation Tool, Crankshaft, PTa ............. 1.18
Installation Tool, Piston C-Clip ................. 1.17
Installation Tool, Spider Roller ................. 1.20
Installation Tool, Water Pump Mechanical Seal .. 1.18
Intake Valve Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2.28
J
Jet Needle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4.14
Jet Needle/Needle Jet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4.19
Jetting Guidelines ........................... 4.1
K
Key Switch Testing .......................... 10.37
Kill Switch Testing .... ........... .......... 10.37
L
Load Test .................................. 10.22
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2.4
Lubrication Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2.5-2.9
Lubrication, Transmission ..................... 8.1
M
Magnetic Coil Replacement .................. , 7.8
Main Jet .................................... 4.15
Main System. . . . . . .. . .. .. ............... 4.20
Maintenance Chart, Periodic .................. 2.1-2.2
Master Cylinder Assembly .................... 9.18-9.19
Master Cylinder Disassembly ................. 9.16-9.17
Master Cylinder Inspection .................... 9.18
Master Cylinder Installation ................... 9.20
Master Cylinder Service Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1.22
Model Identification ..... ... ................ 1.1-1.2a
Multitester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1.13
N
Needle and Seat Pressure Test ................ 4.40
Needle Bearing Inspection .................... 3.34a
Needle Jet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4.14
Neutral Light Testing ......................... 10.38,10041
o
Oil Change, Engine - 4 Strokes. . . . .. . .. . ... 2.23-2.24
Oil Change, Transmission .................... 2.40-2.41
Oil Filter (2 Strokes) ..................... . .. 2.22
Oil Filter Change ............................ 2.23-2.24
Oil Filter Change - 2 Strokes . . ...... ...... 2.19,2.22
Oil Flow .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.36
Oil Flow Chart .............................. 3.37
Oil Level Sensor Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 10.39
Oil Level Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 10.39
Oil Pressure Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3.36
Oil Pump Adjustment, 250 cc ................. 2.19
Oil Pump Adjustment, 300 cc ................. 2.19
Oil Pump Adjustment, 400L .. ................ 2.20
Oil Pump Assembly .......................... 3.71
Oil Pump Bleeding. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ........ .. 2.20-2.21
Oil Pump Check Valve Testing ............... 3.21
Oil Pump End Play Adjustment ................ 3.20
Oil Pump Installation .. " ................... 3.77
Oil Pump Removal/Inspection ............... " 3.69
Oil Tank Vent Line Routing (1996) ............. 1.37
One Way Valve ............................. 3.68
One Way Valve Installation ................... 3.78
Output Gear Backlash Adjustment ............. 8.34
Output Shaft Caliper Service .................. 9.25-9.27
Override Button Testing ...................... 10.38
p
Paint Codes ................................ 104-1 Aa
Paint Codes, 1996 . " ....................... 5.38
Paint Codes, 1997 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5.38a
Pilot Air Screw ........................ . . 4.13
Pilot Jet .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4.13
Pilot System ....... ........................ 4.17
Piston Identification ........................ " 3.3
Piston Inspection/Measurement, Polaris ........ 3.34
Piston Installation ........................... 3.79
Piston Pin Inspection, Polaris ................. 3.34a
Piston Removal/Inspection .................... 3.60
Piston Ring Installation ....................... 3.78
Piston Ring Installed Gap ..................... 3.65
Piston to Cylinder Clearance .. . . ........... 3.63
Piston/Cylinder Clearance, 2 Stroke. . . . . . . . . . .. 3.34
Pliers, CV Boot Clamp ....................... 1 .25-1 .26
Pre-Ride Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2.2
Prop Shaft Removal ......................... 7.44
Publication Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1.2-1 .2a
Puller, Drive Clutch .......................... 1.19
Puller, Driven Clutch ......................... 1.19
Puller, Flywheel ............................. 1 .15
Puller, Piston Pin ............................ 1.14
Puller, Shaft .............................. . 1.14
Pump Kit, Vacuum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1.26
Pump Shaft End Play. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. .. 3.76
Pump Shaft Oil Seal Installation ............... 3.76
PVT Assembly .............................. 6.10-6.11
PVT Disassembly .......... ................ 6.9
PVT Operation .............................. 6.5
PVT System Ducting Components ............. 6.7-6.8
PVT System Introduction ..................... 6.6
PVT System Sealing Components ............. 6.7-6.8
PVT, Maintenance .. .. . . .... .... . ..... 6.7
R
Radiator, Maintenance ....................... 2.18
Rear Axle Bend ... . .... . ....... . ...... 5.13
Rear Axle Installation ........................ 7.26
Rear Axle Removal .......................... 7.24-7.25
Rear Caliper Service, 6x6 .................... 9.28-9.30
Rear Drive Axle, Exploded View .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5.14-5.15
Rear Drive Chain Adjustment ................. 2.36-2.37
Rear Eccentric Assembly. . . . . . . .. . ........ 7.30-7.31
Rear Eccentric Disassembly .................. 7.29
Rear Eccentric Installation .................... 7.32
Rear Eccentric Removal ...................... 7.28-7.29
Rear Strut Stabilizer, 6x6 ..................... 5.16
Rear Suspension Exploded View .............. 5.19
Rear Swing Arm Weldment, 6x6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 5.17
Recharging Kit, Gas Shock ................... 1.23
Recoil Assembly ............................ 3.91
Recoil Disassembly .......................... 3.22-3.24
Recoil Disassembly/Inspection ................ 3.90
Recoil Draining. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2.21
Recoil/Stator Removal ....................... 3.40
Recommended Lubricants .................... 2.3-2.4
Reconditioning Kit, Cylinder Head ............. 1.17
Reed Valve Assembly ........................ 3.31
Replacement Tool, Ball Joint .................. 1.22
Rocker Arm Removal ........................ 3.43
Rocker Arm/Shaft Inspection .................. 3.45
Rocker Arm/Shaft Removal ................... 3.45
Rocker Shaft/Rocker Arm Assembly Installation . 3.89
Roller Clutch Inspection (4x4) ................. 7.5
Rolling Torque .............................. 7.1
Routing Diagram ............................ 1.31-1.33
s
Sediment Tube, Maintenance
Service Bulletins ..
Service Tips .............................. .
Shaft Drive Transmission .................... .
Shaft Drive Transmission Disassembly ........ .
Shaft Drive Transmission Removal ............ .
Shift Linkage Adjustment .................... .
Shift Linkage Rod End Positioning ............ .
Shift Weights .............................. .
Shock Body Holding Tool .................... .
Shop Supplies, General ..................... .
Slide Cutaway ............................. .
Socket, Slotted Nut ......................... .
Spark Plug Maintenance .................... .
Spark, Testing ............. . .............. .
Specific Gravity Test .................. .
Specifications, 2-Stroke Engine Torque ........ .
Specifications, 4 Stroke Engine Torque ........ .
Specifications, Brake ....................... .
2.26
1.3
1.26
8.18
8.21-8.39
8.18-8.20
8.3-8.4
8.5
6.2-6.3
1.23
2.4
4.18
1.13-1.14
2.17
10.17
10.22
3.1
3.1
9.1-9.2
Specifications, Clutching, 1996 ............... .
Specifications, Clutching, 1997 . . .. . . .. .
Specifications, Cooling System ............... .
Specifications, Drive Clutch Spring ............ .
Specifications, Electrical, 1996 ............... .
Specifications, Electrical, 1997 ............... .
Specifications, Engine, 1996 ................. .
Specifications, Final Drive Torque ............. .
Specifications, General, 1996 ................ .
Specifications, General, 1997 .. . ...... .. .
Specifications, High Altitude, 1996 ............ .
Specifications, High Altitude, 1997 ............ .
Specifications, Speed Limiter ................ .
Specifications, Stator Resistance, 1996 ........ .
Specifications, Stator Resistance, 1997 ........ .
Specifications, Torque ....................... .
Specifications, Torque, Suspension ........... .
Specifications, Torque, Transmission .......... .
Speed Limiter System ....................... .
Speed Limiter Testing ....................... .
10.35
Speedometer Service ....................... .
Spider Removal ............................ .
Sprocket Inspection ......................... .
Starter Assembly ........................... .
Starter Disassembly ........................ .
Starter Drive ............................... .
Starter Drive Installation ..................... .
Starter Drive Removal/Inspection ............. .
Starter Motor Brush Inspection/Replacement ... .
Starter Motor Removal ...................... .
Starter Solenoid Bench Test ................. .
Starter Switch Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. .
Starter System ............................. .
Stator Installation. . . . . . . . .. . .. .
Stator Removal/Inspection ................... .
Steering Assembly (2x4) Exploded View ....... .
Steering Maintenance ....................... .
Strut Assembly, 2x4 ......................... .
Strut Assembly, Exploded View, 4x4 .......... .
Strut Casting Seal Replacement .............. .
Strut Seal Sleeve Replacement .............. .
Suspension Springs Optional ................ .
Suspension, Front, Inspection ................ .
Suspension, Rear, Inspection ................ .
Swing Arm Reassembly ..................... .
Swing Arm Removal ........................ .
Swing Arm Removal/Inspection .............. .
Switch Testing ............................. .
T
Taillight Lamp Replacement .................. .
Tap Drill Chart ............................. .
Tensioner Blade Installation .................. .
Thermostat Installation ...................... .
Throttle Cable Adjustment ................... .
Throttle Cable Lubrication ................... .
Throttle Lever Stop Adjustment ............... .
Throttle Opening vs. Fuel Flow ............... .
Throttle Operation .......................... .
Throttle Valve .............................. .
Tie Rod Inspection. . . . . . .. .... ...... . .... .
Tightening Tool, Drive Clutch Spider ........... .
Timing Check Procedures ................... .
Timing Light ............................... .
6.1
6.1 a
3.7
6.4,6.18
10.2
10.2a
3.3
7.1
1.5-1.8
1.8a-1.8d
6.1
6.1a
10.32
10.3
10.3a
1.9
5.1
8.1
10.32
10.32,
8.17-8.17a
6.19
2.35-2.38
10.30
10.28-10.29
10.31
3.88
3.66
10.29
10.28
10.31
10.37
4.16
3.87
3.67
5.12-5.14
2.30-2.31
5.24
5.23
7.10
7.7
5.37-5.37a
2.39-2.40
2.39-2.40
5.22
5.20
5.21
10.37
10.9
1.12
3.78
3.89
2.11-2.12
2.29
2.12
4.14
2.11
4.15
2.31-2.32
1.19
10.10
1.13
Tire Inspection ........ .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . ... .
Tire Pressure ........... . ....... - ... - .... .
Tire Tread Depth .'" - ...................... .
Toe Alignment ............................. .
5.8-5.9
Tool, Fox Shock IFP Removal . .. . ........... .
Tool, Fox Shock Rod Holder ................. .
Tools ... - ............................... .
Tools, Electrical ...... . .......... - ......... .
Torque Patterns, Engine ..................... .
Torque Stop Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ..
Transmission Linkage Adjustment .. . ....... .
Transmission Switch Testing ................. .
Transmission Tool Kit (Shaft Drive) ............ .
Transmission Torque Stop Adjustment ......... .
Transmission Troubleshooting. . . . . . . .. . ..... .
Transmission, Exploded View ................ .
Troubleshooting, Brakes ..................... .
Troubleshooting, Cooling System .... . . . . . .. "
Troubleshooting, Engine, 2 Stroke ............ .
Troubleshooting, Engine, 4 Stroke ............ .
Troubleshooting, Fuel System/Carb ........... .
Troubleshooting, Ignition System ............. .
Troubleshooting, PVT ....................... .
Troubleshooting, Spark Plug ................. .
Troubleshooting, Speed Limiter ............... .
Troubleshooting, Starter System ........ " ""
Type III Transmission Assembly .............. .
Type III Transmission Disassembly ........... .
Type III Transmission Exploded View .......... .
Type III Transmission Installation ............. .
Type III Transmission Removal ............... .
Type III, EZ-Shift Transmission ......... ' .... .
u
2.42-2.43
2.43
2.42-2.43
2.30-2.31,
1.23-1.24
1.24
1.13-1.26
10.1
3.2
8.3-8.4
2.40-2.41
10.38
1.24-1.25
8.3
8.6
8.29-8.29a
9.31
3.97
3.94
3.95-3.97
4.45-4.46
10.19
6.31
3.93
10.33
10.26
8.15
8.15
8.13
8.16-8.17a
8.11-8.12
8.11-8.17a
U-Joint Assembly ........................... 7.19
U-Joint Disassembly .......... ....... ... 7.18
v
Valve Clearance. . . . . . .. . .................. .
Valve Guide Removal/Installation ......... _ ... .
Valve Inspection ............. _ . .. . ......... .
Valve Seal Testing .......................... .
Valve Seat Inspection ................... . .. .
Valve Seat Reconditioning ....... _ . . . .. '" _ ..
Vent Line Maintenance ............... _ ...... .
Vent Line, Transmission ..................... _
Venting Systems, Mikuni CV Carburetor .... _ .. .
Venting Systems, Mikuni MV Carburetor ....... .
Voltage Drop Test ... . .. _ .... _ ..... .
Voltage Test Open Circuit .................... .
w
2.27
3.55
3.54
3.60
3.55
3.56-3.57
2.13
2.41
4.24
4.22
10.26
10.21
Warranty ., ................ _ . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1 .27
Water Pump Impeller Clearance .......... _ ... 3.31-3.32
Water Pump Mechanical Seal Installation ....... 3.77
Water Pump Mechanical Seal Removal ......... 3.73
Water Pump Shaft Oil Seal ... . ............ 3.73
Wheel Hub Seal Replacement ................ 7.9
Wheel Inspection ............................ 2.41-2.42
Wheel I nstallation ......... _ ............... " 2.41-2.42
Wheel Removal Front or Rear ....... _ ....... " 2.41-2.42
Wiring Diagrams ........... ................ 10.43-10.57
Wrench, Axle Nut, Special ................... 1.21
Wrench, Oil Filter .......................... _. 1.14
Wrench, Spanner .......................... __ 1.21
y
Yoke Gauge Tool ......... __ ... _ ........... " 1.25
60935 Foldouts 7/14/03 5:21 PM Page 1
60935 Foldouts 7/14/03 5:21 PM Page 2
60935 Foldouts 7/14/03 5:21 PM Page 3
60935 Foldouts 7/14/03 5:21 PM Page 4
60935 Foldouts 7/14/03 5:21 PM Page 5
60935 Foldouts 7/14/03 5:21 PM Page 6
60935 Foldouts 7/14/03 5:22 PM Page 7
ELECTRICAL
Wiring Diagram 1997 Trail Boss
1997 TRAI L BOSS
'RN
BATTERY
W
,
I
CDI UNIT
'''H'''O OIL lANK!
IGNITION
COl L
(BEHIND
OIL
TANK)
Rl K
U SPARK h
I PLUG
'91----",'-'-+-,,---'
STARTER SWITCH
RIW W/R
FREE
PUSHED 0 '0
HEADLAMP SW ITCH
R/W GRN Y
OFF
LO 0 '0
HI 0 'co '0
AUX SHUT OFF SWITCH
BLK BRN R/ W R/BLK
OFF 0 '0
RUN 0 "0
KEY SWI TCH
BLK BRN R/BLK R
OFF 0 '0
ON
TRANSM ISSION SWITCH
R/W GRY/ W GRNI W PUR
FWD 0 "0
N 0 ----- "0
REV 0 "", '''co '0
OVERRIDE SWITCH
PUR GRY IW GRN
FREE 0 ----- '0
PUSHED 0 000
ETC SWITCH
R IW W
NORMAL
rAUL T 0 -0
I
OH- RUII
SWITCH
START BUTTON
,," '0
Ilff
( LA,,'"
'/W
'RN
(. Oil
\ lJ LAMP
",O,', Oil flOAT sw " RON
!',:;Y;:Yl
W
If
lOW) RRN
I
'" I HIGH I
lI, I ( ') INDICATOR I

10 A
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
(fRONT or
BA TTERY)
NC
'"EN HOT! RRN I
-- - - - -, BR':
R/W HEADLAMPSWITCH I
C'----,I TRAil BOSS y lOW BEAM !
I ,,, GR' " I
BRAKE SWITCH
,,, A
b" NO DR )\ BRANElA"
r" " -.-... ;J TA I LlAMP

Icc,q,'," r'" 0> T",OlTlE
"yn CABLE SLACK
(lkOll<:INA! 1 OVERRIDE SWITCH
.. _w_ ... (LErT HANDLEBAR)
'RN
(l I T L-+--+---"
HANDLEBAR)
'0 ""IW
'"
STATOR
CO IL
'/W
"",,OR !em
ARN
"w '
sHIm,
,"II,".
RES ISTANCES 1101 @ 68'F 110'C)
BLKIR TO BRNIW 120 OHMS
Y I R TO Y 0.3 OHMS
BLKIR TO GROUND NO CONNECTION
Y TO GROUND NO CONNECT I ON
W TO GROUND o OHMS
PRIMARY 0.3 OHMS
5000 OHMS ICAP)
COLOR CODE
BLK , BLACK
BRN , BROWN
GRN , GREEN
PUR , PURPLE
BLU , BLUE
GRY , GRAY
OR 'ORANGE
Y 'YELLOW
R 'RED
W ' WHITE
TWO COLOR
WIRES ARE
SHOWN WITH
MAINITRACE
COLORS,
EXAMPLE:
R/Y , RED
W' ENG I NE GROUND
W' CHASSIS GROUND
NC , SWITCH NORMALLY CLOSED WITH YELLOW
NO' SWITCH NORMALLY OPEN TRACER.
1997 TRA I L BOSS
10.55
10196
60935 Foldouts 7/14/03 5:22 PM Page 8
60935 Foldouts 7/14/03 5:22 PM Page 9
60935 Foldouts 7/14/03 5:22 PM Page 10
60935 Foldouts 7/14/03 5:22 PM Page 11
60935 Foldouts 7/14/03 5:22 PM Page 12
60935 Foldouts 7/14/03 5:22 PM Page 13
60935 Foldouts 7/14/03 5:22 PM Page 14
60935 Foldouts 7/14/03 5:22 PM Page 15
60935 Foldouts 7/14/03 5:22 PM Page 16
60935 Foldouts 7/14/03 5:22 PM Page 17
60935 Foldouts 7/14/03 5:23 PM Page 18
60935 Foldouts 7/14/03 5:23 PM Page 19
60935 Foldouts 7/14/03 5:23 PM Page 20

1996-1998 Polaris Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1996-1998 Polaris Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1996-1998 Polaris Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the main sections covered in the manual?

What safety symbols are used in the manual?

LRRIS

You might also like